Harvard Professor Exposes Google And Facebook & NZ Police Trialled Facial Recognition Tech Without Clearance January 15 2025 | From: Mercola / RadioNewZealand / Various
In recent years, a number of brave individuals have alerted us to the fact that we're all being monitored and manipulated by big data gatherers such as Google and Facebook, and shed light on the depth and breadth of this ongoing surveillance.
Among them is social psychologist and Harvard professor Shoshana Zuboff.
Her book, "The Age of Surveillance Capitalism," is one of the best books I have read in the last few years. It's an absolute must-read if you have any interest in this topic and want to understand how Google and Facebook have obtained such massive control of your life.
Story at a Glance
In her book, “The Age of Surveillance Capitalism,” social psychologist and Harvard professor Shoshana Zuboff reveals how the biggest tech companies in the world have hijacked our personal data - so-called “behavioral surplus data streams” - without our knowledge or consent and are using it against you to generate profits for themselves
Companies like Facebook, Google and third parties of all kinds have the power - and are using that power - to target your personal inner demons, to trigger you, and to take advantage of you when you’re at your most vulnerable to entice you into action that serves them, commercially or politically
Your entire existence - even your shifting moods, deciphered by facial recognition software - has become a source of revenue for corporate entities as you’re being cleverly maneuvered into doing (and typically buying) or thinking something you may not have done, bought or thought otherwise
Facebook’s massive experiments, in which they used subliminal cues to see if they could make people happier or sadder and affect real-world behavior offline, proved that - by manipulating language and inserting subliminal cues in the online context - they can change real-world behavior and real-world emotion, and that these methods and powers can be exercised “while bypassing user awareness”
The Google Nest security system has a hidden microphone built into it that isn’t featured in any of the schematics for the device. Voice data, and all the information delivered through your daily conversations, is tremendously valuable to Big Data, and add to their ever-expanding predictive modeling capabilities
In recent years, a number of brave individuals have alerted us to the fact that we're all being monitored and manipulated by big data gatherers such as Google and Facebook, and shed light on the depth and breadth of this ongoing surveillance.
Among them is social psychologist and Harvard professor Shoshana Zuboff.
"In a room where people unanimously maintain a conspiracy of silence, one word of truth sounds like a pistol shot."
- Czesław Miłosz
Harvard Professor Exposes Google and Facebook
Her book reveals how the biggest tech companies in the world have hijacked our personal data - so-called "behavioral surplus data streams" - without our knowledge or consent and are using it against us to generate profits for themselves.
WE have become the product. WE are the real revenue stream in this digital economy.
"The term 'surveillance capitalism' is not an arbitrary term," Zuboff says in the featured VPRO Backlight documentary.
"Why 'surveillance'? Because it must be operations that are engineered as undetectable, indecipherable, cloaked in rhetoric that aims to misdirect, obfuscate and downright bamboozle all of us, all the time."
"Reveals a merciless form of capitalism in which no natural resources, but the citizen itself, serves are a raw material."
She also explains how this surveillance capitalism came about in the first place.
As most revolutionary inventions, chance played a role. After the 2000 dot.com crisis that burst the internet bubble, a startup company named Google struggled to survive. Founders Larry Page and Sergey Brin appeared to be looking at the beginning of the end for their company.
By chance, they discovered that "residual data" left behind by users during their internet searchers had tremendous value.
They could trade this data; they could sell it. By compiling this residual data, they could predict the behavior of any given internet user and thus guarantee advertisers a more targeted audience. And so, yosurveillance capitalism was born.
The Data Collection You Know About Is the Least Valuable
Comments such as "I have nothing to hide, so I don't care if they track me," or "I like targeted ads because they make my shopping easier" reveal our ignorance about what's really going on.
We believe we understand what kind of information is being collected about us. For example, you might not care that Google knows you bought a particular kind of shoe, or a particular book.
However, the information we freely hand over is the least important of the personal information actually being gathered about us, Zuboff notes. Tech companies tell us the data collected is being used to improve services, and indeed, some of it is.
But it is also being used to model human behavior by analyzing the patterns of behavior of hundreds of millions of people.
Once you have a large enough training model, you can begin to accurately predict how different types of individuals will behave over time.
The data gathered is also being used to predict a whole host of individual attributes about you, such as personality quirks, sexual orientation, political orientation - "a whole range of things we never ever intended to disclose," Zuboff says.
How Is Predictive Data Being Used?
All sorts of predictive data are handed over with each photo you upload to social media. For example, it's not just that tech companies can see your photos. Your face is being used without your knowledge or consent to train facial recognition software, and none of us is told how that software is intended to be used.
As just one example, the Chinese government is using facial recognition software to track and monitor minority groups and advocates for democracy, and that could happen elsewhere as well, at any time.
So that photo you uploaded of yourself at a party provides a range of valuable information - from the types of people you're most likely to spend your time with and where you're likely to go to have a good time, to information about how the muscles in your face move and alter the shape of your features when you're in a good mood.
By gathering a staggering amount of data points on each person, minute by minute, Big Data can make very accurate predictions about human behavior, and these predictions are then "sold to business customers who want to maximize our value to their business," Zuboff says.
Your entire existence - even your shifting moods, deciphered by facial recognition software - has become a source of revenue for many tech corporations. You might think you have free will but, in reality, you're being cleverly maneuvered and funneled into doing (and typically buying) or thinking something you may not have done, bought or thought otherwise.
And, "our ignorance is their bliss," Zuboff says.
The Facebook Contagion Experiments
In the documentary, Zuboff highlights Facebook's massive "contagion experiments," in which they used subliminal cues and language manipulation to see if they could make people feel happier or sadder and affect real-world behavior offline. As it turns out, they can. Two key findings from those experiments were:
By manipulating language and inserting subliminal cues in the online context, they can change real-world behavior and real-world emotion
These methods and powers can be exercised "while bypassing user awareness"
In the video, Zuboff also explains how the Pokemon Go online game - which was actually created by Google - was engineered to manipulate real-world behavior and activity for profit.
She also describes the scheme in her New York Times article, saying:
"Game players did not know that they were pawns in the real game of behavior modification for profit, as the rewards and punishments of hunting imaginary creatures were used to herd people to the McDonald's, Starbucks and local pizza joints that were paying the company for 'footfall,' in exactly the same way that online advertisers pay for 'click through' to their websites."
You're Being Manipulated Every Single Day in Countless Ways
Zuboff also reviews what we learned from the Cambridge Analytica scandal. Cambridge Analytica is a political marketing business that, in 2018, used the Facebook data of 80 million Americans to determine the best strategies for manipulating American voters.
Christopher Wylie, now-former director of research at Cambridge Analytica, blew the whistle on the company's methods. According to Wylie, they had so much data on people, they knew exactly how to trigger fear, rage and paranoia in any given individual.
And, by triggering those emotions, they could manipulate them into looking at a certain website, joining a certain group, and voting for a certain candidate.
So, the reality now is, companies like Facebook, Google and third parties of all kinds, have the power - and are using that power - to target your personal inner demons, to trigger you, and to take advantage of you when you're at your weakest or most vulnerable to entice you into action that serves them, commercially or politically.
It's certainly something to keep in mind while you surf the web and social media sites.
"It was only a minute ago that we didn't have many of these tools, and we were fine," Zuboff says in the film. "We lived rich and full lives. We had close connections with friends and family.
Having said that, I want to recognize that there's a lot that the digital world brings to our lives, and we deserve to have all of that. But we deserve to have it without paying the price of surveillance capitalism.
Right now, we are in that classic Faustian bargain; 21st century citizens should not have to make the choice of either going analog or living in a world where our self-determination and our privacy are destroyed for the sake of this market logic. That is unacceptable.
Let's also not be naïve. You get the wrong people involved in our government, at any moment, and they look over their shoulders at the rich control possibilities offered by these new systems.
There will come a time when, even in the West, even in our democratic societies, our government will be tempted to annex these capabilities and use them over us and against us. Let's not be naïve about that.
When we decide to resist surveillance capitalism - right now when it is in the market dynamic - we are also preserving our democratic future, and the kinds of checks and balances that we will need going forward in an information civilization if we are to preserve freedom and democracy for another generation."
Surveillance Is Getting Creepier by the Day
But the surveillance and data collection doesn't end with what you do online. Big Data also wants access to your most intimate moments - what you do and how you behave in the privacy of your own home, for example, or in your car.
Zuboff recounts how the Google Nest security system was found to have a hidden microphone built into it that isn't featured in any of the schematics for the device.
"Voices are what everybody are after, just like faces," Zuboff says. Voice data, and all the information delivered through your daily conversations, is tremendously valuable to Big Data, and add to their ever-expanding predictive modeling capabilities.
She also discusses how these kinds of data-collecting devices force consent from users by holding the functionality of the device "hostage" if you don't want your data collected and shared.
For example, Google's Nest thermostats will collect data about your usage and share it with third parties, that share it with third parties and so on ad infinitum - and Google takes no responsibility for what any of these third parties might do with your data.
You can decline this data collection and third party sharing, but if you do, Google will no longer support the functionality of the thermostat; it will no longer update your software and may affect the functionality of other linked devices such as smoke detectors.
Two scholars who analyzed the Google Nest thermostat contract concluded that a consumer who is even a little bit vigilant about how their consumption data is being used would have to review 1,000 privacy contracts before installing a single thermostat in their home.
Modern cars are also being equipped with multiple cameras that feed Big Data. As noted in the film, the average new car has 15 cameras, and if you have access to the data of a mere 1% of all cars, you have "knowledge of everything happening in the world."
Of course, those cameras are sold to you as being integral to novel safety features, but you're paying for this added safety with your privacy, and the privacy of everyone around you.
Pandemic Measures Are Rapidly Eroding Privacy
The current coronavirus pandemic is also using "safety" as a means to dismantle personal privacy. As reported by The New York Times, March 23, 2020:
"In South Korea, government agencies are harnessing surveillance-camera footage, smartphone location data and credit card purchase records to helptrace the recent movements of coronavirus patients and establish virus transmission chains.
In Lombardy, Italy, the authorities are analyzing location data transmitted by citizens' mobile phones to determine how many people are obeying a government lockdown order and the typical distances they move every day. About 40 percent are moving around "too much," an official recently said.
In Israel, the country's internal security agency is poised to start using a cache of mobile phone location data - originally intended for counterterrorism operations - to try to pinpoint citizens who may have been exposed to the virus.
As countries around the world race to contain the pandemic, many are deploying digital surveillance tools as a means to exert social control, even turning security agency technologies on their own civilians …
Yet ratcheting up surveillance to combat the pandemic now could permanently open the doors to more invasive forms of snooping later. It is a lesson Americans learned after the terrorist attacks of Sept. 11, 2001, civil liberties experts say.
Nearly two decades later, law enforcement agencies have access to higher-powered surveillance systems, like fine-grained location tracking and facial recognition - technologies that may be repurposed to further political agendas …
'We could so easily end up in a situation where we empower local, state or federal government to take measures in response to this pandemic that fundamentally change the scope of American civil rights,' said Albert Fox Cahn, the executive director of the Surveillance Technology Oversight Project, a nonprofit organization in Manhattan."
Zuboff also discusses her work in a January 24, 2020, op-ed in The New York Times.6,7 "You are now remotely controlled. Surveillance capitalists control the science and the scientists, the secrets and the truth," she writes, continuing:
"We thought that we search Google, but now we understand that Google searches us. We assumed that we use social media to connect, but we learned that connection is how social media uses us.
We barely questioned why our new TV or mattress had a privacy policy, but we've begun to understand that 'privacy' policies are actually surveillance policies … Privacy is not private, because the effectiveness of … surveillance and control systems depends upon the pieces of ourselves that we give up — or that are secretly stolen from us.
Our digital century was to have been democracy's Golden Age. Instead, we enter its third decade marked by a stark new form of social inequality best understood as 'epistemic inequality' … extreme asymmetries of knowledge and the power that accrues to such knowledge, as the tech giants seize control of information and learning itself …
Surveillance capitalists exploit the widening inequity of knowledge for the sake of profits. They manipulate the economy, our society and even our lives with impunity, endangering not just individual privacy but democracy itself …
Still, the winds appear to have finally shifted. A fragile new awareness is dawning … Surveillance capitalists are fast because they seek neither genuine consent nor consensus. They rely on psychic numbing and messages of inevitability to conjure the helplessness, resignation and confusion that paralyze their prey.
Democracy is slow, and that's a good thing. Its pace reflects the tens of millions of conversations that occur … gradually stirring the sleeping giant of democracy to action.
These conversations are occurring now, and there are many indications that lawmakers are ready to join and to lead. This third decade is likely to decide our fate. Will we make the digital future better, or will it make us worse?"
Epistemic Inequality
Epistemic inequality refers to inequality in what you're able to learn.
"It is defined as unequal access to learning imposed by private commercial mechanisms of information capture, production, analysis and sales. It is best exemplified in the fast-growing abyss between what we know and what is known about us," Zuboff writes in her New York Times op-ed.
Google, Facebook, Amazon and Microsoft have spearheaded the surveillance market transformation, placing themselves at the top tier of the epistemic hierarchy. They know everything about you and you know nothing about them. You don't even know what they know about you.
"They operated in the shadows to amass huge knowledge monopolies by taking without asking, a maneuver that every child recognizes as theft," Zuboff writes.
"Surveillance capitalism begins by unilaterally staking a claim to private human experience as free raw material for translation into behavioral data. Our lives are rendered as data flows."
These data flows are about you, but not for you. All of it is used against you - to separate you from your money, or to make you act in a way that is in some way profitable for a company or a political agenda. So, ask yourself, where is your freedom in all of this?
If a company can cause you to buy stuff you don't need by sticking an enticing, personalized ad for something they know will boost your confidence at the exact moment you're feeling insecure or worthless (a tactic that has been tested and perfected, are you really acting through free will?
If an artificial intelligence using predictive modeling senses you're getting hungry (based on a variety of cues such as your location, facial expressions and verbal expressions) and launches an ad from a local restaurant to you in the very moment you're deciding to get something to eat, are you really making conscious, self-driven, value-based life choices? As noted by Zuboff in her article:
"Unequal knowledge about us produces unequal power over us, and so epistemic inequality widens to include the distance between what we can do and what can be done to us. Data scientists describe this as the shift from monitoring to actuation, in which a critical mass of knowledge about a machine system enables the remote control of that system.
Now people have become targets for remote control, as surveillance capitalists discovered that the most predictive data come from intervening in behavior to tune, herd and modify action in the direction of commercial objectives.
This third imperative, 'economies of action,' has become an arena of intense experimentation. 'We are learning how to write the music,' one scientist said, 'and then we let the music make them dance' …
The fact is that in the absence of corporate transparency and democratic oversight, epistemic inequality rules. They know. They decide who knows. They decide who decides. The public's intolerable knowledge disadvantage is deepened by surveillance capitalists' perfection of mass communications as gaslighting …
On April 30, 2019 Mark Zuckerberg made a dramatic announcement at the company's annual developer conference, declaring, 'The future is private.' A few weeks later, a Facebook litigator appeared before a federal district judge in California to thwart a user lawsuit over privacy invasion, arguing that the very act of using Facebook negates any reasonable expectation of privacy 'as a matter of law.'"
We Need a Whole New Regulatory Framework
In the video, Zuboff points out that there are no laws in place to curtail this brand-new type of surveillance capitalism, and the only reason it has been able to flourish over the past 20 years is because there's been an absence of laws against it, primarily because it has never previously existed.
That's the problem with epistemic inequality. Google and Facebook were the only ones who knew what they were doing. The surveillance network grew in the shadows, unbeknownst to the public or lawmakers.
Had we fought against it for two decades, then we might have had to resign ourselves to defeat, but as it stands, we've never even tried to regulate it.
This, Zuboff says, should give us all hope. We can turn this around and take back our privacy, but we need legislation that addresses the actual reality of the entire breadth and depth of the data collection system.
It's not enough to address just the data that we know that we're giving when we go online. Zuboff writes:
"These contests of the 21st century demand a framework of epistemic rights enshrined in law and subject to democratic governance. Such rights would interrupt data supply chains by safeguarding the boundaries of human experience before they come under assault from the forces of datafication.
The choice to turn any aspect of one's life into data must belong to individuals by virtue of their rights in a democratic society. This means, for example, that companies cannot claim the right to your face, or use your face as free raw material for analysis, or own and sell any computational products that derive from your face …
Anything made by humans can be unmade by humans. Surveillance capitalism is young, barely 20 years in the making, but democracy is old, rooted in generations of hope and contest.
Surveillance capitalists are rich and powerful, but they are not invulnerable. They have an Achilles heel: fear. They fear lawmakers who do not fear them.
They fear citizens who demand a new road forward as they insist on new answers to old questions: Who will know? Who will decide who knows? Who will decide who decides? Who will write the music, and who will dance?"
How to Protect Your Online Privacy
While there's no doubt we need a whole new legislative framework to curtail surveillance capitalism, in the meantime, there are ways you can protect your privacy online and limit the "behavioral surplus data" collected about you.
Robert Epstein, senior research psychologist for the American Institute of Behavioral Research and Technology, recommends taking the following steps to protect your privacy:
Use a virtual private network (VPN) such as Nord, which is only about $3 per month and can be used on up to six devices. In my view, this is a must if you seek to preserve your privacy. Epstein explains:
"When you use your mobile phone, laptop or desktop in the usual way, your identity is very easy for Google and other companies to see. They can see it via your IP address, but more and more, there are much more sophisticated ways now that they know it's you. One is called browser fingerprinting.
This is something that is so disturbing. Basically, the kind of browser you have and the way you use your browser is like a fingerprint. You use your browser in a unique way, and just by the way you type, these companies now can instantly identify you.
Brave has some protection against a browser fingerprinting, but you really need to be using a VPN. What a VPN does is it routes whatever you're doing through some other computer somewhere else.
It can be anywhere in the world, and there are hundreds of companies offering VPN services. The one I like the best right now is called Nord VPN.
You download the software, install it, just like you install any software. It's incredibly easy to use. You do not have to be a techie to use Nord, and it shows you a map of the world and you basically just click on a country.
The VPN basically makes it appear as though your computer is not your computer. It basically creates a kind of fake identity for you, and that's a good thing. Now, very often I will go through Nord's computers in the United States. Sometimes you have to do that, or you can't get certain things done. PayPal doesn't like you to be in a foreign country for example."
Nord, when used on your cellphone, will also mask your identity when using apps like Google Maps.
Do not use Gmail, as every email you write is permanently stored. It becomes part of your profile and is used to build digital models of you, which allows them to make predictions about your line of thinking and every want and desire.
Many other older email systems such as AOL and Yahoo are also being used as surveillance platforms in the same way as Gmail. ProtonMail.com, which uses end-to-end encryption, is a great alternative and the basic account is free.
Don't use Google's Chrome browser, as everything you do on there is surveilled, including keystrokes and every webpage you've ever visited. Brave is a great alternative that takes privacy seriously.
Brave is also faster than Chrome, and suppresses ads. It's based on Chromium, the same software infrastructure that Chrome is based on, so you can easily transfer your extensions, favorites and bookmarks.
Don't use Google as your search engine, or any extension of Google, such as Bing or Yahoo, both of which draw search results from Google. The same goes for the iPhone's personal assistant Siri, which draws all of its answers from Google.
Alternative search engines suggested by Epstein include SwissCows and Qwant. He recommends avoiding StartPage, as it was recently bought by an aggressive online marketing company, which, like Google, depends on surveillance.
Don't use an Android cellphone, for all the reasons discussed earlier. Epstein uses a BlackBerry, which is more secure than Android phones or the iPhone. BlackBerry's upcoming model, the Key3, will be one of the most secure cellphones in the world, he says.
Don't use Google Home devices in your house or apartment - These devices record everything that occurs in your home, both speech and sounds such as brushing your teeth and boiling water, even when they appear to be inactive, and send that information back to Google. Android phones are also always listening and recording, as are Google's home thermostat Nest, and Amazon's Alexa.
Clear your cache and cookies - As Epstein explains in his article:
"Companies and hackers of all sorts are constantly installing invasive computer code on your computers and mobile devices, mainly to keep an eye on you but sometimes for more nefarious purposes.
On a mobile device, you can clear out most of this garbage by going to the settings menu of your browser, selecting the 'privacy and security' option and then clicking on the icon that clears your cache and cookies.
With most laptop and desktop browsers, holding down three keys simultaneously - CTRL, SHIFT and DEL - takes you directly to the relevant menu; I use this technique multiple times a day without even thinking about it.
You can also configure the Brave and Firefox browsers to erase your cache and cookies automatically every time you close your browser."
Don't use Fitbit, as it was recently purchased by Google and will provide them with all your physiological information and activity levels, in addition to everything else that Google already has on you.
NZ Police Trialled Facial Recognition Tech Without Clearance
Police conducted a trial of controversial facial recognition software without consulting their own bosses or the Privacy Commissioner.
The American firm Clearview AI's system, which is used by hundreds of police departments in the United States and several other countries, is effectively a search engine for faces - billing itself as a crime-fighting tool to identify perpetrators and victims.
New Zealand Police first contacted the firm in January, and later set up a trial of the software, according to documents RNZ obtained under the Official Information Act.
However, the high tech crime unit handling the technology appears to have not sought the necessary clearance before using it.
Privacy Commissioner John Edwards, who was not aware police had trialled Clearview Al when RNZ contacted him, said he would expect to be briefed on it before a trial was underway. He said Police Commissioner Andrew Coster told him he was also unaware of the trial.
"He's concerned it was able to happen without a high-level sign-off, and [the] involvement of my office," Edwards said, following a phone conversation with Coster on Tuesday.
"They will be looking at protocols, how they do evaluate new technologies."
Police declined to be interviewed, and would not address the record of Coster's remarks.
"Police undertook a short trial of Clearview AI earlier this year to assess whether it offered any value to police investigations," said Detective Superintendent Tom Fitzgerald, who is the national manager of criminal investigations, in a statement.
"This was a very limited trial to assess investigative value. The trial has now ceased and the value to investigations has been assessed as very limited and the technology at this stage will not be used by New Zealand Police."
Prior to the statement from Fitzgerald, police spokespeople told RNZ on two separate occasions in the past week - on 7 and 11 May - that the trial was still underway. A spokesperson later said these statements were incorrect.
Clearview Al, whose early financial backers include New Zealand citizen Peter Thiel, has built a database of about 2.8 billion faces by lifting users' images from social media sites like Facebook, a practice that violates most of these companies' terms of service.
The software has not been independently tested, but in one "accuracy test result" the company sent New Zealand Police, the report concluded the software had 100 percent accuracy in a facial recognition test of all US members of congress.
"Clearview can be used for counter-terrorism to quickly and accurately identify suspects and build up investigations using public information," employee Marko Jukic told police in a 31 January email. The company reportedly later fired Jukic after it emerged he published controversial views online.
Police would not say what they used Clearview AI for in the trial, or who had access to it. Clearview, which has been used in the US to solve everything from mailbox thefts to cases of child sexual abuse, did not respondfine youngto questions about its relationship with New Zealand police.
A law lecturer at Victoria University of Wellington, Marcin Betkier, said New Zealand's privacy laws offered no legal protections to individuals whose data was used by Clearview.
"The data can be used against us, whether by police, or maybe by some other third party," he said.
Edwards said facial recognition technology was inevitable in New Zealand, but there were ways to reduce its risks, including by reviewing the technology before it was trialled.
How The Deep State ‘Justifies’ Itself In America
January 14 2025 | From: StrategicCulture / Various On October 30th 2019, there was a panel discussion broadcast live on C-Span from the National Press Club and the Michael V. Hayden Center.
John Brennan amplified upon the thought, and there was yet more applause. However, that thought hadn’t been invented by McLaughlin; it instead had evolved recently in the pages of the New York Times. Perhaps the discussants had read it there.
Instead of America’s ‘news’-media uncritically trumpeting what government officials assert to be facts (as they traditionally do), we now have former spooks uncritically trumpeting what a mainstream ‘news’-medium has recently concocted to be the case - about themselves.
They’ve come out of the closet, about being the Deep State. However, even in that, they are lying, because they aren’t it; they are only agents for it.
In America, the Deep State ‘justifies’ itself in the ‘news’-media that it owns, and does so by falsely ‘defining’ what the “Deep State” is (which is actually the nation’s 607 billionaires, whose hired agents number in the millions).
They mis-‘define’ it, as being, instead, the taxpayer-salaried career Government employees, known professionally as “the Civil Service.” (Although some Civil Servants - especially at the upper levels - are agents for America’s billionaires and retire to cushy board seats, most of them actually are not and do not.
And the “revolving door” between “the public sector” and “the private sector” is where the Deep State operations become concentrated.
That’s the core of the networking, by which the billionaires get served. And, of course, those former spooks at the National Press Club said nothing about it. Are they authentically so stupid that they don’t know about it, or is that just pretense from them?)
How the Deep State’s operatives perpetrate this deception about the meaning of “Deep State” was well exemplified in the nine links that were supplied on October 28th by the extraordinarily honest anonymous German analyst who blogs as “Moon of Alabama” and who condemned there (and linked to) 9 recent articles in the New York Times, as posing a threat against democracy in America.
As I intend to argue here, the 9 articles are, indeed, aimed at deceiving the public, about what the true meaning of the phrase “the Deep State” is.
However, he didn’t explain the tactic the NYT’s editors (and those former spooks) use to deceive the public about the Deep State, and this is what I aim to do here, by showing the transformation, over time, in the way that that propaganda-organization, the New York Times, has been employing the phrase “Deep State” - a remarkable transformation, which started, on 16 February 2017, by the newspaper’s denying that any Deep State exists in America but that it exists only in corrupt nations; and which gradually transitioned into an upside-down, by asserting that a Deep State does exist in the United States, and that it fights against corruption in this country.
As always, only fools (such as that applauding audience on October 30th) would believe it, but propagandists depend upon fools and cannot thrive without them.
In this case, the Times, in those 9 articles, was evolving quickly from a blanket denial, to an American-exceptionalist proud affirmation, that a Deep State rules this country and ought to rule it.
The first of these NYT articles was published on 16 February 2017, and it denied that the US has any “Deep State” whatsoever.
The second, published on 6 March 2017, blamed President Trump (since the NYT represents mainly Democratic Party billionaires) for mainstreaming the phrase “the Deep State” into American political discourse, and it alleged that that phrase actually refers only to “countries like Egypt, Turkey and Pakistan, where authoritarian elements band together to undercut democratically elected leaders.”
The third, published on 10 March 2017, repeated this allegation, that this phrase applies only to “the powerful deep states of countries like Egypt or Pakistan, experts say.”
The fourth, published on 5 September 2018, was an anonymous op-ed from a Government employee who condemned Trump and “vowed to thwart parts of his agenda and his worst inclinations.”
“This isn’t the work of the so-called deep state. It’s the work of the steady state.” So: still the NYT’s editors were hewing to their propaganda-line, that no “Deep State” exists in America - there are just whistleblowers, here.
The fifth, on 18 December 2018, said, for example, that “Adam Lovinger, a Pentagon analyst, was one of the first to wrap himself in the deep state defense” - namely, that they consist of “people who have been targeted for political reasons.”
So, the NYT’s editors were now reinforcing their new false ‘definition’ of “Deep State,” as consisting just of Government whistleblowers.
The sixth, on 6 October 2019, said, “President Trump and some of his allies have asserted without evidence that a cabal of American officials - the so-called deep state - embarked on a broad operation to thwart Mr. Trump’s campaign.
The conspiracy theory remains unsubstantiated.” So: the NYT’s editors were back, again, to denying that there is any “Deep State” in America.
This was a signal, from them, that they were starting to recognize that they’d need to jiggle their ‘definition’ of “Deep State,” at least a bit.
The seventh, on 20 October 2019, was by a member of the Editorial Board, and it boldly proclaimed, about “the deep state,” “Let us now praise these not-silent heroes.”
The propagandists now had settled firmly upon their new (and previously merely exploratory) ‘definition’ of “Deep State,” as consisting of whistleblowers in the US Government’s Civil Services, “individuals willing to step up and protest the administration’s war on science, expertise and facts.”
The eighth, on 23 October 2019, equated “the deep state” even more boldly with the impeachment of President Trump: “Over the last three weeks, the deep state has emerged from the shadows in the form of real live government officials, past and present, who have defied a White House attempt to block cooperation with House impeachment investigators and provided evidence that largely backs up the still-anonymous whistle-blower.”
The ninth, on 26 October 2019, which came from “a contributing opinion writer and professor of history,” alleged that the origins of “the deep state” are to be found with Teddy Roosevelt in the 1880s, when “A healthy dose of elitism drove Roosevelt’s crusade, as the spoils system had been the path to power for immigrant-driven political machines in big cities like New York.
Yet the Civil Service laws he and others created marked the beginning of a shift toward a fairer, less corrupt public realm.”
In other words: the Deep State, in America, are not perpetrators of corrupt government (such as in “countries like Egypt, Turkey and Pakistan, where authoritarian elements band together to undercut democratically elected leaders”), but are instead courageous enemies of corrupt government; and they are instituted by the aristocracy here (today’s American billionaires), in order to reduce, if not eliminate, corruption in government (which, the Times now alleges, originates amongst, or serves, the lower classes).
The lessons about Big Brother, which were taught by George Orwell in his merely metaphorical masterpiece 1984, were apparently never learned, because even now - as his “Newspeak” is being further refined so that black is white, and good is bad, and truth is falsehood - there still are people who subscribe to the propagandists and cannot get enough of their ridiculous con-games.
Though in some poor countries, a corrupt Deep State rules; a Deep State rules in America so as to reduce if not prevent corruption, the New York Times now concludes.
You can see how it’s done, in those nine NYT articles. Isn’t it simply amazing there?!
Lindsay Perigo: New Zealand Is A Police State
January 13 2025 | From: BreakingViews / Various There is now apparently a police-compiled Enemies List circulating among New Zealand's totalitarian Globalist elite, such as Comrade Ardern, Comrade Andrew Little, Comrade Winston Peters and new Human Wrongs Commissar Comrade Paul Hunt, a lackey of raving anti-Semite and hard-core socialist Comrade Jeremy Corbyn, all advancing the agenda of the most evil man on the planet, George Soros.
(Why was this Islamo-Marxist fascist Paul Hunt brought over to destroy our Bill of Rights?! At whose expense?!)
From many accounts police are actively harassing people on this list.
Freedom of Expression
Everyone has the right to freedom of expression, including the freedom to seek, receive, and impart information and opinions of any kind in any form.
That's what NZ and UK Labour want to destroy, Section 14 of our Bill of Rights (lifted from the UN Declaration of Universal Human Rights), and anything resembling it, in all countries hitherto free or semi-free.
Freedom-lovers are on notice: you may be about to be arrested for what in 1984 are called Thought Crimes. Come on then, Thought Police: arrest me for my thoughts.
It doesn't get any worse than:
“I disagree with what you say but defend to the death your right to say it," now does it?!
Seditious and revolutionary stuff in the Land of Political Correctness!
What you could consider doing instead, though, Thought Police, is gathering signatures on my Citizens' Pledge.
If everyone signed up to this, understood it and meant it, we wouldn't have to worry about a thing, now would we?! It goes as follows:
“Just as I reserve the right to hold and express my opinions on any matter whatsoever, I promise to respect the right of all others to do the same. I renounce unreservedly the use of coercion and violence in the promotion of my opinions."
It shouldn't be hard to get signatures.
A recent poll on Stuff, quickly removed when the results were so decisively un-PC, showed 90% of respondents saying that while Israel Folau's anti-gay tweets were offensive, they certainly shouldn't be illegal.
New Zealanders get it that there's no such thing as a right not to be offended; snowflakes who don't get it should consider migrating to Iran or North Korea.
The ANZAC heroes whom we've just been re-commemorating would surely be appalled to think that the single most precious thing for which they died is about to be extinguished.
I trust my family. Having people in my life I love and trust makes everything far more meaningful and pleasant. I hope people reading this likewise have a circle of trust they’ve built over the years.
On the other hand, you should never trust anyone or anything that hasn’t given you good reason to do so, and if someone or something gives you good reason not to trust them, you should never forget that.
The more power a person or institution has in society, the less trustworthy they tend to be. I don’t say this because it’s fun to be cynical, I say this because my life experience has demonstrated its accuracy.
In the 21st century alone, I’ve been given good reason to distrust all sorts of things around me, including the U.S. government (all governments really), intelligence agencies, politicians, mass media, Wall Street and Silicon Valley, to name a few.
These power centers make up “society” as we know it in 2020, which is really just massive concentrations of lawless financial and political power obfuscating rampant criminality behind the cover of various ostensibly venerable institutions.
What’s most remarkable is how many people still maintain trust in so many of these provably untrustworthy organizations and industries, which speaks to the power of propaganda as well as the comfort of denial.
That said, the ground is clearly beginning to shift on this front.
As more and more people recognize that the system’s designed to work against them, increased numbers will reject conventional wisdom and search for an alternative framework.
Unfortunately, this next step can be equally treacherous and it’s important not to jump from the frying pan into the fire.
This is where social media comes into play. It offers an endless array of opinions and analysis that you don’t get from mass media, but it’s also filled with bad actors, professional propagandists and con artists.
At this point, everyone knows that social media is the new information battleground, so every character or institution with malicious intent is aggressively playing in this arena and often with boatloads of money.
The charlatans at MSNBC will have you believe it’s just the Russians or Chinese, but every government and every single special interest on the planet is now involved.
They’re all on social media in one form or another, trying to push you in a specific direction that’s usually not in your best interests.
It took me a while, but I’ve finally recognized how unthoughtful and treacherous social media is whenever some big news event hits.
Important arguments quickly lose all nuance and devolve into binary talking points and agendas. People split into teams in a way that feels very much akin to the traditional, and now largely discredited, red / blue political theater.
For covid-19, it felt like half of Twitter thought it was an extinction-level event, while the other half was convinced the whole thing was a hoax.
In the aftermath of George Floyd, you were either cheering on the civil unrest, or wanted to send in the military. Increasingly, if you aren’t in one of two manufactured camps on any issue you’ll be shouted down and ostracized.
That’s not the kind of discussion I’m here for.
As someone who’s found great value in Twitter over the years, I’ve become far more careful in how I use it and where to direct my attention and energy.
It reminds me of Mos Eisley in Star Wars, a wretched hive of scum and villainy, but simultaneously a place you can connect with Han Solo and get a spaceship.
As we move forward, it’s going to feel like the world’s ending, and in some ways it will be.
No the world isn’t literally ending, but a specific kind of world is ending, and it’ll be extremely difficult for many people to tell the difference as it’s happening.
This will likely lead to many more episodes of mass insanity as professional manipulators take advantage of millions upon millions of disoriented people.
Priority number one should be to stand guard at the gate of your mind during this time so as not to become a victim.
We live in an age of mass corruption, mass oligarch looting and mass institutional and structural breakdown.
We also live in an age of mass manipulation, mass hysteria and mass psychological warfare.
Navigating through these two realities will become increasingly difficult.
The best thing you can do from here on out is use your time and energy as productively as possible.
We’re going to need builders, creators and inventors more than ever before, because we’re past the point of putting this thing back together.
We’ll need to recreate, reimagine and rebuild, and all of this must spring from a point of consciousness in order to bring forth something that is both better and sustainable.
Become more beautiful and resilient as others become ugly and unhinged.
Focus on what’s within your capacity to control and always remember to resist the crazy.
Sharyl Attkisson: How Media Narratives Became More Important Than Facts
& Every Nation Must Declare War Against Big Tech
December 16 2022 | From: Zerohedge / NaturalNews / Various The day that I told CBS News I wished to leave my job as investigative correspondent ahead of my contract, I didn’t give a reason. I didn’t see the point because the problem wasn’t fixable. Nor was it isolated to CBS News.
My own take is that - as our industry has changed in ways that have become undeniable to most - I was a bit of the canary in the coal mine.
By that, I mean I believe I was among the first to really pay attention to the increasingly effective operations to shape and censor news - the movements to establish narratives rather than follow facts - and to see the growing influence of smear operations, political interests, and corporate interests on the news.
It’s not that I’m smarter than my peers, and I’m surely far less smart than many, but my particular brand of off-narrative reporting happened to draw the intense attention of the smear operators and propagandists, so I began to study it.
A case in point: the smear that was promulgated when I left CBS. It was often incorrectly reported that I told CBS management I was quitting due to liberal media bias.
That false story turned out to be convenient for both political sides, and largely survives today. It simply wasn’t rooted in fact. And I don’t recall reporters even asking me whether it was true.
Once a few articles reported that it was, others simply copied the claim and adopted it as if established fact, eventually without attribution. Now there would be no point in trying to clarify it.
After all, Wikipedia says it’s true. No going back from that.
Powerful smear groups and certain interests - including some within CBS at the time - started the narrative that I was “conservative,” not because they necessarily believed it, but as a tool to “controversialize” the reporting I was doing that was contrary to powerful interests.
The idea is that if I can be portrayed as a partisan, then my reporting can be more easily dismissed.
The Narrative Requires
In fact, prior to the operation to push the narrative that I was “conservative,” my reporting had been lauded by a diverse group of observers, including the likes of Rachel Maddow, who once delivered an entire monologue on an investigative expose I did on the “charity” of then-Rep. Stephen Buyer (R- Ind.).
My most recent Emmy award was for an undercover investigation into Republican fundraising.
But the narrative requests - nay, requires - that we forget all that. We must focus on the supposed miraculous metamorphosis. Depending on who’s spinning, they may insist I was a rational journalist who went crazy one day and flew to the dark side of conservatism.
Or they may say I used to be a devoted liberal, but decided the big money was in pandering to Republicans, so I sold out. The details aren’t important. You are simply to come away with the notion that my reporting is now politically conflicted.
Another example of this narrative: Many news reports comment that I work for the “conservative” Sinclair Broadcast Group. Fair enough - Sinclair is run by a family that’s made no secret of their conservative political leanings.
But the reporters who note this political connection apparently fail to recognize the inherent conflict in the fact that they eagerly label the conservative group; yet I don’t think they reported that I worked for the “liberal” CNN, the “liberal” PBS, or the “liberal” CBS.
Some reporters lack the self-awareness and objectivity to understand they are revealing themselves when they selectively apply labels in a one-sided fashion. They are servicing a narrative, even if unintentionally.
When I worked at CNN, it was owned by a billionaire Democrat donor (Ted Turner) - a good boss, by the way. When I worked for CBS, the management (Sumner Redstone, Les Moonves) were rich Democrat donors - also, a great company to work for during most of my 20 years there.
Sinclair has likewise been a terrific employer to date. They haven’t forced editorial biases in the reporting on my program. The program is mostly apolitical, addressing topics such as the underreported dangers of MRI dye or how American farmers are suffering under the current trade war with China.
When we address politics, you are as likely to see an interview with Rep. Eric Swalwell, a Democrat, as you are to see Sen. Lindsey Graham, a Republican.
Improvements
But there’s the narrative...
When a national print media reporter wrote about my program a couple of years ago, he incorrectly referred to it as “conservative.”
Later, when asked if he’d ever actually seen the program, he admitted he hadn’t.
It’s not that it would be difficult to - well - actually do a little bit of reporting rather than repeat a narrative: My weekly program is on at least a half-dozen times each week in the city where this reporter is based, and it’s posted online.
As easy as it was for him to do some first-hand reporting, he chose to repeat the narrative.
Lara Logan, who recently left CBS News, has also been speaking out about her observations regarding the decline of fair and objective journalism.
She’s likewise been attacking the narratives. As such, she has been subjected to them. That’s how it works. Obviously (says the narrative), she is a disgruntled conservative who is not to be believed.
Or (says the narrative), she’s perhaps a little unbalanced. (You know, all that war reporting and stress. Poor Lara.)
The truth is, Lara is extremely clear-eyed on these issues. And she and I are far from alone in our views on the state of the media.
We agree there is terrific journalism being committed on a daily basis at organizations from The New York Times to local news stations.
However, we agree that national media has also largely become co-opted by powerful interests who understand how to direct the news landscape in a way that services certain narratives and agendas.
I have heard support from hundreds of journalists, college professors, and media observers during the last several years. I have been reached out to by reporters in print and on TV, by national and local news, by students and a Pulitzer Prize winner.
The effort to expose flaws and conflicts in media reporting is growing stronger, not weaker, despite the narratives.
The desire to affect improvements is building. Make no mistake: Not all of us are free to speak publicly, but there are a lot of us.
We have reached a precarious tipping point for humanity… a moment in history where humanity must either rise up and defeat the scourge or Big Tech or be enslaved by all-out techno-fascism.
The techno-fascist organizations like Google, Apple, Facebook, Twitter, YouTube and even Wikipedia have becomea clear and present danger to humanity.
In fact, as I explain in this uncensored video, below, the aggressive censorship, thought control and election meddling of the tech giants is flat-out incompatible with civil society.
Techno-fascists like Mark Zuckerberg and Jack Dorsey are un-elected and answer to no one, yet they now solely determine what thoughts, views and opinions you are allowed to speak or read.
This is incompatible with human freedom and must be halted.
As I explain in this 37-minute artistic expression “rap beats” video with lyrics, it is time for President Trump to declare war on the techno-fascists and for America to rise up and defeat, dismantle and disable the scourge of techno-fascism in the same way we worked together to defeat the Third Reich.
If some of the words are not easy to follow, that’s because this is an artistic expression rap song, not a simple audio lecture.
The World Economic Forum Talks About “Mind Control Using Sound Waves”
& Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted January 10 2025 | From: VigilantCitizen / WakeUpWorld / Various
The World Economic Forum – one of the most powerful elite organizations in the world – recently discussed the emergence of remote mind control technology. And it admits that it could be used to turn humans into mind-controlled slaves.
The World Economic Forum (WEF) is one of the most influential elite organizations, alongside the Council on Foreign Relations, the Bilderberg group, and the Trilateral Commision.
Every year, the forum brings together some 2,500 top business leaders, international political leaders, economists, celebrities and journalists to discuss world issues.
The Board of Trustees of the WEF is composed of some of the powerful people in the world. Here are some of them:
Mark Carney, Governor, Bank of England
Al Gore, Vice-President of the United States (1993-2001); Chairman and Co-Founder, Generation Investment Management LLP
Jim Yong Kim, President, World Bank
Christine Lagarde, Managing Director, International Monetary Fund (IMF)
Peter Maurer, President, International Committee of the Red Cross (ICRC)
Indra Nooyi, Chairman, PepsiCo
L. Rafael Reif, President, Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT)
Ursula von der Leyen, Federal Minister of Defence, Federal Ministry of Defence of Germany
David M. Rubenstein, Co-Founder and Co-Executive Chairman, Carlyle Group
In many ways, the WEF is similar to the Bilderberg Group. Interesting fact: Klaus Schwab, the Founder and Executive Chairman of the WEF is a former member of the steering committee of the Bilderberg Group.
Not unlike other powerful organizations that claim to “help the world”, the WEF is accused of actually promoting the interests of the world elite.
"To function as a socializing institution for the emerging global elite, globalization’s “Mafiocracy” of bankers, industrialists, oligarchs, technocrats and politicians.
They promote common ideas, and serve common interests: their own.”
Far from actually solving world problems, the WEF is accused of simply shifting the blame from governments and major conglomerates to regular citizens.
"A study, published in the Journal of Consumer Research, investigated the sociological impact of the WEF. It concluded that the WEF do not solve issues such as poverty, global warming, chronic illness, or debt.
They have simply shifted the burden for the solution of these problems from governments and business to “responsible consumers subjects: the green consumer, the health-conscious consumer, and the financially literate consumer.”
They merely reframe the issues, and by so doing perpetuate them.
Gore is singled out as a prime example. Gore’s speeches deliberately shift focus away from the problems of unregulated markets and corporate activities to one of moral pathologies, individual greed, etc.
In doing so he is actually promoting the creation of new markets, and hence perpetuating the same old problems in a new guise. New markets will follow the same patterns as the old ones because the core problem of corporate governance is never addressed.”
- Markus Giesler Ela Veresiu, Creating the Responsible Consumer: Moralistic Governance Regimes and Consumer Subjectivity
Remote Mind Control
The WEF’s Annual Meeting of the Global Future Councils took place on November 11-12 in the United Arab Emirates.
One of the topics discussed was “mind control using sound waves”.
The WEF’s official website published an article entitled Mind control using sound waves?
We ask a scientist how it works where University of Oxford Professor Antoine Jérusalem describes the technology and the issues related to it.
Controlling the Brain With Sound Waves: How Does it Work?
Well, to get straight to the science, the principle of non-invasive neuromodulation is to focus ultrasound waves into a region in the brain so that they all gather in a small spot.
Then hopefully, given the right set of parameters, this can change the activity of the neurons.
If you want to get rid of neurons that have gone wild, for example in epilepsy, then you might want to crank up the energy to essentially kill them. But if you want to selectively promote or block the neuronal activity, you need to fine-tune your ultrasound waves carefully.
In other words, there’s a difference between ultrasound stimulation used for removing tissue, and ultrasound neuromodulation, which is aimed at controlling neuronal activity without damaging the tissue.
Ultrasound neuromodulation is something that definitely works, but that we still don’t understand.
What social good can come of it?
The current buzzwords are Alzheimer’s and Parkinson’s disease, as well as traumatic brain injuries. But scientists are also looking at the spinal cord and peripheral nervous systems.
As far as I am concerned, since the brain is the de facto centre of decision for so many processes, any of them could be targeted.
Is it safe?
When attempting to ‘control’ neuronal activity by providing minute mechanical vibrations to a region of the brain, it’s important that the focus of the ultrasound, frequency and amplitude are properly tuned, or the brain can potentially be damaged.
The point is that we still don’t know how to tune all of this; and if I were to exaggerate a bit, I could say that our current approach is not that far off from fiddling around with the settings on a radio until we hear the right station.
One of the many difficulties is to know for sure that we are indeed controllingneurons with these sound waves, as opposed to damaging them.
The truth is that we still don’t know how the process works. And if you don’t know how it works, you don’t know how much is “too much”.
What are the biggest ethical challenges?
The potential of this technique is huge – by that I mean the sheer number of applications, as well as the ethical use.
From a biological perspective, it’s similar to drugs. It can cure you, it can get you addicted, and it can kill you. It’s all about staying within a given set of rules.
From an ethical perspective, the world is changing so fast that it’s difficult to assess what will be acceptable tomorrow that is not today.
I am also convinced that human nature is such that if something can be done, it will be done. The question is by whom. I would rather have a fair society leading the dance than some rogue state without any respect for human or animal life.
If we want to lead that dance 10 years from now, we need to start researching today.
How dystopian could it get?
I can see the day coming where a scientist will be able to control what a person sees in their mind’s eye, by sending the right waves to the right place in their brain.
My guess is that most objections will be similar to those we hear today about subliminal messages in advertisements, only much more vehement.
This technology is not without its risks of misuse. It could be a revolutionary healthcare technology for the sick, or a perfect controlling tool with which the ruthless control the weak.
This time though, the control would be literal.
What can we do to safeguard its potential?
I am not going to argue that scientists are all wise and knowledgeable when it comes to what should and should not be done. Some of us will go as far as we can get away with. But that’s human nature, and not unique to scientists.
Either way, our job is to find something that is beneficial to humanity. And if you find a way to make somebody better, then you most likely also know how to do the contrary.
The goal is to make sure that regulation prevents the latter, without impeding the former. I believe that this is the role of regulators. And I think that the European Union, where I work, is quite good at this.
Another role of politicians should be to provide a communication platform to explain the long vision of any given area of research.
And it can be too early, or not a good idea, and the final decision might very well be to stop it.
But in the long term, the public should have the potential benefits of a new technology explained to them in plain words, which is something that scientists are not necessarily good at.
Politicians should remember that if we don’t do it, then somebody somewhere will do it anyway…potentially unregulated.
In short, Antoine Jérusalem says that remote mind control is an incredibly powerful technology that has the power to possibly cure illnesses.
However, in the wrong hands, the technology can completely take control of one’s brain. In his words, it can be the “perfect controlling tool with which the ruthless control the weak”.
That being said, remote mind control is nothing new and the elite had access to this kind of technology for years.
A few months ago, I published an article about a leaked 1996 document describing remote mind control.
Total Individual Control Technology – Insider Exposes How You And Your DNA Are Being Targeted
Total Individual Control Technology is a nefarious type of EM (Electromagnetic) and V2K (Voice to Skull) weaponized technology that is being experimented with and deployed against segments of the American population.
Those attacked by this electronic stalking are known as TIs (Targeted Individuals). Recently another brave whistleblower has stepped forward to expose it.
Bryan Kofron (who formerly used the alias of Justin Carter) is a security industry specialist who used to work for a private security company SIS (Security Industry Specialists) in Seattle, Washington.
He quit in disgust after realizing that his former firm, and others just like it, were actively using this so-called total individual control technology to target people, then ultimately control and destroy their lives.
Since he quit, he has himself become a victim of the technology via gangstalking.
What Total Individual Control Technology is Capable Of
According to Kofron, this technology is so advanced that it can be used to read your mind, program your mind with thoughts (that you would believe are your own) and induce emotional states in you (including pain, hate and fear).
It can be used to tap into your optical nerve and auditory systems to see and hear what you are seeing and hearing. It can target particular people by engaging in individual-specific attacks (based on the target’s DNA resonance).
Finally, it is being used in vast social engineering programs as a way to experiment upon poor, homeless and weak people who have little or no chance of fighting back.
Kofron explains that this technology is being used by psychopaths who have little scruples about the harm they are causing.
They are targeting specific groups of people: those who are cognitively inclined, highly intelligent, knowledgeable about advanced technology or interested in alternative research (i.e. conspiracy research).
In general, they are either targeting empowered individuals with free minds (to stop dissidents and revolutionaries) or those too poor and weak to fight back.
Using Kofron’s own words, here are some of the things Total Individual Control Technology is able to do:
"This technology manipulates the electrical signals in the brain, thus controlling thoughts and feelings and emotions and sensations throughout the body.
It works by rewiring the brain by creating new neural pathways and destroying existing neural pathways, thus this literally changes the way a person thinks and thus behaves.”
“This technology can also be used to control the muscle movement of the target. It can take over one’s hands or feet while driving and make you press on the accelerator or press on the brake or turn.
This can be used to cause accidents it can also be used to prevent accidents from happening.”
“This technology can also tap into the optical nerve of the target, and the auditory system of the target, so that those monitoring the target can see what the target is seeing and hear what target is hearing.
This information is then downloaded and stored on a computer, in a highly secure classified site on servers that are guarded by some of the tightest security in the world.
This results in the individual’s entire day, everything they see, everything they hear, everything they experiment, everything they experience, and everything they feel being recorded till the end of time.”
“This technology can also be used to manipulate the emotions of the target. It can induce fear, love, hate.”
“This technology can be used to beam images and even motion pictures into one’s brain. Images and motion pictures that are so realistic that you think you are actually watching a movie or seeing something in reality.
It’s like a virtual reality 3D rendering that takes place within the target’s mind.
The images and motion pictures manifest themselves in such a way that the target if they are not aware that this technology is being used on them will believe that they are natural thoughts and natural images.”
“This technology can also be used to induce and control dreams.
It can be used to control dream cycles and sleep patterns. To cause one to sleep very deeply or to cause one to not sleep at all. REM cycles, alpha beta and delta brainwaves can be induced immediately by this technology.
And this technology can also be used to mimic spiritual experiences.
Joy, love, peace that passes understanding can all be induced artificially by this technology to make the target believe that they are having a genuine spiritual experience when they’re not.”
“This technology can also be used to sexually manipulate the target. Make them feel sexual arousal or turn off their sexuality altogether, it can stimulate them and it can shut them down at a moments notice.
It can also be used to manipulate the hormones of the target, thus lowering and raising estrogen and testosterone levels in women and men respectively.”
“This technology can also be used to read the thoughts of the target in real time … they can read your thoughts verbatim as they occur within your own mind.”
“Anywhere from small groups of people 10-20 to 100, to medium size groups of people several thousand to tens of thousands.
This is done by creating a field effect, where an entire field of electromagnetic energy is created in a geographical location and any human being within that geographical location within that electromagnetic field affecting that geographical location will be effected by the technology.
This can be used to induce a general mood in a population or a crowd of people. It can be used to make them passive, it can be used to make them agitated.
And this can be used to cause or stop, induce riots. Stop crime, start crime. Stop thoughts, start thoughts. Massive mind control on a citywide level.”
Total Individual Control Technology Attacks Specific Individuals Based on DNA Resonance
As I have discussed in previous articles on mind control such as “They” Can’t Read Your Thoughts … Right?, the state of current mind control technology is beyond most people’s comprehension and idea of what is possible.
Yet, we have had enough out-of-the-closet whistleblowers and leaked or declassified documents to give us a clear idea of the scary extent to which we can be psychically attacked.
Whistleblowers such as Dr. Robert Duncan have lectured at length about the capabilities of V2K technology, which is defined as an EM frequency technology that utilizes RF (Radio Frequency) signals to induce sound within the cranial cavity of the target.
V2K literally pipes thoughts directly into people’s heads without them knowing it.
Kofron bases his information on his own experience as an insider in this field, and also as recent victim of V2K himself. He was attacked once he went public. He claims he has been assaulted with a beta version which is especially nasty, piping thoughts into his head such as:
"Everyone’s against you”
“Please be quiet or we’re going to kill you”
“Don’t work again or we’re going to kill you”
“You’re the lab rat now motherfucker”
Kofron claims the Total Individual Control Technology attacks are attempting to turn him against his former work colleagues, friends and family.
However, since he was trained in this area, he knows that the voices are technological and can defend himself against the manipulations once he hears them.
Kofron echoes exactly what Duncan has warned about: individual-specific attacks. Duncan states that every person has a “unique resonance signature”, and in almost exactly the same words, Kofron states that:
"… the DNA of the individual is used to determine the resonant frequency of the DNA itself, the resonant frequency is then used to fine tune the technology … to tune it perfectly to the resonant frequency of the targeted individual’s DNA.”
The Drive to Create a Worldwide DNA Database
This leads into another aspect of the NWO agenda: the drive to create a worldwide DNA database. When seen in the light of Total Individual Control Technology, the acquisition of an entire population’s DNA takes on a very sinister meaning.
It is no coincidence that Amazon and Google (who are ultimately controlled by the same force as David Icke suggests) are racing each other, along with Microsoft, IBM and other companies, to assemble a DNA database as quickly as they can.
Those in power who gain access a completed worldwide DNA database and total individual control technology would have a horrifying weapon at their disposal to target literally anyone they wanted.
Kofron exposes how prospective employees are tricked out of their DNA. They apply for a job at SIS, get told they have to do a drug test, and when the urine sample is sent to a lab, part is siphoned off as DNA to go into Amazon’s burgeoning DNA database.
Americans, in the millions, are having their DNA stolen from them, without their knowledge or consent, so they become unwitting targets of this insidious program!
Social Engineering with Total Individual Control Technology
Kofron talks at length about how this technology is fully operational and is already being tested upon those in society who are struggling (such as those who are homeless, poor and who don’t have much family or many friends) since they make the easiest targets.
On his website GangstalkerWars.com, he exposes the details of ongoing operations within Seattle (where he used to work for SIS).
This social engineering is being done by the Federal Government, the Military Intelligence agencies, private security firms (more on this below), some of the largest US corporations (after all, we live in a corporatocracy), local and state police, and social programs within inner-city America.
In one such operation, the perpetrators would target certain geographical blocks of the city, and, for instance, cause everyone in that area to be in a bad mood.
In another operation, SIS (employed by Amazon whose headquarters are in Seattle) would test upon Amazon employees.
In another operation, SIS would experiment upon its own low level employees.
In another operation, homeless people were brought in from all over the nation to special buildings that were then targeted.
This is true gangstalking – the ganging up by sociopaths and psychopaths upon the innocent to electronically harass and stalk them.
The Rising Danger of the Private Security Firm Industry in America
Kofron warns about an alarming trend in American society: the rise of private security companies who mostly employ ex-military and ex-intelligence agents. The US Military Intelligence Complex is completely and utterly out of control.
It runs the government and pulls the strings attached to all the puppet politicians, who don’t have the necessary “clearance” to access the truly top secret information.
These security firms, like the MIC itself, appear to operate above and outside the law.
People rising up the ranks are conditioned to use this technology against innocent victims, and are told they will be rewarded with everything (money, power, women, sex, connection, access, status, belonging to the power club) if they go along with the program and become perpetrators.
If they have a strong conscience and refuse, they will be sacked, shunned, cut off, threatened and even made into TIs themselves.
The Human Rights Loophole: False Diagnoses
Another aspect of Total Individual Control Technology which the perpetrators use to shield themselves is the cruel use of false psychiatric diagnoses.
Here’s how it works: they manipulate TI victims to see a psychiatrist, and then they bribe the psychiatrist to deliver a fake diagnosis that the victim is mentally unstable, deranged, delusional, crazy, incompetent, paranoid, schizophrenic, suffering from Multiple Personality Disorder – or they invent some similar legal-medical-psychobabble diagnosis.
This has the unfortunate effect of stripping away the victim’s natural or human rights, which leaves him or her with no recourse to fight back against his attackers, since his claims and testimonies will be dismissed as the ravings of a madman.
This is a similar tactic to what is used with other victims of mind control.
In my interview with Max Spiers, he touched on the use of the Big Pharma “false memory” foundation, which includes bogus therapists and psychiatrists who convince mind control victims that they’re having false memories (when they are actually recalling how they were tortured and programmed).
The Infrastructure Underlying Total Individual Control Technology
The infrastructure that is enabling the total individual control technology is composed mostly of antennae, radar and cell phone towers.
Often, the antennae are camouflaged (hidden behind walls). Some or most of the radar used is from military bases.
Kofron was not able to explain much of how the technology actually works, although an electrical engineer who called in on one of the radio interviews suggested that the perpetrators are setting up a standing wave of DNA, then doing slight variations in the phasing using pulse code modulation.
Final Thoughts: Total Individual Control Technology Perpetrated by the Cult of Power
In concluding, it’s important to realize how such cruel surveillance is being perpetuated.
As Kofron explains, it’s all about creating an “in” club of perpetrators who get rewarded with money, sex, power and the intrinsic human need for belonging, get told they are on the “right” side and the TIs are on the “wrong” side – and get threatened that if they speak up or quit, they may end up on that wrong side.
It’s the cult of power.
Hopefully this testimony can serve as a wakeup call for those on the fence who can’t quite bring themselves to believe or act. In many ways, time is running out and the net is being drawn tighter and tighter.
The more technology advances, the more weapons the cult of power will have to enslave those who stand for truth and freedom.
At a certain point, there will literally be nowhere to run or hide. The only option is to face it now before it’s too late.
How To Stop The Media From Controlling Your Mind + Why The ‘Red Pill’ Has Become So Big January 9 2025 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / CollectiveEvolution / Various
Our beliefs are powerful beyond imagination: They influence our perception of reality, which in turn influences the way we live.
Therefore, those who control our beliefs control our lives.
And what are our beliefs comprised of? Well, fundamentally of a bunch of information that we have accepted as truth - even when we don’t have strong evidence to support it.
In Brief:
The Facts: During this lockdown, people's attention has shifted from that which keeps them 'distracted' each day, to having to quiet down, reflect and even explore the reality of what is going on in our world.
Reflect On: More 'difficult' times often serve as an opportunity to collapse old paradigms, shift and create anew. Is this part of what we are seeing now?
Much of the information concerning what’s going on in the world is presented to us by the mainstream media. Every day, television channels, newspapers and news websites pump a flood of information into our heads that we rarely question.
This information then leads us to perceive the world in a certain way, and act in it accordingly.
The problem is, most people don’t realize that mainstream media outlets tend not to show us the entire truth, but only a tiny aspect of it, and in a very biased way.
Why? Mainly because they have vested political and financial interests (although, of course, they don’t publicly admit it).
Have you ever wondered why, when you visit several major news websites, you often come across information about the exact same events presented in different, even antithetical ways? Well, there’s an explanation for that:
The mainstream media usually shows only what it wants to show you.
To be clear, I’m not saying that all mainstream media always intends to manipulate you. Sometimes, journalists and others who work for the mainstream media truly and deeply believe in the ideas behind the content they’re putting out to the world.
In fact, usually they themselves have been brainwashed into certain ideologies after years upon years of propaganda and social conditioning.
Hence, it’s not that they are evil or bad, contrary to what many people think. Rather, they are also victims of the cultural environment they live in.
The point I want to make is simple: The mainstream media isn’t to be trusted. In fact, no media is to be trusted. Period. Even what I’m writing here might be utter bullshit, based on my own hidden agendas. So, I don’t want you to trust me. I really don’t. I want you to seek the truth for yourself.
The important question is, how to stop the media from controlling your mind? Here’s my time-tested advice:
Firstly, when it comes to any serious issue under discussion, be sure to expose yourself to as much information as you can, from as many - even conflicting - sources as possible, in order to develop a spherical view of the situation.
Secondly, remember: Just because Jesus, the Pope, Trump, Obama, Putin, Deepak Chopra or your favorite YouTube persona said something, that doesn’t mean it’s true.
So, don’t take anything on blind belief. Rather, question everyone and everything, do plenty of research, and come to your own conclusions using critical thinking.
The media only has the power we give it. Therefore, it’s in our hands to stop it from controlling our lives, right now, if we really want to.
The metaphorical ‘red pill’ comes from the movie The Matrix whereby the main character Neo is offered the opportunity to see ‘the real world’ that is hidden behind the matrix all humans are plugged into and convinced is reality.
Neo has the choice between the red pill to show him the truth, or the blue pill to allow him to go on believing that the world he has been programmed to believe in is in fact reality.
Since Neo was someone who always had an inkling that something wasn’t ‘quite right’ with the world and he could feel there was more, he decides to take the red pill and understand what’s really going on.
Today, humanity has been faced with a number of opportunities to take the red pill. In our world, the blue pill would represent accepting all that government tells people is truth.
It would mean that the mainstream media is always providing truth to the public and there is nothing more to the story. It would mean that we are beings who simply have 5 senses, and our material world is all there is to experience.
We are animals [human animals, as the cabal see us], disconnected from one another, should be in competition to one another and are inherently violent creatures.
The red pill, however, would allow you to see beyond the agendas and narratives within mainstream media and government.
It would open you up to who you truly are and the true nature of reality, in that we are all connected to one unified field and are individual aspects of that field playing together in a vast experience we call ‘ the human experience.’
Our true nature is peace and love, and that what we are playing out today as our reality simply comes from how we have been programmed to forget who we truly are and what we should accept about the world around us.
While this metaphor has been used by many different groups for many different purposes, I’d like to contextualize this conversation by saying that to me, taking the ‘red pill’ is simply about seeing through the deceptions and lies put forth from mainstream media and government about how our world functions.
I also feel that it’s about starting to understand the true nature of our reality, who we are and why we are here. It’s an inner journey of consciousness as much as it is an outer journey of understanding more about how our society operates.
That said, my latest video below explores why, for some of us, this ‘red pill’ has become so big and so much to take all at once.
For others who have been open for many years to exploring new ideas little by little, doses of the ‘red pill’ remained small, but now for some of us, this pill has become something that is blowing our minds wide open to what is going on in our world – and for some, it’s a lot to handle.
During this coronavirus lockdown, we’re seeing many narrative battles, disagreements about what is going on and things occur that simply don’t make sense. It can be frustrating for some, but all of it serves as an opportunity to make us ask questions and reflect.
Sometimes the ‘ridiculousness’ of things or the ‘struggles’ has to become very clear and obvious for us to truly begin questioning what is really going on.
So in that sense, these ‘tougher times’ serves as an opportunity to collapse old paradigms, shift and create anew.
“Order Out Of Chaos”: How The Elite’s Plans Were Foretold In Popular Culture January 8 2025 | From: VigilantCitizen / Various
The core philosophy of the occult elite and its plans for humanity are hidden in plain sight. From famous landmarks to blockbuster movies, it is all laid out for those who have “eyes to see”. At the center of it all, one motto: Order Out of Chaos.
Since late 2008, The Vigilant Citizen has been analyzing popular culture to highlight patterns of messages and symbolism.
And, since the very first articles published on this site, one major theme keeps resurfacing all across popular culture:
The “welcoming” of a global crisis that causes massive chaos and death which allows the ushering in of a new era. In other words: Order Out of Chaos.
This theme can be found all over popular culture, especially in products funded and commissioned by the occult elite. Why is that? Because, since the 19th century, the official motto of the occult elite is Ordo Ab Chao, Latin for Order Out of Chaos.
This an insignia representing the 33rd degree in Freemasonry (the highest degree attainable). At the top, the degree’s official motto: Ordo Ab Chao
As in everything else in Freemasonry, the motto Order Out of Chaos has several meanings, ranging from nebulous metaphysical deeds to concrete social engineering.
On a wider scale, this motto is the ultimate recipe for a drastic change in society:
1. An event causes chaos and panic
2. A solution surfaces which also happens to advance the agenda of the elite 3) Society changes without resistance.
In this day and age, the ultimate goal of the elite is to create a global government that controls the world’s resources while keeping the masses subdued and monitored through police-state tactics. The “solutions” to the current virus crisis represent big steps in that direction.
This is why they welcome these moments of chaos. They are opportunities. While the masses suffer and weaken, the elite gains power and control.
And, since symbols rule the world, Order Out of Chaos is celebrated all over popular culture through symbolism. Here are some examples in chronological order.
Georgia Guidestones
Since their unveiling in 1980, the enigmatic Georgia Guidestones have baffled people with their ominous messages.
Indeed, inscribed on gigantic slabs of stone are “10 Commandments” for a new era. And the first one says: Maintain humanity under 500 million. In order to satisfy this monument, the current world population needs to be reduced by at least 90%.
From a world government to population control, it is all here. Here are the ten “commandments”:
1. Maintain humanity under 500,000,000 in perpetual balance with nature.
2. Guide reproduction wisely – improving fitness and diversity.
3. Unite humanity with a living new language.
4. Rule passion – faith – tradition – and all things with tempered reason.
5. Protect people and nations with fair laws and just courts.
6. Let all nations rule internally resolving external disputes in a world court.
7. Avoid petty laws and useless officials.
8. Balance personal rights with social duties.
9. Prize truth – beauty – love – seeking harmony with the infinite.
10. Be not a cancer on the earth – Leave room for nature – Leave room for nature.
This current crisis is pushing us towards these commandments.
For instance, a world in confinement is clearly an exercise of “balancing personal rights with social duties”. Also, we are definitely “leaving room for nature”.
An NZ Herald headline about the environmental “benefits” of this crisis
In short, the Georgia Guidestones “look forward” to a massive, apocalyptic event to bring forth specific changes to the world. And it is not the only landmark to communicate this specific message in the United States.
At the center of it all is a 4-panel mural displaying death and chaos, followed by the creation of a new world. As my 2009 article states:
“When you analyze the symbolism of the murals, you realize that they tell a terrifying story of future events about to happen, as if it was some sort of prophecy.
There are specific social and political references and other occult details that basically turn those paintings into a New World Order manifesto."
At the risk of causing you nightmares tonight, here’s one of the murals.
A massive militaristic figure wearing a gas mask pokes a dove in the butt. An infinite line of mothers cry while holding dead babies. Is this what you want to see before boarding a plane?
Once again, an artwork placed in a public space tells the story of massive chaos followed by the rebirth of a new world that unites all nations.
Bank of America Murals
The enigmatic murals on display at the Bank of America corporate center in Charlotte, North Carolina revolve around the same general theme as the sinister sites above.
The three murals on display at the Bank of America headquarters
The mural on the right is called “Planning / Knowledge” and it is replete with occult and Masonic symbolism. It basically tells us that those who are “planning” the world have occult “knowledge”.
The center mural is called “Chaos / Creativity”. It depicts a period of transition characterized by turmoil and oppression.
There is civil unrest, military figures on the streets and barb wires all over the place.
There is also this guy:
Amongst the chaos is a person wearing a hazmat suit. Not unlike the DIA mural, the period of chaos appears to be linked with some kind of biological threat
Flash forward to right now.
This is all we see in the news:
People in hazmat suits are all over the news right now
The Movie 2012
Disaster movies attract audiences with big visual effects … to then indoctrinate them with messages.
Released in 2009, the movie 2012 depicted the end of the world as predicted by the Mayans or whatever.
Beyond the specular scenes of famous monuments being destroyed, the movie conveyed one single message: Only the elite would survive a period of chaos.
The slogan of the movie: “We were warned”. The image on the poster: The Brazilian monument “Christ the Redeemer” monument falling down: Symbolic
Indeed, in the movie, the elite knew that a cataclysm was coming years in advance and they hid it from the masses.
They used that time to prepare for a new era while the rest of the world population was left to die.
In the movie, the elite mandates China to build massive ships that would keep the “chosen ones” safe as the world gets wiped out.
The price of a ticket to enter these ships: 1 billion Euros per person.
The Queen of England boards the ship in China
In the end, the chosen ones survived the cataclysm while the rest of the world died.
Their ships landed in Africa and the elite started a new civilization in place they’ve called Cape Hope. Once again, we’re seeing echoes of this today.
While 2012 is not about a deadly virus, it symbolically depicts the elite’s core philosophy: Order Out of Chaos.
The Economist Magazine
For years, The Economist has been creeping out people for years with strange, enigmatic magazine covers that appear to make grim predictions.
While some might say “who cares”, there’s a reason why this magazine should be taken seriously: The Economist is directly linked to the world elite - those who make these predictions a reality.
“I wouldn’t normally dedicate an entire article analyzing the cover of a publication, but this isn’t any publication. It is The Economist and it is directly related to the world elite.
It is partly owned by the Rothschild banking family of England and its editor-in-chief, John Micklethwait, attended several times to the Bilderberg Conference – the secretive meeting where the world’s most powerful figures from the world of politics, finance business and media discuss global policies.
The outcome of those meetings is totally secret. It is therefore safe to say that the people at The Economist know things that most people don’t."
With that being said, here’s The Economist cover titled “The World in 2019”:
I won’t analyze everything here (read my full article about it here), but here are some details that relevant in today’s context.
The Four Horsemen of the Apocalypse. One of them is wearing a mask
The Book of Revelation describes the Horseman as harbingers of the Last Judgement.
The White Horse is said to symbolize Conquest, Pestilence and the coming of the Anti-Christ; The Red Horse represents War; the Black Horse is associated with Famine, and the Pale Horse brings Death.
In today’s context, one could say that the current crisis simultaneously brought some forms of conquest, pestilence, famine, and death.
Here’s another weird element found on the cover.
At the bottom left of the cover is a pangolin
Although there are several theories floating around regarding the origins of the virus, there is one that keeps popping up in mass media: It was transmitted to humans by a pangolin.
Not everyone is coming to the future
Not everyone is learning from the past
Not everyone can come into the future
Not everyone that’s here is gonna last
Then, Madonna blows a wind of death on the masked people and everybody dies. Also, in the background, the Statue of Liberty is broken. Today, our liberties are broken as well
Fast-forward to today, Madonna is saying weird things about the virus. In a recent video posted on her social media account, Madonna said this about the pandemic:
“It’s the great equalizer, and what’s terrible about it is what’s great about it. What’s terrible about it is it’s made us all equal in many ways - and what’s wonderful about it is it’s made us all equal in many ways.”
I personally wouldn’t use the word “wonderful” anywhere near this virus.
But I’m not an elite-connected psychopath. Speaking of which, Madonna also partnered up with those who want to turn this crisis into an Orwellian nightmare.
Although this article looked at items that are widely different, they have a few points in common.
First, they’re were funded and commissioned by the elite.
Second, they are all part of popular culture, which defines and “colors” our society.
Third, they all tell a similar story: The “welcoming” of a major crisis to usher in a New World Order.
One could ask: “Why are these messages even there? Wouldn’t they want to keep their plans secret?”
No. The plans need to be hidden in plain sight, for several reasons.
First, the concept of predictive programming tells us that, once the masses are exposed to a shocking idea, they are less shocked and more accepting when it actually happens.
Second, the elite believes in karmic laws. If the masses are properly warned and if they willingly accept what is happening, the elite is relieved from karmic “revenge”.
Finally, symbols rule the world. Throughout history, the symbolism of those in power was always plastered all over society.
Those who rule the world right now want a New World Order. But, before this can happen, there needs to be chaos.
So You Just Woke Up, Now What? January 7 2025 | From: GreatAwakeningReport / Various
People on Earth are waking up at an exponential rate and it is beautiful. Finally, we are seeing The Truth.
Darkness and deception are coming to an end. However, before we collectively envision a new world, we must process our individual responses to this shifting reality.
The first thing you will probably want to do is wake up as many people as possible. This feels like the most caring thing to do because you want the people you love most to become conscious but prepare to meet ridicule, resistance and / or possibly lose a few people.
Until you have fully integrated what you have just learned it is likely that your approach will be urgent and overwhelming.
Imagine trying to shake someone awake from a deep sleep.
They are never going to appreciate being yanked from the comfort of their slumber. You will probably be faced with their frustration and anger as they pull the duvet firmly over their heads and defiantly go back to bed.
They will only hear you when you can deliver your message with patience, compassion and the awareness that some people will never wake up.
These traits arise after you have worked through healing yourself.
Allow yourself to feel everything. Do not endeavour to suppress or ignore any of it. This is how you heal.
It is not easy, pretty or linear but it will all pass and you will be stronger for it.
Below are some of the emotions you may feel, and accompanying thoughts you may have. This list is by no means conclusive, it is a guide for you.
Your unique perspective and journey are valid. There is no real order or time frame. You may find it useful to document how you are feeling. Journaling, recording audio or video are all excellent ways to get thoughts out of your head.
Go for walks, dance, scream, cry, meditate. Nothing is wrong or bad, we are having a human experience and emotions are part of that.
Just know you are working through at your own pace.
Anger. They lied to me!
Potentially life-saving information was deliberately withheld from me.
How was this allowed to happen? How dare they treat me/us this way!
Some has to pay!
Shame. How could I be so stupid?
I bought into that public figure/organisation.
My friend/relative was trying to educate me but I laughed in their face and called them crazy. Will they speak to me ever again?
Grief. I miss my old life when I didn’t know.
I have lost everything.
Why?
Fear. Can I ever trust again?
How deep do the lies go?
I am so scared. I don’t feel safe.
The union, in 2000 BC, between Babylonian religions, Babylonian banking and Babylonian law has put the world into serfdom.
Shortly before the birth of Jesus Christ also named Yeshua Messiah; The Romans set-up a “Puppet Regime” in Israel, so-as-to more effectively mask the harsh reality that the Israelites were a Conquered Folk.
And, because “Law” was frequently administered by a “Priesthood” in these ancient cultures, a group of priests known as “Pharisees” among them joint with the Romans to Deceive, Confuse, Plunder, and Enslave the common Israelite People.
Jesus Christ, who stormed the Temple with righteous anger, overturning the money changers’ tables and whipping them severely about the head and shoulders to remove them out of the Temple, stating; “make not my Father’s house a house of merchandise.”
As reaction these same money changers called for His death days later. Because, Jesus was a threat to their oppressive and tyrannical financial system.
Subsequently, the two special-interest-groups, the Romans and the Pharisees, united to have Jesus Christ nailed to the Cross a few days later, in 30 AC.
The fact, that never has been recorded that the religion of the Pharisees as become extinct, indicates that they and their slavery practices continue on to exist to this very day.
In their own literature, the modern practitioners of “Rabbinical Judaism” admit quietly that they are decedents from those ancient Pharisees. Jesus Christ and his followers were Crucified for speaking out boldly against these Evils of the Romans and their False-Israelite Pharisee Puppets.
The Romans were already followers of those same Babylonian Slave-Trading Codes. This indicates that the connection between the Roman Slave-Traders and the Pharisees was more than a mere coincidence.
This indicates that at some point in ancient history; the Roman Slave-Traders and the Phariseers of Israel were of Common Cultural Ancestry.
This shows that the modern “magic” of creating money out of nothing had its roots in the ancient city of Babylon. More exactly, some 600 years before the birth of Jesus Christ.
Practitioners of the craft were known historically as “money changers”, to be more specific, “change your money from your hand into mine.”
Already about 1000 BC were money changers active as they even before that date had discovered that control over a fraudulent money supply not only gave them control over the assets of the people, but in a very real way, control over the government of the people.
Around 50 B.C. Julius Caesar took control of the monetary system of the kingdom by minting coins to be used in daily commerce. With a plentiful supply of real money, the kingdom prospered, business flourished and everyone benefited.
Everyone except the money changers, whose livelihood was turned upside down as their control over the nation’s finance was stripped away from them.
Their power would not lie long dormant however. They set about scheming to retake control, and Caesar was assassinated shortly thereafter.
It didn’t take long before corruption returned, taxes increased and the money supply was reduced by 90%, causing businesses to fail, people lost their homes and lands, and poverty became the norm. Sounds familiar?
The reign of King Henry I 1100 – 1135, brings a new form of money that stripped the money changers of their sinful power over people and nations that at time had lasted for over 700 years.
He created a currency called a tally stick. It was a stick of polished wood with notches cut along one side, the number of which indicated the denomination of the amount of money represented by the stick.
The stick called ‘Tally’ was split lengthwise with each half bearing identical notches. One half went into circulation; the other half was kept by the king. It made counterfeiting impossible.
The system was a huge success, as the King’s taxes were to be paid by , which increased circulation and assured its acceptance as a legitimate form of money.
Most important, it kept the money changers from gaining control of the money supply. Which didn’t sit well with them for a very long time. Meanwhile for the people, the world was a much happier place. After the King died, the money changers returned.
In 1791, Alexander Hamilton, the secretary of the treasury had created the first central bank, under the name the First Bank of the United States, although there were only four other bank in the whole country at that time.
Its charter expired in 1811. In 1816 they tried again setting up the Second Bank of the United States, which charter expired in 1836 and was not renewed by Andrew Jackson, the 7th president 1829 to 1837 of the United States, who once again removed the money changers’ central bank system.
After he died in 1845, the criminal money changers returned. They created the banking crisis of 1907, to undertake their third attack to obtain control over the money system.
In 1913 by bribing the Woodrow Wilson Government they re-established their power under the flag of the Federal Reserve Bank, that neither Federal nor a Bank is.
In 2012, after the second term election of Barack Obama, three patriots formed a secret group of ten very rich, intelligent and powerful billionaires. They were worried about losing America to foreign regimes through fascist forces.
That is why they formed a secret alliance, loyal to the flag and constitution of America. They were all personally acquainted with members of the Deep State and obtained first-hand knowledge on their plans. Supported by their powerful, secret alliance, they reached out to trusted associates, motivated by the same reason as to why the Deep State had always handpicked their Presidents; the assurance of a smooth implementation of their plans.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
Henceforth, they decided to beat the Deep State at their own game, without letting them know they were in the same match as a competitor.
Their first step was to select the person they thought would be most suitable to fulfil the job of POTUS.
They listed these criteria for their candidate; must be charismatic, rich, powerful, self-made, motivated to put America first, proud, thick-skinned, a constitutionalist, outspoken, a non-politician but rather, entrepreneurial and must believe in the high probability attaining success in this position.
They selected seven qualified candidates. One of them was Donald Trump. If he would turn down their request, there would quite likely have been an overt coup in an attempt to remove the cabal, as a fallback fail-safe plan.
President Donald Trump was read-in and a key part of his rolw is to expose the Deep State cabal at every turn; the “dark” criminal people who are doing everything possible to keep humanity from waking up.
The cabal are desperate and they are pulling out all the stops to prevent the change into a better world for all of us.
The Deep State hate humanity because they fear humanity as they know what humanity’s true capabilities are and that’s why they’ve gone all out to destroy the populace through Big Pharma’s poisoning pills; so-called “Health care”; applying obstructive methods to healing; toxic fluoridated water; processed foods with poisoning chemicals; soft drinks with dangerous sugars and sweeteners; chemtrails destroying the environment; an education system full of lies, to name just a few facts.
The Deep State want bribed followers, not independent leaders.
Thanks to the well-organised Q-structure, President Trump and the Patriots are becoming successful and meanwhile have manoeuvred the Deep State in the defence.
The printing of trillions of money units, with negative interest rates, unlimited quantitative easing QE –other form of money printing – is committed to buying trillions in Treasury Bonds and mortgage backed securities, municipal bond, junk bond, etc. is doubtless the death warrant for the central bank economy.
This is the transition into the people’s economy on which Trump Team is working since being in office.
The outbreak of the China-Virus is a Deep State Cabal initiated operation to reducing the world population according Agenda 2030. Is cleverly used by the Trump Team to remove worldwide the Deep State from their illegally obtained money changing power.
President Trump and the patriots knew already far in advance, actually from its inception, about this evil operation and has turned this crisis in an opportunity to start worldwide the implementation of GESARA, and ending the Rothschild Central Bank system.
Money Made on the Backs of the Populace
Since the brutal murder of President Kennedy the Deep State became the predominant structure of power over every government.
The money changers had long ago discovered that control over a fraudulent money supply not only gave them control over the assets of the people, but in a very real way, control over the government of the people.
They learned to make money on the backs of the people with the sanction of their own government: They extended their control by applying the sequence of easy money / tight money cycles.
By making money easy to borrow, the amount of money in circulation is increased. When the money changers were satisfied that enough suckers had taken the bait, they sprung the trap.
Money is “created” in a debt-based monetary system. Money only comes into being when credit is established. You walk into a bank, borrow $250,000 for a new house; a mark is made on the bank’s ledger, and voila! $250,000 is instantly made, as it didn’t exist before.
Simply by virtue of the fact you signed your name on a piece of paper promising to pay back that sum of money, while the bank receives as security for this fake loan, your real asset, your house, that they will confiscate the moment you are caught in their trap.
Boom and Bust Cycles Are Made to Happen
Suddenly money supply is tightened. Then they make loans difficult or impossible to get, which results in a decrease of the amount of money in circulation.
With the result, that a percentage of the people will not be able to repay their loans whereas being unable to make new loans, they go bankrupt.
These home owners now are forced to transfer their assets to the lenders for peanuts on the loan. While they most likely remain in debt for the rest of their life.
This trick is frequently applied to suck the financial life blood out of the people and keep these as their debt slaves in line.
Their basic strategies are: destabilising nations; ruin their economies; send millions of manufacturing jobs off to places where virtual slave labour does the work, like in China; adding insult to grievance, export the cheap products of those slave-factories back to the nations who lost the jobs, to be sold to consumers without money on cheap credit, buying most of these things they really don’t need in the first place, to further undercut domestic manufacturers, forcing them to close their doors and firing still more employees, to deliberately increase unemployment figures and lowering job quality.
Then the send in the World Bank or the IMF, to solve the economic chaos by bringing order, lending money and talking away the real assets of the country a security for the emitted loans, based on fake money.
Question; What kind of problems do they solve? Of course The New World Order.
That eventually, creates one world, without national borders, under one management system, with a planned global economy, to restore stability, deceptively promised ‘for the good of all’, and lasting for ever, after in the process 90% of the world population has been culled.
This process is in sophisticated words called “boom and bust”, “the business cycle”, “inflation”, “recession”, “depression” and it keeps you and me confused and blind to their dark magic.
The language has changed, but the fraud is the same as it always has been. And the world is indeed a much less happy place as time goes forward.
There is no reason for anyone to ever suffer from any deficiency. There is no reason for anyone to ever be charged for taxation. The banks use every trick in their books to hold assets that depositors have left with them in good faith – under false claims of ‘abandonment’.
Do not worry; We, the people, have the power to restore our own national government, reclaim our political status from our birth right, and restore our land jurisdiction.
Our countries – without legal personality of their own – are still standing and operating and can be restored to their original legal status by requiring that all property owed by the nations and people be returned.
The clock is ticking. Billions of people worldwide must wake up and recover their stolen belongings and identity.
The corrupt politicians, the church leaders, the military leaders, the banks – all of them must publicly suffer their shame for what has happened all over the world for centuries.
Be vigilant and determined with the exposure of these corrupt people who take every opportunity to undermine their destruction, do not be fooled by these rats.
Be pleased to know that President Trump and his patriots are working with the Alliance and the help of Q and Anons, supported by many volunteer workers, to end our debt slavery and drain the swamp.
Where one goes, we go all! Be convinced that we humans will win the fight against the Deep State.
When everything is given back to the populace, and people themselves are in charge, planet Earth becomes as our Lord originally had envisioned for us.
We humans now have an obligation to take the necessary measures to ensure that all generations to come know what we have been through as debt slaves, so that no one or group will ever stand up again and take control of our money, as has been the case many times in the past. That is clearly explained in this essay.
Make sure, that everyone who takes his/her responsibility seriously, is informed in detail about the sheer scale and depth of the committed fraud, injustice, murder and treason.
All future generations and their children must be informed so similar evils do not happen to them again. Only continued civil vigilance can prevent the return of money changers.
Why So Many “Experts” Make Such Disastrous Errors January 5 2025 | From: MelaniePhillips / Various If you want to discover why so many of our experts are getting things so terribly wrong, Giles Fraser’s interview on Unherd’s “Confessions” with the former Bank of England governor, Lord King, is essential listening.
King asks what it means to be rational in an age of deep uncertainty. Many experts, he says, have come to believe that mathematical calculations and computer modelling provide us with an authoritative representation of reality.
This is hopelessly wrong because such calculations can never encompass the uncertainties that help form human behaviour. Yet these experts have come to believe that everything can be thus quantified and explained.
So anything that can’t be quantified is therefore useless; and anyone who challenges the quantification model is somehow suspect and is disregarded or even disrespected.
The belief that we can quantify everything and suppress whatever we don’t understand, says King, is part of the belief that humans can control everything.
But these experts don’t factor in any understanding of how human beings behave – which may be very different from what such mathematical calculations and computers are telling them.
Human beings, says King, are good at dealing with ambiguity, mysteries and complexity.
Behavioural economics, however, and its fashionable offshoot “nudge theory” (which has its own unit in Whitehall!) is based on the certainty that human beings will always maximise and optimise their opportunities – and if they don’t behave in this way, well, that must be explained by “bias”, more than 100 types of which economists now feed into their calculations.
But it’s the economists’ models that are themselves biased – against reality. As King says, they assume individuals operate only as individuals. In fact, people usually take decisions by talking to others. We tend to act collectively.
These experts make reductive assumptions in a world which is much more complicated than can be explained away by this balance-sheet mentality. As an example, King cites the Brexit debate which partisans on both sides reduced to a “bogus” row about numbers.
Remainers claimed to know exactly how much the public would lose by leaving the EU; Brexiteers claimed to know exactly how much would be available to spend on the NHS.
In fact, says King, the NHS figure omitted the amount of spending on other projects which would be cut back; and, as many said, Remainers couldn’t possibly know how much worse off people would be.
What was missed altogether by this argument over numbers, he says, was that the Brexit issue was actually a debate about values, about sovereignty and how the EU was developing.
King says he’s been on a personal intellectual journey. He was first introduced to computer modelling of the economy when he was an undergraduate at Cambridge.
Now he realises you can’t solve a problem by numbers. He came to understand that inflation couldn’t easily be measured. What we think will happen to the economy might not be what actually happens.
Economics, he says, used to be defined by problems; now it’s defined by techniques and mathematical methods, which means every problem has to be fitted into the mathematical model.
So if this model can’t explain what’s going on in the world, it’s assumed there must be something wrong with the world.
King is speaking principally about economics.
What he says, however, is also applicable to other issues where so many scientific experts have got things so terribly wrong - such as the devastating errors made by some of them over coronavirus, not to mention the global madness over climate change (to which he refers in passing as characterised by “quite a lot of uncertainty”).
Rather than look at what was undeniably true about Covid-19 – that the combination of its exponential rate of infectivity and serious or fatal effects in a minority of cases meant any health care system would quickly become overwhelmed - mindlessly mathematical modellers fed inadequate abstract information into their computers and got disastrously false results.
One of the clearest and most dramatic examples was the study by Professor Tom Pike of Imperial college, London who predicted that at the height of the Covid-19 outbreak Britain would have 260 deaths a day.
Just a few days later, Britain’s daily virus death rate reached 260 and Pike was forced to eat his words and admit he had seriously underestimated the problem.
He had based his false calculation on the assumption that the outbreak in Britain would follow a similar trajectory to what had been seen in Wuhan, China.
Among many aspects of reality that this failed to take into consideration was surely that the Chinese statistics are almost certainly a gross under-estimate.
Pike’s critics got it right.
"Alan McNally, from the University of Birmingham, said that it showed the perils of looking at numbers in isolation, without considering what we know of the virus. ‘Modelling and projections are fantastic tools but really all we need to do is look at the hard numbers we are seeing in other countries just a few weeks ahead of us. We properly introduced social distancing last week,’ he said.
‘Therefore fatalities will continue to double every three days for another two weeks at least given the lag time between infection and death.’
“Jonathan Ball, professor of virology at the University of Nottingham, added: ‘Models are based on major assumptions and often these assumptions are wrong.
Until we do on-the-ground research - go out into the community and test exactly how many people have been infected with this virus - we will have no idea of the rate of severe disease or what proportion of infected people die.’”
Exactly.
And the same point can be made about the apocalyptic predictions of global catastrophe through “climate change”, previously known as anthropogenic global warming (AGW).
Right from the start, the problem has been that these predictions have been based on computer modelling.
This is wholly inadequate to the task, since the climate is one of the most complex, non-linear and chaotic systems in existence. No computer model can adequately deal with this.
The information fed into these models is therefore by definition inadequate – which means that what comes out the other end is next to worthless.
And that’s before you factor in the biases and outright frauds of some of the AGW ideologues who occupy scientific positions – and all of whom who, just as Lord King says, assume that their computer models (and indeed, their whole framework of assumptions) constitute unchallengeable reality.
So anyone who dares point out the factual evidence that contradicts the model is a “denier” who must be suppressed.
Experts are often very quick to claim that any critic who doesn’t belong to their particular discipline can be discounted as ignorant.
Evidence, reality and reason, however, defy the attempted constraints of any discipline.
The key point, articulated by Lord King about economics but with far wider application, is that both the social and physical sciences are now dominated by people who have redefined evidence, reality and reason into nothing less than their formulaic antithesis.
New Zealand Is Regarded Internationally As A Great Place To User-Test, What Does This Mean For Kiwis? January 4 2025 | From: Stuff / Various
For years New Zealand has been utilised by app developers, social media companies and software developers to test new technologies, but the risks and benefits for Kiwi consumers and businesses remain unclear. Ged Cann reports.
That's the mantra overseas, where New Zealand's advantages as a testing ground have been common knowledge in the international tech industry for decades, according to one world-wide developer.
AirG is a Canadian App and Social media company with more than $100 million in annual revenue, operating in nearly 40 countries.
Founder and managing director Frederick Ghahramani said he was first awakened to the potential of New Zealand in 1998.
"It was a CEO of some company giving a speech and he randomly blurted it out: 'If you every want to test something the easiest place to do it is New Zealand'," he said.
Companies that have user-tested here include Facebook, which trialled a Snapchat competitor and their new Marketplace function; Microsoft tested website-creator app Sway; and Dominoes Pizza, which teamed up with drone business Flirty to bring Kiwis the first aerial-delivered pizza.
As far back as the 1980s Kiwis were user-testing a revolutionary method of payment – EFTPOS.
New Zealand was also among the first to receive PokemonGo.
The idea stuck with Ghahramani, and when the time came to launch his first mobile game, Atomic Dove, in 2001 there was only one place to user-test.
In 2016 airG was back to launch Just10, a Facebook-alternative which guaranteed information security and basic encryption.
There was an added reason Ghahramani decided to test this particular product in New Zealand – Kiwis were among the most privacy conscious customers in the world.
A Privacy Commission Report in 2014 showed 40 per cent were very concerned about individual privacy online.
Kiwis' awareness of privacy was linked, in Ghahramani's mind, to their use as guinea pigs.
"It seems everyone has been burned in New Zealand," he said.
But Victoria University head of school for information management Benoit Aubert said Kiwis faced no greater threat as testers than regular customers.
"People don't even read the disclosure that companies provide so in that sense it is risky but no more risky than accepting those that are already out there," he said.
"Yes you can test something, but if it's wrong – who wants to be the first to test the Samsung 7? Nobody."
Mr Aubert said New Zealand's recent placement at the top of the World Bank's 2017 Doing Business Report, which examines regulations that enhance or constrain business activity, reinforced the appeal.
"You want places where population is educated, receptive to technology, well connected, so we fit the parameters of different countries. Then the beauty is that it's a small market," he said.
This kept costs down, Aubert said, and meant if a new service fell flat it did not damage the company's reputation in a significant way.
There were advantages as well, according to Ghahramani, chief among which was bringing Kiwi developers into contact with large foreign companies as they seek local partners.
"Participating in the digital economy is half the battle. Getting a piece of the value chain, it's always better to be first and be early," Ghahramani said.
On the flip-side Mr Ghahramani said it meant local companies were competing with international players for the same pocket share.
"Everyone looks at Kiwi consumers as more affluent, more successful, more educated on average than American consumers, so obviously we are there to get your time, your money, your attention,"he said.
LinQ is a small Wellington-based start-up focused on optimising information handling.
Chief technology officer David Swann said international presence in the technology market was a double-edged sword.
"The fact that we have the big boys in town is sucking up the talent. Right now the pace of talent coming into the market isn't keeping up with demand. For a start-up that's a nightmare."
On the other hand LinQ chief executive Stew Darling said international presence helped home-grown talent think broader and prepared start-ups for the challenges of a global market.
"If you want be global from birth you have to think global from birth," he said.
Facebook, Google, Apple and Microsoft all declined to comment for this article.
Being English speaking, a common law market, and having a clear taxation system are also key advantages airG founder Ghahramani identifies.
"It might as well be a province or Canada or a county of the UK," he said.
"To incorporate in New Zealand is very low cost, withholding taxes are very transparent and straightforward."
The ability to set up and close down companies quickly is also important in an industry that moves fast and takes no prisoners.
"We build and destroy things in a week or three weeks. We want to try it, if it doesn't work - just shut it down and walk away with no consequences," he said.
Industry knowledge puts the average Kiwi customer's astuteness in the top 20 percent of the USA, according to Ghahramani.
"You get a data set of people who are internet aware, internet savvy, they know what they want. That's exactly what you want from a focus group, you don't want people who are the great unknowing masses."
To get the kind of feedback collected for Just10 in the USA Ghahramani said you have to pay professional testers anywhere between $15-100 per person.
The Truth About MMS (Chlorine Dioxide) That They Don’t Want You To Know January 3 2025 | From: JordanSather / Various
For the past several weeks the fake news media has been in an all out rampage against a chemical compound called chlorine dioxide (ClO2) and against me because I discuss the truth about it.
Promoters of this narrative inaccurately refer to ClO2 as an “industrial bleach” and label me as a YouTube conspiracy theorist who “promotes drinking bleach to cure everything.”
Nope. Not. At. All.
That’s why we call them the fake news after all, right? And if you think the news is fake, imagine how fake their science is! Media attacks against this chemical compound and those who talk about it are nothing new.
This article will discuss what chlorine dioxide actually is, some of my personal experiences with it, and the misrepresentation that our media and Pharma owned medical “authorities” give us on the subject.
So, What is This Stuff? Is it Actually Bleach?
Let's start with basic semantics. By designating something that has the ability to decolorize and sanitize as a 'bleach' is confusing a process with a product.
A verb instead of a noun. For example, lemons can bleach, the sun bleaches, but we don’t necessary label those as 'bleach'.
And just like lemons and the sun, ClO2 can also decolorize and sanitize, and is used industrially to do so, but this doesn't make it harmful for humans in every capacity.
“Clorox bleach itself is sodium hypochlorite, which of course, is not chlorine dioxide, and has far different mechanisms of action.”
Whenever a media or science talking head states that ClO2 is “essentially bleach,” either they didn’t pass high school chemistry or they’re knowingly misguiding you - trying to confuse people into thinking it’s the same as the commercial Clorox tucked away in our laundry cabinets.
Clorox bleach itself is sodium hypochlorite, which of course, is not chlorine dioxide, and has far different mechanisms of action. And what's funny is that Chlorine dioxide is a gas, so when the media says "drink bleach" they're just further revealing their ignorance.
So as you can see, there's a total misrepresentation of what ClO2 actually is - a gaseous compound that works to disinfect pathogens very effectively through oxidation.
Clorox bleach itself is sodium hypochlorite, which of course, is not chlorine dioxide, and has far different mechanisms of action.
Chlorine Dioxide Kills Harmful Bacteria?
Yes. ClO2 kills bacteria, viruses, cancer cells - it will selectively target anaerobic pathogens and kill them through oxidation, an electrical reaction where one chemical steals the electrons of another.
Some in the health community may be familiar with the oxidative capacity of food grade hydrogen peroxide and ozone therapy, chlorine dioxide oxidizes similarly. When a ClO2 molecule comes into contact with a virus or bacteria cell, it rips electrons from the cell and destroys it.
Because of its sterilization ability and relative cheapness, this compound is commonly used in a variety of industries such as hospitals and restaurants. The Environmental Protection Agency has it registered for these purposes.
However, ClO2 isn't just used as an industrial cleaner, a stabilized version is commonly used by hikers and campers to kill waterborne pathogens for clean drinking water.
These potable water drops and tablets have chlorine dioxide listed as the main ingredient and can be easily purchased at any camping supply store such as REI or online shopping websites like Amazon.
So, if chlorine dioxide is not a "toxic bleach," why are people like myself being ridiculed by mainstream media for discussing it? And why is there no mention of suppliers like REI and Amazon?
Two reasons - one is simply shoddy and the other is downright shameful. Shoddy journalism is to blame when only the biased FDA is used as a resource.
For example, the FDA puts out warning letters about ClO2, calling it a deadly bleach without explanation, citing zero science or research about the compound.
Yet, the military and the EPA use ClO2 at high dosages to tackle extreme contaminants like Anthrax and Ebola, and the USDA and even the FDA itself have chlorine dioxide registered to decontaminate with.
And it goes to note that while high dosages of most decontaminates are not safe to be around, low doses (like what hikers use for potable water and those drinking it internally to kill pathogens) can be very safe.
Anything can harm or help depending on how you use it. Conscious usage is key. And the shameful part of this issue? The medical establishment is trying to suppress the sharing of any potential health benefits of ClO2 because it is inexpensive and effective.
What Does All This Have to do With MMS?
Some folks who have used and taught about chlorine dioxide for health supporting purposes call it the “master mineral solution" and “miracle mineral supplement” or MMS for short.
I prefer to call it what it is - chlorine dioxide, because it removes any preconceived notions. It’s not magically “miraculous,” it’s just reality! The most notable proponents of MMS are Daniel Smith of Project Green Life and Jim Humble, who has been heavily denigrated by Big Pharma.
In 2015, Smith was sentenced to 51 months in federal prison for (basically) teaching too many people about MMS. You can find/support him at standbydaniel.com.
And Humble is attacked routinely by the press even though, as his name suggests, he's a very humble man. His resources are incredibly helpful in understanding chlorine dioxide protocols and can found on his website JimHumble.co. A helpful resource for information on ClO2 is an “MMSWiki” page that highlights Humble’s research in a Wikipedia style format. And on a side note, Wikileaks released an email regarding MMS/chlorine dioxide in their 2012 Global Intelligence Files data dump.
It consisted of public disclosure for a number of internal emails between the employees and clients of Stratfor, a geopolitical intelligence company. For some reason, a private company that works with the intelligence community on information analysis, Stratfor, had collected an email on MMS.
I find that intriguing. You can read that email here. And before YouTube censors any of them, check out these interviews with European professional Andreas Kalcker. They are top notch!
How is MMS Information Being Suppressed?
Due to the viral nature of social media and with so many people waking up, information about MMS has become widespread. The FDA has attempted to counter with two press releases.
The first in 2010 was then rereleased in 2019, entitled: “FDA warns consumers about the dangerous and potentially life threatening side effects of Miracle Mineral Solution."
This from the FDA - a financially motivated agency that racks up millions in user fees per year (as part of their Prescription Drug User Fee Act), has approved deadly drugs like opioid painkillers, and only approved 'medical marijuana' after a man-made pharmaceutical version was created.
In April of 2017, I released a short 4 minute video about MMS on my Destroying the Illusion YouTube channel and in just over a year it had amassed 250,000 views.
It was ranked #1 on YouTube’s search results for "MMS." Consequently, YouTube started censoring my video from searches and in May of 2019, they completely removed it and added a strike to my channel.
This was followed by a targeted media blitz against MMS led by Business Insider and other media outlets during the summer of 2019, culminating in the FDA warning letter.
See how they operate? Censor the truth beforehand, then publish smears and lies afterward so no one can search for any real information.
Then, once they print that it’s a dangerous-deadly bleach and claim people were harmed, the FDA is “forced” to take action. Information warfare.
So How Does Someone Find and Use It?
I personally don't sell it, but there are still some active vendors as well as a few different ways to make your own ClO2 gas. An easy way to make it is by combining sodium chlorite and citric acid solution in a small 1:1 ratio of drops in a clean glass and allow 30-60 seconds to activate.
That’s pretty much it. When mixing the drops, it’s commonly referred to as 1 “drop of MMS/chlorine dioxide” when 1 drop of sodium chlorite is added to 1 drop of citric acid. 1+1=1 drop MMS.
Easily dispensable bottles of sodium chlorite and citric acid can be purchased online at kvlab.com. Now, let’s discuss when to take these drops and how many.
One of the more well known (but intensive) regimens is Humble’s Protocol 1000, whereby one would take 3 drops of MMS (3+3) every hour for 8-12 hours a day.
With a protocol like this where a small amount of ClO2 is getting into the blood for a prolonged period of time, it allows the compound to do more work on the pathogens in the body.
If it were only taken twice a day, even in higher amounts, it still wouldn’t be in the body as long. I have never done this protocol myself and I rarely use MMS in general these days, but I have the bottles and the knowledge on hand, just in case.
What I have done in the past are “maintenance doses” of 5-10 drops of MMS once or twice a day. I’ve also used chlorine dioxide gas to help clear and cleanse my sinuses and respiratory tract by gently inhaling, holding, and exhaling for a few repetitions.
An important warning about using ClO2 is the “Herxheimer Effect”, named after the doctor who first studied it. Essentially, if the body detoxifies too fast, it can cause nausea, stomach distress, or diarrhea. As such, it's important to start slow when detoxing the body.
How Did I Discover all This?
In 2011, I became acquainted with an individual who had medical experience but was fed up with the establishment medical system. He decided to continue helping people through natural modalities.
After he taught myself and some of my colleagues about MMS, we spent a few years experimenting with it—both cleaning and using it internally.
One of my favorite experiences with MMS was when I met a woman with stage 4 ovarian cancer. She refused chemotherapy and successfully healed herself with a modified regimen of MMS and the Gerson Therapy.
Conclusion
Be aware that many organizations have special interests and will cite their own sources to promote a particular narrative.
You can believe what the fake news and fake science would have you believe, or you can research for yourself and put their narratives to the test. I’ve always found there to be no better teacher than personal experience.
No source can surpass the knowledge you’ve gained from witnessing something first hand. The more knowledge you have from your research and experiences, the more you will know the truth of what’s really going on in the world, and how to manage any circumstances that may arise.
I don't refer to anything as a "cure," for truly there are no cure-alls. I don’t believe in banking on one compound or pill to be our savior, which is why I don’t refer to chlorine dioxide as “magic.”
Instead, I believe that we should be looking holistically at ourselves to figure out how we can practice prevention or to keep a situation from progressing.
There are many powerful substances that are cheap, safe, natural, and readily available that can be used as part of this holistic regimen. It is only through our own ignorance that we don't know how to use them, let alone realize they exist.
We must undo the mass programming. Knowledge is power.
Comment: If you are interested in ordering MMS in New Zealand, pleaseemail usand further details will be provided.
Why Confronting Israel Is Important: The Jewish State Is No Friend January 2 2025 | From: Unz / OccupationMovie / Various
I am often asked why I have this “thing” about Israel, with friends suggesting that I would be much more respected as a pundit if I were to instead concentrate on national security and political corruption. [Update to follow.]
The problem with that formulation is that the so-called “special relationship” with Israel is itself the result of terrible national security and foreign policy choices that is sustained by pervasive political and media corruption, so any honest attempt to examine the one inevitably leads to the other.
Most talking heads in the media avoid that dilemma by choosing to completely ignore the dark side of Israel.
Israel - not Russia - is the one foreign country that can interfere with impunity with the political processes in the United States yet it is immune from criticism.
It is also the single most significant threat to genuine national security as it and its powerful domestic lobby have been major advocates for the continuation of America’s interventionist warfare state.
The decision to go to war on false pretenses against Iraq, largely promoted by a cabal of prominent American Jews in the Pentagon and in the media, killed 4,424 Americans as well as hundreds of thousands Iraqis and will wind up costing the American taxpayer $7 trillion dollars when all the bills are paid.
That same group of mostly Jewish neocons more-or-less is now agitating to go to war with Iran using a game plan for escalation prepared by Israel which will, if anything, prove even more catastrophic.
And I can go on from there. According to the FBI, Israel runs the most aggressive spying operations against the U.S. among ostensibly “friendly” nations, frequently stealing our military technology for resale by its own arms merchants.
Its notable successes in espionage have included the most devastating spy in U.S. history Jonathan Pollard, while it has also penetrated American communications systems and illegally obtained both the fuel and the triggers for its own secret nuclear weapons arsenal.
Israel cares little for American sovereignty. It’s prime ministers Ariel Sharon and Benjamin Netanyahu have both boasted how they control the United States. In 2001, Israel was running a massive secret spying operation directed against Arabs in the U.S.
Many in the intelligence and law enforcement communities suspect that it had considerable prior intelligence regarding the 9/11 plot but did not share it with Washington.
There was the spectacle of the “dancing Shlomos,” Israeli “movers” from a company in New Jersey who apparently had advanced knowledge of the terrorist attack and danced and celebrated as they watched the Twin Towers go down.
Jewish power, both in terms of money and of access to people and mechanisms that really matter, is what allows Israel to act with impunity, making the United States both poorer and more insecure.
A well-funded massive lobbying effort involving hundreds of groups and thousands of individuals in the U.S. has worked to the detriment of actual American interests, in part by creating a permanent annual gift of billions of dollars to Israel for no other reason but that it is Israel and can get anything it wants from a servile Congress and White House without any objection from a controlled media.
Israel has also obtained carte blanche political protection from the U.S. in fora like the United Nations, which is damaging to America’s reputation and its actual interests.
This protection now extends to the basing of U.S. troops in Israel to serve as a tripwire, guaranteeing that Washington will become involved if Israel is ever attacked or even if Israel itself starts a war.
The current U.S. Ambassador to the U.N. Nikki Haley is little more than a shill for Israel while America’s Ambassador in Israel David Friedman is an open supporter of Israel’s illegal settlements, which the U.S. opposes, who spends much of his time defending Israeli war crimes.
And here on the home front Israel is doing damage that might be viewed as even more grave in Senator Ben Cardin’s attempt to destroy First Amendment rights by making any criticism of Israel illegal.
The non-violent Israel Boycott movement (BDS) has already been sanctioned in many states, the result of intensive and successful lobbying by the Israeli government and its powerful friends.
So if there is a real enemy of the United States in terms of the actual damage being inflicted by a foreign power, it is Israel.
In the recent Russiagate investigations it was revealed that it was Israel, not Russia, that sought favors from Michael Flynn and the incoming Trump Administration yet Special Counsel Robert Mueller has evidently not chosen to go down that road with his investigations, which should surprise no one.
Noam Chomsky, iconic progressive intellectual, has finally come around on the issue of Israel and what it means. He has always argued somewhat incoherently that Israeli misbehavior has been due to its role as a tool of American imperialism and capitalism.
At age 89, he has finally figured out that it is actually all about what a parasitic Israel wants without any regard for its American host, observing on “Democracy Now” that:
“Take, say, the huge issue of interference in our pristine elections. Did the Russians interfere in our elections? An issue of overwhelming concern in the media. I mean, in most of the world, that’s almost a joke.
First of all, if you’re interested in foreign interference in our elections, whatever the Russians may have done barely counts or weighs in the balance as compared with what another state does, openly, brazenly and with enormous support.
Israeli intervention in U.S. elections vastly overwhelms anything the Russians may have done…
I mean, even to the point where the prime minister of Israel, Netanyahu, goes directly to Congress, without even informing the president, and speaks to Congress, with overwhelming applause, to try to undermine the president’s policies – what happened with Obama and Netanyahu in 2015.”
Politicians are terrified of crossing the Jewish lobby by saying anything negative about Israel, which means that Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu always gets a pass from the American government, even when he starves civilians and bombs hospitals and schools.
Netanyahu uses snipers to shoot dead scores of unarmed demonstrators and the snipers themselves joke about their kills without a peep from Washington, which styles itself the “leader of the free world.”
Just recently, Israel has declared itself a Jewish State with all that implies.
To be sure, Israeli Christians and Muslims were already subject to a battery of laws and regulations that empowered Jews at their expense but now it is the guiding principle that Israel will be run for the benefit of Jews and Jews alone. And it still likes to call itself a “democracy.”
A recent television program illustrates just how far the subjugation of America’s elected leaders by Israel has gone. British comedian Sacha Baron Cohen is featured on a new show called “Who is America?” in which he uses disguises and aliases to engage politicians and other luminaries in unscripted interviews that reveal just how ignorant or mendacious they actually are.
Several recent episodes remind one of a February 2013 Saturday Night Live skit on the impending confirmation of Chuck Hagel as Secretary of Defense. A Senator asks Hagel. “It is vital to Israel’s security for you to go on national television and perform oral sex on a donkey… Would you do THAT for Israel?”
A “yes” answer was, of course, expected from Hagel. The skit was never aired after objections from the usual suspects.
Baron Cohen, who confronted several GOP notables in the guise of Colonel Erran Morad, an Israeli security specialist, provided a number of clues that his interview was a sham but none of the victims were smart enough to pick up on them.
Cohen, wearing an Israeli military uniform and calling himself a colonel, clearly displayed sergeant’s stripes. Hinting that he might actually be a Mossad agent, Cohen also sported a T-shirt on which the Hebrew text was printed backwards and he claimed that the Israeli spy agency’s motto was “if you want to win, show some skin.”
Cohen set up Dick Cheney by complimenting him on being the “the king of terrorist killers” before commenting that “my neighbor in Tel Aviv is in jail for murder, or, as we call it, enhanced tickling.”
Morad went on to tell Cheney that he once waterboarded his wife to check for infidelity and then convinced the former Vice President to sign a “waterboarding kit” that “already had” the signatures of Benjamin Netanyahu, Ariel Sharon and Demi Lovato.
Another more spectacular sketch included a Georgia state senator Jason Spencer who was convinced to shout out the n-word as part of an alleged video being made to fight terrorism.
After Cohen told Spencer that it was necessary to incite fear in homophobic jihadists, Spencer dropped his pants and underwear, before backing up with his exposed rear end while shouting “USA!” and “America!”
Spencer also spoke with a phony Asian accent while simulating using a selfie-stick to secretly insert a camera phone inside a Muslim woman’s burqa.
In another series of encounters, Cohen as Morad managed to convince current and ex-Republican members of Congress - to include former Senate majority leader Trent Lott - to endorse a fictional Israeli program to arm grade school children for self-defense.
Cohen’s footage included a former Illinois congressman and talk radio host named Joe Walsh saying: “The intensive three-week ‘Kinderguardian’ course introduces specially selected children from 12 to 4 years old to pistols, rifles, semiautomatics and a rudimentary knowledge of mortars. In less than a month - less than a month - a first-grader can become a first grenade-er.”
Both controversial Alabama judge Roy Moore and Walsh were fooled into meeting Cohen to attend a non-existent pro-Israel conference to accept an award for “significant contributions to the state of Israel.”
Representative Dana Rohrabacher, meanwhile, also was interviewed and he commented that, “Maybe having young people trained and understand how to defend themselves and their school might actually make us safer here.”
And Congressman Joe Wilson observed that “A 3-year-old cannot defend itself from an assault rifle by throwing a ‘Hello Kitty’ pencil case at it.”
Cohen’s performance is instructive. A man shows up in Israeli uniform, claims to be a terrorism expert or even a Mossad agent, and he gains access to powerful Americans who are willing to do anything he says.
How Cohen did it says a lot about the reflexive and completely uncritical support for Israel that many American politicians - particularly Republicans - now embrace.
This, in a nutshell, is the damage that Israel and its Lobby have done to the United States.
Israel is always right for many policymakers and even palpably phony Jews like Colonel Morad are instantly perceived as smarter than the rest of us so we’d better do what they say.
That kind of thinking has brought us Iraq, Libya, Syria and the possibility of something far worse with Iran.
Israel routinely interferes in American politics and corrupts our institutions without any cost to itself and that is why I write and speak frequently regarding the danger to our Republic that it poses.
It is past time to change the essentially phony narrative. Israel is nothing but trouble. It has the right to defend itself and protect its interests but that should not involve the United States.
One can only hope that eventually a majority of my fellow American citizens will also figure things out.
It might take a while, but the ruthless way Israel openly operates with no concern for anyone but itself provides a measure of optimism that that day is surely coming.
Start Doing These Nine Things For Yourself Every Day To Immediately Improve Your Life + Alan Watts On How To Make Yourself A Better Person January 1 2025 | From: Medium / UpliftConnect You can ensure your own success over the priorities of others by doing these things for yourself every single day.
“If you don’t design your life, then someone else may just design it for you, and you may not like their idea of balance.” - Nigel Marsh
Successful people know the importance of taking care of themselves first, and don’t let their lives get so off track that they aren’t constantly improving. You owe it to yourself and to those around you to be the best version of yourself, and let’s be honest; we could all use a little improvement.
Here are a few super-simple habits and routines that are easy to implement but could dramatically improve your life this year:
1. Start Practicing a Gratitude Attitude
“Be thankful for what you have, you’ll end up having more. If you concentrate on what you do not have, you will never have enough” - Oprah Winfrey
Adopting a gratitude attitude is really about changing your perception of the world around you. If you find yourself believing that opportunities are far and few and unlikely to come across, this attitude adjustment may be just what you need.
Having sincere gratitude allows us see endless possibilities and realize that we are actually surrounded by opportunities. In order to achieve your dreams you need to believe in it; gratitude allows you to believe in your dreams and visions which eventually allow you to reach your full potential.
2. Take a Breather
During a hectic day, taking a break is usually the last thing on our minds. But even champion athletes need some bench time every once and a while, and so do you.
According to Sharon Salzberg, the author of Real Happiness at Work, “Without some breathing space in the face of constant demands, we won’t be creative, competent, or cheerful.”
The little time taken off from work is well worth the investment. For starters, put everything down for a few minutes and take a walk.
It might not seem like a big deal, but according to Shawn Anchor, author of The Happiness Advantage, taking the time to get outside can be very advantageous and by spending only twenty minutes outdoors you can enhance your mood, expand thinking space and improve your working memory.
I promise, whatever you were working on before your little breather will still be there when you get back - and you might even have your next big idea when you return.
3. Make Time For Meditation
If you haven’t already jumped on the Zen Bandwagon, it’s about time you stop making excuses and just start meditating.
Studies have shown that meditation can help to reduce depression and anxiety, increase memory and awareness, may grow your empathy for others and can boost your immune system.
How and when you meditate is completely up to you; do what works into your schedule and what you are most likely to be able to develop into a routine (remember, the easier the task, the easier it is to make it a habit).
The Conscious Life is a great resource for beginner meditators, answering questions like what to do if you find yourself falling asleep, explaining various breathing exercises and suggestions on time of day and surrounding environment.
The best part? You can actually do this while sitting at your desk in the office.
4. Design Your Life Around Happiness
Happiness can seem like such an abstract concept. After all, a Hallmark card or Dove chocolate wrapper doesn’t exactly give you a concrete way to create a happier life.
But according to Stanford’s famous “Designing Your Life” class, you can actually home in on what happiness means to you, and restructure your life around it. Instead of just abstractly chasing happiness, they suggest you journal it daily.
Start by writing down the specifics - when you were happy, what you were doing, why did it make you happy, etc.). If you notice reoccurring themes or patterns, start changing your goals or routines to incorporate them.
5. Do Good for Others
“If you go out and make some good things happen, you will fill the world with hope, you will fill yourself with hope.” Multiple scientific studies have shown that paying it forward not only makes others feel better, but creates long-lasting feelings of joy within yourself, and can provide that much-needed boost to your overall mood.
University of Pennsylvania Professor, Martin Seligman, notes: “We scientists have found that doing a kindness produces the single most reliable monetary increase in well-being of any exercise we have tested.”
Bring some donuts into work. Offer people coffee. Offer to help with a project. Do what you can to get the whole team beaming, and they’ll do the same for you.
6. Cultivate an Entrepreneurial Mindset
You don’t have to own a business (or even work in a startup) to be an entrepreneur - being an entrepreneur is a mindset, and if you aren’t thinking that way already, it’s time to get on board.
“Being entrepreneurial is essentially about thinking and doing something that we have not done before. It is about assessing a situation, designing alternatives, and choosing a new way - or perhaps a combination of ways.”
You do not need to invent a new app to be innovative - just start thinking outside of the box.
Start trusting your instincts and thinking bravely - you have the entrepreneur in you, you just have to be willing to give it a try.
"Insanity: doing the same thing over and over again and expecting different results.”
- Albert Einstein
If you have been trying to succeed at something for a while now and it hasn’t been working, or, even more important, it isn’t making you happy, it is time to try something else.
It does not mean that you are a failure. It means that you are smart enough to realize when something isn’t working out and that you have enough dignity to do something to make yourself happy.
8. Tech Isn’t Always Helpful
Arianna Huffington once said that we take better care of our smartphones than we do ourselves, and she was right. The average smartphone user checks his or her device every six and a half minutes. That’s 150 times a day.
The media mogul had to reinvent her life after collapsing from exhaustion, and she found that unplugging from her devices was a key component to finding happiness.
Checking your email and phone constantly creates unnecessary stress and can eat away at your happiness.
So if you don’t need to use it, put your phone in a drawer till the end of the day. If having it is necessary for work, limit the amount of times you check it to once every half hour. I do, and it’s made a huge difference.
9. Practice Being Your Future Self
Quite simply, to become that ideal, future version of yourself, you need to practice being it this year.
According to Peter Bregman, CEO and leadership expert, in Harvard Business Review, “You need to spend time on the future even when there are more important things to do in the present and even when there is no immediate apparent return to your efforts.
Whether you want to get in better shape or start a business, it’s not going to happen overnight. Instead of waiting for this change, start prioritizing and scheduling bite-size improvements today, no matter how busy you are
Alan Watts On How To Make Yourself A Better Person
With all the problems facing the world today we seem bent on an urgent need to improve ourselves so we can transform the world. Yet, can we in fact improve our minds, or ourselves? Or is it rather a case of being a vicious circle?
Great philosopher and Zen expert, Alan Watts, says:
"If I am in need of improving, then the person doing the improving is the very person needing the improving!”
Alan Watts wrote more than 25 books and articles on subjects important to Eastern and Western religion, introducing the then-burgeoning youth culture to The Way of Zen.
Open your mind with this profound and mind bending talk from this potent teacher.
Critical Thinking Has Never Been More Important December 31 2024 | From: LibertyBlitzkrieg / Various
There are several reasons I spend so much time discussing and analyzing the current state of affairs.
The primary motivation, aside from a drive to share personal opinions and spread awareness, is to encourage people to think critically.
I don’t want readers to agree with everything I say, I want people to become inspired to think for themselves.
The ruling class doesn’t want you to think, they want you to simply accept the nonsensical stories they tell you.
By contrast, I don’t want readers to blindly accept any of my conclusions, rather, I want my work be a case study on how to deploy independent logic and insight to a variety of topics and situations.
While I haven’t discussed the 2020 presidential campaign much here, I comment on it quite a bit over at Twitter, and people often ask why I discuss the circus at all.
The reason isn’t because I expect a politician to come save us and make everything right again, but because the establishment response to populist-type candidates is so instructive.
Although Trump hasn’t [visibly] done much of anything to address our nation’s core fundamental problems; such as a two-tier justice system, central bank power, financial feudalism, aggressive militarism/empire, rogue intelligence agencies, civil liberties abuses and tech giant censorship, his unexpected victory over chosen one Hillary Clinton nevertheless exposed many individuals and institutions for the frauds they are.
Bernie Sanders’ run is doing the same thing.
You don’t have to like the specific policies of Trump or Sanders to appreciate how any candidate with even a hint of grassroots populism puts the “elites” into panic mode.
It’s important to understand the ruling class doesn’t actually fear Trump or Sanders individually - any one person can be dealt with.
What they really fear is you.
They fear people flocking to unapproved candidates and then talking about things the establishment doesn’t want them talking about.
This is the main reason the whole Russiagate fantasy was unrolled against Trump and pushed hysterically by mass media.
By ensuring “the resistance” to Trump revolved around some invented intelligence agency narrative, the power structure was able to prevent large numbers of people from talking about anything real or significant for four years straight.
Although it didn’t remove Trump from office, it successfully reduced hitherto thoughtful people into emotionally broken mental midgets.
This is the reason the exact same tactic was just unrolled against Bernie Sanders, with Jeff Bezos’ Washington Post reporting the day before the Nevada caucuses that Russia is also supposedly helping Sanders.
It’s ridiculous, but you have to understand the strategy here. If Sanders can’t be prevented from winning the nomination, the establishment needs a plan B, and that plan appears to be Russiagate all over again. These people aren’t very creative.
When it became clear Trump couldn’t be stopped he was smeared with being a tool of the Russians, and the same seeds are being planted around the Sanders campaign.
It doesn’t matter how preposterous it is, the primary goal is to ensure nobody ever talks about anything important.
Absent Russia hysteria, a Sanders vs. Trump matchup would quickly become a battle of who’s more populist, and issues that make so-called elites very uncomfortable would become widely discussed.
The ruling class doesn’t want the public talking about such things so they need to turn the election into a complete circus if Sanders can’t be blocked.
Instead of talking about economic insecurity, healthcare, the cost of college and wars for empire, the goal is to make Sanders and Trump spend the entire campaign season arguing about who hates Russia more.
The important takeaway here is how completely terrified and decrepit the ruling class of this country really is. They have no argument or philosophy about anything important.
As such, their only tactic is to overwhelm the public with nonsense and invented narratives in order to divide, befuddle and control the masses while keeping the imperial oligarchy running exactly as it has for decades.
Once you see the game, it’s impossible to unsee it, but the good news is we all possess within ourselves the power they fear most. The power to think for ourselves and to reject ridiculous lies.
This is why we need to place relentless pressure on these people and never let up. When they feel pressure, they get scared.
When they get scared, they become desperate. When they become desperate, they make mistakes. After enough mistakes, we win.
The Birth And Death Of Privacy: 3,000 Years Of History Told Through 46 Images December 30 2024 | From: Medium / Various
Privacy, as we understand it, is only about 150 years old.
Humans do have an instinctual desire for privacy. However, for 3,000 years, cultures have nearly always prioritized convenience and wealth over privacy.
Section II will show how cutting edge health technology will force people to choose between an early, costly death and a world without any semblance of privacy. Given historical trends, the most likely outcome is that we will forgo privacy and return to our traditional, transparent existence.
*This post is part of an online book about Silicon Valley’s Political endgame. See all available chapters here.
Section I: How Privacy Was Invented Slowly Over 3,000 years
“Privacy may actually be an anomaly.”
-
Vinton Cerf, Co-creator of the military’s early Internet prototype and Google executive.
Cerf suffered a torrent of criticism in the media for suggesting that privacy is unnatural. Though he was simply opining on what he believed was an under-the-radar gathering at the Federal Trade Commission in 2013, historically speaking, Cerf is right.
Privacy, as it is conventionally understood, is only about 150 years old. Most humans living throughout history had little concept of privacy in their tiny communities. Sex, breastfeeding, and bathing were shamelessly performed in front of friends and family.
The lesson from 3,000 years of history is that privacy has almost always been a back-burner priority. Humans invariably choose money, prestige or convenience when it has conflicted with a desire for solitude.
This chapter takes a look at how technology shaped desires for privacy over the major epochs of human history.
Tribal Life (~200,000 B.C. to 6,000 B.C)
“Because hunter-gatherer children sleep with their parents, either in the same bed or in the same hut, there is no privacy. Children see their parents having sex. In the Trobriand Islands, Malinowski was told that parents took no special precautions to prevent their children from watching them having sex: they just scolded the child and told it to cover its head with a mat”
- UCLA Anthropologist, Jared Diamond
While extremely rare in tribal societies, privacy may, in fact, be instinctive. Evidence from tribal societies suggests that humans prefer to make love in solitude (In 9 of 12 societies where homes have separate bedrooms for parents, people prefer to have sex indoors. In those cultures without homes with separate rooms, sex is more often preferred outdoors).
However, in practice, the need for survival often eclipses the desire for privacy. For instance, among the modern North American Utku’s, a desire for solitude can seem profoundly rude:
“It dawned on me how forlorn I would be in the wildness if they forsook me. Far, far better to suffer loss of privacy”
-
Anthropologist Jean Briggs, on being ostracized by her host Utku family, after daring to explore the wilderness alone for a day.
The big question: if privacy isn’t the norm, where did it start? Let’s start from the first cities:
Ancient Cities (6th Century B.C. - 4th Century AD)
Roman citizens engaged in conversation in a public restroom. Credit: A Day In The Life Of Ancient Rome
Like their tribal ancestors, the Greeks displayed some preference for privacy. And, unlike their primitive ancestors, the Greeks had the means to do something about it. University of Leicester’ Samantha Burke found that the Greeks used their sophisticated understanding of geometry to create housing with the mathematically minimum exposure to public view while maximizing available light.
Sightline analysis of maximum viewable space from the street. Burke (2000)
However, Athenians penchant for solitude was not without its influential critics:
“For where men conceal their ways from one another in darkness rather than light, there no man will ever rightly gain either his due honour or office or the justice that is befitting”
- Socrates
Athenian philosophy proved far more popular than their architecture. In Greece’s far less egalitarian successor, Rome, the landed gentry built their homes with wide open gardens. Turning one’s house into a public museum was an ostentatious display of wealth. Though, the rich seemed self-aware of their unfortunate trade-off:
“Great fortune has this characteristic, that it allows nothing to be concealed, nothing hidden; it opens up the homes of princes, and not only that but their bedrooms and intimate retreats, and it opens up and exposes to talk all the arcane secrets”
- Pliny the Elder, ‘The Natural History’, circa 77 A.D.
The majority of Romans lived in crowded apartments, with walls thin enough to hear every noise. “Think of Ancient Rome as a giant campground,” writes Angela Alberto in A Day in the life of Ancient Rome.
And, thanks to the Rome’s embrace of public sex, there was less of a motivation to make it taboo - especially considering the benefits.
“Baths, drink and sex corrupt our bodies, but baths, drink and sex make life worth living”
-
Graffi - Roman bath
Early Middle Ages (4th century AD-1,200 AD): Privacy As Isolation
Early Christian saints pioneered the modern concept of privacy: seclusion. The Christian Bible popularized the idea that morality was not just the outcome of an evil deed, but the intent to cause harm; this novel coupling of intent and morality led the most devout followers (monks) to remove themselves from society and focus obsessively on battling their inner demons free from the distractions of civilization.
“Just as fish die if they stay too long out of water, so the monks who loiter outside their cells or pass their time with men of the world lose the intensity of inner peace. So like a fish going towards the sea, we must hurry to reach our cell, for fear that if we delay outside we will lost our interior watchfulness”
- St Antony of Egypt
It is rumored that on the island monastery of Nitria, a monk died and was found 4 days later. Monks meditated in isolation in stone cubicles, known as “Beehive” huts.
Even before the collapse of ancient Rome in 4th century A.D., humanity was mostly a rural species
A stylized blueprint of the Lord Of The Rings-looking shire longhouses, which were popular for 1000 years, shows animals and humans sleeping under the same room - because, there was only one room.
“There was no classical or medieval latin word equivalent to ‘privacy’. privatio meant ‘a taking away’”
- Georges Duby, author, ‘A History Of Private Life: Revelations of the Medieval World’
Late Medieval / Early Renaissance (1300–1600) - The Foundation Of Privacy Is Built
“Privacy — the ultimate achievement of the renaissance”
- Historian Peter Smith
In 1215, the influential Fourth Council Of Lateran (the “Great Council”) declared that confessions should be mandatory for the masses. This mighty stroke of Catholic power instantly extended the concept of internal morality to much of Europe.
“The apparatus of moral governance was shifted inward, to a private space that no longer had anything to do with the community,” explained religious author, Peter Loy. Solitude had a powerful ally.
Fortunately for the church, some new technology would make quiet contemplation much less expensive: Guttenberg’s printing press.
Thanks to the printing presses invention after the Great Counsel’s decree, personal reading supercharged European individualism. Poets, artists, and theologians were encouraged in their pursuits of “abandoning the world in order to turn one’s heart with greater intensity toward God,” so recommended the influential canon of The Brethren of the Common Life.
To be sure, up until the 18th century, public readings were still commonplace, a tradition that extended until universal book ownership. Quiet study was an elite luxury for many centuries.
Citizens enjoy a public reading
The Architecture Of Privacy
Individual beds are a modern invention. As one of the most expensive items in the home, a single large bed became a place for social gatherings, where guests were invited to sleep with the entire family and some servants.
But, the uncleanness of urbanized life quickly caught up with the Europeans, when infectious diseases wiped out large swaths of newly crowded cities. The Black Death, alone, killed over 100 million people.
This profoundly changed hygiene attitudes, especially in hospitals, where it was once common for patients to sleep as close together as houseguests were accustomed to.
“Little children, both girls and boys, together in dangerous beds, upon which other patients died of contagious diseases, because there is no order and no private bed for the children, [who must] sleep six, eight, nine, ten, and twelve to a bed, at both head and foot”
- Notes of a nurse (circa 1500), lamenting the lack of modern medical procedures
Though, just because individual beds in hospitals were coming into vogue, it did not mean that sex was any more private. Witnessing the consummation of marriage was common for both spiritual and logistical reasons:
“Newlyweds climbed into bed before the eyes of family and friends and the next day exhibit the sheets as proof that the marriage had been consummated”
-
Georges Duby, Editor, ‘A History of Private Life’
Few people demanded privacy while they slept because even separate beds wouldn’t have afforded them the luxury. Most homes only had one room. Architectural historians trace the origins of internal walls to the more basic human desire to be warm.
Below, in the video, is a Hollywood re-enactment of couples sleeping around the burning embers of a central fire pit, from the film, Beowulf. It’s a solid illustration of the grand hall open architecture that was pervasive before the popularization of internal walls circa 1,400 A.D.
Couples sleep around the warmth of a fire (clip from Beowulf)
“Firstly, I propose that there be a room common to all in the middle, and at its centre there shall be a fire, so that many more people can get round it and everyone can see the others faces when engaging in their amusements and storytelling”
- 15th century Italian Architect, Sebastian Serlio
To disperse heat more efficiently without choking houseguests to death, fire-resistant chimney-like structures were built around central fire pits to reroute smoke outside. Below is an image of a “transitional” house during the 16th century period when back-to-back fireplaces broke up the traditional open hall architecture.
Housing Culture: Traditional Architecture In An English Landscape
“A profound change in the very blueprint of the living space”
- Historian Sarti Raffaella, on the introduction of the chimney.
Pre-Industrial Revolution (1600–1840) - The Home Becomes Private, Which Isn’t Very Private
The first recorded daily diary was composed by Lady Margaret Hoby, who lived just passed the 16th century. On February 4th, 1600, she writes that she retired “to my Closit, wher I praid and Writt some thinge for mine owne priuat Conscience’s”.
Cardinal Albrecht of Brandenburg in his study
By the renaissance, it was quite common for at least the wealthy to shelter themselves away in the home. Yet, even for those who could afford separate spaces, it was more logistically convenient to live in close quarters with servants and family.
“Having served in the capacity of manservant to his Excellency Marquis Francesco Albergati for the period of about eleven years, that I can say and give account that on three or four occasions I saw the said marquis getting out of bed with a perfect erection of the male organ”
- 1751, Servant of Albergati Capacelli, testifying in court that his master did not suffer from incontinence, thus rebutting his wife’s legal suit for annulment.
Law
It was just prior to the industrial revolution that citizens, for the first time, demanded that the law begin to keep pace with the evolving need for secret activities.
In this early handwritten note on August 20th, 1770, revolutionist and future President of the United States, John Adams, voiced his support for the concept of privacy.
“I am under no moral or other Obligation…to publish to the World how much my Expences or my Incomes amount to yearly.”
Despite some high-profile opposition, the first American Census was posted publicly, for logistics reasons, more than anything else.
Transparency was the best way to ensure every citizen could inspect it for accuracy.
Privacy-conscious citizen did find more traction with what would become perhaps America’s first privacy law, the 1710 Post Office Act, which banned sorting through the mail by postal employees.
“I’ll say no more on this head, but When I have the Pleasure to See you again, shall Inform you of many Things too tedious for a Letter and which perhaps may fall into Ill hands, for I know there are many at Boston who dont Scruple to Open any Persons letters, but they are well known here.”
-
Dr. Oliver Noyes, lamenting the well-known fact that mail was often read.
This fact did not stop the mail’s popularity
Gilded Age: 1840–1950 - Privacy Becomes The Expectation
“Privacy is a distinctly modern product”
-
E.L. Godkin, 1890
“In The Mirror, 1890” by Auguste Toulmouche
By the time the industrial revolution began serving up material wealth to the masses, officials began recognizing privacy as the default setting of human life.
“The material and moral well-being of workers depend, the health of the public, and the security of society depend on each family’s living in a separate, healthy, and convenient home, which it may purchase”
- Speaker at 1876 international hygiene congress in Brussels
For the poor, however, life was still very much on display. The famous 20th-century existentialist philosopher Jean Paul-Satre observed the poor streets of Naples:
Crowded apartment dwellers spill on to the streets
“The ground floor of every building contains a host of tiny rooms that open directly onto the street and each of these tiny rooms contains a family…
they drag tables and chairs out into the street or leave them on the threshold, half outside, half inside…outside is organically linked to inside…
yesterday i saw a mother and a father dining outdoors, while their baby slept in a crib next to the parents’ bed and an older daughter did her homework at another table by the light of a kerosene lantern…
if a woman falls ill and stays in bed all day, it’s open knowledge and everyone can see her.”
Insides of houses were no less cramped:
The “Right To Privacy“ Is Born
While architecture failed to keep up with society, it was during the Gilded Age that privacy was officially acknowledged as a political right.
“The intensity and complexity of life, attendant upon advancing civilization, have rendered necessary some retreat from the world, and man, under the refining influence of culture, has become more sensitive to publicity, so that solitude and privacy have become more essential to the individual; but modern enterprise and invention have, through invasions upon his privacy, subjected him to mental pain and distress, far greater than could be inflicted by mere bodily injury.”
- “The Right To Privacy” - December 15, 1890, Harvard Law Review
Interestingly enough, the right to privacy was justified on the very grounds for which it is now so popular: technology’s encroachment on personal information.
However, the father of the right to privacy and future Supreme Court Justice, Louis Brandeis, was ahead of his time. His seminal article did not get much press - and the press it did get wasn’t all that glowing.
"The feelings of these thin-skinned Americans are doubtless at the bottom of an article in the December number of the Harvard Law Review, in which two members of the Boston bar have recorded the results of certain researches into the question whether Americans do not possess a common-law right of privacy which can be successfully defended in the courts."
- Galveston Daily News on ‘The Right To Privacy’
Privacy had not helped America up to this point in history. Brazen invasions into the public’s personal communications had been instrumental in winning the Civil War.
A request For Wiretapping
This is a letter from the Secretary of War, Edwin Stanton, requesting broad authority over telegraph lines; Lincoln simply scribbled on the back “The Secretary of War has my authority to exercise his discretion in the matter within mentioned. A. LINCOLN.”
It wasn’t until the industry provoked the ire of a different president that information privacy was codified into law. President Grover Cleveland had a wife who was easy on the eyes. And, easy access to her face made it ideal for commercial purposes.
The rampant use of President Grover Cleveland’s wife, Frances, on product advertisements, eventually led to the one of the nation’s first privacy laws. The New York legislature made it a penalty to use someone’s unauthorized likeness for commercial purposes in 1903, for a fine of up to $1,000.
Indeed, for most of the 19th century, privacy was practically upheld as a way of maintaining a man’s ownership over his wife’s public and private life - including physical abuse.
"We will not inflict upon society the greater evil of raising the curtain upon domestic privacy, to punish the lesser evil of trifling violence”
- 1868, State V. Rhodes, wherein the court decided the social costs of invading privacy was not greater than that of wife beating.
The Technology Of Individualism
The first 150 years of American life saw an explosion of information technology, from the postcard to the telephone. As each new communication method gave a chance to peek at the private lives of strangers and neighbors, Americans often (reluctantly) chose whichever technology was either cheaper or more convenient.
Privacy was a secondary concern.
"There is a lady who conducts her entire correspondence through this channel. She reveals secrets supposed to be the most pro- found, relates misdemeanors and indiscretions with a reckless disregard of the consequences. Her confidence is unbounded in the integrity of postmen and bell-boys, while the latter may be seen any morning, sitting on the doorsteps of apartment houses, making merry over the post-card correspondence.”
- Editor, the Atlantic Monthly, on Americas of love of postcards, 1905
Even though postcards were far less private, they were convenient. More than 200,000 postcards were ordered in the first two hours they were offered in New York City, on May 15, 1873.
The next big advance in information technology, the telephone, was a wild success in the early 20th century. However, individual telephone lines were prohibitively expensive; instead, neighbors shared one line, known as “party lines.” Commercial ads urged neighbors to use the shared technology with “courtesy”.
But, as this comic shows, it was common to eavesdrop.
“Party lines could destroy relationships…if you were dating someone on the party line and got a call from another girl, well, the jig was up.
Five minutes after you hung up, everybody in the neighborho - including your girlfriend - knew about the call. In fact, there were times when the girlfriend butted in and chewed both the caller and the callee out. Watch what you say.”
- Author, Donnie Johnson
Where convenience and privacy found a happy co-existence, individualized gadgets flourished. Listening was not always an individual act. The sheer fact that audio was a form of broadcast made listening to conversations and music a social activity.
This all changed with the invention of the headphone.
“The triumph of headphones is that they create, in a public space, an oasis of privacy”~ The Atlantic’s libertarian columnist, Derek Thompson.
Late 20th Century - Fear Of A World Without Privacy
By the 60's, individualized phones, rooms, and homes became the norm. 100 years earlier, when Lincoln tapped all telegraph lines, few raised any questions. In the new century, invasive surveillance would bring down Lincoln’s distant successor, even though his spying was far less pervasive.
Upon entering office, the former Vice-President assured the American people that their privacy was safe.
“As Vice President, I addressed myself to the individual rights of Americans in the area of privacy…
There will be no illegal tappings, eavesdropping, bugging, or break-ins in my administration.
There will be hot pursuit of tough laws to prevent illegal invasions of privacy in both government and private activities.”
- Gerald Ford
Justice Brandeis Had Finally Won
2,000 A.D. And Beyond - A Grand Reversal
In the early 2,000s, young consumers were willing to purchase a location tracking feature that was once the stuff of 1984 nightmares.
“The magic age is people born after 1981…
That’s the cut-off for us where we see a big change in privacy settings and user acceptance.”
-
Loopt Co-Founder Sam Altman, who pioneered paid geo-location features.
The older generations’ fear of transparency became a subject of mockery.
“My grandma always reminds me to turn my GPS off a few blocks before I get home “so that the man giving me directions doesn’t know where I live.”
- A letter to the editor of College Humor’s “Parents Just Don’t Understand” series.
Increased urban density and skyrocketing rents in the major cities has put pressure on communal living.
A co-living space in San Francisco / Source: Sarah Buhr, TechCrunch
“We’re seeing a shift in consciousness from hyper-individualistic to more cooperative spaces…
We have a vision to raise our families together.”
- Jordan Aleja Grader, San Francisco resident
At the more extreme ends, a new crop of so-called “life bloggers” publicize intimate details about their days:
Blogger Robert Scoble takes A picture with Google Glass in the shower
At the edges of transparency and pornography, anonymous exhibitionism finds a home on the web, at the wildly popular content aggregator, Reddit, in the aptly titled community “Gone Wild”.
Section II: How Privacy Will Again Fade Away
For 3,000 years, most people have been perfectly willing to trade privacy for convenience, wealth or fame. It appears this is still true today.
AT&T recently rolled out a discounted broadband internet service, where customers could pay a mere $30 more a month to not have their browsing behavior tracked online for ad targeting.
“Since we began offering the service more than a year ago the vast majority have elected to opt-in to the ad-supported model.”
Performance artist Risa Puno managed to get almost half the attendees at an Brooklyn arts festival to trade their private data (image, fingerprints, or social security number) for a delicious cinnamon cookie. Some even proudly tweeted it out.
Tourists on Hollywood Blvd willing gave away their passwords to on live TV for a split-second of TV fame on Jimmy Kimmel Live.
Even for holdouts, the costs of privacy may be too great to bear. With the advance of cutting-edge health technologies, withholding sensitive data may mean a painful, early death.
For instance, researchers have already discovered that if patients of the deadly Vioxx drug had shared their health information publicly, statisticians could have detected the side effects earlier enough to save 25,000 lives.
As a result, Google’s Larry Page has embarked on a project to get more users to share their private health information with the academic research community. While Page told a crowd at the TED conference in 2013 that he believe such information can remain anonymous, statisticians are doubtful.
“We have been pretending that by removing enough information from databases that we can make people anonymous. We have been promising privacy, and this paper demonstrates that for a certain percent of a population, those promises are empty.”
- John Wilbanks of Sage Bionetworks, on a new academic paper that identified anonymous donors to a genetics database, based on public information
Speaking as a statistician, it is quite easy to identify people in anonymous datasets. There are only so many 5'4" jews living in San Francisco with chronic back pain. Every bit of information we reveal about ourselves will be one more disease that we can track, and another life saved.
If I want to know whether I will suffer a heart attack, I will have to release my data for public research. In the end, privacy will be an early death sentence.
Already, health insurers are beginning to offer discounts for people who wear health trackers and let others analyze their personal movements. Many, if not most, consumers in the next generation will choose cash and a longer life in exchange for publicizing their most intimate details.
What can we tell with basic health information, such as calories burned throughout the day? Pretty much everything.
With a rudimentary step and calorie counter, I was able to distinguish whether I was having sex or at the gym, since the minute-by-minute calorie burn profile of sex is quite distinct (the image below from my health tracker shows lots of energy expended at the beginning and end, with few steps taken. Few activities besides sex have this distinct shape)
My late-night horizontal romp, as measured by calories burned per minute
More advanced health monitors used by insurers are coming, like embedded sensors in skin and clothes that detect stress and concentration. The markers of an early heart attack or dementia will be the same that correspond to an argument with a spouse or if an employee is dozing off at work.
No behavior will escape categorization - which will give us unprecedented superpowers to extend healthy life. Opting out of this tracking - if it is even possib - will mean an early death and extremely pricey health insurance for many.
If history is a guide, the costs and convenience of radical transparency will once again take us back to our roots as a species that could not even conceive of a world with privacy.
A Country Without An Honest Media Is Lost: The Largest Conspiracy Theory Peddlers Are Mainstream Media And The US State Department December 29 2024 | From: CaitlinJohnstone / PaulCraigRoberts
The US State Department has issued a statement accusing the Syrian government of having carried out a false flag chemical weapons attack in northwestern Aleppo with the intent to blame it on the jihadist factions in the region, citing “credible info” that the public has not been permitted to see.
The Official Narrative is that only the Syrian government uses chemical weapons, so the chemical weapons usage must necessarily be a false flag staged by Syrian president Bashar al-Assad.
Except they didn’t use the words “false flag”. Despite the accusation being the exact definition of the thing that a false flag attack is, you won’t see the US government using that term, nor will you ever see it used in this instance by any of the authorized mainstream narrative-framing institutions like CNN or Fox News.
This is because the term “false flag” is reserved solely for mention when referring to crazy, kooky Kremlin propaganda, as in the insane, unhinged, tinfoil hat belief that terrorists in Syria might possibly have some kind of motive to stage a false flag chemical attack in order to get the US, UK and France to act as their air force in a retaliatory strike against the Syrian government.
That kind of false flag would be completely inconceivable to any right-minded empire loyalist, and is forbidden to even think about.
At the same time we are seeing a push from the mass media to advance a narrative that the Yellow Vests protests in France are due to Russian influence, with Iraq-raping neocon Max Boot publishing a column today in the Washington Post that is based entirely around the talking point that two trending Russian topics on social media have been “giletsjaune” and “France,” and Bloombergputting out an article blatantly titled “Pro-Russia Social Media Takes Aim at Macron as Yellow Vests Rage”.
Their entire theory is that since there are people in Russia talking about a major event that everyone else in the world is also talking about, the protests against Macron’s unpopular centrist policies are therefore the result of a conspiracy seeded by Russia.
But you’ll never hear this theory about a Russian conspiracy referred to as a “conspiracy theory” by the mainstream press.
The theory that Russian elites have conspired to infiltrate the highest levels of the US government has been given serious treatment at the top echelons of media and political influence, despite its lacking any discernible evidence whatsoever, but when they talk about these alleged conspiracies they always make a point of using the word “collusion” instead.
There is no actual difference between the words collude and conspire when used in this way, but the former is used because a deliberate effort has been made to stigmatize the word “conspiracy” while the word “collude” remains effectively neutral in the public eye.
But the fact of the matter is that conspiracy theories have gone mainstream, and there is no legitimate reason to call the authorized, power-manufactured conspiracy theories by a different name than the grassroots narratives like those about 9/11 or the JFK assassination.
Indeed, due to the nature of populist folk narratives there is a lot more publicly available evidence contradicting the official 9/11 and JFK assassination stories than there is for the establishment Russia conspiracy theories, because those narratives often boil down to nothing more than secretive intelligence agencies saying “This is true because we said so.”
Since grassroots conspiracy theories are unable to rely on empty assertions from authority, they tend to be built upon information that is publicly available.
Some people get annoyed with me for using the term conspiracy theory at all, but I insist that the phrase is itself intrinsically neutral: A theory about a conspiracy.
The problem is not the phrase, it is the stigma that has been attached to that phrase by establishment media and establishment politicians; shifting to a different phrase to describe theories about conspiracies would only ensure that that phrase becomes stigmatized in the exact same way by the same sort of campaign.
This would only ensure the survival of the tactic of regurgitating a pre-stigmatized label in the war of ideas instead of advancing actual arguments.
The fact of the matter is that powerful people do indeed conspire, those conspiracies do indeed need to be talked about, and the largest promulgators of conspiracy theories are not Infowars or RT, but mainstream media and the US State Department.
Those who dismiss an idea by calling it a “conspiracy theory” without providing further argumentation are simply admitting to you that they have no argument, and it is right to point this out when they do it, because something being a conspiracy theory doesn’t mean it’s not grounded in facts.
Some conspiracy theories are good and are backed by solid evidence, some are stupid and are circulated for intellectually dishonest reasons.
Once upon a time you would be called a conspiracy theorist for saying the west is arming terrorists in Syria or the DNC is conspiring to ensure the primary victory of Hillary Clinton; those things are now conspiracy facts, as history has vindicated the solid theories which predicted them.
Other conspiracy theories are promulgated by dim-witted partisan loyalists for no other reason than dim-witted partisan loyalty, like the aforementioned Russiagate conspiracy theory, or the QAnon conspiracy theory which claims Donald Trump is leading a rebellion against the Deep State as cryptically reported by an anonymous user on 8chan.
Other conspiracy theories are subscribed to simply because they help people escape the cognitive dissonance of conflicting beliefs.
For example, a strong believer in capitalism who sees the undeniable signs that a plutocratic class has control of their government, but who cannot accept that this plutocratic takeover was facilitated by a rampant capitalist system which ensures that the greediest sociopaths rise to the top, may avoid cognitive dissonance by explaining the existence of the corrupt dominator class with conspiracy theories about Jews or pedovore cults.
A liberal who cannot accept that neoliberal empire loyalists like Macron have failed to “make centrism cool” as Max Boot predicted will avoid cognitive dissonance by explaining the failures of the Church of the Status Quo with conspiracy theories about Russian social media campaigns.
Conspiracy theories, in reality, are nothing more than people’s attempts to explain what is going on in their world.
Why Trump got elected. Why things stay shitty despite our perfectly rational attempts to change them. Why voting doesn’t seem to make much difference in the actual behaviors of one’s government.
Why we keep marching into stupid wars, Orwellian dystopia and climate collapse despite having every incentive not to.
Why the wealthiest of the wealthy keep getting wealthier while everyone else gets poorer and poorer.
Some attempts to explain these things will come from a well-informed and intellectually honest place, and some will come from a myopic and intellectually dishonest place. Their individual merits can only be assessed on a case-by-case basis.
And in my opinion the conspiracy theories coming from the world’s most powerful institutions are the most dishonest by far.
I saw a recent post by the WikiLeaks Twitter account which referred to the corporate media as “the narrative business pretending to be in the news business,” which is in my opinion a perfect way to phrase it.
The real currency of the world is not gold, nor is it bureaucratic fiat, nor even raw military force; it’s narrative control.
The ability to control the stories people tell about what’s going on in their world means the ability to control how they think, how they vote, how they behave, and how they all agree money and power itself operates within our society.
Conspiracy theories are a way for those in power to manipulate the narrative without actually giving the public any hard facts and evidence, and the world’s most powerful institutions are increasingly relying on conspiracy theories because they don’t have facts and evidence on their side.
And why would they?
The same power establishment which deceived the world into destroying Iraq is obviously far too depraved to be able to justify its global hegemony with factual evidence.
Why So Many Of Us Feel Lonely These Days December 28 2024 | From: The UnboundedSpirit / Various
We are living in the most connected period in human history, yet there has never been a time before when people felt as isolated as we do.
Although we have easy access to communication technology that allows us to instantly communicate with people from across the world, hundreds of millions of us feel disconnected from the rest of humanity.
Loneliness, as you might know, sucks. To live in a world where you don’t have anyone to genuinely connect with can be soul-crashing.
It can make you feel insecure, anxious, unimportant and undeserving of love and respect. In other words, loneliness feels like being thrown heavy blows in the psyche.
And since the psyche and the body are not separate but intrinsically connected, what is hurting as psychologically is also hurting us physically.
One of the main reasons why loneliness is so harmful is that it tends to go hand-in-hand with high levels of stress, which has been shown to significantly weaken our immune system, and thus to accelerate aging as well as cancer, heart disease, Alzheimer’s, and all sorts of other diseases.
Loneliness, therefore, is a very serious health issue.
Yet we rarely hear or talk about it, which itself is a crystal clear sign of social disconnection - a reflection of our modern, globalized world, wherein loneliness has become an epidemic in recent years.
Day by day, more and more people feel lonely, starting from a very early age. So what could explain that? What changed over the last few decades that lead to this sense of isolation that so many of us experience?
I can mention a lot of things here, but I think that at the root of our loneliness lies the cultural belief that we don’t depend on each other.
This belief is mainly the result of our modern-day socioeconomic system, which is driven by profit and is largely based on the conversion of relationships into paid services.
In this system, most of us are conditioned to think that we can purchase everything we need, without having to form relationships or ties to other people.
Do you want to eat a delicious meal? Pay your local restaurant and it will be prepared for you.
Do you feel the urge to have sex? Pay a prostitute (if the law allows it) and an attractive person will sleep with you. Do you want someone to take care of your kids while you’re busy? Pay a nanny and she’ll help you out.
All that we desire is within our reach, we believe, provided that we possess the necessary funds to pay for it.
Therefore, as long as we work enough and earn enough, we’ll be able to satisfy our wants. In other words, we’ll be “independent” - a word that implies personal success in our culture.
Other cultures, however, considered this kind of independence as a sign of failure.
In earlier times, people used to feel dependent on one another. They saw themselves as part of a wider community which they served and was serving them.
If, let’s say, someone wanted to move a heavy object out of her house, she’d not hesitate to ask her neighbors for a helping hand (instead of paying some company), and the neighbors were pleased to come over and help.
Or, if someone wanted to have fun and play, he’d likely meet with his friends and sing, dance, play sports or maybe create something together (instead of paying for entertainment).
Being embedded in their communities, people felt much safer and happier. Not only did they have the support of their neighbors when in need, but they also formed intimate relationships with them.
Nowadays, we think that we don’t really need anyone. We pay strangers - who can be easily replaced by other strangers - for pretty much anything we need.
Not surprisingly, the sense of community has almost completely disappeared. Each one of us feels like a tiny island in a vast ocean, separated from each other by the wild currents of a cold and indifferent existence.
And the emotional cost of this sense of separation is affecting everyone - some of us more, others less - but we all experience a certain degree of alienation, and the resulting feelings of fear, insecurity and anxiety.
Our loneliness is further intensified by the fact that in our society people are constantly competing with one another in order to maximize their personal financial gain.
That’s because we’re living in a scarcity-based economic system where money isn’t enough to go around. In this system, more for one person means less for another.
Hence, nearly everyone is trying to outdo others, something we’ve been conditioned to do since the age of five or so - that is, when we were first sent to school, where we were trying to perform better than our classmates in order to please our parents and teachers.
Is it any wonder, then, that so many of us feel lonely? When we feel that our success is threatened by the success of others, how can we trust other people?
When we’re hurt again and again by others since our very early childhood, how can we dare to open up our hearts, embrace others and offer them a place in our lives?
It feels nearly impossible. Rather, we prefer to insulate ourselves from the world to find protection from it.
But the problem is, the more we seek security away from others, the more we lose it, because true security can only come from a sense of communal belonging.
Whether we like to admit it or not, we are all, in a sense, dependent on each other - and there’s nothing wrong with that.
Just like we depend on the sun, the sea and the air, we also depend on other people.
We are social beings with an inherent need to connect with others. And, contrary to what many of us think, money can only buy us short-lasting substitutes of what we’re actually looking for.
Yes, we can pay someone to prepare for us a good meal, but would that be the same as a meal prepared by someone who sincerely cares for us?
Yes, we can pay a band to play music for us, but would that be the same as a beloved one serenading us? And yes, we can pay a stranger to sleep with us, but would that be the same as having sexual intercourse with someone who knows us inside and out?
I’m sure that everyone deep down knows the answer to those questions: Money can’t buy us connection.
But our belief that we don’t need each other has made us stray away from what’s truly important to us.
Once we realize that as truth, we’ll start reaching out to other people and begin working together on creating new social systems that will help us build bridges between our hearts, instead of walls all around them.
In Socialist Theocracy, Getting ‘Woke’ Brings Absolution
December 27 2024 | From: TheEpochTimes / Various Double standards are a hallmark of socialist movements.
The infamous “community organizer” Saul Alinsky established their tenets simply: “Accuse the Other Side of That Which You Are Guilty.”
And in their hypocrisy, they extend this tenet to their cohorts, under Alinsky’s rule to “never strike left.”
Because of this, a politician can loudly claim to oppose racism in all forms, yet turn a blind eye when a member of his own camp is exposed as a racist.
A basketball star can claim to oppose oppression, then defend state oppression in the next breath. They can march in lockstep, crying foul about all the wrongs of the world, while ignoring the wrongs in their own camp.
It all comes down to the sins of the fathers. In Western religion, this goes back to the story of original sin, the temptation in the Garden of Eden, and the curse from the Tree of Knowledge.
It holds that man is born into sin, and that through baptism and repentance, we may find redemption.
The socialist religion also holds that people are born into sin, but the extent of this sin is determined by the color of each person’s skin, their gender, and how closely they follow the traditions, or “old ideas,” that socialism seeks to eradicate.
Rather than believing that people can repent and improve themselves to overcome original sin, socialism holds that white people should be forever guilty of historical slavery, men should be forever guilty of patriarchy, and the wealthy should be forever ashamed of their own gains.
Yet they offer their own form of repentance: getting “woke.”
To be forgiven for politicized sin, the socialists must proclaim their hatred of who they are.
The white person must proclaim their hatred of “white privilege,” the man must proclaim his hatred of “toxic masculinity,” and the business owner must announce his opposition to “capitalism.”
After being born again through this political baptism, they’re no longer held accountable to the narratives of their camp. By proclaiming their wokeness to the church of the state, they are granted absolution from all political sins past and present - just as long as they continue to voice their hatred of all they once were.
Socialism is very much a theocratic system. In its destruction of God, it aimed to replace God; and in its destruction of morals, it has looked to create a new morality.
The statist theocracy now rules, and those who sit in its pews can preach to their masses about how they, too, were once lowly sinners in the ever-changing crimes of political correctness.
History is merely repeating itself, regardless of how the adherents to this state belief try to separate their “new” socialism from the tyrannical history of the “old” socialism.
Thomas Molnar explained this principle in his book “Utopia: The Perennial Heresy,” saying that in every practical regard, socialism functions as a theocracy.
And to guard its forced theocratic rule, it demands that all beneath proclaim their enthusiasm: to speak their wokeness, lest the unclean elements of society should rise up in revolt.
Theocracy, Molnar explained;
"May never relent, for, as long as danger exists - and the very absence of enthusiasm for theocratic rule is interpreted as danger - the repressive force may not relax.
Wielders of such force must be shown proof that their subjects, candidates for perfection, live in a permanent state of enthusiasm.”
And because danger to such systems will always exist, he explained, “the elect will insist on regular enthusiastic demonstrations of consensus.”
"Under Communist regimes, for example, the individual may not simply retire into silence; he must enthusiastically speak, write, approve, and proclaim louder than the next fellow.”
Of course, socialism has no problem contradicting its own principles - and this has held true for leaders of its systems and ideology from the get-go. Pol Pot killed the intellectuals but was an intellectual himself.
Marx hated the bourgeois class, of which he and his aristocratic wife were a part. Lenin killed the peasants to protect the working man. And Mao destroyed belief to create consensus for his own.
The vague political goal always shines on the horizon, and the socialist tyrant points to it, claiming that we can reach it tomorrow, if only the privileged elements of society could be destroyed today.
Tyranny and oppression then become the tools to destroy “oppression,” and through their contradictory double-think, the socialists believe that through their own tyranny, they’ve fought tyranny.
Molnar explains that this contradictory thought - and the demand in socialist regimes that all “true believers” demonstrate their enthusiasm for its principles, lest they fail to be absolved of the past - is part of the ongoing hypocrisy that has always plagued socialist Utopianism.
Molnar explains, “The same paradox characterizes all Utopian thinkers: they believe in unrestrained human freedom; at the same time, they want so thoroughly to organize freedom that they turn it into slavery.”
These Five Traits Can Only Be Found In Genuine Empaths
& Psychic Abilities Everyone Can Unlock December 26 2024 | From: iHeartIntelligence / UniverseInsideYou
We all possess interesting characteristics, and genuine
empaths are no different. However, the traits that make them unique are
rather astounding.
The trademark trait of empaths, or what everyone knows about them, is all in the name- empath. They exhibit empathy
“It’s been argued that empathy conferred an evolutionary advantage to
humans. Since we’re tribal creatures, empathizing with others increased
our sense of commitment to the community and to those in it.
Additionally, it permitted us greater understanding of not just our own
feelings, but those of others,” writes Peg Streep in PsychologyToday.
While empaths are undeniably gifted in this area, they are so much more than this one aspect.
Here are 5 unique traits that make every empath special:
1. They Mirror The Emotions Of Others
There are certain brain cells which are responsible for us feeling
compassion, and relating to the joy, fear, and love of others. These
brain cells are referred to as ‘mirror neurons.’
Empaths are believed to
have hyper-responsive mirror neurons, making it possible for them to
deeply understand the feelings of another person.
Dr. Judith Orloff warns that we should be aware of those who display a lack of empathy. “Psychopaths, sociopaths, and narcissists are thought to have what science calls ’empathy deficient disorders.’
This means they lack the ability to feel empathy like other people do,
which may be caused by an under-active mirror neuron system.”
No one wants to be around someone who is constantly negative, but for empaths, it is much more than simple dislike.
There is a phenomenon called emotional contagion where “one person’s emotions and related behaviors directly trigger
similar emotions and behaviors in other people.”
For example, an infant
crying in a hospital will set off other babies to cry. Or, if someone is
having a bad day and displaying anger and aggression, others around
them will do the same. What does this mean for empaths?
Orloff states, “Empaths need to choose positive people in their lives so
they’re not brought down by negativity. Or, if, say a friend is going
through a hard time, empaths should take special precautions to ground
and center themselves.”
Enduring the full effect of the world and those in it can be
physically and mentally exhausting for empaths.
You will notice they
have to take time for themselves, where they are on their own, in their
own space. Even if that space is nature, which it often is.
Besides needing this time to recover and reinvigorate themselves,
empaths actually crave alone time. As Orloff explains, “Research has
shown that introverted empaths tend to have a higher
sensitivity to dopamine than extroverts. Basically, they need less
dopamine to feel happy. That could explain why they are more content
with being alone.”
Whether it is a video on the news, a disturbing image on social
media, or even a texted photo, empaths can’t watch or look at it. It’s
not that they are avoiding the realities of this world, but they already
are aware, and when they have to see these things it makes them feel
like they are seeing it in person.
Empaths get the full effect. While
most people can see these things with a sense of detachment, that simply
isn’t an option for empaths.
In fact, if you are an empath, you’ve probably unfollowed a few
people because of the things they share. It’s never a bad thing to take
care of yourself, and you get to choose what you allow into your life.
“You’re too sensitive.”
“You cry too much.” “You’re too emotional.” Empaths spend a lot of time
hearing these phrases throughout their childhood, and sometimes even
well into adulthood.
Instead of support, empaths often have to go down a road of scrutiny.
They learn that there is a cycle of growth we all have to go through -
we let the world in (we get hurt), we block the world out (we hurt
ourselves), and return to letting the world in again (but with
boundaries in place.)
Empath sensitivity and heightened emotional awareness is not a bad
thing, and it is certainly not a weakness. It takes real strength to
feel everything so deeply. Do you have any empaths in your life? Share this article with them and show them how much they mean to you.
Psychic Abilities Everyone Can Unlock
Since the start of recorded history, psychic abilities have been documented, exposing the supernatural gift that some possess to look beyond the physical world and reach into the spiritual one.
Throughout the past, our mental abilities have been a topic of mystery; often being attributed to certain individuals’ ability to control matter simply by thought, giving birth to numerous supernatural theories related to Alchemy and prophecies, communicating with non-physical entities, travelling outside of one’s physical body, supernatural healing, supernatural levels of strength, hypnosis, telekinesis and much more.
We know fo sure that the mind is capable of extraordinary things, but yet we have been surprised again and again by it.
Perhaps, the unknown capabilities of the human brain are yet to be found, feats of unnatural mental abilities becoming common practice in the future. In this video, we'll discuss a small fraction of the known psychic abilities we as human all possess and simply need to develop in order to use them. Let's start.
These binding forces are not dependent upon personal knowledge or beliefs. By simply taking the ACTION to perform the ritual, the effects and results are achieved, and therefore the people who performed the ritual are bound to whatever the ritual is designed to do.
Christmas is saturated with occult symbolism linked to dark magic that is designed to bind you to the Christmas contract. This contract is used by the Dark Forces to drain your energy and enslave your soul.
However, when you become aware of it and remove your consent and stop performing the ritual known as Christmas, the magic spells of the Christmas contract cannot harm you anymore. Be aware that magic can be used for good or evil purposes.
If you have a hard time believing that magic is real, read my informative article titled How Words Can Be Used as Magic Spells. This article gives you a short introduction to how magic works. If you plan to celebrate Christmas, it would be wise to mediate before doing so.
During meditation, tell the Universe that you refuse to give your consent to the Dark Forces. Furthermore, tell the Universe that you are getting together on December 25th to spend time with your family and friends, not to celebrate Christmas.
When you say these things, your mind generates energy signatures and then projects them out into the Universe. These energy signatures tell the Dark Forces that you are aware of their Christmas contract and refuse to give them your consent.
If the Dark Forces do not honor your decision and harm you, they would violate your free will and therefore would have to face the consequences for their actions. All thoughts, intentions, and actions are known by the Universe and there is no escaping its laws.
I will be writing my own article about the hidden secrets of Christmas in about a week, so if you are interested in the occult version of Christmas, keep an eye out for it. - PL Chang
Is Christmas really magic mushroom, sun and Saturn worship in disguise?
Christmas has come around again, and as we all scurry about hanging lights and stars everywhere, and adorning our trees with red and white ornaments, how many of us reflect on the occult origins of Christmas? How many of us realize that this merry festival has roots, in fact, in ancient traditions of magic mushrooms, Saturn worship and sun worship?
Jesus again pictured in religious artwork with magic mushrooms [beneath his feet]
Today’s Christmas is truly a hodgepodge of ancient rituals and celebrations, with roots as far back as 4000 years to the Mesopotamians. This is not surprising, for Christianity itself is a borrowed religion, built on top of previous Coptic (Egyptian), Mesopotamian and Babylonian religions.
Christmas really has nothing to do with the alleged historical birthday of a human called Jesus. Let’s take a look at some of the traditions which have formed Christmas, so we can gain a deeper understanding of its symbolism.
The Christmas-Magic Mushroom Connection
John Allegro was a free-thinking Dead Sea Scrolls scholar and archeologist. In 1970 he wrote a fascinating and highly controversial book entitled The Sacred Mushroom and the Cross, whose subtitle was A Study of the Nature and Origins of Christianity within the Fertility Cults of the Ancient Near East. In it he put forth the unique idea that Christianity was an expression of an ancient cult which worshipped sex and mushrooms.
To straight-laced scholars and prim-and-proper Christian apologists, this idea was simply too much for them to contemplate, but Allegro (left) provided an impressive amount of evidence to back his claims.
He showed how the mushroom – specifically the red-and-white magic mushroom Amanita muscaria – came up again and again in Christian art.
He explained how the Eucharist – where Christians believe the bread wafer is transformed into the body of Christ – is a re-enactment of the sacred ceremony of ingesting the flesh of the Amanita magic mushroom.
Allegro argued that the entire story of the Jesus in the Gospels was a code for the ancient journey of conscious self-exploration, the hallucinogenic “trip”.
You can imagine how the majority of people reacted to his “sex-and-mushroom cult” theory in 1970 in England!
Yet his ideas have merit. James Arthur and others after Allegro further developed the idea of the Christmas-magic mushroom connection.
Amanitas are also linked to fertility and sex; they have a sexual appearance, representing both the male and female. At different stages of their growth life cycle, they resemble a phallus, breast and yoni.
It is interesting to note that Jesus pictured in religious artwork with amanita mushrooms around him. Is the red-and-white Santa Claus or St. Nicholas a modern representation of the village shaman who had the knowledge of pharmacopeia? Is the holy grail actually the mature Amanita with its edges curled up?
Is the Amanita magic mushroom the fabled Holy Grail?
Were Amanitas the source of power and insight for the old ruling class of priests? And perhaps most importantly, what part does the Amanita play in humanity’s origins and the extraterrestrial Annunaki who were mining for “gold”? These are interesting questions to ponder as you decorate your tree in red-and-white with mushroom ornaments this year.
Note: Masonic and other insider have stated that the 'Holy Grail' actually has nothing to do with a cup or grail, that it is a veiled reference to the 'Royal Bloodlines'.
The Christmas-Sun Worship Connection
Thanks to groundbreaking research of investigators like Jordan Maxwell (whose work was the basis of one major segment of the hit movie Zeitgeist), people have begun to become aware of the link between Christmas and sun worship.
At its core, the Illuminati and secret societies that run the world are deeply into black magic, which, defined, is the use of mostly unseen and unknown forces to gain power and control over others. The Illuminati are black magicians.
They utilize certain powers and then, through their control of the media and academia, put out disinformation and lies to prevent people from believing in and accessing those very powers, lest their power base be eroded.
A typical Christian art interpretation of Jesus. Note the sun cross at the back
Christmas is all about the birth of the “son”. But what if it is actually the birth or rebirth of the “sun”? A sun that goes through a “spring”, ascends to a height (summer solstice), then goes through a “fall” (autumn)? Christianity tells us that Jesus the son is our savior. Yet literally speaking the “sun” is our savior; without the sun there would be little or no life on Earth.
So it is only natural that sun worship was practiced by early cultures all over the world, especially in the keys days following the winter solstice, when the sun disappears over the horizon in northern latitudes for 3 days. Jesus was dead for the 3 days. Is this the symbolic “death” of the sun?
December 25th is the first day when the son or sun makes his triumphant return. Many people make fun of early religions and brand them as primitive, without actually realizing that Christianity itself has either stolen or built upon (depending on your viewpoint) these exact traditions.
Is it purely a coincidence that the date of Christmas is always December 25th every year, exactly 3 days after the 22nd (or night of the 21st), the date of winter solstice? Is it another coincidence that Jesus is pictured everywhere throughout Christian art on top of a sun cross, showing the sun’s journey through the 4 seasons every year? Is Christmas an elaborate ritual to lure back the “prodigal sun” from death?
The Christmas-Saturn Worship Connection
Finally, we come to the Saturn connection. The Christmas-Saturn connection is far from the only connection Saturn has with many modern (dark) activities. Saturn is the ancient roman god of time, harvest, law, tyranny and death. In the ancient Greek pantheon he was Chronos, meaning time, and from which we get words like chronological.
Saturnalia was an ancient Roman festival in honour of the deity Saturn, held on 17 December of the Julian calendar and later expanded with festivities through to 23 December. The holiday was celebrated with a sacrifice at the Temple of Saturn, in the Roman Forum, and a public banquet, followed by private gift-giving, continual partying, and a carnival atmosphere that overturned Roman social norms: gambling was permitted, and masters provided table service for their slaves.[1] The poet Catullus called it "the best of days."
For those investigating the global conspiracy, Saturn has particular significance. Why? Because Saturn – and what it represents – is the object of worship of some of the secret societies that are running the planet today. Indeed, the worship of Saturn is a theme running through the priest, the lawyer and the academic classes, as can be seen by the use of gowns and square mortarboards in the color of black – Saturn’s color.
To quote Jordan Maxwell:
“When you graduate from high school you come out processionally with a black robe … and wear the square mortarboard on top of your head. The square mortarboards are, of course, used by the Freemasons for their plaster, so that is why you wear a square mortarboard when you graduate, ultimately becoming an Alumni. It all has to do with Freemasonry; it all has to do with the control of education in this country.”
In the early first centuries A.D., Saturn had a very strong presence in the most powerful city in the world: Rome. Every year from December 17th to 25th, there was a wild, licentious festival in his honor, named Saturnalia.
For these 8 days of the year, people would cut loose in a period of utter lawlessness; Roman courts were closed and Roman law dictated that no one could be punished for damaging property or injuring people during the festival.
There was widespread intoxication, people running around naked, rape and orgies. There was even human sacrifice – a theme that continues to underly some of the strange, dark rituals practiced by today’s ruling elite at places like Bohemian Grove.
According to some sources, Christmas was invented to compete with the pagan celebrations like Saturnalia, because it was just so popular. It was a successful strategy. Over time, the Church adopted many pagan rituals in their attempt to make Christianity more attractive to converts.
What Does Christmas Mean to You?
Ultimately, we all imbue our lives and activities with our own sense of meaning. You can decide what Christmas means to you.
However, it is always good to be aware of the occult origins and hidden symbolism of traditions and events, for as Confucius said, the world is ruled by signs and symbols, not words or law. Symbols communicate directly with our subconscious and guide our lives from behind the scenes, so choose consciously to which things you give your attention and energy.
The US Space Force Swore In Its First “Chief Of Space Operations” + Navy Patents UFO-Like Compact Nuclear Fusion Reactor And Hybrid Space / Sea Crafts December 24 2024 | From: TheMindUnleashed / Zerohedge / Various
The U.S. Space Force is now a very real thing. [ Historical But Relevant ]
Recently, US Air Force General John “Jay” Raymond was sworn in as the chief of Space Operations for the new United States Space Force.
While it was initially reported as somewhat of a joke when Donald Trump first announced it, the U.S. Space Force is a very real thing and is now the seventh military branch of the Pentagon.
Important Notice:The computer that is used to put the articles together for this website has a failing hard drive. On the weekend it seemed to have completely died.
While currently still limping along - it is running on borrowed time and its quite likely that within the next week or so that updating this website will not be possible unless resources can be found to remedy the situation.
Service may be interrupted.
Sincere thanks to those who have assisted in the interim.
On Tuesday, Raymond was sworn in by Vice President Pence at his ceremonial office.
“It is President Trump’s belief that the United States must remain as dominant in space as we are on land and sea and the air. And your charge is to see to that mission with the United States Space Force,” Pence said during the ceremony.
Raymond responded by saying, “Mr. Vice President, we have our marching orders and we are moving out.
We do not want a conflict to begin or extend into space, we want to deter that conflict from happening. The best way I know how to do that is to do so from a position of strength.”
The Space Force will be comprised of roughly 16,000 officers and other personnel from the U.S. Air Force and U.S. Space Command.
In fact Raymond is himself a commander of both the Air Force Space Command and the U.S. Space Command, possibly signaling that these agencies will be working very closely and consisting of many of the same members.
In addition to the personnel from other agencies the Space Force was granted $40 million through the 2020 National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA).
Comment: What is really going on here with this 'Space Force'? Well... a number of people (including David Wilcock) have been releasing information on what have been termed a number of Secret Space Programs that have been running since as early as WWII.
It certainly does appear that full disclosure in regard to these programs is on the way, running on a concurrent timeline with the exposure and take-down of what many refer to as the Cabal / Illuminati...
And the establishment of the US 'Space Force' seems to be a way to begin educating the uninformed masses of what has actually been transpiring off-planet... And honestly what else could it be?
NASA does nothing anymore...
Read on carefully and check the links out.
Trump is expected to hold a meeting with Pentagon officials to discuss uniform and logo details for the new agency.
The meeting will include Defense Secretary Mark T. Esper, Air Force Secretary Barbara Barrett, and the new chief of Space Operations Jay Raymond.
The Trump administration is also planning on sending a legislative proposal to Congress for the fiscal year of 2021 which would create National Guard and Reserve units for the Space Force.
The proposal also seeks to consolidate other space-related organizations in the government under the Space Force banner including the Space Development Agency.
United States Air Force: Space Force Now
Gen. John W. Raymond became the first ever Chief of Space Operations. Vice President Mike Pence swore him in during a ceremony at the White House.
One day after the series premiere of CBS's Star Trek: Picard - which star and executive producer Patrick Stewart said would be a rebuke of 'President Donald Trump and Brexit,"
Trump unveiled the official logo for the United States Space Force, "the Sixth Branch of our Magnificent Military!"
Navy Patents UFO-Like Compact Nuclear Fusion Reactor And Hybrid Space / Sea Crafts
A mysterious set of patents filed recently by a U.S Navy researcher has caught the eyes of technologists and conspiracy theorists alike.
These patents describe exotic technologies that do not exist in the commercial or military spheres - as far as we know - and that usually only surface in UFO lore, including high-energy electromagnetic force fields, revolutionary propulsion systems, and a “hybrid aerospace-underwater craft.”
The newest patent is for a practical fusion reactor that could be stored in aircraft to help achieve unimaginable speeds and maneuverability.
The mystery around these patents continues to grow during a time in which the Navy and State Department have stunningly reversed their decades-old policy of not acknowledging UFO sightings.
Perhaps the most surprising patent concerns the “hybrid aerospace-underwater craft,” which can supposedly navigate with equal precision through space, air, and water with no heat signature and “engineer the fabric of our reality at the most fundamental level.”
In the patents filed, Pais has revealed that Chinese scientists are already way ahead of the United States in such fields.
The reason this is a shocking admission is because military personnel, Navy officers, and air pilots have for years reported USOs (unidentified submerged objects) that seem to fly in and out of the sea at incomphrensible speeds.
The newest patent teases the discovery of the “Holy Grail” of energy production, the long sought nuclear fusion reactor, which could revolutionize life on Earth by creating a sustainable long-term fuel source and reduce radioactive waste and greenhouse gas emissions.
Currently, scientists do not know how to manage systems that utilize high-pressure plasma in the range of hundreds of millions of degrees Fahrenheit and can only create split second controlled nuclear fusion reactions.
However, the patent for Pais’ “Plasma Compression Fusion Device,” which was only disclosed September 26, 2019 states:
“At present there are few envisioned fusion reactors/devices that come in a small, compact package (ranging from 0.3 to 2 meters in diameter) and typically they use different versions of plasma magnetic confinement.
Three such devices are the Lockheed Martin (LM) Skunk Works Compact Fusion Reactor (LM-CFR) , the EMC2 Polywell fusion concept, and the Princeton Field-Reversed Configuration (PFRC) machine. […]
These devices feature short plasma confinement times, possible plasma instabilities with the scaling of size, and it is questionable whether they have the ability of achieving the break – even fusion condition, let alone a self-sustained plasma burn leading to ignition.”
Pais states that this technology would be capable of producing as much as a terawatt (1 trillion watts) of power, which vastly surpasses America’s largest current nuclear power plant.
While it’s not known whether such technology is possible at all, much less in a compact structure, we do know that the U.S. military and private firms like Lockheed Martin are competing with the government run-Chinese Academy of Sciences to create the world’s first compact nuclear reactor.
Faking Medical Reality December 23 2024 | From: JonRappoport / Various “It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines. I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine.” - Marcia Angell, MD
“The secret of acting is sincerity. If you can fake that, you’ve got it made.” - George Burns
The faking of medical reality is, at bottom, an operation designed to bolster the power of the medical cartel, one of the most important forces on the planet.
What do doctors rely on? What do medical schools rely on? What do medical journals and mainstream medical reporters and drug companies and the FDA rely on?
The sanctity of published clinical trials of drugs. These trials determine whether the drugs are safe and effective. The drugs are tested on human volunteers. The results are tabulated. The trial is described in a paper that is printed by a medical journal.
This is science. This is rationality. This is the rock. Without these studies, the whole field of medical research would fall apart in utter chaos.
Upon this rock, and hence through media, the public becomes aware of the latest breakthrough, the newest medicine.
Through doctors in their offices, the public finds out what drugs they should take - and their doctors know because their doctors have read the published reports in the medical journals, the reports that describe the clinical trials.
Or if the doctors haven’t actually read the reports, they’ve been told about them.
It all goes back to this rock.
And when mainstream advocates attack so-called alternative or natural health, they tend to mention that their own sacred profession is based on real science, on studies, on clinical trials.
One doctor told me, “The clinical trials and published studies are what keep us from going back to the Stone Age.”
So now let me quote an article in the NY Review of Books (May 12, 2011) by Helen Epstein, “Flu Warning: Beware the Drug Companies.”
“Six years ago, John Ioannidis, a professor of epidemiology at the University of Ioannina School of Medicine in Greece, found that nearly half of published articles in scientific journals contained findings that were false, in the sense that independent researchers couldn’t replicate them.
The problem is particularly widespread in medical research, where peer-reviewed articles in medical journals can be crucial in influencing multimillion- and sometimes multibillion-dollar spending decisions.
It would be surprising if conflicts of interest did not sometimes compromise editorial neutrality, and in the case of medical research, the sources of bias are obvious.
Most medical journals receive half or more of their income from pharmaceutical company advertising and reprint orders, and dozens of others [journals] are owned by companies like Wolters Kluwer, a medical publisher that also provides marketing services to the pharmaceutical industry.”
“The FDA also relies increasingly upon fees and other payments from the pharmaceutical companies whose products the agency is supposed to regulate.
This could contribute to the growing number of scandals in which the dangers of widely prescribed drugs have been discovered too late. Last year, GlaxoSmithKline’s diabetes drug Avandia was linked to thousands of heart attacks, and earlier in the decade, the company’s antidepressant Paxil was discovered to exacerbate the risk of suicide in young people.
Merck’s painkiller Vioxx was also linked to thousands of heart disease deaths. In each case, the scientific literature gave little hint of these dangers.
The companies have agreed to pay settlements in class action lawsuits amounting to far less than the profits the drugs earned on the market.
These precedents could be creating incentives for reduced vigilance concerning the side effects of prescription drugs in general.”
Also from the NY Review of Books, here are two quotes from Marcia Angell, former editor-in-chief of The New England Journal of Medicine, perhaps the most prestigious medical journal in the world. (“Drug Companies and Doctors: A Story of Corruption”)
“Consider the clinical trials by which drugs are tested in human subjects.
Before a new drug can enter the market, its manufacturer must sponsor clinical trials to show the Food and Drug Administration that the drug is safe and effective, usually as compared with a placebo or dummy pill.
The results of all the trials (there may be many) are submitted to the FDA, and if one or two trials are positive - that is, they show effectiveness without serious risk - the drug is usually approved, even if all the other trials are negative.”
“In view of this control and the conflicts of interest that permeate the enterprise, it is not surprising that [drug] industry-sponsored trials published in medical journals consistently favor sponsors’ drugs - largely because negative results are not published, positive results are repeated in slightly different forms, and a positive spin is put on even negative results.
A review of seventy-four clinical trials of antidepressants, for example, found that thirty-seven of thirty-eight positive studies were published.
But of the thirty-six negative studies, thirty-three were either not published or published in a form that conveyed a positive outcome.”
It turns out that the source of the informational pipeline that feeds the entire perception of pharmaceutical medicine is a rank fraud.
It would be on the order of an intelligence agency discovering that the majority of its operatives were actually working for the other side.
And then continuing on with business as usual.
Sometimes the body is dead even though it keeps on walking. It can smile and nod and perform basic functions - a zombie - but it is doing so only because certain implacable criminals back it up and give it a machine-like force.
Starfield concludes that 225,000 people are killed by the medical system in the US every year - 106,000 by FDA-approved medicines. That latter figure would work out to over a MILLION deaths per decade.
A Final Note: The august editors of medical journals have a game they can play. Suppose a drug company has just finished writing up the results of a clinical drug trial and has submitted the piece to a journal for publication.
The editor knows the company carried out a half-dozen other such trials on the same drug…and they didn’t look good. The drug caused wild fluctuations in blood pressure and blood sugar.
There were heart attacks. Strokes. But this ONE study, the one submitted for publication, looks very positive.
The editor knows if he prints it and forgets about “ethics,” the drug company will order re-prints of the piece from him and distribute them to doctors all over the world, and to reporters, professors, government officials.
The drug company will order and pay for so many re-prints, the medical journal can make $700,000 from publishing THAT ONE STUDY. Let’s see.
In one hand, the editor sees: I won’t publish it = no money. In the other hand, he sees: I’ll publish it=$700,000. What to do?
Faking Medical Reality
Here is yet another way to do medical studies that guarantee a waterfall of lies will spread out far and wide. Another way to make the studies look good when they aren’t.
Let’s say you went into a school to see if it was a good place for your child to acquire a real education. And you were shown overall performance records of the students on standardized tests, and these records looked quite impressive.
Upon inquiring a little further, though, you came across an interesting point. The head of the school believed that some students just didn’t perform well on tests - and so he had excused them from taking any exams.
The World Health Organization (WHO) was founded with the aim of building a healthier future for people all over the world. Whether it’s the effects of smoking, the Swine flu pandemic or a nuclear disaster, the WHO is the body we rely on to advise on and resolve a public health crisis.
But can it be trusted?
Trust Who documents filmmaker Lilian Franck’s quest to discover what lies behind the altruistic façade of the world’s largest public health body. What she uncovers is an alarming picture of corruption and opacity.
This powerful investigative doc shines a light on how industry lobbies have infiltrated the WHO and asks whether the organisation can be trusted to keep the public healthy.
Shocked, you said to him, “Your performance records are a sham. They don’t reflect the truth. You’ve stacked the deck.”
And he replied, “Not at all. I’ve merely kept statistics on those pupils who have the ability to take tests. That’s the important population. The others shouldn’t be tested at all. In this venue, they don’t count.”
Keep that analogy in mind as we proceed.
I want to alert you to a staggering medical practice in clinical trials of psychiatric drugs.
It’s called “placebo washout.”
Basically, it works this way. Before a drug company starts to test the effectiveness of a new medicine they want to market, they bring together all the volunteers - and they give them a sugar pill.
They tell them, “We’re going to give you a sugar pill.”
After a ten-day period on the placebo, the researchers weed out the people who improved, got better, feel better. They dump them from the ensuing clinical trial. Bye bye.
They don’t want these people around for the real clinical trial that is to follow.
Of course, they claim there are good reasons for this washout strategy. But the fact is, eliminating these volunteers from the study makes it far more likely that the drug being tested will look good, when it shouldn’t.
It’s real. They give everybody a sugar pill, and then they dismiss all those who got better on it.
Then they get down to the actual clinical trial. They divide the remaining volunteers into two groups. Those who will receive the drug, and those who will be given another placebo.
Nobody is told which group they’re going to be in. That’s the whole point. Blinding the study enables researchers to compare the number of people who get better on the drug with those who get better on the placebo.
You see, it’s common knowledge that some people will get better on anything. That’s why they form the two groups. They have to prove (to the FDA) the drug is performing better than the sugar pill.
General estimates vary on what percentage of people get better on placebos. 35-45%, some researchers say, is a rule of thumb. Sometimes the % is higher.
But wait! The researchers ALREADY kicked out the people who got better on the sugar pill during the 10-day preliminary washout!
Well, in the actual clinical trial, where half the people get the placebo and half get the medicine, some people who get the placebo - armed with the hope that they might be getting the medicine - will feel better, even though they’re only swallowing sugar pills.
And the researchers must show that more people who are getting the drug are feeling better than those who are getting the placebo.
That’s the whole reason for this type of clinical trial.
“See, 47 people who took the drug feel better. And only 22 people who took the sugar pill feel better. Therefore, the drug really works.”
Sure it works. Because you already kicked out all the people who felt better on a placebo in the washout phase.
In effect, you did a screening. You “cut out the competition.”
It’s like saying, “We have a great runner on our team. His times in the 100-meter dash are exceptional…there’s only one thing. In track meets, we insist he run only 80 meters and you have to imagine it’s 100.”
The FDA, which approves all drugs for public use, knows all about the placebo washout con job. Researchers know this. Shrinks know this. Drug companies know this. Even some medical reporters know this.
And yet, the practice goes on.
Placebo washout is on the order of saying, “Yes, we tested the new plane and it performs magnificently. Of course, we didn’t put it into the air. We rolled it across the runway.”
If there are any psychiatrists out there who are reading this, any researchers who want to defend placebo washout, I suggest we set up a debate with Dr. Peter Breggin, psychiatrist and author. But I warn you. Buckle up. It’ll be a bumpy ride.
Placebo washout. Rigging the game. Stacking the deck. The bigger the lie and the more obvious it is, the harder it is to believe that’s what’s you’re looking at. Until you LOOK.
In my 30 years as a reporter, I’ve come across maybe 100 scandals that could cause a significant sector of the medical cartel to burst into flames and blow away in the wind. This is one of those.
Of course, media, government, and drug corporations make sure such a thing never happens. And when I say media, I’m including publications you’d think would love to watch a really good fire. Turns out they have no stomach for it.
NOTE: In case you’re still a little shaky on this scam, let me lay it out this way:
A drug company has a new drug, Gx, for depression. It’s not on the market yet. For that they need FDA approval, and the approval rests on the results of a clinical trial the company is going to launch.
The company signs up 500 volunteers, all of whom meet mainstream criteria for a diagnosis of clinical depression.
The company brings together the 500 volunteers and administers them a sugar pill (placebo) for 10 days. Everybody knows it’s a sugar pill.
After 10 days, the company discovers which of the 500 people responded well to the pill: placebo effect. Let’s say 80 people did. They feel better. Boom. They’re dumped from further consideration. They’re gone.
Why? Because chances are very good that, were they allowed on to the next phase, those among them who ended up with the sugar pill would have said, “Wow, I feel better. I feel less depressed.”
And THAT means the people who were given the actual drug, Gx, would be “up against stiffer competition” from the group who took the placebo.
After those 80 people were booted from the placebo washout phase, with 420 volunteers left, they were divided into 2 groups of 210 each, and then 210 got the drug, Gx, and 210 got a sugar pill.
None of the volunteers knows what they’re getting. This phase of the trial goes on for 6 weeks. At the end of that period, the study is “unblinded,” and everyone knows who got which pill.
Now, among the placebo group of 210, it turns out that 60 showed significant improvement, and among the group of 210 who got Gx, 85 showed improvement.
The researchers conclude, “Those on Gx performed significantly better than those on placebo. This drug is good.”
But had those original 80, who were kicked to the side of the road after the placebo washout phase, been included in this later phase, the conclusions of the researchers could have turned out quite badly for the drug and the drug company.
Gx could have performed no better than the sugar pill. It could have done worse.
Scientists Explain How Earth’s Magnetic Field Connects All Living Systems December 22 2024 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various
Science has recently shed light on the fact that what we used to perceive as ‘human’ aura is actually real.
All of our bodies emit an electromagnetic field, and this fact plays a very important role far beyond what is commonly known when it comes to understanding our biology, and the interconnectedness we share with all life.
For example, did you know that the heart emits the largest electromagnetic field of all the body’s major organs? These fields and the information encoded into them can change based on how we are feeling, what we thinking, and different emotions we take on.
In Brief:
The Facts: Earth, as well as all other living systems, have a magnetic field and scientists are discovering that these fields connect us all, and actually carry biologically relevant information.
Reflect On: This information is suggesting that, not only can your actions affect yourself and others around you as well, but so can you thoughts, feelings and emotions. The way you feel changes the information coded into your magnetic field.
The heart even sends signals to the brain through a system of neurons that have both short-term and long-term memory, and these signals can affect our emotional experiences.
The emotional information that’s modulated and coded into these fields changes their nature, and these fields can impact those around us. As Rollin McCraty, Ph.D, and director of research at The HeartMath Institute tell us, “we are fundamentally and deeply connected with each other and the planet itself.”
"Research findings have shown that as we practice heart coherence and radiate love and compassion, our heart generates a coherent electromagnetic wave into the local field environment that facilitates social coherence, whether in the home, workplace, classroom or sitting around a table.
As more individuals radiate heart coherence, it builds an energetic field that makes it easier for others to connect with their heart.
So, theoretically it is possible that enough people building individual and social coherence could actually contribute to an unfolding global coherence."
The quote above comes from Dr. Deborah Rozman, the President of Quantum Intech.
We are living in exciting times when it comes to science, and although not emphasized and studied in the mainstream as much as we’d like, science is acknowledging that we are all part of a giant web of connections that, not only encompasses life on this planet, but our entire solar system and what lies beyond it.
So, what exactly is heart coherence? Well, it implies order, structure, and as Dr. Rozman puts it, “an alignment within and amongst systems – whether quantum particle, organisms, human beings, social groups, planets or galaxies.
This harmonious order signifies a coherent system whose optimal functioning is directly related to the ease and flow in its processes.” Basically, feelings of love, gratitude, appreciation and other ‘positive’ emotions not only have an effect on our nervous system, but they have an affect on those around us, far beyond what we might have previously thought.
It’s similar to the studies that have been conducted regarding mass meditation and prayer. As far as their effects on physical systems, numerous publications have yielded statistically significant results.
For a selected list of downloadable peer-reviewed journal articles reporting studies of this type of phenomena, mostly published in the 21st century, you can click here.
Another point that illustrates the importance of coherence is the fact that several organizations around the world have conducted synchronized meditations, prayers, intention experiments, and more. A number of studies have shown that collective meditations, prayer or focused intention directed toward a certain positive outcome can have measurable effects.
For example, one study was done during the Israel-Lebanon war in the 1980s. Two Harvard University professors organized groups of experienced meditators in Jerusalem, Yugoslavia, and the United states with the specific purpose of focusing attention on the area of conflict at various intervals over a 27-month period.
During the course of the study, the levels of violence in Lebanon decreased between 40 and 80 percent each time a meditating group was in place. The average number of people killed during the war each day dropped from 12 to three, and war-related injuries fell by 70 percent.
Another great example is a study that was conducted in 1993 in Washington, D.C., which showed a 25 percent drop in crime rates when 2,500 meditators meditated during a specific periods of time with that intention.
"Every individual’s energy affects the collective field environment. The means each person’s emotions and intentions generate an energy that affects the field.
A first step in diffusing societal stress in the global field is for each of us to take personal responsibility for our own energies. We can do this by increasing our personal coherence and raising our vibratory rate, which helps us become more conscious of the thoughts, feelings, and attitudes that we are feeding the field each day.
We have a choice in every moment to take to heart the significance of intentionally managing our energies. This is the free will or local freedom that can create global cohesion."
– Dr. Rozman
The Global Coherence Initiative (GCI)
The GCI in an international cooperative effort to help activate the heart of humanity and facilitate a shift in global consciousness.
It’s primary focuses are to invite people to participate by actively adding more heart-coherent love, care, and compassion into the planetary field.
The second is scientific research on how we are all energetically connected with each other and the planet, and how we can utilize this interconnectivity, which is very real, to raise our personal vibration to assist in creating a better world.
The hypotheses of the researchers and scientists behind this process are as follows:
The Earth’s magnetic fields are a carrier of biologically relevant information that connects all living systems
Every person affects this global information field. Large numbers of people creating heart-coherent states of love, appreciation, care, and compassion can generate a more coherent field environment that benefits others and helps off-set the current planetary discord and incoherence
There is a feedback loop between human beings and Earth’s energetic/magnetic systems
Earth has several sources of magnetic fields that affect us all. Two of them are the geomagnetic field that emanates from the core of the Earth, and the fields that exist between Earth and the ionosphere. These fields surround the entire planet and act as protective shields blocking out the harmful effects of solar radiation, cosmic rays, sand, and other forms of space weather. Without these fields, ice as we know it could not exist on Earth. They are part of the dynamic ecosystem of our planet
Think about the current state of our planet. We are definitely not in coherence, with all of the violence, war, hate, and greed that still plague our planet, we have a lot of work to do.
We do not yet know how these thoughts, emotions, and feelings are affecting the entire planet, and what type of information these experiences are encoding into once electromagnetic fields, and how it is interacting with that of the Earth’s.
Things are changing, however. There is definitely a shift within people who are desiring a better experience here on planet Earth.
These energetic fields are known to scientists, but there are still many unknowns. Solar activity and the rhythms taking place on Earth’s magnetic fields have an impact on health and behaviour. This is firmly established in scientific literature.
Scientific literature also firmly establishes that several physiological rhythms and global collective behaviours are not only synchronized with solar and geomagnetic activity, but that disruptions in these fields can create adverse effects on human health and behaviour.
"When the Earth’s magnetic field environment is distributed it can cause sleep problems, mental confusion, usual lack of energy or a feeling of being on edge or overwhelmed for no apparent reason.
At other times, when the Earth’s fields are stable and certain measures of solar activity are increased, people report increased positive feelings and more creativity and inspiration.
This is likely due to a coupling between the human brain, cardiovascular and nervous system with resonating geomagnetic frequencies."
The Earth and ionosphere generate frequencies that range from 0.01 hertz to 300 hertz, some of which are in the exact same frequency range as the one happening in our brain, cardiovascular system, and autonomic nervous system.
This fact is one way to explain how fluctuations in the Earth’s and Sun’s magnetic fields can influence us. Changes in these fields have also been shown to affect our brain waves, heart rhythms, memory, athletics performance, and overall health.
Changes in the Earth’s fields from extreme solar activity have been linked to some of humanity’s greatest creations of art, as well as some of its most tragic events.
We know how these fields affect us, but what about how we affect these fields?
That’s the real question here. GCI scientists believe that because brain wave and heart rhythm frequencies overlap the Earth’s field resonance, we are not just receivers of biologically relevant information, but also feed information into the global field, thus creating a feedback loop with the Earth’s magnetic fields.
"Research is indicating that human emotions and consciousness encode information into the geomagnetic field and this encoded information is distributed globally.
The Earth’s magnetic fields act as carrier waves for this information which influences all living systems and the collective consciousness."
This research, which is still in its infancy, has great ramifications. It will further push along the fact that our attitudes, emotions, and intentions actually matter, a lot, and that these factors within the realm of non-material science can affect all life on Earth.
Coherent, cooperative intention could impact global events and improve the quality of life on Earth. Practicing love, gratitude, appreciation, and bettering ourselves as individuals is one out of many action steps towards changing our planet for the better.
So What Can You Do?
So, next time you are upset, angry, or frustrated, try observing yourself and how you react. It’s great practice to try and lose your buttons so they cannot be pushed, and work on your personal development.
You have to do whatever you can to feel good, which could include exercise, eating healthy, minimizing electronics time, spending time with friends, animals, and more.
You could practice being less judgemental, and work on your intentions by figuring out if they are coming from a ‘good’ place. You could be more grateful, you could help others, and you can treat others how they want to be treated.
There are a number of tools you could use, like meditation, for example, to assist you with these action steps. Bottom line, if you are at peace with yourself, and have control over your emotions, you are helping the planet and others around you. If you are constantly angry, harming others or have negative intentions, you could be doing the exact opposite.
To further your research on this topic, an excellent place to start is the at the Institute of HeartMath.
The Institute of HeartMath is an internationally recognized nonprofit research and education organization dedicated to helping people reduce stress, self-regulate emotions, and build energy and resilience for healthy, happy lives.
Lucifer Revisited: The Testimony Of Eracidni Murev Te & Christopher Lee Describes The Power Of Satanic Rituals In 1975 Video
December 21 2024 | From: CollectiveEvolution / VigilantCitizen / Various The 7-part Lucifer Series I wrote last summer for CE, based on the testimony of an alleged bloodline family insider, has garnered vastly more reader emails than any other article I have written.
This speaks to a great interest on the part of our readers in the discussion of the metaphysical and spiritual underpinnings of our life here on Earth, of the nature of Good and Evil.
As such, I am taking the opportunity here to continue this conversation by diving into the testimony of another alleged insider who claims to be part of an esoteric group that provides a ‘counterbalance’ to the activities of the individuated Lucifer Group Soul on the planet.
In Brief:
The Facts: Interesting testimony from an insider who claims to belong to a group that serves as a 'counterbalance' to the incarnated Lucifer soul group on this planet recently appeared in the 'Godlike Productions' Forum.
Reflect On: Are we willing to stretch our paradigm of reality in order to consider testimony that purports to present deeper truths about how the world and the universe work?
This individual, who uses the handle Eracidni Murev Te (trans: ‘to share in truth’), is saying that he represents an incarnated group on the ‘positive’ side that serves to keep the ‘negative’ Lucifer group in check, although this individual is careful to use such dualities as positive/negative, good/evil and dark / light in the relative sense rather than in an absolute sense.
I highly recommend reading my Lucifer Series before embarking on this testimony, simply because I will not be fully repeating the context created there within this series.
Whether or not this individual is who he says he is should be an important question for any discerning mind.
It is not the only factor in determining the value of his testimony, but we should look carefully at the credibility and self-consistency of what he says in order to determine if we believe he has direct access to what he speaks about or is simply someone well-versed in esoteric and occult knowledge based on his careful reading of his own recommended book list (The Kybalion, the Emerald Tablets, the Dao, and the Law of One / Ra material).
If you have read the Lucifer series you will recall that the individual that posted answers to questions on the ‘Above Top Secret’ forum in October 2008 went by the moniker ‘Hidden-Hand’ and claimed to be a generational member of one of the ruling bloodline families.
His explanation for why he, being part of the covert dark side, would have any reason or motivation to speak the truth of what is going on, is as follows:
"Every so often, as per the directives of the Law of our Creator, a brief window of opportunity opens, whereby a select handful of our Family are required to make communication with our subjects, and offer you the chance to ask us any questions you would like answered."
Our new source Eracidni Murev Te (who I will refer to as EMT) started posting on the ‘Godlike Productions’ Forum in December 2018 and had a similar if not more convoluted reasoning for coming out to share profound hidden truths with us:
"Every so often, the opportunity arises for our counterbalance to share with the world certain aspects of being and how our world is run that traditionally have been hidden. They are obligated to use this opportunity to do so by Fundamental Law and a compromise made long ago – with us.
Recently, our counterbalance informed us the “Karmic” cost of the last diffusion was greater than anticipated and declined to participate this year. We agreed to accept responsibility in their place for the time being.
We are a much smaller and much less politically-positioned group tasked with, well, record keeping. However, the nature of our tasks puts us in a unique position to fulfill the duty of our counterpart.
As such, I am here to share that which the questions allow."
My first impression from reading this was that it was a gimmick being used by the writer to insert himself into the story of the ruling bloodlines by casting himself and his (much smaller) group as a ‘counterbalance’ to the activities of the Lucifer Group Soul - something that I don’t recall reading anything about in the Hidden-Hand material.
That said, it’s worth suspending disbelief long enough to properly analyze the entire set of threads to see if the wisdom is consistently laced with that other-worldly quality about it.
As truth-seekers we should leave no stone unturned, and of great interest to me is to see if there are some new and profound insights brought in through this testimony.
EMT made it a point to reference ‘Fundamental Law’ in his introduction before answering any questions:
"If you ask a question in accordance with Fundamental Law, I will answer.
If your question is not in accordance with Fundamental Law, I will say so and answer as much as your question permits. I will not provide false answers to any question."
In the initial Q/A that came from a forum participant, we can get more insight into what this ‘Fundamental Law’ refers to:
Q:Why now?
EMT: Recently, we all have “leveled-up,” so to speak. When this happens, it is sometimes necessary to provide wisdom and information about the new modalities of being available to “individuals” so that the transition happens smoothly. It happens to be that the last several times this has happened diffusion was deemed appropriate.
Q:How long until 5D?
EMT: This both is and isn’t up to you and everyone else. I cannot fully answer this question because doing so would violate Fundamental Law.
Q:What can I do?
EMT: That depends on what you intend reality to be.
It seems as though ‘Fundamental Law’ here refers to human free will, and the conditions by which EMT is able to answer questions will be contingent on the answer not impinging on individual free will.
If he says that moving to 5D is preordained to occur on a certain date, for example, it might prevent people from doing the sometimes arduous personal work that is necessary for their personal evolution.
The ‘Law of One‘, material channeled from an entity called ‘Ra’ and regarded by some as one of the best sources of esoteric and spiritual truth, is a very good reference for this discussion.
It identifies free will, or finity, or the limit of the viewpoint, as the ‘first distortion’ (13.12, 15.21, 99.5).
The created universe that we experience is the Creator’s exploration of Itself through the first distortion, which Ra also calls the Law of Confusion (27.10).
In other words, free will is a distortion of Unity / Oneness, which is ultimate reality, and has been manufactured into our reality through limiting our perception of the One.
This does not make it ‘false’ as such, just limited to certain realms of existence, and extremely valuable in helping to foster a whole range of important experiences that are available to us as individuated human beings.
The fact that EMT has promised to be truthful but also respectful of individual free will is a good starting point for our deeper exploration of his content, and certainly in accord with the testimony of ‘Hidden-Hand’ that I wrote about previously.
Going forward, let’s suspend disbelief until we have a firm handle on what Eracidni Murev Te has to tell us.
What's The Difference Between Lucifer and Satan?
The Bible kind of wanders back and forth between definitions, conflating the various terms. Examples, for reference can be found:
But I think we're dealing with a bunch of cult-like superstitions and hearsay and folklore, that only partially contains overlap with actual reality.
That's why it's so messy and hard to sort out - like arguing the difference between Saint Nick and Kris Kringle which is the american santa claus. Anyway, that's all I have on that at the moment. Diving deep into what the Church of Satan teaches isn't my cup of tea to say the least.
Christopher Lee Describes The Power Of Satanic Rituals In 1975 Video
In this rare interview, actor Christopher Lee discusses the power of black magic and satanic rituals, adding that there’s “nothing fictitious” about them. He also explains why there was a resurgence of interest in occultism at the time. His answer remains fully relevant today.
Christopher Lee’s career in the film industry was a long and fruitful one.
While younger people know him for his role as Saruman in The Lord of the Rings and The Hobbit trilogies, Lee’s filmography goes way back (nearly 70 years) and includes a long list of movies and television shows (over 200).
When one looks at roles taken by Lee throughout his life, two constants emerge: He often played the role of the villain and he often played in movies with dark, occult themes.
For instance, Lee played the role of Count Dracula in eight movies, the last one being The Satanic Rites of Dracula (1973).
The Satanic Rites of Dracula begins with a satanic ritual taking place in an English country house with four prominent members of society: A government minister, a peer, a general and a famous scientist. Literally the occult elite
The least one can say is that Christopher Lee appeared to know a thing or two about black magic and satanic rituals.
In an interview about To the Devil a Daughter, Lee serves a lesson on black magic to the interviewer while explaining the power and the danger surrounding these rituals.
While the interview took place over 44 years ago, everything he says remains true and relevant today.
Related Articles:
Satanists Are Gaslighting Us
http://www.wakeupkiwi.com/news-articles-96.shtml#Gaslighting
Meet Naomi Seibt - The 19-Year-Old, Blond Antidote To Greta Thunberg
& NZ Government Begins National Climate Indoctrination Of Children
December 20 2024 | From: Zerohedge / GreatClimateDebate / Various In what is a somewhat shocking lead article, the Washington Post has written a feature on Naomi Seibt, a German climate skeptic and YouTuber that WaPo describes as “...19-year-old German who, like Greta, is blond, eloquent and European.”
"Naomi denounces “climate alarmism,” calls climate consciousness “a despicably anti-human ideology,” and has even deployed Greta’s now famous “How dare you?” line to take on the mainstream German media."
Of course, there is a reason why WaPo decided to show Naomi to the world... to set the narrative - that she is a climate-denying, right-wing racist...
"In addition to climate change, Naomi echoes far-right skepticism about feminism and immigration.
The German media have described her as sympathetic to the nationalist Alternative for Germany (AfD), the biggest opposition party in parliament, whose leaders have spoken of fighting “an invasion of foreigners.""
Naomi says she is not a member of AfD - she describes herself as libertarian - but acknowledges speaking at a recent AfD event.
"What the climate skeptics, or climate realists say, makes a lot of sense to me, scientifically,” Seibt said in the interview.
“And that's how I became really passionate about the topic.”
“I think this entire climate mainstream narrative is not about science at all. Because I would say that more than 90% of the people, especially the young people, who go to those Fridays for Future protests, they have no clue what they're actually talking about.
They don't know anything about the science behind it.
All they know is, this is the mainstream, and they are actually scared many of them I think that the planet is going to end like 12 years from now. And so, this is not about science. This is about politics. This is about controlling us."
As WaPo reports, Naomi said her political activism was sparked a few years ago when she began asking questions in school about Germany’s liberal immigration policies.
She said the backlash from teachers and other students hardened her skepticism about mainstream German thinking.
Former EU Climate Change Advocate Now Based in NZ and Blowing the Whistle
The following video presentation below by former EU Climate Change proponent Christopher Le Breton. This was presented in Dunedin several weeks ago.
A fresh look at Climate Change and it's hidden agenda. Christopher Le Breton, a professional environmentalist who has lived, worked and traveled in 107 countries, shares his insights acquired after three decades of working with Government (EU) and not for profit organisations worldwide.
Christopher was previously working at high level in Brussels with the EU in helping to cement the global climate change narrative until he realised the truth and the true agenda.
He has now given away that career, based himself in Dunedin, and is dedicating himself to raising awareness of the truth about the real climate change agenda, geoengineering, HAARP, and eco-terrorism.
Great to see someone like Christopher, with his background, now stepping away and taking on a mission like this.
Very brave move. Christopher was invited to speak at Waitangi Day where he was able to speak for 15 minutes about the climate change deception and geo-engineering where he received an open and positive response.
He is now working on raising funds so that he can take his presentation on tour in NZ.
More recently, she said that watching young people joining weekly “Fridays For Future” protests inspired by Greta helped spur her opposition to climate change activism.
"I get chills when I see those young people, especially at Fridays for Future. They are screaming and shouting and they’re generally terrified,”she said in an interview.
“They don’t want the world to end."”
Later this week, Naomi is set to make her American debut at the Conservative Political Action Conference, or CPAC, a high-profile annual gathering just outside Washington of right-leaning activists.
“She’s a fantastic voice for free markets and for climate realism,” James Taylor, director of the Arthur B Robinson Centre for Climate and Environmental Policy at The Heartland Institute, told The Washington Post.
NZ Government Begins National Climate Indoctrination Of Children
”Education” continues its slide into indoctrination and brainwashing. The Cultural Marxist’s “long march through the institutions” is now substantially complete.' (@JWSpry)
There’s a disturbing whiff of totalitarianism, in that this secular religion permits no dissent’ (Karl du Fresne, Dominion Post, January 23, 2020) - state-organised bullying of kids’ (David Seymour)
The New Zealand government has announced a new Climate Change Curriculum (available here) for children from 10 and above.
It is a callous, exploitative project whose undisguised aim is to frighten children to death (perhaps literally) in order to fulfil the government / UN climate agenda.
Let us be quite clear – the climate change curriculum has nothing to with science or education but is unashamedly evangelical.
The IPCC reports are Holy Writ, and to question any detail is heresy.
There is instruction on how to resist temptation from the devil, in the form of sceptics (heretics). Donald Trump, the villain who pulled the United States out of the Kyoto Agreement, is of course the Devil Incarnate.
There are fast days with abstinence from certain foods.
Greta Thunberg leads the Children’s Crusade. If the children fail, there will be hell on earth, and they will live with the guilt forever - moral blackmail, guilt and blame play a prominent role in the climate cult.
There is no attempt to apply academic rigour at any point or to inspire critical thinking – the aim is to suppress critical thinking. Children are brainwashed, cowed or bullied into becoming climate activists.
They are given no space to disagree with the facts as presented, to fail to respond emotionally as demanded, to refuse to take action as required.
Such manipulation is child abuse.
The ‘Science’ (Section A)
The fundamental creed is, of course, that an increase in anthropogenic greenhouse gases, principally CO2, is causing the world to warm up, with various spin-off effects like scarily rising sea levels, droughts, hurricanes etc.
The science presented is at best selective. It does not show the breakdown of gases in the atmosphere.
There is no attempt to put climate change into context, even by providing a graph of geological history.
Everything is taught as bald fact, with no room for debate, even where the claims are hotly disputed by reputable scientists around the world.
Instead the children are taught to swallow and regurgitate the mendacious mantra that ‘97% of climate experts agree.’
The IPCC is referred to repeatedly as an absolute authority, despite the heavy criticism that has been levelled at the organisation over the years, with number of contributors complaining that the findings of scientists are reversed by the final editors.
New Zealander Dr Vincent Gray, who contributed to all the early IPCC reports, described the IPCC in 2007 as too blinkered and corrupt to save (see also here and here).
An analysis by Dr Jock Allison of flaws in the science presented, focusing on the so-called myth busters in Session 7, is included below as an Appendix.
How does it make you feel?
One of the strangest aspects of a supposedly scientific subject, where one would expect the application of some objectivity, is the emphasis on and encouragement of emotional response.
This is introduced as early as lesson two with ‘The Feelings Splash: How does this make us feel’. The remaining lessons of Section A include segments entitled ‘Feelings Thermometer.
Can we measure our feelings?’; ‘Understanding our feelings about Climate Change’; ‘Introducing “Psychological adaptation”:
Wellbeing action – what can I do?” – all leading up to Lesson 7: ‘Empathy / Outrage + Action = ACTIVISM’. (One doesn’t like to think of how a child who said, ‘I’m fine with it’ would be viewed.)
Emotional response is such an essential part of the programme that there is a separate 15 page teacher resource dedicated to the subject.
Having callously pressured and enticed children into experiencing overwhelming emotions by telling them what is in effect a pack of lies, the education authority kindly offers advice to teachers and in turn parents on how to deal with traumatised children:
"It is normal for children and adults to feel worried, frustrated, angry and sad when learning about the issues around climate change.
Parents and whanāu can help when they acknowledge and accept the range of emotional impacts that awareness of climate change brings.
‘Parents and whanāu can watch out for:
Worsening anxiety or behaviors over time
Withdrawal or avoidance
Excessive reassurance seeking or limit testing
Changes in sleep, appetite and weight
Somatic symptoms such as tummy aches and headaches
Anxiety or behaviors that are interfering with functioning or causing distress
Any other change in your child that causes distress or interferes with their functioning”
There follows a long list of professional agencies that can advice parents or treat traumatised children.
It goes without saying that, if the campaign has its intended result and children are driven to suicide by this programme, blame will be attributed to climate change, not to the wickedness of those who devised this programme.
Activism (Sections B and C)
The purpose of the curriculum is not to educate: it is to terrify the children, then prime them for activism.
The argument for an urgent need for activism is as follows:
Greenhouse gases, generated by human activities, such as CO2 and methane are warming the planet – to question this is impossible
The natural emotional reaction is grief, fear, despair, anger and of course guilt – failure to react thus is impossible
The responsible response is to take action – failure to act is impossible
Whoops. They sure as hell don't talk about the NASA study showing that every planet in the system is warming up...
Section B introduces the concepts of personal responsibility and activism:
Session 6: ‘Living with Climate Change: What can I do?’
This session starts by recapping the essentials of the situation as has been taught to the children, with a graph showing sensational, totally unrealistic scenarios by 2080-2100 if little or no action is taken to reduce emissions.
‘Average temperature rise – 3.7 degrees celsius’. (Jock Allison, below, Point 6, shows that neither the satellite data nor NOAA’s Climate Reference Network indicate continued upward movement in temperature.)
‘Global sea level rise – 0.63 metres’. (Numerous data sets and studies, including an analysis of measurements from the world’s 225 best long-term coastal tide gauges indicate an average global sea level rise of 1-2mm per annum and not accelerating, which suggests an increase of 60-120mm by 2080, so nowhere near 630mm).
None of these predictions are any more likely to come to fruition than any of the past sensationalist predictions on the subject - see Jock Allison on failed predictions, below, Point 22.
Having been reminded of looming Armageddon, the children are now set for the next stage. They can live their religion, by making changes to their own lives, on the basis of the science as they have been taught it.
They can do their bit to reduce emissions by using less electricity, shopping locally, driving less, planting trees, etc.
A most concerning element is the strong pressure on children to limit their meat and dairy intake, with no discussion of health implications, nor any relevant resources.
Starting with meatless Mondays is suggested – it is very clear that it will be virtually impossible for a children to opt out if a school makes this policy.
The programme is intended for children as young as 10 – ‘A dietary warning for people with developing bodies would be a prudent addition as well if teachers want to avoid lawsuits’ (Robin Grieve).
Greta Thunberg is introduced at this stage as an inspiration, presaging what is to come.
Go out into the world and spread the word (Session 7)
Essential tools: children are first reminded of the fallacious mantras that ‘most scientists’ agree (argumentum ad verecundiam or appeal to authority) and that most of the population agrees (argumentum ad populum).
The discussion on activism covers climate activists that the children may have hear of, such as Greta Thunberg, Schools Strike4Climate, and David Attenborough, who has himself been blamed for the epidemic of eco-anxiety among young people.
While the climate cult insists that there is no significant opposition to its teachings, care has been taken to include in the curriculum a sizable section on dealing with heretics who question the IPCC gospels.
Children are given instruction to prepare them for dealing with hypothetical situations with those who are yet to be convinced, or ‘flat out deny the existence of climate change’ (nobody denies climate change, but no matter).
Children are expected to rote-learn a set of dictums to be used to confront such situations and make conversions or silence unbelievers – role plays are set up to help them memorise the answers.
The suggested situations are often straw men, and the answers are either seriously disputed or out and out lies (one can only guess at the conflict that will arise between a child armed with these mantras and an educated parent).
For a detailed analysis of the ‘myths’ and their supposed refutations, see Jock Allison, below.
Section C, ‘Time For Climate Action’consciously sets out to turn children into activists for the climate cult.
Children are obliged to commit as groups to ‘actions’. Suggested actions range from turning off lights to planning a campaign or a website.
Children are encouraged to target their campaigns at everyone from parents to cabinet ministers.
Ironically, there is also a section on children’s basic rights, including those relating to wellbeing and education.
Of course, as is the fashion, there is a suggestion of greater entitlement, also that adults are not taking action because they are selfish and uncaring of children and future generations (not because they have more sense).
The resource does not actually suggest civil disobedience, but it does feature prominently Greta Thunberg, who is closely aligned with the militant Extinction Rebellion.
MMS: The Latest Health Restoration Newsletter: 'The Controversial Healing Cure' [Historical But Relevant]
December 19 2024 | From: G2 / KellyBroganMD / Various Plus: Concerned about Coronavirus? No virus can withstand chlorine dioxide.
Whether it be Coronavirus, Hepatitis, Ebola, Zika; NO virus can withstand chlorine dioxide.
This is NOT speculation; this has already been scientifically verified as detailed in the following documentation.
Note that on the following ClorDiSys website it states;
"To date, no organism tested against chlorine dioxide gas has proved resistant."
Click on the image above to view the entire PDF in a new window
Note also on page 2, the table listing viruses that chlorine dioxide was effective against, includes "Human coronavirus.";
Click on the image above to view the entire PDF in a new window
The common seasonal flu kills over 35,000 per year in the USA alone (0.1% of those who contract it); so with the Coronavirus now killing around 1% to 3%
Of those who contract it, this makes Coronavirus 10 to 30 times more dealy than common flu.
Authorities in affected countries are sterilizing Coronavirus contaminated surfaces in public places and hospitals using Chlorine Dioxide (MMS1/WPS1), and Calcium Hypochlorite (MMS2/WPS2).
It is very sad that corrupt, ill informed authorities will not accept that these products can also be safely used in the human body; as Jim Humble discovered about 25 years ago.
To watch the documentary click on the image below:
Authorities know that these products kill Coronavirus on surfaces, but due to the corrupt Big Pharma $$$ driven health system, they will not acknowledge that it does the same thing safely in the human body.
So how do you treat the body using chlorine dioxide against ANY virus, and many other disease causing pathogens?
Although we do not know long term how severe this outbreak will become, it would be wise to be prepared for the worst; have some MMS on hand and educate yourself in its use. It is better to have it and not need it, than to need it and not have it.
Having a little concern regarding the Coronavirus would not be out of place. With the initial laid back attitude of some Governments, it is now highly probable that it will reach most countries in the world.
It starts with symptoms similar to flu, and if left in the hands of the ill-informed health system, can kill within days.
Signs of the virus are fever and symptoms of respiratory illness, such as coughing, difficulty breathing or shortness of breath - however, it has been reported that some carriers of this strain of Coronavirus show no respiratory symptoms at all.
This makes it extremely difficult to detect carriers of the virus, taking into account that health officials are looking for respiratory symptoms such as coughing, sneezing and breathing difficulties.
Another report said some carriers have no fever and no coughing, but instead are exhibiting symptoms of diarrhea, vomiting and chest pains.
If you notice any of the above symptoms, it would be wise to get onto 'protocol 1000' ASAP.
Mark recommends if infected to take a 6 drop dose every 2 hours, 4 x per day, (for an adult). Obviously you would need to back off the dose rate for subsequent doses should there be any negative reaction.
The breathing protocol would also be helpful should any of your symptoms include respiratory problems. All you need for both of these protocols is the 2 bottle MMS kit (WPS1 kit).
So will the World Health Organisation be recommending saving lives from Coronavirus using chlorine dioxide?
Highly unlikely.
The WHO is also influenced by Big Pharma dollars, and have been actively fighting the natural spread of the knowledge of MMS and the millions of people it has helped.
We personally would NOT rely on the Health System if you suspect that you have contracted the virus. They do not have an effective cure, and their ill-informed actions are likely to finish you off.
DISCLAIMER: Coronavirus is a broad name for a family of viruses. This patent is NOT for the new COVID-19 virus and The Pirbright Institute does not currently work with human coronaviruses. If you share this patent online, be aware you are in fact sharing a separate patent for avian infectious bronchitis virus and porcine delta-coronavirus. This is not a patent for the new COVID-19 virus.
The mainstream media have a history of not telling the truth regarding such matters. To get reliable daily updates on the Coronavirus, we recommend this website here at pandemic.news
These are Some COVID-19 Facts:
COVID-19 at first LIVES WITHIN YOUR THROAT before dripping down into your lungs.
COVID-19's pneumonia signs of infection at first are a DRY COUGH and WITHOUT a runny nose for three to four days. Then the virus will fuse with the nasal fluid and drip into the trachea and enter the lungs causing Wuhan's pneumonia in 4 to 5 days - condition serious.
COVID-19 is NOT HEAT RESISTANT and it dies at temperatures of 26 to 27 degrees (80.6 F).
If infected, warm up your body: sun, hot baths, sauna, overdress etc.
Virus is of a fairly large size: 400, 500 NM. So any normal facial mask will work, not just the 3M USA mask. Facial masks will be OUT OF STOCK for many months to come.
The most common way to get infected is by touching things in public, such as hand rails, door handles, ATM's, buses etc. The virus will live roughly TWELVE HOURS on a metal surface.
DISINFECTING EVERYTHING IS OF MAJOR IMPORTANCE - DEEP CLEANING.
Large groups that are quarantined (ships, hotels etc) will spread the virus amongst themselves. This is considered a lower risk to the greater population, than allowing those people home to self quarantine.
COVID-19 will spread around the world and countries with a strong infrastructure will do better while others with struggling circumstances will have a higher percentage of death.
INFECTIOUS COUNTRIES (poor infrastructure) will be totally quarantined from the world.
Northern Hemisphere governments are predicting the infectious rate to peak in MAY/JUNE 2020 and continue to fall until OCTOBER. Southern hemisphere governments are bracing for a sharp rise and more fatalities as Africa's infrastructure is unstable.
COVID-19 virus lives freely on your skin (temperature dependant). In this time it is spread to further contact surfaces and to the persons face (touch).
Governments WILL CLOSE STATE LINES AND BORDERS to contain the spread of the virus creating food shortages and no person to person contact. Self containment and personal protection is the only real measure governments have to contain virus on mass.
International and local travel will fall close to zero while community spread continues unabated.
PREPARE YOURSELF (if borders close): Three months non perishable food, as much bottled water, self transportation, safety equipment, disinfection material, bartering goods and communication.
Be sure to have an MMS (WPS1) kit on hand; as you never know when you may need it to save yourself or the life of a loved one. Help others prepare; by sharing this email with those on your mailing list ...
Undoing The Dis-Education Of Millennials
December 18 2024 | From: NewBostonPost / Various I teach in a law school. For several years now my students have been mostly Millennials. Contrary to stereotype, I have found that the vast majority of them want to learn.
But true to stereotype, I increasingly find that most of them cannot think, don’t know very much, and are enslaved to their appetites and feelings.
I found my students especially impervious to the ancient wisdom of foundational texts, such as Plato’s Crito and the Code of Hammurabi.
Many of them were quick to dismiss unfamiliar ideas as “classist” and “racist,” and thus unable to engage with those ideas on the merits.
So, a couple of weeks into the semester, I decided to lay down some ground rules. I gave them these rules just before beginning our annual unit on legal reasoning.
Here is the speech I gave them:
"Before I can teach you how to reason, I must first teach you how to rid yourself of unreason. For many of you have not yet been educated. You have been dis-educated. To put it bluntly, you have been indoctrinated.
Before you learn how to think you must first learn how to stop unthinking.
Reasoning requires you to understand truth claims, even truth claims that you think are false or bad or just icky.
Most of you have been taught to label things with various “isms” which prevent you from understanding claims you find uncomfortable or difficult.
Reasoning requires correct judgment. Judgment involves making distinctions, discriminating.
Most of you have been taught how to avoid critical, evaluative judgments by appealing to simplistic terms such as “diversity” and “equality.”
Reasoning requires you to understand the difference between true and false. And reasoning requires coherence and logic.
Most of you have been taught to embrace incoherence and illogic. You have learned to associate truth with your subjective feelings, which are neither true nor false but only yours, and which are constantly changeful.
We will have to pull out all of the weeds in your mind as we come across them.
Unfortunately, your mind is full of weeds, and this will be a very painful experience. But it is strictly necessary if anything useful, good, and fruitful is to be planted in your head.
There is no formula for this. Each of you has different weeds, and so we will need to take this on the case-by-case basis. But there are a few weeds that infect nearly all of your brains. So I am going to pull them out now.
First, except when describing an ideology, you are not to use a word that ends in “ism.”
Communism, socialism, Nazism, and capitalism are established concepts in history and the social sciences, and those terms can often be used fruitfully to gain knowledge and promote understanding.
“Classism,” “sexism,” “materialism,” “cisgenderism,” and (yes) even racism are generally not used as meaningful or productive terms, at least as you have been taught to use them.
Most of the time, they do not promote understanding.
In fact, “isms” prevent you from learning. You have been taught to slap an “ism” on things that you do not understand, or that make you feel uncomfortable, or that make you uncomfortable because you do not understand them.
But slapping a label on the box without first opening the box and examining its contents is a form of cheating.
Worse, it prevents you from discovering the treasures hidden inside the box.
For example, when we discussed the Code of Hammurabi, some of you wanted to slap labels on what you read which enabled you to convince yourself that you had nothing to learn from ancient Babylonians.
But when we peeled off the labels and looked carefully inside the box, we discovered several surprising truths. In fact, we discovered that Hammurabi still has a lot to teach us today.
One of the falsehoods that has been stuffed into your brain and pounded into place is that moral knowledge progresses inevitably, such that later generations are morally and intellectually superior to earlier generations, and that the older the source the more morally suspect that source is.
There is a term for that. It is called chronological snobbery. Or, to use a term that you might understand more easily, “ageism.”
Second, you have been taught to resort to two moral values above all others, diversity and equality.
These are important values if properly understood. But the way most of you have been taught to understand them makes you irrational, unreasoning.
For you have been taught that we must have as much diversity as possible and that equality means that everyone must be made equal.
But equal simply means the same. To say that 2+2 equals 4 is to say that 2+2 is numerically the same as four.
And diversity simply means difference. So when you say that we should have diversity and equality you are saying we should have difference and sameness.
That is incoherent, by itself. Two things cannot be different and the same at the same time in the same way.
Furthermore, diversity and equality are not the most important values. In fact, neither diversity nor equality is valuable at all in its own right. Some diversity is bad.
For example, if slavery is inherently wrong, as I suspect we all think it is, then a diversity of views about the morality of slavery is worse than complete agreement that slavery is wrong.
Similarly, equality is not to be desired for its own sake. Nobody is equal in all respects. We are all different, which is to say that we are all not the same, which is to say that we are unequal in many ways.
And that is generally a good thing. But it is not always a good thing (see the previous remarks about diversity).
Related to this: You do you not know what the word “fair” means. It does not just mean equality. Nor does it mean something you do not like. For now, you will have to take my word for this. But we will examine fairness from time to time throughout this semester.
Third, you should not bother to tell us how you feel about a topic. Tell us what you think about it. If you can’t think yet, that’s O.K.. Tell us what Aristotle thinks, or Hammurabi thinks, or H.L.A. Hart thinks.
Borrow opinions from those whose opinions are worth considering. As Aristotle teaches us in the reading for today, men and women who are enslaved to the passions, who never rise above their animal natures by practicing the virtues, do not have worthwhile opinions.
Only the person who exercises practical reason and attains practical wisdom knows how first to live his life, then to order his household, and finally, when he is sufficiently wise and mature, to venture opinions on how to bring order to the political community.
One of my goals for you this semester is that each of you will encounter at least one idea that you find disagreeable and that you will achieve genuine disagreement with that idea.
I need to explain what I mean by that because many of you have never been taught how to disagree.
Disagreement is not expressing one’s disapproval of something or expressing that something makes you feel bad or icky.
To really disagree with someone’s idea or opinion, you must first understand that idea or opinion.
When Socrates tells you that a good life is better than a life in exile you can neither agree nor disagree with that claim without first understanding what he means by “good life” and why he thinks running away from Athens would be unjust.
Similarly, if someone expresses a view about abortion, and you do not first take the time to understand what the view is and why the person thinks the view is true, then you cannot disagree with the view, much less reason with that person.
You might take offense. You might feel bad that someone holds that view.
But you are not reasoning unless you are engaging the merits of the argument, just as Socrates engaged with Crito’s argument that he should flee from Athens.
So, here are three ground rules for the rest of the semester:
1. The only “ism” I ever want to come out your mouth is a syllogism. If I catch you using an “ism” or its analogous “ist” - racist, classist, etc. - then you will not be permitted to continue speaking until you have first identified which “ism” you are guilty of at that very moment. You are not allowed to fault others for being biased or privileged until you have first identified and examined your own biases and privileges.
2. If I catch you this semester using the words “fair,” “diversity,” or “equality,” or a variation on those terms, and you do not stop immediately to explain what you mean, you will lose your privilege to express any further opinions in class until you first demonstrate that you understand three things about the view that you are criticizing.
3. If you ever begin a statement with the words “I feel,” before continuing you must cluck like a chicken or make some other suitable animal sound."
To their credit, the students received the speech well. And so far this semester, only two students have been required to cluck like chickens.
Ending The 1901 Plan
December 17 2024 | From: ClassicCapital / Various Storm Arrives To Deal With It.
Since the 2016 campaign for U. S. president began, we have witnessed an intense demonstration of the globalist cabal’s influence in the three branches of federal government.
This remarkable learning experience was made possible by the historic election of an anti-cabal president, Donald J. Trump, who has benefited from adequate personal security in office for the first time since President Andrew Jackson self-protected with his own pistols during 1829-1836.
President Trump has done much more than merely survive the cabal’s actions against him and the nation; he has mounted a multi-national counter-assault to disable, disarm and destroy the power centers and principals of the globalist cabal.
The 1901 Plan
Presently the world is occupied by what appears to be a bio-weapon deployed against the world by the cabal with intent to produce something approximating the deadly results of its “Spanish influenza” epidemic of 1918, which was an important element of what is becoming known as the 1901 plan.
The 1918 “flu” was introduced into the war zones of Spain during the last months of World War I, most likely by intentional infection of a company of Army troops from Ft. Leavenworth, Kansas, as they shipped out to battle.
The 1918 bio-weapon eventually killed a much greater number of young, vigorous Americans (mostly civilians) than all U. S. wars combined to the present date, plus millions more victims worldwide.
Fortunately, the current virus appears to be less deadly, while public health responses have been much more comprehensive – in fact, astonishingly so.
Considering all that was done throughout the 20th Century to fulfill the objectives of the 1901 plan, it seems appropriate to consider the current outbreak of disease to be a continuation of the 1901 plan, which expressly extended through the year 2000.
The 1901 plan included clearly stated goals to:
1. Undermine each national government to the point of collapse into a top-down system of global control;
2. Totally eliminate the “middle class,” defined as all persons supporting themselves independently;
3. Find methods by the year 2000 to poison every human not needed to serve the global rulers;
4. Establish a network of privately owned central banks to control issuance of currency in every nation;
5. Establish taxes on earned income (the hallmark of the middle class) with higher tax rates applicable to higher income levels;
6. Establish death taxes at high rates to confiscate large estates of wealthy people unwilling to support the 1901 plan; and
7. Create a new type of man capable of taking “full power” by acting on the principle that, as a creation of God, whatever he wants or does is the will of God and is, therefore, morally right.
Considering this diabolical 1901 plan and the evil capabilities of its adherents, does it not come to mind that major events of the 20th Century and the first 15 years of the 21st seem to fit entirely within its expressed intentions?
Likewise, when a Plan to Save The World from the aims of the 1901 plan surfaces, and significant progress is made to accomplish its objectives, should we not give close attention to providing aid and comfort for its success is both natural and essential?
As a point of interest, by the time the 1901 plan came to my attention, the research, writing and editing of The Fruits of Graft were substantially completed.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
For this reason, the historical reporting of the 1901 plan was not revealed to the reader until Chapter 17 of the book.
First, the devastating events of the 20th and early 21st centuries were detailed, showing them to be cunningly designed and executed with full intentions to impose maximum harm on the American [Western] people and their constitutional government.
Then the 1901 plan is revealed, making the worldview-shattering point that all of this wrong-doing was not merely random criminality hitting targets of opportunity.
Rather, a master plan carefully crafted to do utmost damage to humanity's well-being was behind the cataclysmic failures of government policy. Any latitude at all for excuses of ignorance or ineptitude is extinguished.
This stubborn reality made obvious that no counter-attack against the oppressors of American [Western] society would be sufficient or successful unless it targeted the primary centers of power of the globalist cabal.
We can be neither successful nor safe until those globalist principals are unhorsed and destroyed.
That is the task at hand presently, and one that the Trump presidency was undertaken and is now undertaking to achieve.
Where We Go From Here
The past four U.S. presidencies preceding President Trump (Bush, Clinton, Bush, Obama) have been puppet operatives of the globalist cabal, and those were certainly not the first.
Operatives of the cabal remain prominent in major media organizations, academia, think tanks and private business. A number of such operatives have been deposed already due to actions of the Trump administration, though this has not been widely reported in clear terms.
But the direct attack on major operatives and outposts of the globalist cabal is still to come, and there is reason to believe it is imminent.
Americans are already seeing highly unusual times. Other nations are in desperate straits; insufficient numbers of ventilators in Madrid, so elderly victims are being sedated to favor the young.
What previous nationwide shutdown of business and social gatherings due to illness of any nature can you recall?
By the time this current event is concluded – perhaps on Good Friday – we will have significantly more to record in history for posterity to learn and cherish.
Island Gun Laws: The History Of Gun Control And Crime In Australia, New Zealand, And The UK
December 16 2024 | From: Ammo / Various
Politics nowadays are dominated by what gets attention, because what gets attention spreads the fastest and furthest.
This is the dark side of social media and 24/7 news, and one event in particular in the firearms world is ground zero for this phenomenon – mass shootings.
In the wake of a mass shooting, politicians who already dislike law-abiding people owning guns use the tragedy to push for additional gun laws, irrespective of the existing laws already broken.
This is done when emotions are at their highest (and thus rational thinking at its lowest), usually under the auspices of enacting gun laws like those in the U.K. and Australia. President Obama's former Chief of Staff Rahm Emanuel said it best:
"You never want a serious crisis to go to waste. And what I mean by that is an opportunity to do things you think you could not do before."
Careful analysis of these countries’ gun control experiments actually depicts a more nuanced picture of gun policy and crime.
In fact, there is reason to believe that gun control may have actually not had much of an impact on crime in either country – but this sort of critical thinking takes concerted effort, and who has time for such things when politics today are less about sound, long-term policy and more about sensationalizing another's tragedy to advance your agenda?
Below is a guide to help American gun rights activists understand the history of gun registration and gun control efforts in the U.K. and Australia, the two countries which anti-gun politicians often cite as muses for their proposed laws.
On April 28, 1996, Australia experienced a national tragedy. A deranged murderer, Martin Bryant, went on a rampage and killed 35 people in cold blood. In response to this atrocity, known as the Port Arthur massacre, the Australian government undertook a heavy-handed gun control campaign.
This included a mandatory buyback program where Australian citizens had to turn over 650,000 “assault weapons” to the government. This program was followed up by a subsequent buyback program in 2003.
At the center of Australia’s gun control policy following the Port Arthur massacre was the National Firearms Agreement of 1996. Although international media outlets portray the 1996 NFA as a ban, it was actually a draconian form of gun control that still allowed for gun ownership, albeit to a very limited degree.
The only real bans that took place were ones targeting so-called “assault weapons” – long-guns such as rifles and shotguns. Handguns were still accessible to the public, but were subject to stiff restrictions.
Events That Led to Gun Laws in Great Britain
Britain’s first gun control package passed in the modern era was the Firearms Act of 1920. Fearing a growing wave of unrest in the aftermath of World War I, British politicians passed this gun control law despite scant evidence showing that crime was on the rise during that time period.
The Firearms Act of 1920 was only the beginning – as the 20th century was a time of progressive government growth in all facets of life, and the U.K. was no exception.
After the enactment of the Firearms Act of 1920, the British government passed gradually stricter laws in 1937, 1968, and 1988. Despite having comprehensive gun control at the national level, the homicide rate in Great Britain slowly grew from the 1950s into early 2005.
When it came to mass shootings, British gun control efforts proved futile. Shooting rampages in Hungerford, England and Dunblane, Scotland received international attention, which put the island nation at a major public policy crossroads. Like its Australian counterpart, the United Kingdom opted for stiffer gun control.
After the Hungerford massacre, the government responded with the passage of the Firearms Act of 1988, a new gun control measure that placed draconian restrictions on rifles and shotguns.
Arguably the most popular example of foreign gun control, advocates of tougher gun laws routinely cite Australia and its 1996 NFA law as an example of gun control causing crime to fall. Although Australia is a nation characterized by a low degree of crime, there’s more to Australia’s low crime rates than gun control.
Homicide rates have been declining across Western Europe, Canada, and the U.S. since the 1990s. Australia was not exempt from this trend, and in fact, Australia’s falling crime was essentially the norm for industrialized countries in the West.
Homicides were already a rare occurrence before the passage of the 1996 NFA. In sum, we can barely learn anything meaningful from slight changes in Australian homicide rates around this time.
"There is now general agreement, at least for developed English-speaking countries and western Europe, that homicide patterns have moved in parallel since the 1950s.
The precise timing of the declines has varied, but the common pattern is apparent. Homicide rates increased substantially from various dates in the 1960s, peaked in the early 1990s or slightly later, and have since fallen substantially.”
This same trend of declining violence was on display in the United States. American homicide rates reached a 51-year low in 2014. During this time period, there wasn’t a gun control measure as comprehensive as Australia’s NFA in America that we can point to in explaining this decline.
In fact, American gun ownership per capita increased by 56 percent from 1993 to 2013. This was accompanied by a gun violence decrease of 49 percent. Correlation is not causation, but this goes to show the explanations behind crime rates are complex and are not necessarily about passing a so-called gun control “fix.”
The Effects of Gun Control in Australia
According to gun researcher John Lott, homicide rates in Australia have been on a downtrend since 1969. During this timeframe, the only time homicide rates increased was from 1998 to 1999, not long after the NFA was passed.
However, Ryan McMaken argues that Australian crime data is very spotty. He contends that the data is not very reliable because crime was such a non-issue that the government did not prioritize recording it. McMaken provides further context:
"Australia is a small country, with only a few more million people than Florida, spread out over an entire continent. In the relatively high homicide days of the early 1990s, Australia's homicides totaled around 300.
This means in a bad crime year, in which homicides increase by only 20 or 30 victims, it could swing overall rates noticeably.”
All in all, what we can gather is that Australia had low crime rates well before the passage of the 1996 NFA. However, this is one part of the story.
Australia’s gun buyback program from 1996 to 1997 was able to reduce the supply of firearms from 3.2 million 2.2 million, but the declines in homicide or suicide rates were not as high as many gun control advocates expected.
Interestingly enough, Australia’s gun buyback did not even stifle civilian gun ownership. In 2010, private gun ownership was back to 1996 levels.
Plus, data from 1997 to the present day show that gun ownership in Australia has actually grown three times faster than the population. The total number of firearms in circulation went from 2.5 million to 5.8 million.
Gun control advocates maintain that the more guns present, the more likely crime rates will skyrocket. Crime rates were already low before gun control came into being and continued to fall even after gun control was implemented.
Moreover, Australia still experienced an increase in the amount of guns in the country despite the gun control laws in effect.
Indeed, it’s hard to place what factors exactly contributed to Australia’s decreasing homicide rates. It’s simplistic to believe that gun control is the missing x-factor in lowering crime.
Additionally, the Australian experience shows that Australia’s decision to not completely ban gun ownership has given some law-abiding gun owners a little bit of flexibility in acquiring firearms.
The Australian gun control case actually looks quite bleak when compared to the U.S.’s higher degree of gun rights over the past few decades. From 1995 to 2006 – a time when firearm ownership was reduced – Australia witnessed a significant increase in rapes and sexual assaults.
Document Shows the Role of Police in Christchurch Attacks
In 400 Years of Gun Control, author Howard Nemerov specifically pointed to numbers indicating a 21.4 percent increase in rape and sexual assault rates during this period.
On the other hand, America saw increased gun ownership during this time, so it’s no surprise they fared better when it came to sexual assaults, which fell by 16.8 percent.
Gun ownership tends to benefit the most vulnerable in society, like women and the elderly, who are often overpowered in violent assaults by criminals who rely on brute strength. With guns entering the equation, the playing field is ultimately leveled. All in all, gun control down under is not what it seems.
The Effects of Gun Control in the U.K.
Like Australia, low homicide rates have been generally the norm in recent British history. At the beginning of the 20th century, England and Wales were already some of the safest countries in the world based on global and historical standards.
At first glance, the gun control measures appeared to coincide with decreases in Britain’s homicide rates, which started taking place after 2002.
However, there is reason to believe that there were other factors contributing to Britain’s falling crime rates during that period. John Lott argues that increased policing in the U.K. is a more plausible explanation for this drop around the early 2000s.
Although Lott recognizes that the police play a crucial role in fighting crime, his research over the years has led him to the conclusion that the police can’t always be at crime scenes to save lives.
They usually end up at the crime scene after the fact, thus demonstrating the need for other security options at our disposal. An increased law enforcement presence eventually hits a point of diminishing returns as witnessed in the U.K. during the mid-2000s.
Despite a substantial increase in the police force, the murder rate was still above the pre-handgun ban rate. Gun control advocates remain steadfast in their belief that gun control was solely responsible for the fall in murders after 2002.
Even if we concede ground on this point, we also have to ask why gun control was not at fault for the repeated increases in murder rates from the 1960s until the 1990s – a time when homicide gradually increased despite new gun control legislation being passed throughout those decades.
We must also keep in mind that statistical figures in the U.K. should be viewed with a certain degree of skepticism given the differences in the way crimes are accounted for.
Starting in 1967, homicide figures in England and Wales exclude cases that don’t result in convictions. Put simply, when no arrest for a homicide is made, which in turn results in no conviction for the murderer, the murder is not accounted for in statistical figures.
The U.S. has a different approach to recording homicide statistics – including cases that did not result in murder convictions. For example, deaths caused by defensive gun use as well as unsolved cases would be classified as homicides in the U.S.
This makes crime rate comparisons between countries like the U.S. and the U.K. rather tricky. When adding gun control laws and their effects on crime rates into these comparisons, the picture becomes murkier.
Confounding variables abound which can lead to flawed interpretations of these events. Recent data show that the U.K.’s gun control experiments are actually causing more harm than good.
Like its Australian counterpart, which also implemented draconian gun control in the 1990s, negative criminal trends have started to surface since new gun control laws were enacted.
Sexual assaults have seen an alarming rise from 1995 to 2006, specifically increasing by 76.5 percent according to Howard Nemerov’s book 400 Years of Gun Control. All the gun control in the world has not been able to save the U.K. from steadily increasing rates of violent crime.
One particular interesting detail about crime under the country’s gun control regime is that criminals have now changed the tools they use to carry out their dirty deeds. Specifically, British criminals are using knives to commit crimes.
The Guardian reported on the recent knife crime wave sweeping across the U.K.:
"Police recorded 39,598 offences involving a knife or sharp instrument in the year to December 2017, a 22% increase compared with the previous year (32,468), and the highest number registered since comparable records started in 2010. Gun crime rose to 6,604 offences.”
The London Metropolitan Police reports that teenagers commit 49 percent of knife crime. On top of that, three quarters of stabbings were committed by minorities. Breitbart also gave a lurid depiction of London’s ongoing knife rampage:
"London specifically experienced record high knife crime, increasing by 15 percent to a total of 14,987 blade offences – representing 38 percent of all knife crimes across England and Wales and averaging 41 knife crimes a day.”
With questionable immigration policies that prevent assimilation and an environment that does not protect law-abiding Britons’ right to self defense, the U.K. risks sliding into social chaos.
Sadly, British politicians still believe more government control is the answer to this problem. In the face of this stabbing epidemic, London Mayor Sadiq Khan has advocated for knife control.
One Member of Parliament Scott Mann has even floated the idea of embedding GPS trackers on all knives sold in London.
Instead of considering alternatives like tougher policing in crime-ridden neighborhoods or even arming their citizens, elected officials in London have created a de facto surveillance state.
A report from WorldAtlas uncovered that London is the most surveilled city in the world with an estimated 51,000 cameras used to snoop on London residents.
New Zealand: An Addendum
On March 15, 2019, New Zealand faced its own Port Arthur incident. A 28-year-old Australian citizen by the name of Brenton Tarrant opened fire on two mosques in Christchurch, leaving 50 people dead.
The shocking nature of this massacre had media talking heads around the world on edge for the next week
In an already polarized environment in western countries, where identity politics have strong pull, politicians were quick to make their pro-gun control stances heard.
There is no question this event was a horrific tragedy and the atrocious nature of the incident will forever rock New Zealand’s public conscious.
That being said, analyzing this incident and figuring out how to go from there requires level-headed thinking. Much to the dismay of pro-gun advocates who want to see their countries expand gun rights, emotion tends to reign supreme in all public policy discussions.
As with the Australian and British cases, we find that New Zealand has also witnessed the same declining crime rates trend the rest of the West has experienced in the past few decades. In 2014, New Zealand’s homicide rate stood at 0.9 per 100,000 people. Particularly curious, New Zealand hit a 40-year low in its murder rates in 2017 – with only 35 people being killed in the country. Murders peaked in the 1980s, with 1986 being the year with the highest total of murders, standing at 79.
It should be noted that New Zealand does feature pretty strict gun control. Gunpolicy.org notes that in New Zealand, “the right to private gun ownership is not guaranteed by law,” which is a stark contrast from the U.S. – which nominally recognizes it as a right.
Prospective gun owners in New Zealand must have a license before buying a gun. Then, they must go through a universal background check of sorts that “considers criminal, mental health, medical, addiction and domestic violence records.”
Following the Mosque shootings, Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern immediately called for bans on semi-automatic weapons and “military-style” variants.
She got her wish a few days after the shooting, with a new ban on “assault weapons.” Despite the New Zealand government’s push for gun owners to turn in their firearms in the wake of the mass shooting, a paltry number of firearms have been turned in so far.
Like Australia, we cannot assume with certainty that gun control has been the primary driver of New Zealand’s already low crime rates. The effects of New Zealand’s new gun control laws will be an interesting case study nonetheless.
But with the American counterexample showing how crime rates can still decrease, even with certain jurisdictions liberalizing gun laws, we must call into question the conventional wisdom that gun control is the alpha and the omega of decreasing crime rates.
When push comes to shove, the New Zealand government’s newest gun control package may turn out to be a dud that only satisfied the political class’s “do something.”
Follow the Red, White, and Blue
The British government will eventually have to admit that there’s only so much it can do to fight crime. Instead, the U.K. and Australia, for that matter, should follow in the footsteps of America and expand gun rights. The gun rights victories that have occurred since the 1980s have served America well.
Research from the Pew Center in 2015, showed that the murder rate in America fell by one half – 7 per 100,000 in 1993 to 3.4 per 100,000 in 2014. In the same period, the total number of gun deaths (numbers that include accidental deaths and suicides) dropped by almost one-third, plummeting from 15.2 to 10.6 per 100.
Additionally, the number of privately owned guns and people carrying concealed has grown year by year.
Over the past three decades, gun laws have witnessed unprecedented levels of relaxation at the state level. From reforms such as licensed concealed carry to permitless Constitutional Carry, law-abiding gun owners in certain states have more firearms freedoms than in previous decades.
These numbers at least demonstrate that looser gun laws don’t lead to chaotic episodes of violence. Crime rates don’t suddenly explode when people are allowed to freely own and carry firearms.
The Australian and British cases, on the other hand, show a more mixed picture of countries that were already safe before passing gun control due to political outrage.
The effects of these laws are still being discerned, however, it can be argued that they have had little effect on impacting crime. In the British case, law-abiding citizens may want to have expanded gun rights due to the country’s increasingly unstable migrant crisis and the police’s inability to stop crime.
All in all, a truly free society is one that respects an individual’s right to self defense. No matter the intentions, governments have no authority to infringe upon this sacred right.
Higher Fluoride Levels During Pregnancy May Be Linked With Lower IQ Scores In Kids: Study
December 15 2024 | From: CTVNews / Various
Children whose mothers were exposed to higher levels of fluoride in their tap water during pregnancy scored lower on IQ tests than those with mothers who had less exposure while pregnant, according to a new study.
In an effort to determine whether fluoride should be considered a neurotoxin, researchers from York University in Toronto conducted an observational study of 512 mother-child pairs from six major Canadian cities.
Of this sample, 40 per cent lived in communities with fluoridated municipal water.
“We went into this not knowing what to expect… no study had been done on pregnancy and fluoride exposure,” lead author Christine Till told CTV News.Comment: Really? See below...
"It was shocking to see the size of the effect. I suppose it’s a shock because we were all told that it’s safe… but when you think about it, we shouldn’t be so shocked because there is a literature and decades of work showing this effect.
There are biological reasons the fetus can be at increased risk of neurotoxicity, so we are taking these findings very seriously."
The Public Health Agency of Canada (PHAC) says fluoride molecules can strengthen teeth by hardening tooth enamel, contributing to tooth surface re-mineralization, and deterring oral bacteria.
For decades, governments around the world have added fluoride to public drinking water to reduce rates of tooth decay in children and adults.
Despite being endorsed by major public health bodies around the world, including the World Health Organization and the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, which considers water fluoridation one of the top 10 public health achievements of the 20th century, communities have resisted adding the mineral to their water supply out of concern that it is potentially toxic.
According to PHAC, only 13.9 million Canadians or 38 per cent of the population had access to public fluoridated water in 2017.
By comparison, the York University researchers said that 66 per cent of U.S. residents had access to fluoridated water.
Europe, on the other hand, only had fluoridated water for 3 per cent of its residents, but they rely on other strategies to distribute the mineral, such as supplements and dental treatments.
For this study, published in the JAMA Pediatrics journal on Monday, the academics used information from the Maternal-Infant Research on Environmental Chemicals report to determine the potential association between fluoride exposure during pregnancy and cognitive development in children.
The children’s exposure to the mineral was estimated by the fluoride concentration in the mother’s urine samples while they were pregnant and how much water they reported they consumed during their first and third trimester.
When the children were three to four years old, their IQ was assessed using the Wechsler Primary and Preschool Scale of Intelligence test.
After controlling for other confounding factors, such as fluoride metabolism and children’s intellectual abilities, the researchers found that a 1-mg/L increase in maternal urinary fluoride concentration was associated with 4.5-point lower IQ score in boys. There wasn’t a statistically significant association in girls, the study said.
"This is a major loss of IQ points that would have societal and economic impacts; it would definitely be felt at a population level,” said Till.
“4.5 points is a dramatic loss of IQ, comparable to what you’d see with lead exposure, and that’s why we’re so concerned.”
However, when the exposure was measured only by the pregnant mothers’ self-reported daily intake of water, a 1-mg/L increase in fluoride was associated with a deficit of 3.7 points in both boys and girls.
In a statement to CTV News, the Canadian Dental Association said it was reviewing the findings.
“While the study does not address the oral health benefits of fluoridated municipal water, the Canadian Dental Association is reviewing the findings in consultation with our colleagues in the scientific community,” read the statement.
"It is important to recognize that this is one study with small sample sizes within the context of more than 40 years of other research on the safety and health benefits of fluoridated water.
Careful attention to oral health is particularly important during pregnancy, and CDA recommends that women see their dentist as part of maintaining their oral health.”
The study’s authors acknowledged some of the limitations of their research, including its observational design, how fetal fluoride exposure and estimated fluoride intake was measured, and the lack of assessment of fluoride exposure during infancy.
The researchers said their findings indicate a possible need to reduce fluoride intake during pregnancy.
“Based on our findings, we’re recommending that women reduced fluoride intake during pregnancy,” Till said.
"It’s important to note that there are many sources of fluoride, but one major source is fluoridated water, that counts for about 70 per cent of our intake.”
Till acknowledged that the study results may be controversial.
“Given the nature of the findings and their potential implications, we subjected it to additional scrutiny for its methods and the presentation of its findings,” read a statement issued alongside the publication.
“Publishing it serves as testament to the fact that JAMA Pediatrics is committed to disseminating the best science based entirely on the rigor of the methods and the soundness of the hypotheses tested, regardless of how contentious the results may be.”
A Whole Branch Of Science Turns Out To Be Fake
December 14 2024 | From: NoMoreFakeNews / Various Devotees of science often assume that what is called science is real and true. It must be. Otherwise, their faith is broken.
Their superficial understanding is shattered. Their “superior view” of the world is torpedoed.
Such people choose unofficial “anti-science” targets to attack. They never think of inspecting their own house for enormous fraud.
For example: Psychiatry.
An open secret has been slowly bleeding out into public consciousness for the past ten years.
There are no definitive laboratory tests for any so-called mental disorder.
And along with that:
All so-called mental disorders are concocted, named, labeled, described, and categorized by a committee of psychiatrists, from menus of human behaviors.
Their findings are published in periodically updated editions of The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM), printed by the American Psychiatric Association.
For years, even psychiatrists have been blowing the whistle on this hazy crazy process of “research."
Of course, pharmaceutical companies, who manufacture highly toxic drugs to treat every one of these “disorders,” are leading the charge to invent more and more mental-health categories, so they can sell more drugs and make more money.
But we have a mind-boggling twist. Under the radar, one of the great psychiatric stars, who has been out in front in inventing mental disorders, went public. He blew the whistle on himself and his colleagues. And for several years, almost no one noticed.
His name is Dr. Allen Frances, and he made VERY interesting statements to Gary Greenberg, author of a Wired article: “Inside the Battle to Define Mental Illness.” (Dec.27, 2010).
Major media never picked up on the interview in any serious way. It never became a scandal.
Dr. Allen Frances is the man who, in 1994, headed up the project to write the latest edition of the psychiatric bible, the DSM-IV. This tome defines and labels and describes every official mental disorder. The DSM-IV eventually listed 297 of them.
In an April 19, 1994, New York Times piece, “Scientist At Work,” Daniel Goleman called Frances “Perhaps the most powerful psychiatrist in America at the moment…”
Well, sure. If you’re sculpting the entire canon of diagnosable mental disorders for your colleagues, for insurers, for the government, for Pharma (who will sell the drugs matched up to the 297 DSM-IV diagnoses), you’re right up there in the pantheon.
Long after the DSM-IV had been put into print, Dr. Frances talked to Wired’s Greenberg and said the following:
“There is no definition of a mental disorder. It’s bullshit. I mean, you just can’t define it.”
BANG.
That’s on the order of the designer of the Hindenburg, looking at the burned rubble on the ground, remarking, “Well, I knew there would be a problem.”
After a suitable pause, Dr. Frances remarked to Greenberg, “These concepts [of distinct mental disorders] are virtually impossible to define precisely with bright lines at the borders.”
Frances should have mentioned the fact that his baby, the DSM-IV, had unscientifically rearranged earlier definitions of ADHD and Bipolar to permit many MORE diagnoses, leading to a vast acceleration of drug-dosing with highly powerful and toxic compounds.
Here is a smoking-gun statement made by another prominent mental-health expert, on an episode of PBS’ Frontline series. The episode was: “Does ADHD Exist?”
PBS FRONTLINE INTERVIEWER:Skeptics say that there’s no biological marker - that it [ADHD] is the one condition out there where there is no blood test, and that no one knows what causes it.
BARKLEY (Dr. Russell Barkley, professor of psychiatry and neurology at the University of Massachusetts Medical Center): That’s tremendously naïve, and it shows a great deal of illiteracy about science and about the mental health professions.
A disorder doesn’t have to have a blood test to be valid. If that were the case, all mental disorders would be invalid…There is no lab test for any mental disorder right now in our science. That doesn’t make them invalid.
Without intending to, Dr. Barkley blows an ear-shattering whistle on his own profession.
So let’s take Dr. Barkley to school. Medical science, and disease-research in particular, rests on the notion that you can make a diagnosis backed up by lab tests. If you can’t produce lab tests, you’re spinning fantasies.
These fantasies might be hopeful, they might be “educated guesses,” they might be launched from traditional centers of learning, they might be backed up by billions of dollars of grant money…but they’re still fantasies.
Dr. Barkley is essentially saying, “There is no lab test for any mental disorder. If a test were the standard of proof, we wouldn’t have science at all, and that would mean our whole profession rests on nothing - and that is unthinkable, so therefore a test doesn’t matter.”
That logic is no logic at all. That science is no science at all. Barkley is proving the case against himself. He just doesn’t want to admit it.
Psychiatry is all fraud all the time.
Without much of a stretch, you could say psychiatry has been the most widespread profiling operation in the history of the human race. Its goal has been to bring humans everywhere into its system.
It hardly matters which label a person is painted with, as long as it adds up to a diagnosis and a prescription of drugs.
300 so-called mental disorders caused by…what? No lab evidence. No defining diagnostic tests. No blood tests, saliva tests, brain scans, genetic assays. No nothing.
But psychiatrists continue to assert they are the masters of causation. They know what’s behind “mental disorders.” They’re in charge.
What about the generalized “chemical imbalance” hypothesis stating that all mental disorders stem from such imbalances in the brain?
Dr. Ronald Pies, the editor-in-chief emeritus of the Psychiatric Times, laid that hypothesis to rest in the July 11, 2011, issue of the Times with this staggering admission:
“In truth, the ‘chemical imbalance’ notion was always a kind of urban legend - never a theory seriously propounded by well-informed psychiatrists.”
Boom. Dead.
The point is, for decades the whole basis of psychiatric drug research, drug prescription, and drug sales has been: “we’re correcting a chemical imbalance in the brain.”
The problem was, researchers had never established a normal baseline for chemical balance. So they were shooting in the dark. Worse, they were faking a theory. Pretending they knew something when they didn’t.
In his 2011 piece in Psychiatric Times, Dr. Pies tries to protect his colleagues in the psychiatric profession with this fatuous remark:
“In the past 30 years, I don’t believe I have ever heard a knowledgeable, well-trained psychiatrist make such a preposterous claim [about chemical imbalance in the brain], except perhaps to mock it…
The ‘chemical imbalance’ image has been vigorously promoted by some pharmaceutical companies, often to the detriment of our patients’ understanding.”
Absurd. First of all, many psychiatrists have explained and do explain to their patients that the drugs are there to correct a chemical imbalance.
And second, if all well-trained psychiatrists have known, all along, that the chemical-imbalance theory is a fraud…
…then why on earth have they been prescribing tons of drugs to their patients…
…since those drugs are developed on the false premise that they correct an imbalance?
The honchos of psychiatry are seeing the handwriting on the wall. Their game has been exposed.
The chemical imbalance theory is a fake. There are no defining physical tests for any of the 300 so-called mental disorders.
All diagnoses are based on arbitrary clusters or menus of human behavior. The drugs are harmful, dangerous, toxic. Some of them induce violence. Suicide, homicide. Some of the drugs cause brain damage.
So the shrinks have to move into another model of “mental illness,” another con, another fraud. And they’re looking for one.
For example, genes plus “psycho-social factors” cause mental disorders. A mish-mash of more unproven science.
“New breakthrough research on the functioning of the brain is paying dividends and holds great promise…” Professional PR and gibberish.
Meanwhile, the business model demands drugs for sale.
So even though the chemical-imbalance nonsense has been discredited, it will continue on as a dead man walking, a zombie.
Two questions always pop up when I write a critique of psychiatry. The first one is: psychiatric researchers are doing a massive amount of work studying brain function. They do have tests.
Yes, experimental tests. But NONE of those tests are contained in the DSM, the psychiatric bible, as the basis of the definition of ANY mental disorder. If the tests were conclusive, they would be heralded in the DSM. They aren’t.
The second question is: if all these mental disorders are fiction, why are so many people saddled with problems? Why are some people off the rails? Why are they crazy?
The list of potential answers is very long. A real practitioner would focus on one patient at a time and try to discover what has affected him to such a marked degree. For example:
Severe nutritional deficiency. Toxic dyes and colors in processed food. Ingestion of pesticides and herbicides. Profound sensitivities to certain foods.
The ingestion of toxic pharmaceuticals. Life-altering damage as a result of vaccines. Exposure to environmental chemicals. Heavy physical and emotional abuse in the home or at school.
Battlefield stress and trauma (also present in certain neighborhoods). Prior head injury. Chronic infection. Alcohol and street drugs. Debilitating poverty. Other items could be added.
Psychiatry is: fake, fraud, pseudoscience from top to bottom. It’s complete fiction dressed up as fact.
But the obsessed devotees of science tend to back away from this.
They close their eyes. If a “branch of knowledge” as extensive as psychiatry is nothing more than an organized delusion, what other aspect of science might likewise be parading as truth, when it is actually mere paper blowing in the wind?
Ten Insane, Completely Irrational Things Millions Of People Believe As We Enter The 2020s [Historical But Relevant]
December 13 2024 | From: NewsTarget / Various The 2020s may one day be called the “decade of insanity,” given all the insane things believed by a surprisingly large number of people.
The frantic beliefs of these people are, of course, driving them to the brink of insanity. [Comment: This article is somewhat dramatic, however it does highlight some highly relevant points.]
When the masses can be convinced that they are all going to die, they tend to become rather crazed and irrational.
And that’s where we are today in America [The West], no longer the “land of the free” but rather the “cesspool of the insane,” led by psycho-terrorism organizations known as CNN, the Washington Post and the New York Times [The Mainstream Media].
They’ve all abandoned journalism and now prioritize carrying out acts of psychological terrorism (or what I’ve called “journo-terrorism”) against the people.
So now we launch the decade of the 2020s as a nation that’s largely run by criminals and traitors (i.e. most of Congress and the bureaucracy), where the university students are taught by libtard nut jobs pretending to be “professors,” where investors think the stock market will never suffer a correction again, and where CNN literally reports that men can get pregnant and give birth to human babies, some of whom the Left says should probably be murdered in the name of “women’s rights” (i.e. abortion).
We are now living in the Age of Insanity, and it’s not looking any better for 2020 and beyond.
So here’s a list of 10 totally insane things that millions of Americans believe right now as we enter this decade of insanity.
Hint: Given all the 5G radiation, brain damaging fluoride in the water, heavy metals in the food and hormones in food packaging, it’s certain that the insanity is only going to get worse, so buckle up and prepare for life in a mad, mad world.
Insane Belief #1: Men Can Become Women by Wishing it So
Nearly all Leftists literally believe there are more than two genders and that a person of one gender can magically transform into a completely different gender just by wishing. (See Gender.news for many examples.)
Yes, Leftists now believe that men can get pregnant and have babies, and children are being taught that there are an infinite number of genders when, in reality, there are only two.
By the same token, children are also being taught that getting the right answer on a test question isn’t important anymore… it’s how you feel about your answer that’s the new “reality.”
Insane Belief #2: Stock Market Crashes are a Thing of the Past
This belief afflicts nearly all the masses, the oblivious retail investors who stupidly think their pension funds and mutual fund investments will keep growing forever, with no retractions, corrections or crashes.
So they buy and buy even as we are in such overbought territory that all the professional investors are selling everything and heading to their cabins in the woods with bars of gold.
In 2020, the typical American is now in “full FOMO” mode (Fear Of Missing Out) and is almost fanatically plunging all assets into the stock market in a desperate effort to chase the irrational exuberance to its final, disastrous end.
When the day of reckoning comes for these markets, the masses will be destroyed. But if the Fed plays along with more money creation and spontaneous liquidity, that day may yet be delayed until perhaps 2021 (or not).
Insane Belief #3: The Earth Will be Destroyed in 10 Years if We Don’t Stop Using Fossil Fuels
AOC reminds us that we now have a clinically retarded lunatic as a member of Congress, and she quite literally believes the entire planet will cease to exist in just ten years if we don’t immediately stop burning fossil fuels.
But she’s not alone: The incessant fearmongering of the journo-terrorism media has managed to transform all sorts of previously rational people into raving climate lunatics who, when they speak, sound dumber than dirt.
If we were to halt the use of fossil fuels, of course, the global food supply would almost immediately collapse, leading to mass starvation, disease and a population implosion. Perhaps this is what the globalists really want, it seems, since they keep demanding it at every turn.
What’s new in all this is the fact that climate lunatics are now terrorizing children, then holding them up as “warriors” to fight for “climate justice” when, in reality, they’re just terrorized, abused young people who will one day come to harshly resent how they were exploited and psychologically terrorized by left-wing lunatics for political gain.
Insane Belief #4: A Human Baby that’s Born Alive Isn’t Really “Alive” Until the Mother Decides She Wants to Keep It
According to the same lunatic Leftists who have decided that men can somehow become women by wishing for a sex change, human babies that are born alive and healthy aren’t really “alive” until the mother decides she wants to keep that baby.
Until that moment comes, the mother, the doctor and apparently anyone in the room with a baseball bat can legally murder that child in the name of “progressivism,” Leftists insist.
This is the new culture of the mainstream Left: Infanticide and violence against human babies. Celebrated and applauded by all Democrats.
And they justify it all by claiming that Trump is bad, therefore murdering babies makes it all even, somehow.
Yes, it’s insane, but this is how the Left thinks. And it brings up the question: If these people are willing to murder their own children, do you really think they will hesitate to murder their political opponents if given the opportunity?
Keep that in mind the next time some baby-killing Governor (Northam, anyone?) announces he’s coming for your guns.
Heck, they probably need your guns to help them execute all the children they plan to kill in the hospitals, while Michelle Wolf celebrates how killing babies makes her feel “like God.”
Insane Belief #5: Flat Earth
Yes, in the year 2020, we still have millions of Americans who quite literally believe the Earth is flat… like a disc floating in space. They also believe the sun and moon are discs, and that satellites don’t exist, and that gravity isn’t real.
And they are rather fanatical about these beliefs, convincing themselves that there is a global conspiracy to silence the truth about the “flat Earth” in order to prevent humans from discovering the edges where you can step off into outer space… or something.
At least the Flat Earthers aren’t fascists who demand we give up combustion engines or something, like AOC. Mostly, the Flat Earth movement is all about a “thought experiment,” but they aren’t dangerous like Leftists who want to murder children and collapse entire economies.
If we had Flat Earthers in congress instead of climate lunatics, we’d actually be better off, come to think of it. And elections would be far more entertaining.
Insane Belief #6: All Vaccines are Safe, Because Somebody on the News Said So
It’s amazing how many people still believe vaccines are safe, even when the federal government itself publishes vaccine damage statistics and details of the billions of dollars in payouts that have been made to the families of vaccine-damaged children. You can download the data yourself at VAERS.HHS.GOV.
Yes, the CDC openly admits vaccines contain neurotoxic substances such as formaldehyde, mercury, squalene and aluminum.
There is no debate that vaccines carry risk of harm and manage to harm a great number of children each year, yet many American adults who consider themselves to be “informed” have no clue of this reality.
That’s because anyone who talks about vaccine safety is immediately de-platformed from all the major tech platforms.
And that’s happening because the vaccine deep state is run by the same CIA that runs the tech giants, and they’re using vaccines as a depopulation bioweapon against humanity, right now at this very moment. If you’re curious to see the overwhelming evidence that proves this assertion, check out this article and video.
Insane Belief #7: The Mainstream Media Tells the Truth, or at Least Tries To
Of all the really stupid beliefs held by modern Westerners, the belief that the mainstream media is even attempting to tell the truth is among the most insane.
It’s not just that CNN, the NYT, the WashPost, MSNBC, etc., get every major story wrong, it’s the fact that they intend to lie to their audiences.
For years, they’ve peddled false conspiracies about Russia and election meddling, always running cover for Hillary Clinton, Joe Biden and the deep state, while knowingly publishing damned lies about Trump and his supporters.
The corporate media in America is, plainly stated, openly engaged in criminal treason against the United States of America, yet there are still a (shrinking number of) morons who can somehow watch CNN’s Brian Stelter and not laugh out loud or puke all over themselves.
I’m not sure which is shrinking faster: CNN’s audience, or the brains of the remaining few who somehow still watch CNN.
Insane Belief #8: Food Isn’t Medicine, and “Real” Medicine Can Only be Acquired From Pharmacies
Despite all the remarkable research about healing foods, nutrients, disease prevention, superfoods and “miraculous” food cures, there are still people - many of them are doctors - who think the only “real” medicine comes from a pharmacy.
Somehow, we are entering the decade of 2020 while millions of people still carry a belief system from the 1950s, when it was widely believed there were just four vitamins, and food was thought to be useless in promoting good health.
Now, of course, we know the truth: Pharmaceuticals are fake medicine, and food is the real medicine.
If you’re not preventing disease and healing yourself through food, you’re not really up to speed on what modern science has documented about food as medicine.
In fact, we cover these breakthroughs every day at sites like FoodScience.news or SuperfoodsNews.com. Check them out to stay informed and prevent disease on a daily basis.
Insane Belief #9: All White People are Evil, and the Only “Experts” in the World are Children
This is a two-fer: The insane, delusional Left has now convinced millions of people that all white people are evil, but also that children are the new “experts” on things like gun control and climate change.
Yep, adults are stupid and children have all the answers. Is this a freaking Disney movie?
And if you put up a poster that says, “It’s okay to be white,” you are immediately accused of hate crimes. Yes, it’s okay to be black, and it’s okay to be brown, but it’s never okay to be white in today’s insane “progressive” society defined by left-wing bigotry, racism and hate.
And if you’re Asian, the entire left-wing university system will brazenly discriminate against you for being too smart, making sure they can usher in a bunch of unqualified minorities who can’t compete with Asians when it comes to cognitive tests, so they’re given bonus points for “social justice,” whatever that means.
As we enter the 2020s, I do want to welcome all the Asians to the club, where we are all called “racists” by the very libtard lunatics whose policies are, by definition, the most racist of all.
Just remember, if you don’t agree with everything a Leftist says, you are engaged in hate speech.
Insane Belief #10: The World as You Know it is Sustainable and Normal, and Nothing Will Collapse Because that’s Unimaginable
Finally, the really big false belief is summarized by the phrase, “normalcy bias.” People think the world will always operate as it does now because that’s all they know.
They are incapable of imagining anything else, such as a grid down collapse, an economic collapse, World War III, a civil war on the streets of America, a food collapse followed by mass starvation, visitation by aliens and so on.
So they lead their pointless lives as sheeple living out some sort of mad experiment in shared insanity, oblivious to the reality that almost everything they think is permanent is actually headed for collapse.
Much of what currently functions in the world is entirely unsustainable, and that means it must come to an end.
Endless money creation must come to an end. Government debt spending must come to an end. The loss of fossil water to irrigate food crops must come to an end.
The ecological destruction of the planet will eventually collapse the food supply on which we depend. The pensions will collapse once the market corrects.
The dollar will eventually be abandoned as a failed fiat currency. The nuclear power plants will eventually fail and melt down, perhaps following a severe earthquake that already places multiple nuke plants in California in the direct line of fire.
You get the point. The history of our world has rarely seen as long a run of peace and prosperity as the one we are currently experiencing.
Most of human history has been punctuated by genocide, democide, world wars and economic collapse. The fool thinks that’s all “history” now, and modern humans finally have it all figured out, but the wise person knows that history repeats itself.
There’s nothing new under the sun, my friends, and all the stupid things humans did in the past are about to be magnified in the present because humans are more stupid today than ever before.
This is partially thanks to Google, which is now in the business of suppressing human knowledge and dumbing down the masses, but it’s also the fault of the masses, who decided the internet was invented to deliver porn instead of wisdom.
Yes, we’re fighting against all this with the upcoming launch of our own search engine called Webseed.com - launching in January - which will focus on health and wellness content.
But that’s just a drop in the bucket compared to the ocean of idiocy that now defines those who both use and run Google, Facebook, Twitter and YouTube. Will The West survive past 2025 as it is structured now?
It is my belief that America as we know it will not survive beyond 2025, which means these are in the last five years of a world structured as “normal,” at least as you and I have come to know it.
I hope I’m wrong, but I fear I’m right, as I was right about the 2000 dot com crash, the 2008 sub-prime housing bubble crash, the criminality of Obama, the false flag operations of the FBI and a hundred other accurate predictions I’ve made over the last two decades.
Believe what you wish, just know that the more closely your beliefs are aligned with reality, the better chance you have at surviving what’s coming. Those who believe nonsensical things won’t fare well as reality smack them hard.
Houston Anthropologist Reveals Irrefutable Proof That Recorded History Is Wrong December 12 2024 | From: WakingTimes / Various
Evidence Found Across the Globe of Highly Evolved Human Species from before the Ice Age, Demand Scientific Recognition of our Past that Depicts Societies of Advanced Technology and Culture.
Does this look super advanced or what?
Houston anthropologist, Dr. Semir Osmanagich, founder of the Bosnian Archaeology Park, the most active archaeology site in the world, declares that irrefutable scientific evidence exists of ancient civilizations with advanced technology that leaves us no choice but to change our recorded history.
An examination of the age of structures across the earth reveals conclusively that they were built by advanced civilizations from over 29,000 years ago.
“Acknowledging that we are witness to fundamental proof of advanced civilizations dating back over 29,000 years and an examination of their societal structures forces the World to reconsider its understanding of the development of civilization and history,” explains Dr. Semir Osmanagich.
“Conclusive data at the Bosnian Pyramid site revealed in 2008 and confirmed this year by several independent labs who conducted radio carbon testing dates the site at 29,400 +/-400 years minimum.”
The radiocarbon dating tests of 29,200 years +/- 400 years was done by Radiocarbon Lab from Kiew, Ukraine, on organic material found at the Bosnian Pyramid site. Physicist Dr. Anna Pazdur of Poland’s Silesian University first announced the news at a Press Conference in Sarajevo in August of 2008.
Professor of Classical Archaeology from the University of Alexandria Dr. Mona Haggag called this discovery “writing new pages in European and World history.”
The C14 date of 29,000 years at the Bosnian Archaeological Park was obtained from a piece of organic material retrieved from a clay layer inside the outer casing to the pyramid. It follows a sample date obtained during the 2012 dig season on material located above the concrete at 24,800 years, meaning this structure has a construction profile stretching back almost 30,000 years.
“The ancient people who built these pyramids knew the secrets of frequency and energy. They used these natural resources to develop technologies and undertake construction on scales we have never witnessed on earth,” said Dr. Osmanagich.
Evidence clearly shows that the pyramids were built as ancient energy machines aligned with the earth’s energy grid, providing energy for healing as well as power.
Ancient historians in the US have news just as astonishing as anything found in the far corners of the globe. For instance, the Rockwall discovery outside of Dallas, Texas, is only one example of how we are now re-examining ancient mysteries to reveal more about our past, right in the United States.
H2 (History 2) popular series Unearthing Ancient America recently filmed an episode about the Rockwall that will air later this year. The Texas site is a complex and massive wall ten miles in diameter built over 20,000 years ago and covered by soil seven stories below the ground.
The question is by whom was this structure built and for what purpose and, most importantly, how can knowledge left by these past civilizations help shape our future?
Newly-revealed or rediscovered traces of ancient civilizations have ignited an innate curiosity about human origins as reflected by recent coverage in mainstream media and TV. The November 2013 issue of National Geographic: 100 Greatest Mysteries Revealed-Ancient Civilizations Unearthed says;
“Sometimes cultures leave behind mysteries that baffle those who come after them, from standing stones to coded manuscripts, indications that ancient people indeed had a profound purpose.”
Forward-thinking scientists continue to pursue knowledge from our past that is useful to determine a better future. Renowned author Michal Cremo in his book Forbidden Archeology theorizes that knowledge of advanced Homo-sapiens has been suppressed or ignored by the scientific establishment because it contradicts the current views of human origins that don’t agree with the dominant paradigm.
Cremo’s body of work has been described as “a useful teaching resource, raising a wide range of issues covering aspects of knowledge transfer, sure to be provocative in the classroom.” It has been reviewed with widespread appraisal by hundreds of academic journals.
Gobekli Tepe in Eastern Turkey
Results clearly indicate that similar advanced civilizations of humans were present all across the globe at that time in history. For example, Gobekli Tepe located in Eastern Turkey, is a vast complex of enormous megalithic stone circles with a radius of between 10 and 20 meters, much larger than the well-known Stonehenge in Great Britain.
Excavations at Gobekli Tepe that began there in 1995 revealed radio carbon dating at least 11,600 years. German archaeologist Dr. Klaus Schmidt from the German Archaeological Institute, Berlin, Germany, with the support of ArchaeoNova Institute from Heidelberg, Germany, has led the excavation of these recently-discovered pre-historic megalithic circles at the Turkey location.
“Gobekli Tepe is one of the most fascinating Neolithic locations in the world,” Dr. Klaus Schmidt claims. But as he explains in a recent report, to understand the new finds, archaeologists need to work closely with specialists in comparative religion, architectural and art theory, cognitive and evolutionary psychology, sociologists using social network theory, and others.
“It is the complex story of the earliest, large settled communities, their extensive networking, and their communal understanding of their world, perhaps even the first organized religions and their symbolic representations of the cosmos,” as reported by Klaus Schmidt.
In addition to the megalithic structures, figures and carvings have been discovered, depicting animals of pre historic nature such as dinosaurs and other wild life. Since excavations started in 1995, four of the circles have been partially cleaned, but it is thought that there are a total of up to 50 circles hidden underground.
These vast monoliths, soaring seven meters in height and 25 tons in mass at Gobekli Tepe, are situated right in the heart of what we perceive as the origin of civilization. This find offers new guidance to the true history of earth and our ancient civilizations.
“Our archaeological research goal is not to simply uncover all of the megalithic circles but to try to figure out their purpose,” adds Schmidt.
Bosnian Pyramid Now in Eighth Year: Proof of Advanced Civilizations from over 30,000 years ago
The Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids now in the eighth year of excavation spans six square kilometers in the Visoko River Basin 40km northwest of Sarajevo. Comprised of four ancient pyramids almost three times the size of Giza and an extensive subterranean pyramid tunnel complex, new discoveries each year continue to reveal proof of a much different history of mankind on earth.
The central pyramid of the Sun rises a colossal 420 meters in to the air and has a mass of millions of tons. By comparison the Great pyramid of Cheops (Khufu) in the Giza plateau is 146 meters high, making the Bosnian Pyramids the largest and oldest known pyramids on the planet.
Since research began at the Bosnian site, Dr. Osmanagich has amazed the scientific and archaeological community by gathering a team of interdisciplinary engineers, physicists and researchers from around the world to conduct open and transparent investigation of the site to try and discover the true nature and purpose of this pyramidal complex.
“This is an unknown culture presenting highly-advanced arts and sciences, technology capable of forming truly massive structures and we believe in that process demonstrating an ability to harness pure energy resources,” comments Tim Moon, who has recently joined Osmanagich as lead archeologist at the Bosnian site.
The archaeological project delivered another significant finding this year in the pyramid tunnel complex known as Ravine. Tunneling deep into a ridge line leading toward the Pyramid of the Sun the team has unearthed several megalith stones.
Oh yeah, that one was definitely made with ropes and pulleys too. Sigh.
We are locating foundation walls around its perimeter and cut stone blocks.” Large quantities of artifacts have been recovered from the associated tunnels leading to the site, including effigies painted on stone, art objects and a series of hieroglyphics or ancient texts carved into the tunnel walls.
Dr. Osmangich stresses that it is time for open sharing of knowledge so we can understand and learn from our past.
“It is time for us to open our minds to the true nature of our origin and destruction of each other as a civilization on this planet. Our mission here is to realign science with spirituality in order to progress as a species, and this demands a clear path of shared knowledge.”
Visitors are welcome to the Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids and its Foundation offers a volunteer program each dig season, running June to September.
To hear Dr. Sam’s interview on Lost Knowledge go here.
For more on the Bosnian Pyramids go to www.icbp.ba.
This 1926 Eugenics Exhibit Sums Up What The Elite Think About You And Your Family
December 11 2024 | From: HumansAreFree / Various This is an exhibit about Eugenics, dated 1926.
According to eugenics, “some people are born to be a burden on the rest”.
You see, the eugenics movement - which steadily gained popularity for the first nearly 40 years of the 20th century and is the direct reason for forced sterilization laws implemented across America - sought to “breed out” people the elite that ultimately funded and promoted it (the Carnegie Institute and the Rockefeller Foundation, etc.) determined were genetically defective “riff raff” by way of pseudoscience parading as science.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Victims of eugenics included minorities, the children of Caucasians who interbred with minorities, poor people, people with physical disabilities or who were considered “feeble-minded,” those who were deemed “delinquent,” and really, the list goes on and on (the slope got more and more slippery over time).
Eugenics only disappeared from public view when the PR disaster of World War II forced it to.
Guess it looked pretty bad after the Nazis began so heavily promoting it.
Aside from the Eugenics Record Office set up at Cold Spring Harbor on Long Island, the movement would train and send field workers around the country to take family pedigrees and compile data used to argue who had good breeding or not and who deserved the right to reproduce or not.
They set up exhibits at county fairs for “public education” on eugenic matters.
They would even sponsor contests called “Better Baby” and “Fitter Family” at these fairs to judge “human stock” the way other organizations attending county fairs judged other things like prize pigs and heirloom tomatoes.
The poster shown at the start of this article is from one such eugenics educational exhibit. It featured lights that flashed at specific intervals to demonstrate different “facts” about the types of babies being born in the U.S.
Just consider the gall of that statement for a moment.
These eugenicists - the elite of society who funded this movement - only considered “about 4%” of all Americans to be “high grade”.
And truly, those are the people the elite eugenicists wanted to breed more of while using twisted, fake science to justify getting rid of everyone else.
As far as they were concerned, everyone else not in that 4% should either be sterilized or, at the very least, laws should be passed where they would be forced to apply to the government for permission first before they would be allowed to procreate.
We still have people like Bill Gates pushing his paralyzing polio vaccines in countries were polio is supposedly eradicated anyway and paralyzing African-only meningitis vaccines, while people like Richard Dawkins go around saying all babies who test positive for potentially having Down’s Syndrome in the womb should be automatically aborted because it would be immoral for their mothers not to do so. (That’s just to name a few).
We’re continually bathed in the idea that we’re expendable. Modern society goes like this: we’re just slightly higher animals than other animals floating around on a rock in a vast, empty nothingness with no higher meaning or purpose to any of it. Oh, and there are too many of us, too.
The system has us divided and conquered, fighting with each other all the time over one thing or another while the evil eugenicist elites have positioned themselves at the top to continue raping and killing us through various industrial- complexes (military, prison, medical, agricultural, etc.).
Meanwhile, fighting with each other over silly things like manufactured politics or skin color, they have us running for the “cure” which doesn’t cure anything while we overlook the cause.
It’s a rule-by-experts scientific dictatorship in a time when the government and rich psychopaths own, steer, and weaponize all the meaningful science to begin with. “The game is rigged,” as comedian George Carlin would say.
So why do we even keep playing it? It’s their box, their Matrix, not ours.
The reality is we have been dehumanized so much more by now than we were during the days of open eugenics in the first half of the 20th century.
The elite probably don’t even consider 4% of us “high grade” at this point.
“About 4%.” That one exhibit says it all.
Hidden History: The Eugenics Record Office Is for Sale
The Incredible Hidden Life Of Trees December 10 2024 | From: UpliftConnect / Various
Seven amazing facts you may not know: Trees have captured the human imagination since the beginning of time. Watching their cycles of growth, shedding of leaves, and re-flowering in the spring, people have long perceived trees as powerful symbols of life, death, and renewal.
We look to them for inspiration when we need grounding energy, as their roots descending deep into the Earth remind us of our own connection to and dependence on our planet for stability and life. Trees live for hundreds or even thousands of years, and so we revere them as keepers of past secrets and sentinels of the future.
Related:A Biologist Believes That Trees Speak A Language We Can Learn
Forests cover one-third of the Earth’s landmass. They provide a home to at least 80% of land-based plants, animals, and insects. Trees are one of our main defenses against climate change, as they balance our air by absorbing carbon dioxide from human activities and turning it into oxygen; they also protect watersheds by holding our soil in place.
In honor of the International Day of Forests on March 21, here are seven incredible facts about the hidden life of trees.
Trees have captured the human imagination since the beginning of time.
1. Pando, or the Trembling Giant
Pando is a grove of approximately 47,000 quaking aspen trees in Utah. This remarkable group of trees is considered a single organism, because all the trees share a single root system and each tree is genetically identical. New trees are produced by sprouting from the massive parent root system.
It is estimated that Pando has been alive at least 80,000 years, making it one of the oldest living things on the planet.
Consider that when this tree colony first sprouted from the ground, humans would still not arrive on North America for another 50,000 years. In some parts of the planet, Neanderthal people were still 30,000 years from going extinct.
The 106-acre grove of trees has seen unimaginable changes, living through the ice age and at times being completely burnt down above ground, but surviving and renewing itself below ground.
2. More than 25% of Western Pharmaceuticals Originate in Rainforest Plants
There are 3,000 plants currently recognized by the U.S. National Cancer Institute as active against cancer cells, and 70% of these come from rainforests. Perhaps this is why the shamans of the Amazon believe that for every human ailment, the rainforest holds a cure.
And yet, only 1% of all rainforest plants have actually been studied (by modern science) for medicinal purposes. Imagine how many valuable healing plants are destroyed or even made extinct as the rainforests are cleared at a rate of 1.5 acres per second. Due to rainforest destruction, the Earth loses approximately 137 species of plants, animals, and insects per day.
3. Not All Rainforests are in Tropical Zones
The Pacific Temperate Rainforest is the largest remaining coastal temperate rainforest on Earth. It is situated along the Pacific Coast and stretches from Northern California up to the Prince William Sound in Alaska.
It is characterized by high amounts of rainfall, more than 10 feet per year in some areas; and in many places the forest grows right up to the shoreline. It includes the Great Bear Rainforest in western Canada, home to the Spirit Bear, a rare subspecies of black bear with a white coat.
A National Geographic article about the Great Bear Rainforest states: “Grizzlies, black bears, wolves, wolverines, humpback whales, and orcas thrive along a coast that has been home to First Nations like the Gitga’at for hundreds of generations.
It’s a spooky, wild, mysterious place: There are wolves here that fish. Deer that swim. Western red cedar trees that have stood a thousand years or more. And a black bear that is white.”
Alt text hereSpirit bear in the Great Bear Rainforest
4. In Many Cultures, it is Believed That Hugging a Tree Releases Negative Energy From the Human Body
Many people believe that trees, like humans and all living things, possess an energetic vibration and an aura. Because trees’ vibrations are slower and deeply connected to the Earth through their roots, connecting with trees can help us to feel safe, secure, and stable.
Most would agree that a walk in the forest or even simply gazing at a tree provides a deep feeling of peace and serenity, and can be emotionally and psychologically healing.
5. People in Malaysia Maintain a Very Intimate Relationship With Trees
Among the Sng’oi indigenous people, a person and a tree can belong together, and this relationship is maintained for life. When a person belongs with a tree, they also belong with its offspring: any trees that grow from the seeds of the first tree, no matter how far they become scattered.
Also in Malaysia, trees are planted around houses so closely that the walls of the homes may give way to the growing roots. In the graveyards, the trees are allowed to take root into graves, and it is said that the trees whisper prayers to the creator asking for the forgiveness of sins of those buried in that place.
These practices speak to an ancient knowing that people and trees are intimately interconnected throughout life and forever in history.
Hugging a tree can release negative energy from the bodyHugging a tree can release negative energy from the body
6. Trees are Literally Saving our Lives Every Day
A July 2014 study showed that trees prevent $6.8 billion per year in averted health costs annually, just in the United States. It is estimated that by removing massive amounts of air pollution through their leaves, trees “prevented 850 human deaths and 670,000 cases of acute respiratory symptoms in 2010 alone.”
Studies show that trees in urban areas are removing 4 to 8 times the pollution from the air as their equivalents in rural areas.
This highlights the importance of planting trees everywhere we possibly can, and especially in highly-populated areas where pollution is highest.
Trees are saving our livesTrees are an important part of our lives
7. Trees in a Forest Communicate With One Another Through Underground Networks
Trees are connected below the ground by mycorrhizal fungi, which live symbiotically with the roots of the trees. Both the trees and the fungi need each other to survive. But that’s not all. Because the fungi essentially connect the roots of one tree to another, the trees can use the fungi to pass nutrients to one another.
So, for example, in winter when aspens are weaker, nearby conifers were found to pass additional nutrients to the aspens to keep them healthy. Similarly, older, more-established trees pass nutrients through the fungi to young seedlings which need to grow larger toward the sun’s light in order to survive.
The largest, oldest trees in the forest serve as the hub because they possess and produce large amounts of resources, and their massive roots spread out in all directions.
When one tree is attacked by insects, it distributes pheromonal chemicals through the fungi beneath the soil to warn nearby trees of a possible attack so the other trees can prepare by changing the chemical makeup of their leaves. The fungal networks also strengthen the immune systems of the trees.
So not only do different species of trees help each other out in the forest, but fungi and even other types of plants join the underground network and communicate together to support the health of the entire ecosystem.
There is documented proof that when a tree is dying, it releases its resources into the root networks so that its neighbors can benefit from the nourishment that it will no longer need - it is making the ultimate sacrifice.
Trees communicate with each other below the groundTrees communicate with each other below the ground
In closing, here is a beautiful poem written by Clare Dakin of TreeSisters, which will help you to deepen your connection with trees and with all of nature:
Let the birds take your clothes
Let the waves undo your holding back
Let the vines unravel your tired mind
And the earth savour your sweat and tears.
Let your stories burn off like rising mist,
As your past and the false floors of curbed self love
Dissolve into butterfly wings and fire flies
As your edges blur and your Planetary Self ignites.
Let the trees bathe your breath
Let the meadows embrace you
Let the mountains and the bees remind you
Let the sky flood in and allow the clouds to guide you.
Let your undoing be as total
As your becoming is beautiful –
And when the living world has climbed inside
Enough for you to feel four legs, scales and wings.
May you finally know yourself alive as all things –
Indivisible and responsible
Reborn into wholeness
Natural, Sacred and Wild
~ Clare Dakin
Why People Get Addicted To Drugs (Or Other Things) December 9 2024 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various
In most countries around the world, drug addicts are considered to be criminals. As a result, they are usually treated with contempt and, if they're caught using drugs, they're locked behind bars.
But why exactly do people get addicted to drugs or other things, such as food, porn, video games and social media?
Globally, tens of millions of people are addicted to drugs. Because of their addiction, many of them lose all that they have: Τheir health, their wealth, their relationships, and often their lives.
Yet nothing can force them out of their addiction. Although they know that drugs are harmful, they still keep on taking them. So, the question is, why do they do that?
Our society considers drug addicts as irresponsible, stupid and immoral. Psychological research, however, shows something very different: Τhat they are deeply hurt individuals who are trying to find relief from their suffering.
They are people who were abused - sexually, physically or emotionally - usually during their very early childhood. They are mostly men and women who were unloved, neglected or abandoned during their formative years.
As a result of their traumatic experiences, drug addicts feel a sense of inner lack - a lack of love, joy, meaning and purpose - and try to fill it through substance abuse.
Whether by drinking alcohol, sniffing cocaine or injecting heroin into their bodies, all they try to achieve is to experience a sense of comfort, a sense of inner peace, a sense of control over their lives.
The problem is, the exhilarating psychological effects of drugs are always short-lived. While they last, it feels incredibly good, but within minutes or at most hours, they start to fade away. And then the pain returns. In fact, it never returns - it was already there, hidden yet present. And it feels unbearable.
When this happens, drug addicts feel drawn to psychotropic substances again.
But no matter how many of them they take, they’re never enough to satisfy their needs. Hence, they inevitably lead to the exact same result. And the cycle of addiction repeats itself one more time.
The reason why drugs don’t work in the long run is because they don’t address the root cause of addiction: the sense of emptiness inside.
On the contrary, they only offer an external substitute of what the addict is really looking for: to feel worthy and complete.
The Buddhists have a mandala called Wheel of Life, which divides human existence into six different realms - each representing our various ways of being.
One of those realms is the Realm of Hungry Ghosts. The inhabitants of that realm are depicted as creatures with long scrawny necks, tiny mouths, skinny limbs and big, bloated, empty bellies.
“This,” addiction expert Gabor Maté says,“is the domain of addiction, where we constantly seek something outside ourselves to curb an insatiable yearning for relief or fulfillment.
The aching emptiness is perpetual because the substances, objects or pursuits we hope will soothe it are not what we really need.
We don’t know what we need, and so long as we stay in the hungry ghost mode, we’ll never know. We haunt our lives without being fully present.”
A monk prays for a hungry ghost. From the Kyoto National Museum
Now, when we think of addiction, most of us tend to think specifically of drug addiction.
But addiction can be to anything: food, money, possessions, porn, video games, social media and so on. And whether we realize it or not, many of us are addicted to at least one of them - some more, others less.
Food can provide us with a fleeting sense of fulfillment. Money can provide us with a fleeting sense of power. Possessions can provide us with a fleeting sense of security. Porn can provide us with a fleeting sense of intimacy.
Video games can provide us with a fleeting sense of adventure. And social media can provide us with a fleeting sense of connection.
But, again, no matter how many of those things we consume or acquire, in the end they always let us down, because they can’t give us what we truly deep down long for.
Often, we try to deal with addiction by fighting against it. We restrict our caloric intake, we renounce money and possessions, we repress our sexual urges, and so on, not realizing that addiction is merely a symptom of an underlying disease, and not the cause of it.
Hence, we can’t get rid of it. On the contrary, we usually find that we crave even more what we deprive ourselves of. In other words, our addiction becomes stronger, not weaker.
When it comes to drug addiction, we collectively try to deal with it by waging war against drugs and their users. How exactly? By legally punishing those we find to possess them, in an effort to control their circulation and consumption.
But we never ask: Why do people get hooked to drugs in the first place?
If we did, we’d see that drug addicts are mentally ill people who need help, not criminals who should be locked in jail.
We’d also find out that our society is structurally breeding mental illness and addiction through systems that lead to oppression and social alienation.
But those in power don’t want us to know about that, afraid that otherwise we’d kick them out of power, and dismantle the systems that brought them into it.
So they choose to misdirect our attention. By demonizing drugs and drug addicts, they make us forget what truly matters.
It’s no wonder, therefore, that so many people are addicted to drugs, regardless of the harsh drug laws in place in most countries around the world.
To treat drug addiction, or any other form of addiction, we need to stop fighting against it and instead try to understand it.
In addition, we need to stop judging or punishing those who suffer from it, and instead start treating them with respect and compassion.
Then and only then will we be able to figure out where addiction really comes from, as well as το support addicts in their journey to recovery and healing.
ClimateChangeGate: The Hidden Agenda Behind The Huge Hoax And Global Criminal Conspiracy & Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures
December 8 2024 | From: StateOfTheNation / ClimateScienceNews / Various Climate Change Hoax Exposed as Massive Money-Making Scam and Global Control Scheme.
The whole world has been suffering tremendously from a highly premeditated and complex hoax initially known asGlobal Warming.
When this carefully packaged fraud did not pan out, the New World Order globalist cabal repackaged the unparalleled scam as Climate Change.
What is critical to understand is that the globalist perps have been stealthily geoegineering climate change for decades so that it will appear to be taking place in a much worse way.
Clearly, there is unprecedented atmospheric flux occurring planet-wide, but the geoengineers are manufacturing it on a regular basis.
A daily look at the sky presents the most obvious evidence as to how they are conducting solar radiation management and water vapor production (H2O is the most abundant greenhouse gas) via chemical engineering techniques.
The planet has been experiencing wild and wacky weather for decades now; however, it’s the geoengineers who are primarily responsible for the unprecedented meteorological chaos. And then, there are solar infulences.
There are other valid reasons for both the unpredictable weather and climate chaos tormenting planet Earth. Most of these scientifically proven factors are well explained in the following extended essay.
Global Warming
The Global Warming narrative actually began quite naturally, but was then quite purposefully hijacked and manipulated by malevolent forces determined to dominate the entire planetary civilization. As follows:
The Back Story:
This is what TPTB did. They saw that the planet had entered a period of natural and very gradual global warming.
This occurred during World War II when they had to track the weather very closely for wartime purposes.
The steady warming of the planet paralleled the same period when the Oil & Gas Industry really began to take off and the global population explosion first began.
At the time when the data really started to pour in, the warming was just a “small campfire” … this was early on, right after World War II. Soon after they first made those observations about the slow warming of the planet, the decision was made to turn the little campfire into a raging wildfire.
They experimented with HAARP and used chemtrails and other advanced geoengineering technologies to ramp up the heat worldwide.
Eventually the wildfire of global warming was stoked sufficiently so that full-blown forest fires, brush fires and grass fires were jumping off anywhere and everywhere.
In this way, the synthetic component of Global Warming was fabricated on top of a very real phase of planetary heating.
The next part of their plan was to fabricate the patently false narrative known as the human activity CO2-driven climate change scam.
Only with this correct understanding can the true depth and breadth of the furtive NWO plot to take over the world be properly comprehended and responded to.
But, first, it’s important to be aware of the financial and economic, fiscal and commercial drivers of this massive out-of-control Climate Change juggernaut rolling across the 7 continents.
For it is the secret society of banksters known as the International Banking Cartel and their “Global Money-Making Scam”, that is continuously co-opting Fortune 1000 corporations and national governments, which is at the heart of this “Huge Hoax”.
Solar Variability and Climate: Professor Joanna D. Haigh
Joanna D. Haigh on the ‘little ice age’, solar radiation, and global warming.
There is another major component to this geoengineered Climate Change fraud.
Extreme weather events are now routinely geoengineered and weaponized into what are essentially false flag weather attacks. This highly destructive and deadly type of weather warfare is being used for several reasons.
First and foremost among them is the NWO manufactured need to advertise Climate Change as a real threat to humanity.
What better way to do this than to let loose a plague of violent superstorms, debilitating drought and deluges, as well as other devastating weather events around the globe.
This is how Mother Earth is being blamed for the “meteorological mayhem via false flags” that are really manufactured by the globalist-directed geoengineers.
In this way, nations everywhere are being misled in the camp of Climate Change whose fanatics are desperate to stop weather flux, some of which are totally natural, but most of which are manmade.
The following irrefutable and highly perceptive statement was made by Catholic nun and PhD scientist Rosalie Bertell in her ground-breaking book titled “Planet Earth, the Latest Weapon of War”.
It should also be noted that much of the weather warfare is being aimed at locations that have been targeted by the NWO cabal for specific reasons - political and governmental, economic and financial.
For example, two of the most destructive superstorms on to hit North America on record have occurred within the past couple of years. Behind each of these calamitous weather attacks were hidden agendas that are explained in detail in the exposés posted below (See Related Articles section.)
In point of fact, the geoengineers are now systematically taking control of natural storms, or fabricating them from scratch and amping them up into megastorms, just before slamming them into a targeted city, state or region of a country.
In this manner, nations are either compelled to stay on the NWO reservation, or coerced to comply with a cabal dictate that significantly advances their NWO agenda.
There is perhaps nothing more damning in the official record that proves the existence of this immense conspiracy to defraud humanity than the CIA’s memo titled “The Need For A Climate Control Study Program”.
The preceding CIA document from 1960 outlines the plan and ‘need’ for large-scale climate control initiatives with both civil and military applications.
Knowing that weather changes in the last few decades have been planned and then actualized confirms that CO2 itself is not to blame for the now pervasive weather upheavals.
In their own words, we now know that the profound weather disorder was effectuated according to a master plan.
The key element of that NWO conspiracy was to create a new global bogeyman - Climate Change - that would sufficiently unite the world community of nations so that every country would eventually demand a One World Government.
It is surely no coincidence that this top-secret and highly consequential government report first began to take shape in 1963, not long as the aforementioned CIA document was produced.
Clearly, this exceedingly elaborate and far-reaching conspiracy to deceive the Western people was designed by the World Shadow Government as a means of coming out of their closet.
For their ultimate goal is to rule the world via a totalitarian and tyrannical government not too unlike the European Union, where citizens still think they have a voice but in reality they do not.
Toward that end, the primary purpose of a One World Government would be to act as the enforcement arm of the International Banking Cartel that greedily covets all of the natural resources on the planet.
This is my most concise expose of climate fraud. Please pass it around to everyone you know and your elected officials. The video is short, but cuts right to the heart of the matter.
The NWO globalists know that they must also completely control the weather worldwide because of its enormous impacts on the land, sea and air.
Hence, numerous geoengineering experiments are now being covertly conducted on the land masses, in the oceans and throughout the atmosphere as a prelude to their future world domination.
The Carbon Control Matrix, which was fastidiously developed as a reaction to the fake Global Warming narrative, is just one glaring example of how the One World Government will react to these contrived crises.
The clandestine standing armies now supported by the U.N. will be used to police the panoply of new laws and statutes, rules and regulations, taxes and surcharges that are coming down the pike.
This is also why the various “agendas” were deceptively inaugurated by the United Nations.
For instance, Agenda 21, the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development and Vision 2050 were each implemented as a means to prepare (and especially program) governments and citizenries alike for this rapidly unfolding NWO paradigm.
The current trend of Climate Change hysteria will only get worse. The globalists have never been so desperate to foist their warped vision on all of humankind.
2019 saw an extraordinary uptick in meticulously staged events, each designed to over-dramatize the utterly bogus yet thoroughly captivating Global Warming fiction.
Here’s just one example of how far the globalists will go to pull of this “Con of the Millennium”.
What the patriots can do in order to thwart this juvenile attempt to corral every inhabitant of the planet into the Climate Change pen of compliance is to disseminate information like this.
The more aware folks are everywhere of this demonic connivance, the more difficult for the perps at the top of the food chain to succeed.
In other words, shining the light of awareness on their exceedingly misguided project is the best way to terminate it.
The Truth Movement ought to come together in such numbers so that the raw people power poses a massive and monolithic countervailing force to their unending insanity.
“The climate change hoax is the most complex and convoluted criminal conspiracy in world history. The global warming scam is - BY FAR - the biggest boondoggle ever.
There’s not even a close second. What the globalists did, early on, was to entice everyone into some aspect of this fraudulent business venture.
The International Banking Crime Syndicate made sure everyone thought they could get a piece of the action.
Once they did, and it’s still going on, it was just a matter of executing the climate ruse. Then, anyone without a conscience eagerly joined the climate change club."- Intelligence Analyst & Former U.S Military Officer
Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures
The climate change hoax has collapsed. A devastating series of research papers has just been published, revealing that human activity can account for no more than a .01°C rise in global temperatures, meaning that all the human activity targeted by radical climate change alarmists - combustion engines, airplane flights, diesel tractors - has virtually no measurable impact on the temperature of the planet.
The paper explains that IPCC analysis of global temperatures suffers from a glaring error - namely, failure to account for “influences of low cloud cover” and how it impacts global temperatures.
Natural variations in low cloud cover, which are strongly influenced by cosmic radiation’s ability to penetrate Earth’s atmosphere due to variations in the strength of our planet’s magnetosphere, account for nearly all changes in global temperature, the researchers explain.
As this chart reveals, more cloud cover is inversely related to temperature. In other words, clouds shield the surface of the Earth from the sun, providing shade cover cooling, while a lack of clouds results in more warming:
Cloud Cover Accounts for the Real Changes in Global Temperatures
This is further supported by researchers at Kobe University in Japan who published a nearly simultaneous paper that reveals how changes in our planet’s magnetic field govern the intensity of solar radiation that reaches the lower atmosphere, causing cloud formation that alters global temperatures.
"Records of suborbital-scale climate variation during the last glacial and Holocene periods can be used to elucidate the mechanisms of rapid climate changes…
At least one event was associated with a decrease in the strength of the Earth’s magnetic field.
Thus, climate records from the MIS 19 interglacial can be used to elucidate the mechanisms of a variety of climate changes, including testing the effect of changes in geomagnetic dipole field strength on climate through galactic cosmic ray (GCR)-induced cloud formation…"
In effect, cosmic rays which are normally deflected via the magnetosphere are, in times of weak or changing magnetic fields emanating from Earth itself, able to penetrate further into Earth’s atmosphere, causing the formation of low-level clouds which cover the land in a kind of “umbrella effect” that shades the land from the sun, allowing cooling to take place.
But a lack of clouds makes the surface hotter, as would be expected. This natural phenomenon is now documented to be the primary driver of global temperatures and climate, not human activity.
A New Climate Religion for Idiots There is no evidence that CO2 drives climate change, never mind human-generated CO2 which is 3% - 5% of total CO2. The ice-core data that exists demonstrates the opposite; that temperature change drives changes in CO2 levels.
The Climate Crisis is about controlling us not controlling CO2.
Burn all the oil you want, in other words, and it’s still just a drop in the bucket compared to the power of the sun and other cosmic influences. All the fossil fuel consumption in the world barely contributes anything to actual global temperatures, the researchers confirmed.
As they explain, the IPCC’s climate models are wildly overestimating the influence of carbon dioxide on global temperatures:
"…the [IPCC] models fail to derive the influences of low cloud cover fraction on the global temperature.
A too small natural component results in a too large portion for the contribution of the greenhouse gases like carbon dioxide.
That is why J. KAUPPINEN AND P. MALMI IPCC represents the climate sensitivity more than one order of magnitude larger than our sensitivity 0.24°C.
Because the anthropogenic portion in the increased CO2 is less than 10%, we have practically no anthropogenic climate change. The low clouds control mainly the global temperature."
The Entire “Climate Change” Hoax is a Fraud
Carbon dioxide, in other words, isn’t the “pollutant” that climate change alarmists have long claimed it to be.
CO2 won’t destroy the planet and barely has any effect on global temperatures (the IPCC’s estimate of its effect is, according to Finnish researchers, about one order of magnitude too large, or ten times the actual amount).
In fact, NASA was forced to recently admit that carbon dioxide is re-greening the Earth on a massive scale by supporting the growth of rainforests, trees and grasslands. See these maps showing the increase in green plant life, thanks to rising CO2:
Click on the image above to view a largre version in a new window
Importantly, reducing our global consumption of fossil fuels will have virtually no impact on global temperatures.
The far bigger governor of climate and temperatures is the strength and configuration of Earth’s magnetosphere, which has always been in flux since the formation of the planet billions of years ago.
The weaker the magnetosphere, the more cosmic rays penetrate the atmosphere, resulting in the generation of clouds, which shield the planet’s surface from the sun.
Thus, a weaker magnetosphere causes global cooling, while a stronger magnetosphere results in global warming, according to this research. This phenomenon is called the “Svensmark Effect.”
"This suggests that the increase in cosmic rays was accompanied by an increase in low-cloud cover, the umbrella effect of the clouds cooled the continent, and Siberian high atmospheric pressure became stronger.
Added to other phenomena during the geomagnetic reversal - evidence of an annual average temperature drop of 2-3 degrees Celsius, and an increase in annual temperature ranges from the sediment in Osaka Bay - this new discovery about winter monsoons provides further proof that the climate changes are caused by the cloud umbrella effect."
The “War on Carbon” is Derived from Sheer Stupidity, Arrogance and Scientific Illiteracy
The extreme alarmism of climate change lunatics - best personified by Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez’ insistence thathumanity will be destroyed in 12 years if we don’t stop burning fossil fuels - is all based on nothing but fearmongering media propaganda and faked science. (The IPCC and NOAA both routinely fudge temperature data to try to create a warming “trend” where none exists.)
It’s all a massive, coordinated fraud, and the mainstream media deliberately lies to the public about climate change to push anti - free market schemes that would destroy the U.S. economy while transferring literally trillions of dollars into the pockets of wealthy globalists as part of a “carbon tax” scheme.
Yet carbon isn’t the problem at all. And the “war on carbon” is a stupid, senseless policy created by idiots, given that humans are carbon-based lifeforms, meaning that any “war on carbon” is a war on humanity.
Why Carbon Dioxide is the "Miracle Molecule of Life" for Greening our Planet
Western Propaganda - So Simple But So Effective December 7 2024 | From: JournalNeo / Various
When some time ago Noam Chomsky and I met at MIT, in order to write a book “On Western Terrorism: From Hiroshima to Drone Warfare” and to produce a film with the same title together, the topic we mainly aimed at discussing was that of the countless genocides the West has committed all over the world since the end of the WWII. The second topic was impunity.
But no matter what atrocities we re-visited, our conversation kept slipping towards one crucial theme: the propaganda that has been manufactured in media centers like New York, Paris, London and other North American and European cities; the propaganda created in order to twist both the past and the present.
Without such brainwashing and the almost total indoctrination of the Western general public and the ‘elites’ in all of the ‘client’ states, no imperialist and neo-colonialist policies would have become truly successful.
We spoke about US commercial advertising and its influence on German Nazi propaganda, and about Nazi propaganda influencing by return both the US and European propaganda-makers.
Noam kept asking me about my childhood in socialist Czechoslovakia, and I explained to him, honestly, how indoctrinated I was as a teenager: not by the Communist dogmas, but by the BBC, the Voice of America and the Radio Free Europe – all of them relentlessly spreading the Western political and market gospel to all corners of the socialist world.
Both Noam and I have created dozens of essays on the topic, as well as several books. My latest one, basically written about all the corners of the world where the Empire is spreading destruction and followed by indoctrination, has more than 800 pages, and is called “Exposing Lies of the Empire”.
And I always feel that even this massive book just touches the tip of the iceberg, that it is only a beginning!
Western propaganda is actually a perfect apparatus! It is effective and it is almost fully ‘bulletproof’. It ‘works’! European empires have been refining it for many long centuries, and the European offspring – the United States – has elevated it to almost total perfection.
One precondition for its success is, of course, that the Western political and economic regime owns almost all the major media channels and distribution outlets of the world.
Diversity can never be tolerated. It could smash the idiocy! Once this prerequisite is completed, things get relatively relaxed and cozy for the demagogues in Washington, London and Paris.
Here is just an example of how easy it is to smear a world leader who resists the imperialist designs of the Empire:
Imagine that one sunny morning, some 10 major newspapers and television stations declare that various anonymous but highly reliable sources in Moscow have informed them that the Russian President Vladimir Putin is a vampire!
This ‘news’ would fly all over the world. Many readers and viewers would at first roll around on the floor laughing, but some would not. And even several of those who found the information thoroughly bizarre and unbelievable would at some point realize that seeds of doubt were beginning to grow inside their brains: “OK, it is absurd, of course, but what if? What if? How awful that would be!”
But how can one really prove that he or she is not a vampire? Or how can one prove that he or she has not been visited by some evil extra-terrestrial flying saucers on several occasions?
At some point, the Russian President would feel that he had enough of the charade. He’d go to the best university clinic in Moscow, and ask for a certificate that clearly stated that he is not a vampire. Several leading academics and doctors would get involved and produce a complex and thorough scientific conclusion, resolutely stating that President Putin is not a vampire.
Shocked by and reacting to the vulgarity demonstrated by the Western propaganda tsars, most of the Russian media outlets would offer some commonsense and logic:
"Can’t we all see clearly that he cannot be a vampire? All his teeth are of approximately equal length, he socialized during the day, he does not sleep in a coffin, he eats garlic and he is not scared of crosses; be they Orthodox, Protestant or Catholic ones!”
Others would argue that there are actually no real vampires inhabiting our Planet.
This is when the Western mass media would go into overdrive. Sarcastically it would declare that the Russian academia, Russian doctors and Russian media cannot be trusted – they are all under the heel of the state, and on top of it they have been infiltrated by nation’s secret services and former KGB agents.
"And doesn’t ‘Vlad’ sound somehow similar to ‘Bran’, which is the castle in Romania, which in turn used to be the home base of the commander-in-chief of all militant vampires - Count Dracula?”
There would still be some rational resistance: “No, ‘Vlad’ does not really sound like ‘Bran’, and anyway, nobody in Russia calls Mr. Putin ‘Vlad’ – only the Western media does.” But such voices of reason would never reach the general public all over the world! And on it goes.
In the end, a few billions of human brains would register and subconsciously store the ‘vampire theory’, and they would never again look at the President of Russia, or at his country, with the same eyes!
Of course the Russian leadership is not the only one that the West is targeting. There is a relentless flow of ‘shocking’ rumors and derogatory remarks made by the mainstream media against the President of China, of Byelorussia, against the leadership of Iran, South Africa, Eritrea, Zimbabwe, Syria, and North Korea as well as against all the left-wing governments of Latin America.
After being repeated hundreds of times, the rumors, at least for many people, get confused with facts, and get accepted as facts.
When still leading Cuba, Fidel Castro was constantly ‘dying’ or ‘disappearing’. The North Korean government has been relentlessly portrayed as a desperate gang of bloodthirsty sexual maniacs, executing and raping all that moves.
The ANC and especially President Zuma have done ‘nothing to close that staggering social divide in South Africa’. In South America, the pro-Western media outlets invented and then perfected a new lucrative industry: manufacturing corruption scandals and implicating in them virtually all of the popular socialist leaders.
Nihilism, darkest ‘news’, and scenarios have been force-fed to the public, in order to eradicate all zeal and optimism that comes when one is building a great independent and egalitarian nation.
"I never forget that day,” an Eritrean cameraman exclaimed, during my visit to his country. “I had just finished an assignment inside the Presidential Palace. Then I met my friends and we were having coffee in front of the main gate. Suddenly the Western networks began broadcasting that ‘there is a coup in Asmara’.
Social media went bananas. It was the “Breaking News” story everywhere. And here we were, right there, on a lazy sunny afternoon, in front of the Palace… I had just seen the President…. All was quiet!
They just invented it, in order to get people out onto the streets! They were trying to manufacture a coup via their media outlets.”
It is mainly fear, implanted into the brains of its subjects and slaves; fear that allows the Empire to control almost the entire Planet. Often it is subconscious fear, but it is fear nevertheless. Fear can be that of the Empire as a whole, or of its might and brutality, or even of the alternatives, portrayed in the most unsavory and frightening colors by the propaganda.
In order to rule unopposed, one has to be feared! And one has to smear the alternatives. The task to spread fear, slander diversity and dissent, was given to the official media, academia and ‘artists’.
Of course the biggest ‘threat’ to the Empire has been the two sisters who were born under the same star, from the same mother called Humanism.
Their names are Communism and Socialism. And I am not only talking about the Western Marxist concept. There are many great concepts that put life and the well-being of the people first, all over the world!
In fact, a few decades ago, it was becoming crystal clear that Western colonialism, imperialism and capitalism were finished. Their time was up! Socialism was the natural and logical way forward for most of humanity.
But then the West and its Empire fought back. They employed extreme violence and brutality, as well as cunning ‘divide and rule’ tactics. Tens of millions died, and progress was stopped, although hopefully, only for a limited period of time. And not everywhere!
One of many reasons why Russia is perceived as a great ‘threat’ is because it inherited the humanist and internationalist foreign policy of the Soviet Union. But, also because it itself is actually becoming socialist again (although it is moving in that direction by taking extremely short steps). Russia is recovering irreversibly from those dark days of the free marketer and West’s lackey, Boris Yeltsin.
Russia is also hated because it is setting the ‘wrong example’; proving to the world that one can develop and prosper without taking orders from the West, without serving its governments and corporations. Or more precisely: it can do it exactly because it broke itself free!
The demonization of Russia is relentless. Every little negative detail is multiplied and magnified by the mainstream media and film industry. The world’s public is being nourished by bizarre stereotypes and fabrications. And so one of the most compassionate, deep, artistic and passionate nations on Earth, Russia, is depicted as being cold, robotic, heartless and inherently evil.
Massive NATO military forces are now dispatched along Russia’s western border, and they include German troops. Periodically there are maneuvers and exercises, not far from the borderline.
It is clearly a provocation, and it all brings back the horrific memories of the years right before World War II, the war in which the Russian nation lost between 25 and 30 million lives. A few hundred kilometers south, an old ally, in fact a Slavic sister, Ukraine, is being forced to confront Russia by its Western handlers, something that is being done against the will of the great majority of the Ukrainian people.
The US is heavily involved in the destabilizing of Central Asia, including a group of nations that used to form part of the Soviet Union. But thanks to Machiavellian Western propaganda, it is actually Russia that is being portrayed as the aggressor and a danger to world peace!
And it is China [CCP], which is being depicted as some kind of a ruthless and unpredictable monster that is now ready to swallow the world!
In fact China is an extremely predictable country, and any unbiased student of world history would clearly see how peacefully it has been behaving, for centuries!
But to ‘prove’ that China is not a Communist country, anymore, and at the same time that it is one of the greatest threats to world peace and ‘stability’ (read: to Western control of the World), is one of the most important tasks given to the Western media, academia and propaganda tsars by the Empire.
And they are succeeding! Indoctrination tactics are working flawlessly. The Western pubic is by now thoroughly brainwashed (at worst) or confused (at best) when it comes to China.
In recent years I engaged hundreds of French, Italian, Spanish, German, British and Czech people in discussions about China, just to receive (with extremely few exceptions) a barrage of standardized, patronizing, mass-produced ‘opinions’.
It often felt like talking to the people who were forced to live for decades under the Taliban or under the ‘spiritual guidance’ of some fundamentalist evangelical Protestant sect.
In fact, China is both Communist (Communism or Socialism, but with Chinese characteristics) as it is breathtakingly successful! Analyzing this marvelous country, together with my China-based colleagues and comrades, I am coming to the conclusion that Beijing often uses “capitalist means in order to achieve socialist goals” (to borrow a quote from Jeff J Brown, which is actually the sub-title’ of his latest book).
And an enormous, independent, successful Communist or Socialist country – that is absolutely the worst nightmare for the Empire! It is something that has to be stopped, derailed, destroyed, isolated and demonized by all means! China’s Communist success…
You would never hear about that on CNN, BBC or Fox TV! Just as you would never hear that Indonesia, India, Rwanda and any of the other Empire’s allies and client nations, are in fact the most brutal fascist ‘failed’ states, and that the genocides in Papua, Kashmir and the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) are the bloodiest extermination campaigns anywhere in the world.
I have worked in all these countries, intensively, I can testify. As this is being written, the people of Kashmir are being murdered and tortured. Right at this moment! I am wondering how many of my readers are aware of it?
Perhaps I’m obsessed with “exposing lies of the Empire”. A second volume will soon follow my 820-page long book. I cannot stop travelling, investigating and amassing the evidence. Because I am shocked; because I am outraged and because there are so few, so desperately few people that are actually working in the most desperate parts of the world!
Virtually all stereotypes about the world that have been domesticated in the West are wrong, terribly wrong.
The story of the Russian Revolution is told in the most twisted way, and so is the story of the Ukrainian famine and of the gulags. Not everything is wrong, of course, but the facts and numbers are twisted. I will soon resume my work in the Russian Far East, to write on this subject.
The story of China is grotesquely wrong, from the Great March to the present day!
The story of Cambodia’s “Commie slaughter” under the Khmer Rouge is a thoroughly idiotic manipulation! The slaughter was there, but more people died from the US carpet-bombing, and then from being displaced from their farms by US mines and cluster ‘bombies’, than from Pol Pot’s atrocities.
The great majority of Khmer Rouge men and women had nothing to do with Communism. They were just settling scores with the capital, which they saw as responsible for selling the country to the US, and for the bombing of the countryside. In the jungle, I recently met Pol Pot’s personal guard.
He told me frankly that he was simply pissed off (the bombing killed his relatives), and had no clue what Communism was:
“Pol Pot came and said ‘Communism! Let’s fight the traitors!’ And we did. How could someone call us a Communist country if we did not even know what Communism was?”
What we hardly ever hear is the most important story of mankind: the story of Western colonial plunders, of imposed slavery, genocides that lasted for centuries, of British-triggered famines that killed tens of millions in the Sub-Continent, of virtually the entire Europe and Christianity systematically committing global holocaust.
We are not told that it actually happened, and that it is still going on and on and on! In order to ‘shelter’ the Western public from the horrendous truth about the past and the present of their countries and culture, new and newer stories about those “evil others” are being invented and circulated.
Perhaps, soon, we will be really told that Mr. Putin is a vampire, or that Kim Jong Un is eating Korean virgins for breakfast. We may not be far from such a new wave of propaganda zeal. It all makes sense: the more evil the Empire becomes; the more it has to smear its adversaries.
The mass media and Hollywood are asked to perform. And they do! Reality and fiction are now being systematically mixed, and everything gets blurred and finally the great confusion and intellectual chaos are managing to overwhelm both reason and logic.
The Empire is killing millions and destroying countries and continents. But California is falling off a cliff, and clouds of huge insects are invading the entire North America. While millions of alien terrorists are now engulfing the ‘tolerant’ and ‘democratic’ Europe! So what is more terrible?
Plus there are those sinister monsters like Count Vlad and Comrade Kim, waiting with their daggers behind a corner! Therefore, The Empire and its people have to ‘protect’ themselves. They have to be tough, even tougher than before! And to put their interests first! America (North America) first! Germany first! France first!
Primitive? Does it all sound primitive? Yes, certainly. But it works! At least for the Europeans and North Americans [Westerners] it does. And the rulers don’t give a damn what works or doesn’t for the rest of the Planet.
The Eradication Of Natural Alternatives: Big Pharma Wants To Eliminate The Competition December 6 2024 | From: Sott / Various
Everyone has the simple desire to find happiness within themselves - to find a state of well-being that can be carried throughout their lives. Sara is no different. Sara is a teacher who struggles with mental conditions for which she has been prescribed a bevy of medications.
Over the years she has struggled, as most in her situation have, with addiction and the unbearable side-effects of her FDA-approved "safe" medications.
Her absolute passion in this life is for the children whom she molds and develops with an unrivaled dedication. As she began to grapple further with the unexpected effects and growing addiction to her medications, she began to see it affecting her ability to be present in her responsibilities, while also stealing her creativity that she so greatly treasured.
So when she discovered kratom, which successfully replaced not one, but all of her medications, with zero side-effects, she thanked God for providing this miracle and natural alternative.
In a time when much of what Westerners thought they knew about themselves and their health has begun to prove unfounded, the ever-present natural and homeopathic alternatives are once again gathering attention.
Due largely in part to the continual effort of the pharmaceutical industry, many are unaware that the majority of natural alternatives to the overwhelming amount of different pharmaceutical medications are not only very effective, but in many cases, a far better option.
Big Pharma has been caught in kickback schemes, exposed for bribery, fraud, and price-fixing, and has made it quite clear to the American people that their primary concern is not the health of the nation, but their own bottom line. Yet the pharmaceutical giants march on, increasing their profit with every passing year.
To think that this or any other company would not attempt to stomp out competition that threatened to rival their products is just naïve. This is seen in business every day.
Yet people seem to cast Big Pharma in a light of righteousness, as if they are some benevolent caregiver providing the country with loving healthcare; as if they are somehow exempt from the cutthroat nature of big business simply because their efforts are incorrectly seen as a public service, even though Big Pharma is not concerned with anything above and beyond its own profits.
What is being witnessed is an all-out assault on any possible natural alternative to Big Pharma medications; and currently in their crosshairs, being heralded as a miracle drug, is the natural root extract kratom.
Just as the nation is witnessing with cannabis, the pharmaceutical industry is beginning to wage war against this natural substance because it threatens to expose the simple fact that natural remedies actually work; and work well.
Kratom has shown to work wonders for pain relief, anxiety, insomnia, and much more. In addition to its list of uses, it has a long and respected history; kratom has been used in Southeast Asia for centuries and is perfectly safe, especially when compared to the obvious dangers known to exist with opiate use.
Opiates are an epidemic in this county, causing more 16,000 deaths a year, and according to the National Institute on Drug Abuse, an estimated 36 million people abuse opioids worldwide, with an estimated 2.1 million Americans suffering from opiate addiction.
The number of unintentional overdose deaths from prescription pain relievers has soared in the United States, more than quadrupling since 1999.
The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention report that more Americans now die from painkillers than from heroin and cocaine combined. This is due in large part to the industry's efforts to over-prescribe opiate based medications; and this is not a hypothetical.
Americans now consume more than 84 percent of the world's supply of oxycodone and almost 100 percent of hydrocodone opioids.
These "painkillers," which most doctors will tell you do a poor job of living up to that title, are currently listed as a Schedule II controlled substance.
Currently cannabis, the plant being shown to have more health benefits than all of Big Pharma's medications combined, is listed as a Schedule I controlled substance, implying that the plant has zero medical value and is highly addictive - both of which are categorically untrue.
To add insult to injury, the Federal government has a patent on the medical use of cannabis, all while arresting those who use cannabis for its medical value. It's laughably absurd.
To the resounding cheers of the American people, Big Pharma has been losing the battle to keep cannabis in the dark shadowy recesses of the illegal drug world and out of the hands of those in desperate need of its healing properties.
That in itself is a perfect example of how the industry is not focused on the needs and desires of the people they claim to help, but rather on telling them what they need and creating a situation in which that need becomes a reality; and their profits soar at the expense of real cures as opposed to prolonged treatments.
As kratom continues to rise and its value begins to be clearly demonstrated, Big Pharma has now made it their number one enemy.
It may seem illogical and unnecessary to label a natural root extract that has been used for thousands of years as dangerous while this country's number one prescribed medication is killing people in the millions, yet that is exactly what's happening.
It's clear that opiates are the real problem; so all should be asking themselves why law enforcement chooses to focus on the natural substances alone: It always comes back to money.
There are billions of dollars in profit that the government stands to lose with the rise of natural substances such as cannabis, kratom, or kava, on both a medical and an industrial level. This is why Americans are exposed to fast-tracked drugs with countless known (as well as unknown) side-effects that fly through the FDA, only to be pulled years later due to terrible and often terminal results.
This has almost become an accepted practice. Yet there are drugs with the potential to cure and not just treat that get shelved at the FDA for decades, shrugged off as just the backlogged efforts of the FDA. They can only do so much, right?
The FDA just approved a new super-Vicodin type drug called Zohydro. This drug contains up to five times the amount of hydrocodone and does not have time-release protection, so it can be easily crushed up and snorted or injected by those who would abuse it.
This drug was approved after only one twelve-week trial in which five of the people involved died as a result.
Yet kratom, which has been used for centuries and is widely accepted as extremely safe, is dangerous and unlawful in the eyes of the Feds.
“When you talk to pain specialists in our field, they will all tell you one indisputable fact: opiates are lousy drugs to treat chronic pain" said one FDA committee member who voted against Zohydro approval.
The hypocrisy within this country's medical field, as well as many others, has become something of an established American business model. Lie long enough, with enough confidence and with enough force, and the Truth no longer matters.
This is becoming business as usual, and it is at the expense of the nation's health. They are bogging down drugs that can cure while fast-tracking highly addictive treatments, producing the perfect return customer.
With Alabama's new law deeming kratom illegal and with other states soon to follow, Sara is left falling back into her old rut of addiction and mental fog brought on by the prescribed "healthcare" that so often left her feeling lost in a world full of potential.
So many fall victim to the pacification and addiction almost certain to rear its ugly head when being subjected to daily and prolonged pharmaceutical drug use. Kratom was the one natural substance that gave her zero side-effects and completely relieved her of her anxiety while rendering her other drugs unnecessary.
It is not hard to see why Big Pharma saw this substance as a threat to its ongoing domination of the drug trade in the United States.
How Science Arrived At The Doorstep Of Spirituality December 5 2024 | From: UpliftConnect / Various
Science Validates Collective Intention: Can thought, intention, and emotion influence the physical world? Many people believe that they can, but scientific models for testing and quantifying this idea often fall short.
Classical physics has been very successful at understanding the physical nature of the universe, yet this world-view assumes that reality is limited to matter.
This leaves classical physics ill-equipped to measure or quantify non-physical phenomena. This has led to a movement towards post-material science.
If you experience intuition and other non-physical phenomena, you will be excited to learn that science is beginning to validate this realm. You will be inspired to explore the quantum ways that you are connected with the entire universe.
In Brief:
The Facts: Quantum science today is showing us that our collective thoughts and intentions can have an impact on our physical world and environment.
Reflect On: What does this mean when exploring the reality of ourselves? Or exploring the reality of how we can create change on our planet?
Spiritual practices like meditation, qigong, and yoga were considered forms of science long before Newton inspired classical physics. Quantum Physics flirts with realms of mystery that were traditionally reserved for mystics.
There is no need to be on the sidelines as an observer because there are a few very interesting research projects happening in the interstices between science and spirituality which we will explore below.
Today we have an unprecedented opportunity to participate in this historic process that integrates physics, consciousness, and group meditation.
Spiritual practices like meditation, qigong, and yoga were considered forms of science
Classical Newtonian Physics is primarily focused on the material world, yet consciousness studies are one of the cutting edges of scientific research.
This calls for a new paradigm that allows mind, consciousness, and non-material phenomena to be accepted into the equation of reality, while finding adequate means to study and quantify them.
A leading group of well-respected scientists have come together and presented a Manifesto for Post-Materialistic Science as a solution to the limitations of classical physics.
As with any new field of inquiry, it is not without controversy, and is upsetting to some members of the scientific status quo.
“Major advances in science - revolutions, even - follow the collapse of outworn paradigms, whose overthrow is forced by the accumulation of empirical evidence that violates the paradigm.”
- Dave Pruett, Former NASA researcher; Emeritus Professor of Mathematics, James Madison University
How Science Arrived at the Doorstep of Spirituality
The first echoes of the need for a new paradigm that addresses the non-physical realty came from Einstein in the early 1930’s.
In his research, he observed something so bizarre that he could barely believe what he was seeing. He called it “spooky action at a distance”, which later became two of the main concepts studied in the quantum information sciences, known as entanglement and non locality.
Entanglement occurs when two particles are so deeply linked (by a quantum field) that one particle can instantaneously (meaning faster than the speed of light!) influence the other even at great distances non-locally.
This implies that the physical distance between the particles is irrelevant, thus a quantum leap in our idea of what is possible.
“Major advances in science - revolutions, even - follow the collapse of outworn paradigms, whose overthrow is fThe shift from materialistic science to post-materialistic science may be of vital importance to the evolution of human civilization.
It may be even more pivotal than the transition from geocentrism to heliocentrism.”
Though this phenomena is not fully understood, it is accepted in quantum mechanics. Maybe you have experienced a moment where you randomly thought of a loved one that you hadn’t thought about in a long time, then the phone rings and you pick it up to hear their voice?
These sorts of “synchronicities” happen often for many people, yet may be hard to prove exactly why or how they happen. Quantum physics is at the very beginning of exploring this phenomena that is has usually been called coincidence…until now.
“Without the spiritual world the material world is a disheartening enigma.”
– Joseph Joubert
Have you had a moment where you randomly thought of a loved one, then the phone rings?
Research Science Meets Meditation, Human Intention, and Consciousness
Bill Tiller, Fellow to the American Academy for the Advancement of Science and Chairman Emeritus of Stanford University’s Department of Materials Science, spent 34 years in academia after 9 years as an advisory physicist with the Westinghouse Research Laboratories.
He has published over 250 conventional scientific papers, 3 books and several patents.
As a renowned scientist, he is also a strong advocate for meditation, non-physical science, and spirituality.
He has coined the term Psychoenergetic Science to describe his work that combines consciousness and science.
“For the last four hundred years, an unstated assumption of science is that human intention cannot affect what we call ‘physical reality.’
Our experimental research of the past decade shows that, for today’s world and under the right conditions, this assumption is no longer correct.
We humans are much more than we think we are and Psychoenergetic Science continues to expand the proof of it.”
- Dr. Bill Tiller
Tiller is convinced that intention can influence physical substances and he has developed a crystalline-based silicon technology that can capture and store an intention directed by a group of meditators.
This energetic intention resonates at a frequency that can be recorded or broadcast to achieve a designated effect in people.
Early research with this technology in his lab at Stanford, as well as labs in London and Berlin, indicates the ability of directed human intention to increase or lower the pH of water by 1 point, the growing of larvae at a 30% increased rate, and the killing of bacteria at a 30% increased rate.
This implies some sort of non-physical, non-local connection between intention and these physical substances.
Addressing Skepticism
As with any new field of study there will be successes and failures. Scientists are vulnerable to the weaknesses that we all experience.
Denial of facts, confirmation bias, resistance to new ideas, etc. are issues that scientists from the old and the emerging paradigm will need to address.
Vigorous research can be expensive and funding can be hard to find for theories that are unconventional. So yes, there will be skeptics and there will also be new discoveries that topple long-held beliefs about humans, the universe, and what is possible.
Just as Einstein was baffled and skeptical of his own observations of entanglement, we are all liable to have our preconceived notions challenged and overturned by this emerging field of non-material science.
Yes you can! The best thing about consciousness research on a global scale is that it requires participation from lots of people.
Since we face unprecedented challenges with climate instability, wars, and economic disparity, there has never been a more potent time on the planet for humans to collectively access higher realms of potential.
We are ready for a quantum shift and we really need one.
Global Coherence Initiative
Globally Synchronized for a Quantum Leap
Currently, leading minds in science, spirituality, and technology are learning to collaborate in ways that are certain to make some waves.
Unify organizes globally synchronized meditations through their online network of over one million fans, as well as a network of over 2,000 local organizers in countries around the world.
Combined with United Nations Millennial Goals, like International Day of Peace during the September equinox, or World Water Day during the March equinox, the Unify Team is able to facilitate hundreds of thousands of meditators around the world to focus their intention on important global issues.
These global meditations are free and open to anyone who wants to be involved, or organize their own local event. Learn more here.
The Merraki Institute has partnered with Bill Tiller and is conducting vigorous scientific research in another participatory global experiment.
Merraki is a Greek word meaning, “Doing something with soul, creativity, or love” and it is refreshing to see this ethic being central to a scientific research project.
If you are interested in participating with Tiller’s exciting new technology that uses crystalline-based silicon to store and emit an energy transmission of intention, you can learn more or get involved here.
We all exist within a larger field of energy, a quantum field. Perhaps love, intention, and emotion are entwined within this mysterious field? We have the ability to access various internal states of consciousness through meditation and mindfulness, we can alter our social relationships, and potentially we can shift things on a global scale.
This process begins within, is deepened with personal practice, and is celebrated in the larger community that is engaging in these ancient practices.
We may finally start to see scientific validation for the unseen realms that many of us feel intuitively. Hopefully we will also begin to experience quantum shifts in the world around us as we deepen our understanding.
We are not alone, and the boundaries where we begin or end as physical, emotional, and electrical beings is constantly being redefined by science. Unity consciousness may be a scientific law waiting to be discovered…
In ancient times, when a people or nation was conquered, the new rulers obliterated the history of the vanquished.
Prior to the availability of printed books, history was passed from one generation to the next orally, on handwritten scrolls, or carved in stone on monuments and shrines.
The conquering armies routinely destroyed statues, sanctuaries, tombs, and any physical trace of the previous civilization.
"8 Now there arose a new king over Egypt, who did not know Joseph. 9 And he said to his people, “Look, the people of the children of Israel are more and mightier than we; 10 come, let us deal shrewdly with them, lest they multiply, and it happen, in the event of war, that they also join our enemies and fight against us, and so go up out of the land.” 11 Therefore they set taskmasters over them to afflict them with their burdens."
-
New King James Version (NKJV)
After Joseph saved the Egyptian people from famine, the Children of Israel were welcomed into Egypt and became valued members of Egyptian society.
Many years later, a tribe from the south conquered Egypt and, in a heartbeat, the Children of Israel became scapegoats and slaves to the new rulers.
Artist O. Von Corven interpretation of the Library of Alexandria based on archaeological evidence
During the Greek and Roman eras, books were handwritten but were often kept in libraries and used for education and study.
One of the most famous was the Library of Alexandria which was estimated to have contained over 500,000 books and documents and was home to over 100 scholars for many decades.
The library was burned to the ground during several wars and various periods of unrest. Centuries of human history was lost forever.
In 1440, Johannes Gutenberg invented the printing press, and books became available in greater numbers. The result was an exponential growth in knowledge, education, science, and philosophy.
Literacy, formerly a privilege available only to the ruling class, suddenly became a dangerous tool that could be used by common folks to challenge the power and authority of the elite.
Tyrants, recognizing that an enlightened public is a risk to their authority, always attempt to control what information is available to the people and how it is disseminated.
Joseph Goebbels, the Reichsminister for Propaganda and Public Enlightenment, controlled all radio, press, cinema, and theater in Nazi Germany and regulated German culture.
His often-quoted philosophy of propaganda continues to be a tool used by diabolical dictatorial regimes:
A lie told once remains a lie but a lie told a thousand times becomes the truth
Propaganda works best when those who are being manipulated are confident they are acting on their own free will.
Propaganda must facilitate the displacement of aggression by specifying the targets for hatred.
The most brilliant propagandist technique will yield no success unless one fundamental principle is borne in mind constantly – it must confine itself to a few points and repeat them over and over.
It is the absolute right of the State to supervise the formation of public opinion.
A law against hating Jews is usually the beginning of the end for the Jews.
Under Goebbels’ leadership, literature and books that did not promote and support the goals of the Nazi regime were burned in public events.
"The book burnings took place in 34 university towns and cities. Works of prominent Jewish, liberal, and leftist writers ended up in the bonfires.
The book burnings stood as a powerful symbol of Nazi intolerance and censorship. The Nazi University Student Association created blacklists of works by literary and political figures such as Bertolt Brecht, Erich Maria Remarque, and Ernest Hemingway that were to be thrown into the flames.
In the aftermath of the book burnings, the Nazi regime raided bookstores, libraries, and publishers’ warehouses to confiscate materials it deemed dangerous or “un-German.”
- Author(s): United States Holocaust Memorial Museum, Washington, DC
In a symbolic act of ominous significance, on May 10, 1933, university students burned upwards of 25,000 volumes of “un-German” books, presaging an era of state censorship and control of culture – United States Holocaust Memorial Museum, Washington, DC
German schools substituted indoctrination for education, and “truth” in public media was defined by the political needs of the regime.
Goebbels’ propaganda machine blamed Germany’s economic and social problems on the Jews, providing the Nazi regime with a convenient and familiar scapegoat for the Holocaust.
Isn’t that exactly what is going on in our country [the West] today?
In order to force all of us to sign on to their agenda of a one-world collectivist tyranny, the elite globalists must first destroy American / Western history, ignore the philosophy of our founders, and outlaw our foundational concepts of private property, self-protection, and individual rights.
Fallen Christopher Columbus statue outside the Minnesota State Capitol, St. Paul, Minnesota, June 10, 2020
American History is the anchor that binds each of us to American culture, and the collectivists are desperate to separate us from the traditions that guarantee our freedom.
They tear down our statues, falsely condemn dissent as racism, denounce our founders as white supremacists, refuse to teach true American History in schools, and ban books, films, television programs, and public figures at will, often for the most specious and ridiculous reasons.
These destructive actions are absolutely the same outrageous and barbaric behavior as German university students and Hitlerjungend burning books in the public square.
And they dare to call us Nazis. The sad truth is whatever radical progressives and the collectivist elite call us is exactly what they are doing.
The ability to disseminate knowledge on a global scale via the Internet can grant even one single person the power to change the future of humanity either for the better or, unfortunately, for the worse.
Why Medically Caused Deaths Continue To Be Ignored December 3 2024 | From: JonRappoport / Various
More than any other reporter, I have continued to champion and spread the word about Dr. Barbara Starfield’s revelation: The US medical system kills 106,000 people a year with its medicines. Extrapolate that number for a decade: more than MILLION DEATHS.
I have reported, many times, on Starfield’s review, “Is US Health Really the Best in the World,” published in the Journal of the American Medical Association on July 26, 2000.
I interviewed her in 2009, when she told me that her death numbers (106,000 per year) were conservative, and that the federal government was doing NOTHING comprehensive to fix the ongoing disaster.
Imagine that, coming from a doctor who was a revered public health expert at the Johns Hopkins School of Public Health.
Since I’ve written more articles about Dr. Starfield’s revelations than any reporter around, I also know the reaction of the mainstream press over the years: SILENCE. And more silence. And more.
So this time, I thought I’d explain the main reasons for the silence.
On one obvious level, it stems from the fact that the pharmaceutical industry buys enormous amounts of ads on and around news media. Do not bite the hand that feeds you.
And of course, blaming the medical system for a million deaths per decade…well, if you’re the New York Times and you’re making this into a take-no-prisoners ongoing building story, you’re going to incur considerable heat. Blowtorch heat.
Then there is this: nowhere in the medical literature is there any evidence, based on published studies of drugs, that these substances do such catastrophic damage. In fact, the studies and reports of clinical drug trials are largely glowing.
Only one conclusion can be reached: the medical literature is rife with fraud from top to bottom.
This fact would immediately throw the reputations of the most prestigious medical journals in the world into garbage landfills.
Indeed, we have, on the record, an editor of one of these publications broadly confessing to a mind-boggling reality: Dr. Marcia Angell, editor of The New England Journal of Medicine for 20 years, has written:
"It is simply no longer possible to believe much of the clinical research that is published, or to rely on the judgment of trusted physicians or authoritative medical guidelines.
I take no pleasure in this conclusion, which I reached slowly and reluctantly over my two decades as an editor of The New England Journal of Medicine.”
- NY Review of Books, January 15, 2009, “Drug Companies & Doctors: A Story of Corruption”
Next: if the press dug deep into the guts of the Starfield story, the FDA, which must approve all medical drugs before they are released for public use, would go down with a blinding crash.
No one would be able to defend the Agency. Its profound criminal alliance with Pharma would come full force to the surface.
Multiple medical schools would come under the gun for their relationships with Pharma, and their basic practice of teaching monopolistic drug medicine and not nutritional medicine.
These schools pretend “the evidence of safety and efficacy” for drugs is wide-ranging and invariably clear. Therefore, they, the schools, are abetting what amounts to a capital crime.
And what of the basic Hippocratic oath to “first do no harm”?
Where is that vaunted pledge that tries to establish the practice of medicine as supremely ethical?
As you can see, a whole long line of dominos would fall, if the Starfield story were pursued, by the mainstream, with time, energy, money, and passion for the truth. (Starfield is not the only citation on medically caused deaths. I have documented others in the past.)
Finally, we arrive at a psychological and even philosophical reason for press silence on this ongoing holocaust: for millions of people, the institution of medicine is a foundational pillar of Reality in the world.
Attachment to it is, in a way, mythological. Loyalty to the medical system runs the gamut from hope for raw physical survival to spiritual sustenance.
Creating doubt, widespread doubt, about such a powerful building block of Existence - that would be tinkering with the very structure of things, “meddling with the primal forces of nature.”
But here, on these pages, I’ll meddle with anything I want to. If you can’t handle that, so be it. If I want to make a true fact into a sledgehammer and use it over and over, I will. And on this issue of medical caused deaths, I’d be crazy not to.
Screentime Is Making Kids Moody, Crazy, And Lazy December 2 2024 | From: PsychologyToday
Children or teens who are “revved up” and prone to rages or - alternatively - who are depressed and apathetic have become disturbingly commonplace.
Chronically irritable children are often in a state of abnormally high arousal, and may seem “wired and tired.”
That is, they’re agitated but exhausted. Because chronically high arousal levels impact memory and the ability to relate, these kids are also likely to struggle academically and socially.
At some point, a child with these symptoms may be given a mental-health diagnosis such as major depression, bipolar disorder, or ADHD, and offered corresponding treatments, including therapy and medication. But often these treatments don’t work very well, and the downward spiral continues.
What’s happening?
Both parents and clinicians may be “barking up the wrong tree.” That is, they’re trying to treat what lookslike a textbook case of mental disorder, but failing to rule out and address the most common environmental cause of such symptoms - everyday use of electronics.
Time and again, I’ve realized that regardless of whether there exists any “true” underlying diagnoses, successfully treating a child with mood dysregulation today requires methodically eliminating all electronics use for several weeks - an “electronics fast” - to allow the nervous system to “reset.”
If done correctly, this intervention can produce deeper sleep, a brighter and more even mood, better focus and organization, and an increase in physical activity.
The ability to tolerate stress improves, so meltdowns diminish in both frequency and severity.
The child begins to enjoy the things they used to, is more drawn to nature, and imaginary or creative play returns. In teens and young adults, an increase in self-directed behavior is observed - the exact opposite of apathy and hopelessness.
It’s a beautiful thing.
At the same time, the electronic fast reduces or eliminates the need for medication while rendering other treatments more effective.
Improved sleep, more exercise, and more face-to-face contact with others compound the benefits - an upward spiral! After the fast, once the brain is reset, the parent can carefully determine how much if any electronics use the child can tolerate without symptoms returning.
Restricting electronics may not solve everything, but it’s often the missing link in treatment when kids are stuck.
Children’s brains are much more sensitive to electronics use than most of us realize. In fact, contrary to popular belief, it doesn’t take much electronic stimulation to throw a sensitive and still-developing brain off track.
Also, many parents mistakenly believe that interactive screen-time - Internet or social media use, texting, emailing, and gaming - isn’t harmful, especially compared to passive screen time like watching TV.
In fact, interactive screen time is more likely to cause sleep, mood, and cognitive issues, because it’s more likely to cause hyperarousal and compulsive use.
Here’s a look at six physiological mechanisms that explain electronics’ tendency to produce mood disturbance:
Because light from screen devices mimics daytime, it suppresses melatonin, a sleep signal released by darkness. Just minutes of screen stimulation can delay melatonin release by several hours and desynchronize the body clock.
Once the body clock is disrupted, all sorts of other unhealthy reactions occur, such as hormone imbalance and brain inflammation. Plus, high arousal doesn’t permit deep sleep, and deep sleep is how we heal.
Many children are “hooked” on electronics, and in fact gaming releases so much dopamine - the “feel-good” chemical - that on a brain scan it looks the same as cocaine use.
But when reward pathways are overused, they become less sensitive, and more and more stimulation is needed to experience pleasure.
Meanwhile, dopamine is also critical for focus and motivation, so needless to say, even small changes in dopamine sensitivity can wreak havoc on how well a child feels and functions.
In fact, animal studies show that exposure to screen-based light before or during sleep causes depression, even when the animal isn’t looking at the screen.
Sometimes parents are reluctant to restrict electronics use in a child’s bedroom because they worry the child will enter a state of despair - but in fact removing light-at-night is protective.
Both acute stress (fight-or-flight) and chronic stress produce changes in brain chemistry and hormones that can increase irritability.
Indeed, cortisol, the chronic stress hormone, seems to be both a cause and an effect of depression - creating a vicious cycle. Additionally, both hyperarousal and addiction pathways suppress the brain’s frontal lobe, the area where mood regulation actually takes place.
In today’s world, it may seem crazy to restrict electronics so drastically.
But when kids are struggling, we’re not doing them any favors by leaving electronics in place and hoping they can wind down by using electronics in "moderation."
It just doesn't work.
In contrast, by allowing the nervous system to return to a more natural state with a strict fast, we can take the first step in helping a child become calmer, stronger, and happier.
Anna von Reitz: The Banking System Including Specifics On The World Bank And Karen Hudes December 1 2024 | From: PhiBetaIota / Various
The banks are crooked. All of them. They have no other choice. And THAT is the problem.
We have, whether we know it or not, created a criminal banking system and then stood back and let it roll. What kind of results do we expect from that?
A train wreck is what I expect from that, and “transitioning” out of this crooked system is made difficult by the fact that both alternative models, the gold-backed system and the quantum system, are known to be crooked, too.
What bothers me is that the bankers know this and I know this and you should know it if you don’t - but nobody is talking about this fundamental fact.
The Federal Reserve [Worldwide Reserve Banking] system is a fantasy built on grossly criminal practices requiring impersonation, enslavement, and barratry.
The IMF system is built on a currency commodity rigging scheme - the “Exchange Stabilization Fund”.
The BRICs system is built on manipulation of gold reserves and artificially restricting access to gold - commodity rigging, again.
The Quantum system is another fantasy built on manipulation of old MS-DOs programming and manipulation of digits, more rigging...
It’s all about manipulation of “perceived values” of symbols and artificially controlling access to commodities. It’s all crooked. And if you think about it more than five minutes, it’s also crazy.
It’s idolatry. Just like people used to carve statues and worship the “image of God” they had themselves created, we create these “symbols of value” - coins, pieces of paper, etc. - and give them value based on our belief that they have value.
Years ago I waved a dollar bill at a friend who was staring at me like I was nuts.
I said to him, “Look at this! What is it? It’s a piece of paper! And it’s not even a useful piece of paper. It’s printed all over, so not good to write on. It’s too stiff and hard-surfaced to use for toilet paper.
What in the hell do you think this is? What gives it any “value” if not your pig-headed belief that it HAS value?”
Well?
And it is the same thing with a gold coin. Sure, gold is a metal, so relatively speaking, more valuable than paper.
It’s even a fairly rare metal with some special properties as metal, which increases its value for some industrial applications.
But, when you get right down to it, what good is it to you? Can you eat it? Wear it? Will it keep you warm or fuel your car?
And if you don’t use gold or silver, what other commodities are you going to arbitrarily pick? Blueberry jam? Seltzer water?
You see, this whole system of thinking and doing things is crazy, so instead of arguing over which idiot-system we are going to use, let’s stop being idiots.
There is only one (1) and exactly one (1) honest form of money possible.
And that is money based on the value of all traded commodities and all labor, worldwide.
A currency based on all traded commodities and all labor immediately guts the motivation for rigging commodities and buffers everyone against losses. It also puts a curb on “futures trading” - because every country is a producer of “currency standard goods”, and so, at least potentially, is every individual.
So, we could have honest money, free trade, and global harmony for the cost of issuing a currency based on the total value of traded goods and labor, worldwide.
It could be issued by one international Think Tank and all the various countries could take turns sending their own oversight teams to make sure nobody was fudging anything.
That takes care of the fear that there would be one bank controlled by one set of all powerful bureaucrats.
Along with this, strict and permanent accords would have to be adopted guaranteeing every living man and woman the absolute right to engage in trade and to use this global currency without restriction or fear of losing access to it and the transfer systems related to it.
Our money would stand for the labor, both skilled and unskilled, of workers in China as well as Belize, Germany, and all the other countries of the world. It would stand for all the commodities traded on every stock exchange worldwide.
So a gain in the value of skilled labor in Bangladesh would increase the value of the money worldwide, and a new forest planted in Brazil would increase the value of the money worldwide.
In this way, the monetary system would encourage everyone to do better and to help each other.
It would also encourage every government on Earth to be diligent in guarding against counterfeiting and hoarding and other evils, because they would know that it was their money being victimized by these practices, along with everyone else’s.
Ah, but what about the Eternal Problem? How to pay for the disabled, the sick, the elderly, the infants - all those who, for one reason or another, are not able to pull their weight?
We simply value them more, and in our new banking system, we give them extra tokens.
Life itself is infinitely valuable, beyond price.
So we need to stop focusing on the comparatively petty issue of how do we feed the poor and infirm - and start focusing on the much larger issue of properly valuing life and thereby valuing our brothers and sisters, fathers and mothers, friends and neighbors, the dogs at our feet and the trees lining our streets.
Comment: The following links were articles recently released by the 'Reserve Bank of New Zealand.'
In an utterly obsurd attempt to keep the narrative going that the local chapter of a Rothschild-run private central bank
has any legitimacy to lend currency to a nation - they bang on about being inclusive of all racial groups - and get this - even pat themselves on the back for winning a central bank award for transparency?
Transparency from a central bank? Who are they kidding?
ENOUGH.
These lying criminals can see the writing on the wall.
“It is important for our legitimacy that a broad cross-section of New Zealanders – rather than a few technical experts or regulated institutions – are interested in and understand our activities. Where we fit, what we do, and what we don’t do. We are working for all current and future New Zealanders.”
"We want to be a ‘Great Team, Best Central Bank’ and transparency plays a crucial part to get there. This award recognises our efforts to bringing a higher level of transparency and accountability in achieving our mandate,” Mr Orr said. "
These quotes are absolute nonsense.
The people are waking up
- and in this context they are now repeating the most important question of all relating to this:
“Why is a privately owned and run banking institution issuing and controlling the currency of my country?”
After all, everything that we trade and everything that we earn from work and services, is all predicated on being alive and having needs and desires as living people.
Most of us are both producers and consumers, but those who are only able to consume are vitally important as well.
It is the consumers who give meaning and value to what the producers produce, whether it is goods or services.
Consumers are the ultimate source of “perceived value” in any such system. Put another way, it’s my hunger that makes your hot dog valuable in the first place.
If we remember these simple facts when we create economic service systems - and that is all that banking and insurance and stock and bond markets are - and properly value consumers for what they contribute, then everything falls back into balance. Both the yin and the yang have their due.
From that perspective, it then becomes possible for people to see that all of this, whether honest or crooked in its factual operation, is arbitrary.
It’s a game. We are keeping tally and nobody really knows why.
That simple act of keeping track of what goes into the system and what comes out of the system and into “your” account and “my” account, is what creates the illusion of limitation, separation, and value. Accounting makes rich men rich and poor men poor.
Accounting is the mechanism of enslavement, just as law is the instrument of condemnation.
So we need to ask ourselves - what are we accounting for? Why?
Perhaps it might make sense if the purpose of accounting was to make sure that everyone gets a fair share, or to make sure that something pencils out in terms of effort going into it versus benefit coming out of it, but instead, the main purpose of accounting in the modern world is to keep track of digits and shunt them here and there, to keep a tally of symbols - signifying what? Non-existent piles of silver? Hours that nobody ever worked?
This might be harmless enough in a theoretical world, but our actual experience tells us that it is harmful, because people forget it is a game and charlatans make false claims in commerce based on these tallymarks.
They take actual homes and farms and factories “in return for” - well, nothing at all.
Yes, I will give you credit for reading this, because most people can’t bear to think about these things - and I will note that there is no big difference between me “giving you credit” for reading this and any bank giving you credit for filling out a loan application, pledging your assets to them, so that they have credit to loan you.
You finally see how stupid this is? How important it is to know what you are valuing? And how that value is accounted fof?
Value, like beauty, is actually in the eye of the beholder. It doesn’t exist external to the relationship between individual Producers and individual Consumers.
So focus the economic services industry on the relationship between Consumer and Producer, and properly value the Consumers.
The simpler, more mindful, more direct, and more honest we can make the interface between Consumers and Producers on a worldwide basis, the better.
Instead of quibbling about what physical material we use to make tokens - our little Tiki gods made of gold, plastic, paper or what-have-you - or what form the tokens take, our attention should be on what we value and why we value it and how we account for it.
The more abundant and the more widely dispersed the tokens are, whatever we use as tokens, the better.
We don’t need to be coy or chintzy about our reasons for distributing tokens, either, so as to make them seem more valuable by being scarce. We can freely give every man, woman, and child on this planet more than enough tokens to live and live well, which should be the goal of any sane economic system.
And then, we need to ask ourselves a lot of disturbing questions like: do we really need ten Barbie dolls?
Do we need to eat meat every night of the week? What impacts do our consumer choices have on the planet? The plants, the animals, and other people?
Do we need to make other choices and value other things? Or value different things more?
Maybe love and health should hit the scales and weigh in as being “valuable”? These are the worthy questions, and the answers we give can change the world.
It really doesn’t matter whether we use gold, paper, plastic, or digits as a “medium of trade”.
Whatever tokens we use to represent value, they remain tokens, in the same way that a statue representing a saint remains a statue.
So let’s re-focus our thinking and the worldwide debate about banks and “money” and currencies, and most of all about “value” - and let’s squarely face such questions as, “Can value be stored?”
I, for one, don’t believe that value can be stored in a gold coin like storing electrons in a car battery; rather, I see that some delusions are more durable than others. People more readily believe that gold has value, so according to their belief, it does.
But that’s like saying I believe in ghosts, so I am more scared when I hear something go bump in the night.
It’s not a reflection of the value of gold. It’s a reflection of people’s long term belief in the value of gold.
Let’s ask - what is our standard for assigning “value” to a cord of wood, or an hour of time? Let’s ask why your hour as a brain surgeon is so much more valuable than my hour cleaning ten toilets?
Most of all, let’s ask who all this really belongs to - because to be honest, none of us created any of what we are trading.
Even our ability to walk around and think and perform work is being constantly created for us by powers we don’t begin to comprehend.
So, in the final analysis, what are we doing, but indulging in an adult game of “Pretend”?
Let’s look at what we are doing, why we are doing it, and how we are doing it. And then answer the real question that we are being asked by the entire Universe: what do you want? Do you want things to be like this?
Karen Hudes is a flak for the World Bank - but this statement requires analysis of what the “World Bank” is. It’s a bank of banks, controlled by bankers from all over the world.
So what happens when the World Bank does things that endanger or offend the member banks?
If things get bad enough and the implications liability-wise are clear enough, those member banks that stand to lose the most will need a “whistleblower” to dampen down the improper actions being taken by the World Bank.
The same scenario could develop within the World Bank itself. The Directors could find themselves being outgunned and out-maneuvered by several very powerful member banks - in effect, forced to do immoral or illegal things and left to take the blame for it.
Enter Karen Hudes.
That is the kind of “Whistleblower” she is - not the brave, lonely figure alerting the world to criminal wrong-doing, but the Insider being employed to blow the whistle because internal organizational control mechanisms aren’t working.
You might think of her as the person being paid to pull the emergency brake on a runaway train.
So, she’s certainly not an enemy of the World Bank. She still indirectly works for them and so, last time I looked, does her husband.
She was, in fact, taking action to help at least some factions within the World Bank and most likely, her activities stem from the second scenario - that is, most likely she was working for some of the directors of the World Bank to save the World Bank.
My beef with Karen is that she either doesn’t know or chooses not to tell the truth about the American issues. She misrepresents American history and does so in a way that undermines efforts to settle accounts.
And why that is?
She has spent her life in Europe and even many Americans who grew up and stayed in this country for a lifetime don’t know their own history, so it is completely plausible and even likely that she simply doesn’t know that she is misrepresenting what went on here.
It could also be that she knows the history and is - again - protecting the World Bank.
The World Bank has reasons why it does not want to hear about what it owes Americans.
1. We know that FDR collected by his own admission 20,000 tons of privately held American gold.
We know that 6,000 tons of that was used to capitalize the Federal Reserve System, and 14,000 tons was used as a bankruptcy guarantee for the other Secondary Creditors - the World Bank and IBRD (International Bank of Reconstruction and Development).
We know this gold stash was used as a collateral guarantee backing both the World Bank and IBRD as a result.
We also know that when the bankruptcy of “the” United States of America, Incorporated was finally settled in November of 1999 - that gold was not returned to the Americans.
World Bank and IBRD claimed it as “abandoned assets” - and made no attempt to contact us and return the assets to the lawful heirs - the living people of this country.
I have a problem with that.
It’s bad enough that they had the free use of our assets as collateral for 66 years without our consent and even worse that FDR stole our assets at gunpoint in the first place - which they also had cause to know - without adding injury to insult by purloining the assets once the bankruptcy was over.
We want the 14,000 tons of American gold returned to the lawful government of this country, to be returned for the direct benefit of the heirs of those it was stolen from.
It’s just simple law and decency. If your Grandmother was forced at gunpoint to “donate” her wedding ring, you’d feel the same way I do. It’s not even the thought of any riches. It’s the thought of justice and property being returned to the lawful heirs and owners.
Second Bone to Pick:
Upward of $21 trillion dollars worth of credit owed to Americans is also owed by the banks - and the World Bank and its members certainly have cause to know this.
The “system” adopted in 1913 and completely implemented in 1934 is a debt-credit system using a private military script I.O.U. known as the FEDERAL RESERVE NOTE - FRN’s, as currency.
Like any other “Note” this is just a piece of paper promising to pay at some later date.
But to be legal there has to be a redemption date and there is none published on these notes - why?
Because the debt was transferred to Treasury Bonds that are issued in tranches and paid off on specific dates - to the purported investors, the Federal Reserve Banks.
But are the Federal Reserve Banks the actual investors?
No. They are just a bunch of check kiters, illegal securities brokers, and crooks..
The American States and People are the actual investors - again, at gun point, forced to “invest” by Legal Tender Laws.
So let’s look a little deeper at the actual situation.
They are using debt as legal tender which results in what is known as a debit-credit system.
I give you an I.O.U. and you give me a hamburger.
Have I paid you for the hamburger?
No.
I have promised to pay you back sometime in the future.
In this way the “US National Debt” accumulated, and so also did the American National Credit.
All the Americans who exchanged their actual labor and actual hamburgers for I.O.U.s are owed pre-paid credit for every penny of the US National Debt.
Plus interest.
This is a fact that none of the banks want to face, because they all benefited from using this credit that was in fact owed to us. They purloined it, leveraged it, invested it, cashiered it away so that we couldn’t have any direct benefit from it, and now, they don’t want to admit what they did and return it.
In fact, they can’t return it, but they could make a good faith effort to benefit the people they wronged by carrying through on the promised remedy passed by their Congress back in 1934, and honoring a system of Mutual Offset Credit Exchange Exemption, which the miscreants never actually disclosed to the public or fully implemented.
In a MOCEE system both parties owe each other debts.
In this case, we owe them for government services and they owe us for the goods, services, credit, etc., that they receive from us - so we simply agree to “offset” our debts.
I owe you $10, you owe me $100, so we agree that henceforth, I owe you nothing and your debt to me is reduced to $90.
Confirmed - Loans & Mortgages Are Created Out Of Thin Air By The Banks
This stunning news clip from New Zealand TV news show 'Seven Sharp' confirms the revelations shared by 'The Money Masters' and other such pioneering thinkers and researchers who have long sought to bring forward the truth about how money works.
The is as stunning as it is simple: whenever you apply for a loan or a mortgage THE BANK YOU APPLIED TO CREATES THE MONEY OUT OF NOTHING.
It is not lent to you from the banks' holdings, it is not borrowed from other accounts. It simply is entered into a bank account digitally and from that day forth you are contractually responsible for paying back the created money PLUS all the interest that accrues.
This fiat currency is destroying the confidence, trust, and agreements that we hold with one another and with merchants on a daily basis by corrupting the medium of exchange that we all collectively agree to use.
Many will go on to expound the details of promissory notes, double entry book keeping and all sorts of other confusing details, but it is essential that this video or the source for it at Seven Sharp should be shared with every one you know.
Please, take 5 minutes now to share this video and explain why it is so important that everyone knows that the banks are hoodwinking the people and it does not need to be this way any more.
If the rats had simply carried through and made this available to the Americans, the US Debt would have been kept in check and never “blossomed” into a $21 trillion dollar behemoth. Plus interest.
Now the “US” Corporations, including the Federal Reserve System, responsible for this theft and embezzlement of pre-paid credit owed to the Americans, applied for and received bankruptcy protection because of the bogus “US National Debt” that should have been offset -but clearly, this was all predicated on fraud and embezzlement of credit owed to us, so that no bankruptcy protection should have been allowed.
Those who benefitted from this theft and who protected the perpetrators - the Pope and the Queen - remain on the stick for it, but all the banks worldwide benefitted, so Karen’s buddies at the World Bank are squeezing their knees together, too.
It’s an absolutely staggering amount of pre-paid credit that was extracted from us and the interest owed on it has taken on a life of its own.
The pre-paid American National Credit is the elephant in the downstairs bathroom.
We know that they can never pay us back in actual fact, but they can begin to make amends by doing what they agreed to do in the first place. They need to be authorizing Mutual Offset Credit Exchange Exemptions for all Americans, allowing us to offset all public debts.
In real time that means that we would be able to offset mortgage payments (which are public debt, not private - but that’s another story), college loans, utility payments, and various other bills.
This could be done simply by issuing a special purpose credit card.
In this way, Americans would finally obtain relief and the Perpetrators would finally be paying some of their own bills and nobody would have to go broke over it.
So far, they are trying tooth and nail to obscure and cover up the facts, but both the history and the very nature of a debt-credit system belie them.
They are stuck and they either come to terms to provide relief that is owed, or eventually enough “wolves” will wake up - enough other countries will realize that they have been or are being victimized in exactly the same way, and then all bets are off.
I suspect that this latter fact is what makes the World Bank so nervous.
Growth and profits are good things for corporations - and that includes banks, but not at the cost of enslaving people you are supposed to serve, and not at the cost of fraud, embezzlement, and all the other crimes involved.
This is just "the credit side" of things. There’s more that puts us - Americans - at odds with Karen and the World Bank on the actual assets side.
In 1868, the Scottish Government chartered a commercial corporation calling itself “The United States of America, Inc.”
They then gained access to our credit using this semantic deceit.
Their plan and the plan of every other corporation operating in this manner ever since, was simply to charge up our credit cards to the limit, claim bankruptcy protection for themselves, and claim that we were their co-signers - so as to leave us holding the proverbial bag.
Before their planned bankruptcy, however, they did a number of things that have still to be corrected or accounted for.
Most significantly, they bought the Philippine Islands “for” us, using our money to do it, and then, they transported all our physical gold to the Philippines for “safe-keeping” offshore.
That original Doppleganger went bankrupt in 1906 and the next Doppleganger, “the” United States of America, Inc. pulled the same basic trick, inflated the currency, ran up the stock market, caused the whole “Roaring Twenties” and Prohibition mark up, went bankrupt in 1933 - and in 1934, their Board of Directors calling itself a “Congress” passed legislation “creating and independent government for the Philippines”.
This created a situation wherein we owned the land of the Philippines lock, stock, and barrel, but now the Philippines had an “independent government” to act as the Trustee for all our gold that was packed off and stored there.
This is the connect between Marcos and the Philippines and our gold and President Kennedy and the various agreements that various Presidents made “for” us and that Karen keeps hooting about - the Bilateral Minefields and Green Hilton and so on.
Comment: Anna's knowledge on matters in the East (and especially with regards to deposited historical gold and other assets in bunkers in Eastern Asian countries) is outside of her otherwise extremely well-versed sphere of expertise. Therefore some of her comments on Eastern matters are not always well informed.
To put it mildly, all that went on back then by any sane evaluation, is piracy.
And by Maxim of Law, “Possession by Pirates does not change ownership.”
Everything that they stashed over there still belongs to us and we have the shipping and docket and flat and box numbers and everything else from those days down to this. We even have their supreme Bank Trustee in our jurisdiction, and are working with him to sort this Mess out.
So, that is stroke Number Three that Karen Hudes and the World Bank don’t want to face.
Don’t get me wrong. The Americans don’t own all the gold that is cashiered in the Philippines and Indonesia. We do, however, own a very goodly part of it, and we own it outright.
Our gold and silver deposits collateralize many, many, many banks and the loss of that collateral is what ultimately terrifies the banks.
As with so many other bunko schemes they changed the meaning of “Depositor” to allow themselves to seize deposits left in their keeping, but our deposits were made before those surreptitious changes away from a “normal course of business” - so we are unaffected and grandfathered-in.
Karen and her Employers at the World Bank don’t know whether to stand up or sit down as a result. Nobody knows what to do, and at the same time, nobody wants to talk to us - because they are afraid of us.
They know how mercilessly we have been cheated and defrauded and they expect no mercy in return.
I can only assume that they judge others by themselves.
However, in the broad scheme of life, it does no good for anyone to seek the destruction of others. That just opens up another avenue for nasty people to profit themselves at everyone else’s expense, so no, we are not proposing vengeance.
We are proposing a peace and reconciliation process to discharge odious debt and open up credit resources and restore a sane economic system, at the same time that we fully restore our own government - putting Americans in control of America again.
This should be good news for people worldwide, as it dawns on them that “the US” is not America.
It should also be a relief that we are proceeding in a lawful and peaceful manner and not being vengeful.
At the same time, Mr. Trump and the Pope and the Queen, need to talk directly to the actual Creditors and dispense with any pretense that we are anyone or anything but what we are: the American States and People, doing business as The United States of America [Unincorporated].
Obviously, Karen and the World Bank and the community that she represents professionally have tried to avoid these facts and tried to explain them (and us) away, and that is why I have a less-than-high regard for Karen.
I see her as someone who is grinding her own wheel and actually protecting interests that have been less than honest and forthcoming both now and in the past.
That doesn’t mean that they can’t change, and it doesn’t mean that we won’t talk to them in the interests of resolving all these issues. It just means that the facts as we know and observe them don’t jive with the story that Karen is selling.
A Final Comment from Anna:
[This comment is not part of the original article. It came to me from Anna today, February 23 2020 via email. I told her that I wanted to republish this article from PhiBetaIota and asked her for any additional comments:]
The fact is that the same parties control all the world’s gold just as they control oil supplies and soon hope to control water supplies.
The game now is to locate, jail, or otherwise neutralize these whackjob criminals.
I stand by everything I said in that article and it does not matter what you choose for your idol - paper, gold, crude oil - nor does it matter if it comes from the East or the West.
It’s all crooked, it’s all idolatry, and if the Pope or the Mullahs or the leaders of the Synagogues of the world were worth their salt, they would all be denouncing it and calling for the honest currency system I described.
Until we adopt such a system there will be commodity rigging and fraud. I am sorry but that is just the way it goes. Human nature is what it is.
A Nazi In The (Pocket) Is Worth Four In The Bush (Family)
November 30 2024 | From: IlluminatiNews / Various The Nazi’s American Banker: What is interesting about the history of the Bush family are the connections: Avril Harriman, Allen Dulles, the Rockefellers (the start of the oil connection), James Baker III, Gulf Oil, Pennzoil, Osama bin Laden… on and on it goes.
A lapse of memory? It’s as well to remember that the Web never forgets, at least Bush should have taken note of this fact and been careful of his utterances and how they can come back to haunt them.
In fact four generations of Bush family history and too many skeletons in too many closets to count are to be found on the Web.
[Comment: This article was written around sixteen years ago. Some references are dated but the history remains.]
And given all the ‘pullpit pounding’ (more of which below) by ol’ Duyba and his minions, over the dubious moral character of Saddam and his cronies, much of which has underpinned the justification for the invasion and occupation of Iraq, it’s as well to compare the two sets of rogues.
Not surprisingly, there’s little to choose between the two except that, in the case of the Bush gang, they have a ‘pedigree’ in perfidy which extends back almost a century and four generations that makes Saddam look positively angelic by comparison.
Part I: Prescott Bush – Setting a Family Example
In a previous piece a quote I used mentioned Prescott Bush the grandpa so I decided to do a little researching to see what other dirty little secrets the Bush family have hidden in the dark recesses of the WWW and lo and behold, there’s a load of stuff out there (7,630 links to be precise, according to google just on granpa Prescott Bush).
Geronimo!
It’s 1918 and, well you know students, they’re always up to innocent pranks. It seems Grandpa Bush set his grandson some fine family precedents starting with digging up Geronimo’s skull.
"In 1918, Prescott Bush and two companions crept into the cemetery near Fort Sill and pried open the grave of Geronimo. The head was taken out, spiffed up and forwarded to New Haven, where it was given pride of place for goofy rituals that have been attended by generations of Bushes and a veritable army of powerful types."
The Apache nation (what was left of it anyway) was not amused. Okay, we’ll forgive granpa Bush his ‘juvenile pranks’ but it seems that this set the scene for the rest of his miserable life until his death in 1972 from carcinoma of the lung.
From Skulls to Zyklon B (And Back Again)
But it seems that great-granpa George Walker was also in on the business of making money out of death (like great-granpa like great grand-son);
"George Walker, GW’s great-grandfather, also set up the takeover of the Hamburg-America Line, a cover for I.G. Farben’s Nazi espionage unit in the United States.
In Germany, I.G. Farben was most famous for putting the gas in gas chambers; it was the producer of Zyklon B and other gasses used on victims of the Holocaust.
The Bush family was not unaware of the nature of their investment partners.
They hired Allen Dulles, the future head of the CIA, to hide the funds they were making from Nazi investments and the funds they were sending to Nazi Germany, rather than divest."
It just doesn’t stop does it, as Prescott Bush, son of George continued in the ‘grand tradition’ of skullduggery by also doing deals with the Nazis:
"On October 20, 1942, the US Alien Property Custodian, under the "Trading With the Enemy Act," seized the shares of the Union Banking Corporation (UBC), of which Prescott Bush was a director and shareholder.
The largest shareholder was E. Roland Harriman. (Bush was also the managing partner of Brown Brothers Harriman, a leading Wall Street investment firm.)
"The UBC was established to send American capital to Germany to finance the reorganization of its industry under the Nazis. Their leading German partner was the notorious Nazi industrialist Fritz Thyssen, who wrote a book admitting much of this called "I Paid Hitler."
"Among the companies financed was the Silesian-American Corporation, which was also managed by Prescott Bush, and by his father-in-law George Herbert Walker, who supplied Dub-a-Ya with his name.
The company was vital in supplying coal to the Nazi war industry. It too was seized as a Nazi-front on November 17, 1942. The largest company Bush’s UBC helped finance was the German Steel Trust, responsible for between one-third and one-half of Nazi iron and explosives.
"Prescott Bush was also a director of the Harriman Fifteen Corporation, (this one owned largely by Roland’s brother, Averell Harriman), which owned about a third of the Consolidated Silesian Steel Corporation, the rest owned by Friedrich Flick, (a member of Himmler’s "Circle of Friends" who donated to the S.S.)."
What is interesting about the history of the Bush family are the connections; Avril Harriman, Allen Dulles, the Rockefellers (the start of the oil connection), James Baker III, Gulf Oil, Pennzoil, Osama bin Laden… on and on it goes. It looks like this’ll have to be part one of an on-going series on the Bush dynasty and their dirty dealings.
The story of steel magnate and billionaire bankroller of the Nazis, Fritz Thyssen and his Bush family connection is so incredible, that it deserves to be turned into a movie (obviously not by Hollywood).
It all starts with John Loftus, a former U.S.Department of Justice Nazi War Crimes prosecutor who is the source of the following,
"From 1945 until 1949, one of the lengthiest and, it now appears, most futile interrogations of a Nazi war crimes suspect began in the American Zone of Occupied Germany…. [The interrogation of] [m]ultibillionaire steel magnate Fritz Thyssen-the man whose steel combine was the cold heart of the Nazi war machine."
They were trying to find out what had happened to Thyssen’s billions but without success. Why?
"What the Allied investigators never understood was that they were not asking Thyssen the right question. Thyssen did not need any foreign bank accounts because his family secretly owned an entire chain of banks.
He did not have to transfer his Nazi assets at the end of World War II, all he had to do was transfer the ownership documents – stocks, bonds, deeds and trusts – from his bank in Berlin through his bank in Holland to his American friends in New York City, Prescott Bush and Herbert Walker.
Thyssen’s partners in crime were the father and father-in-law of a future President of the United States [my emph. WB].
…
"The British and American interrogators may have gravely underestimated Thyssen but they nonetheless knew they were being lied to. Their suspicions focused on one Dutch Bank in particular, the Bank voor Handel enScheepvaart, in Rotterdam.
This bank did a lot of business with the Thyssens over the years. In 1923, as a favor to him, the Rotterdam bank loaned the money to build the very first Nazi party headquarters in Munich.
"If the investigators realized that the US intelligence chief in postwar Germany, Allen Dulles, was also the Rotterdam bank’s lawyer, they might have asked some very interesting questions. They did not know that Thyssen was Dulles’ client [my emph. WB] as well.
Nor did they ever realize that it was Allen Dulles’s other client, Baron Kurt Von Schroeder who was the Nazi trustee for the Thyssen companies which now claimed to be owned by the Dutch [my emph. WB]. The Rotterdam Bank was at the heart of Dulles’ cloaking scheme, and he guarded its secrets jealously…
"[T]he Dutch connection remained unexplored until 1994 when I published the book "The Secret War Against the Jews." As a matter of historical curiosity, I mentioned that Fritz Thyssen (and indirectly, the Nazi Party) had obtained their early financing from Brown Brothers Harriman, and its affiliate, the Union Banking Corporation.
Union Bank, in turn, was the Bush family’s holding company for a number of other entities, including the "Holland American Trading Company."
There are so many twists and turns to this story, that this is not the place to to go into all the labyrinthine links between the Nazis, the Bush Family and the CIA (via Allen Dulles) or indeed, a host of other corporate connections.
But this final quote from the same source, gives you an idea of just how much money is involved;
"The enormous sums of money deposited into the Union Bank prior to 1942 is the best evidence that Prescott Bush knowingly served as a money launderer for the Nazis.
Remember that Union Banks’ books and accounts were frozen by the U.S. Alien Property Custodian in 1942 and not released back to the Bush family until 1951.
At that time, Union Bank shares representing hundreds of millions of dollars worth of industrial stocks and bonds were unblocked for distribution. Did the Bush family really believe that such enormous sums came from Dutch enterprises?
One could sell tulip bulbs and wooden shoes for centuries and not achieve those sums. A fortune this size could only have come from the Thyssen profits made from rearming the Third Reich, and then hidden, first from the Nazi tax auditors, and then from the Allies."
For the full story please go to the link above.
Crocodile Tears
All of which makes the following quote from Dubya all the more sickening:
"In April 1999, [then] Texas Governor George W. Bush proclaimed a week of remembrance for the Holocaust. He said, "I urge Texans to never forget the inhumanity of those who perpetrated the Holocaust, and reflect upon our own humanity and our responsibility to respect all peoples."
Like granpa like grand-son? Well given where Dubya got his money from, and his continuing in the ‘grand tradition of the Bush gang, I’m feeling quite biblical about things.
I know there will be some among you who think I’ve just got it in for the Bushes, so in my wanderings over the Web, I came across this little gem from TownHall.com.
Duty, Honor, Country: The Life and Legacy of Prescott Bush, by Mickey Herskowitz
This paean to the life of Prescott Bush, by a conservative writer is a salutory warning to us all. I quote,
"He [Prescott Bush] was a unifier, not a divider. And he was of such high integrity [sic] that behind the scenes was where he was at his best. He was a man of great faith.
His grandfather was a minister whose faith and integrity were fully ingrained in the Bush family. Prescott always emphasized honesty, charity, fairness and proactive dedication to God, family and country."
- From a review by Susan Kurz
I could go on quoting, but I’m afraid I’ll throw up. Check it out for yourself at TownHall.com.
There’s none so blind as those that refuse to see.
From Eugenicist to Anti-Abortionist
Not content with digging up the ancestors, supporting Fascism, laundering Nazi money through a Dutch-based bank, selling weapons to the mullahs of Iran, trading guns for drugs, doing business deals with Osama bin Laden, the Bush family in the form of ol’ granpa Prescott was an early supporter of the Eugenics movement (or racial purity, to give it its real name).
And a rather embarassing connection it is too, as Bush Senior discovered:
"…And the Birth Control League was there, which had long trumpeted the need for eugenical births–fewer births for parents with "inferior" bloodlines. Prescott [Bush’s] partner Tighe was a Connecticut director of the league, and the Connecticut league’s medical advisor was eugenics advocate Dr. Winternitz of Yale Medical School.
Now in 1950, people who knew something about Prescott Bush knew that he had very unsavory roots in the eugenics movement. There were then, just after the anti-Hitler war, few open advocates of sterilization of "unfit" or "unnecessary" people. (That would be revived later, with the help of General Draper and his friend George Bush.
Then, very late in the 1950 senatorial campaign, Prescott Bush was publicly exposed for being an activist in that section of the old fascist eugenics movement.
Prescott Bush lost the election by about 1,000 out of 862,000 votes.
In his foreword to a population control propaganda book, George Bush wrote about that 1950 election: "My own first awareness of birth control as a public policy issue came with a jolt in 1950 when my father was running for United States Senate in Connecticut.
Drew Pearson, on the Sunday before Election day, ‘revealed’ that my father was involved with Planned Parenthood…. Many political observers felt a sufficient number of voters were swayed by his alleged contacts with the birth controllers to cost him the election…."
The Bush story is such a fascinating history of capitalist corruption and power that it needs to be presented to a public that is consistently lied to, not only by the corporate media but by our so-called leaders.
In Part Two, I’m going to give you the low-down on the Bush family’s involvement in the scams and dealings of the Reagan years, the Iran-Contra scandal and one of the biggest rip-offs in history, the savings and loan scandal, which cost the US taxpayer literally trillions of dollars. Yeah, you read right, trillions!
Part II: "Frauds-R-Us"
"You can fool some of the people all of the time, and those are the ones you have to focus on."
- G.W. Bush
"You have to look at the entire Bush Family in this context -- as if the family ran a corporation called ‘Frauds-R-Us.’ George Jr.’s specialty was insurance and security fraud. Jeb’s specialty was oil and gas fraud. Neil’s specialty was real estate fraud. Prescott’s specialty was banking fraud. And George Sr.’s specialty? All of the above."
- Lt. Cmdr. Al Martin, US Navy (Ret)
"While opportunism isn’t new in U.S. politics, never did so many in one family extract so many dollars from taxpayers as when George Bush senior was president a decade ago"
- David E. Scheim, author of Contract on America
"What you’ve got with Bush [George senior] is absolutely the largest number of siblings and children involved in what looks like a never-ending hustle."
- Republican pundit Kevin Philips
"Texas businessmen [are] not crooks, "they just have an over-developed sense of the extenuating circumstance."
- Molly Ivins
Just Too Many Jinks, Links
I started this second part with the objective of extending the dossier on the Bush Gang, but I quickly realised that short of writing a (very long) book, I’d never be able to encapsulate all of it in the easy-to-digest form of an essay, hence the external pages, so that if you want to pursue a particular character or company, all you need do is click on a particular link.
You'll find that many of the names and companies are cross-linked, pointing to the intricate network of associates that the Bush clan have built up over the years.
No doubt if one were to do the same thing with Rockefeller, you'd end up with the same rats nest of associations (pun intended).
Gangster Capitalism
And in any case, the critical issue is not so much the individual goings-on of these ne’er do wells, but that they are typical of a system, which since its foundation (one built on slavery, genocide, continental land theft and gangster capitalism) has utterly corrupt institutions which it nevertheless claims make it the bastion of the ‘free world’!
As the saying goes, they have ‘no shame’.
Hear No Evil, See No Evil, Speak No Evil
The other really important question to ask is how can one family which has so many skeletons in the family closet, get away with such dirty dealings and over such a long period of time without being called to task?
It’s as if the mass media goes deaf, dumb and blind when the name Bush comes up.
For no matter what your politics are, left, right or indifferent, a family which has its fingers in so many dirty dealings has surely got to get you thinking about exactly what kind of country it is you live in (if you’re an American) and what kind of world is it that’s dominated by a country with a media (not to mention a legal system) that’s quite content not to challenge its president or his lying, thiefing family and their tenticular network of associations which includes:
The Mafia, the Chinese Communist Party, Japanese Triads, the Vatican, Central American drug smugglers and gun runners, international arms dealers, the Ayotollah Khomeini (RIP), Cuban-American terrorists, money laundering, illegal arms sales, countless conflicts of interests, nepotism, coverups, tax avoidance, SEC fiddles and banking scams?
The fact that this litany of evil is effectively left unscrutinised and unquestioned by the dominant media, or, on the few occasions when it is mentioned, it’s only ‘in passing’, reveals the cynical, opportunistic attitude toward not only the concept of access to information, but acting on it.
The system also makes a complete mockery of the so-called moral approach used by the leaders of the ‘free world’ when they accuse others of the same behaviour.
Is it any wonder that we have populations who have ‘dropped out’ of the political process. Where is the accountability? Where indeed?
It’s a Shell Game
In recent years the problem has been excerbated by the ‘gutting’ of the government through wholesale deregulation and privatisation, which has enabled those with the ‘right’ connections to gain access to vast gobs of money in the form of subsidies and lucrative contracts (eg Marvin Bush’s Ignite corporation, or the Kuwaiti Harken Oil deals, Choicepoint’s Homeland Security contracts and the software company it uses, Sybase Inc which has Bush family connections).
The effect has been to turn various and sundry government agencies into hollow shells. Companies can then effectively write themselves blank cheques or simply ignore the toothless edicts issued by the regulators (eg the SEC over the Silverado S&L scandal).
The assault on the rights of citizens, won at great cost and over generations of struggle, has since the 1970s, been steadily eroded to the point that we are now left with a façade of the original, a cardboard mockup that has all the appearances democracy, civil rights and so forth but virtually no substance. Our cynical leaders would have us believe that:
"Failure to vote, as Britain’s Chancellor remarked after the last UK election, is the mark of the satisfied citizen."
- Perry Anderson
Satisfied or cynical? Or perhaps fatalistic about a system which has systematically encouraged its citizens to disenfranchise themselves?
Ultimately of course, it exposes the real nature of the political class and who it really serves – the rich and powerful and their utter disdain for those without any real power.
With ‘elections’ being reduced to no more than tokenised democracy (only about a quarter of the electorate actually bother to vote in US national elections and a fraction more in the UK), it’s no surprise that firstly, there is no genuine representation ‘of the people, for the people, by the people’, but just as importantly, the total lack of representation or accountability encourages an arrogance and bravado on the part of the power elite that they can get away with anything, because they we let them (and they do)!
A comparable process is at work in the ‘4th Estate’ who have reduced journalism (when they bother to actually cover the real stories) to another hollow shell, where the act of merely reporting is now considered sufficient to fulfill their obligations as ‘watchdogs’ of the nation’s affairs.
The thought of actually leading with a story, and pursuing it, day after day, until someone actually takes notice and says, ‘enough is enough’ is simply not permitted because the same corporations that own the media are also part and parcel of the same power elite that’s busy ripping off the nation and holding the world to ransom.
Par For the Course
Forget ‘Dynasty’, although maybe they got the idea for the programme from the Bush posse. Staggering, is all I can say about the Bush family saga.
Yet actually it’s par for the course as they say and not at all exceptional in the annals of the US power elite.
The history of US capitalism is made up of family dynasties of one kind or another, from the robber barons of the Du Ponts, Mellons, Morgans, Rockefellers, Carnegies and Kennedys, through to the newcomers like Enron, Worldcom, Halliburton, Bechtel, Harken, Carlyle and so forth.
And, like the landed aristocracies of England, they marry into each other’s families, go to the same schools and universities, sit on each other’s corporate boards and invest in each other’s business dealings. Importantly, they watch each other’s backs and for obvious reasons.
The Actors
Below are the sections in alphabetical order, of some of the companies and individuals connected to the Bush family (or vice versa). Clicking on the bold link at the start of each section will take you to a page of additional links.
Oh what a tangled Web we weave. Salem bin Laden, one of 57 children their father Mohammed sired with his 12 wives, and Bush were founders of the Arbusto Energy oil company in Texas (I assume not with the 12 wives as well).
He died in a plane crash - like his father - but not before the Arbusto Energy Oil Company, founded in 1978, had become hugely successful. Later, Spectrum 7 Corp bought out Arbusto (now called Bush Exploration Co).
In 1986, with the company on the verge of bankruptcy, it was purchased by Harken, and even though Bush Exploration Co had debts of $3 million, Harken paid Bush $2 million for his stock.
See also the BCCI (Bank of Credit & Commerce) connection below, another murky international scandal involving drug money laundering etc which one of the original investors in Arbusto, James R. Bath, a Houston businessman and old friend of GWB was involved in.
"Time magazine described Bath in 1991 as "a deal broker whose alleged associations run from the CIA to a major shareholder and director of the Bank of Credit & Commerce."
BCCI, as it was more commonly known, closed its doors in July 1991 amid charges of multibillion-dollar fraud and global news reports that the financial institution had been heavily involved in drug money laundering, arms brokering, covert intelligence work, bribery of government officials and - here's the kicker - aid to terrorists."
As a senator from Missouri, John Ashcroft received generous campaign contributions from companies, including Enterprise Rent-A-Car and Monsanto, which were based in his home state.
But a company didn’t have to be from Missouri to get some attention from the senator. Ashcroft was one of only a handful of senators sponsoring a bill that extended the patent on Schering-Plough’s ultra-profitable allergy pill, Claritin.
Extending the patent, would save the company billions of dollars in potential revenue.
The bill died in committee, but Schering-Plough still gave Ashcroft $50,000 for his failed 2000 Senate bid. Schering-Plough donated the money to Ashcroft’s joint fundraising committee, which Ashcroft set up with the National Republican Senatorial Committee to encourage unlimited soft money contributions from corporations that could not legally contribute to his main campaign committee.
(Check out Schering-Plough's campaign contributions to other candidates.) Besides Schering-Plough, Ashcroft’s joint committee logged contributions from AT&T ($25,000) and Microsoft ($10,000). Microsoft, of course, is hoping the new attorney general drops the justice department’s antitrust suit against the company."
"He says the government shouldn't overreact to corporate scandals. He led the campaigns of the last four Republican presidents.
He watched the September 11 attacks at the Ritz-Carlton with the Bin Laden family. He's defending the Saudi's against a trillion-dollar lawsuit brought forth by the September 11 families."
"BCCI defrauded depositors of $10 billion in the '80s in what has been called the "largest bank fraud in world financial history" by former Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenthau."
- Wayne Madsen
The BCCI-Bush connection is, it could be argued an ‘accidental’ one, but it’s highly unlikely even if it is difficult to track, but the seeds are all there, including GW Snr’s CIA connection (as head of it) in the 1970s and the links to BCCI as well as his long time association with James R. Bath, an investor in Arbusto.
Bath, was a Houston businessman and old friend was also an investor in BCCI.
Essentially, BCCI was a convenient ‘channel’ for moving money through to fund the various illegal enterprises being undertaken at the time including, Iran-Contra, the Iranian arms sales, CIA money laundering operations, connections to powerful Middle Eastern businessmen, the Vatican and its right-wing connections through BNL.
The story of the BCCI was told in the thriller movie 'The International'
Perhaps this extract from "Texas Connections" gives you an idea of the reach:
"… Sheikh Abdullah Bahksh of Saudi Arabia, a 16% shareholder in Harken Energy at the time, was represented by a Palestinian-born Chicago investor named Talat Othman, who served with George W. Bush on the board of Harken Energy. Othman made at least three separate visits to the White House to discuss Middle East affairs with then President George Bush.
At about the same time, and just prior to the Gulf War, Harken Energy, with no previous international or offshore drilling experience, was awarded a 35-year petroleum exploration contract with the emirate of Bahrain.
Sheikh Bahksh emerged as a co-investor in the Bank of Commerce and Credit International (BCCI), a criminal enterprise since dissolved, that existed primarily as a mechanism for obtaining political influence using Middle Eastern oil money.
Bahrain's prime minister, Sheik Khalifah bin-Sulman al-Khalifah, was a major investor in BCCI's parent company, BCCI Holdings, of Luxembourg.
Through its commodities affiliate, Capcom, BCCI was used as a money laundering service by drug traffickers, arms dealers, etc. BCCI's front man in the U.S., and the person chiefly responsible for its takeover of First American Bank in the U.S., was Kamal Adham.
Adham is referred to in the Kerry Committee report on BCCI as having been "the CIA's principal liaison for the entire Middle East from the mid-1960's through 1979."
He was also the head of intelligence for Saudi Arabia during the time George Bush Sr. was Director of the CIA."
There are so many connections between the Bushes, the ‘Defence’ establishment, the global trade in arms, that the mind boggles. That it barely gets a mention in the mainstream media (except of course, to simply ‘report’ it) is a scandal of the grandest proportions.
But it only goes to show the power of big business and the political class they have installed in both the US and the UK (after all, John Major is employed by the Carlyle Group and BAE Systems, the major arms supplier to the UK, is part-owned by Carlyle).
Not only the connections beggar belief but the sheer hypocrisy of the Bush government should put it in a new category in the Guinness Book of Records. As you’ll see from just a few of the links to information on Carlyle below, their tentacles extended to many of the armed conflicts going on in the world. There’s no business like war business!
Unless you were around and following events in the 1980s, especially Central American affairs and later, the Iran-contra scandal, you probably won’t know who Elliot Abrams is.
More’s the pity too. As Reagan's Assistant Secretary of State for Human Rights and Humanitarian Affairs he used to oversee US foreign policy in Latin America, and was active in covering up some of the worst atrocities committed by the US-sponsored Contras.
According to congressional records, under Abram's watch, the Contras "raped, tortured, and killed unarmed civilians, including children," and that "groups of civilians, including women and children, were burned, dismembered, blinded and beheaded."
His partners-in-crime include John Negroponte, the new ambassador to the UN, who served under Reagan as ambassador to Honduras from 1981-1985.
He is known for his role in the cover up of human rights abuses by CIA trained paramilitaries throughout the region.
Honduran exiles associated with the paramilitary forces that had been living in the US, were exported to Canada prior to Negroponte's Senate confirmation hearing, thus rendering their testimony unavailable.
Another partner from the ‘good ol’ days is Otto Reich who was appointed as Assistant Secretary of State for Western Hemisphere Affairs (which includes Latin America).
The Bush administration used a "recess appointment" during January 2002 to side step the Senate confirmation hearing otherwise required of the appointment. Democrat opposition to Reich's nomination had been predicted.
But they are still up to their old tricks:
"The coup in Venezuela against Hugo Chavez sports the sticky fingerprints of all three men and the modus operandi of a long line of US-led cold war interventions.
But if these covert ops were tragedy, the Chavez plot was farce. The rapid unraveling of the coup suggested that the Venezuelan plotters would have done better seeking advise from Supreme Court Justice Rehnquist rather than from Reich.
It soon became public that Bush officials maintained a web of connections with the conspirators and appeared to have foreknowledge of the plot. Using the same conduit Reagan used to fund the contras, the National Endowment for Democracy, the administration had funneled money to Venezuelan opposition.
According to British media, Abrams gave a nod to the plotters; Otto Reich, a former ambassador to Venezuela, met repeatedly with Pedro Carmona and other coup leaders. The day Carmona seized the presidency, Reich summoned ambassadors from Latin America and the Caribbean to his office and endorsed the new government.
Abrams pleaded guilty to two misdemeanor counts of withholding information from Congress in 1991, for which George Bush senior subsequently pardoned him in December 1992."
As there’s so much information on the Bush-Enron connection (over a quarter of a million links on Google), rather than attempt to show the bankruptcy side of things, I’ve sifted through a number of stories and tried to find the ones which show the bigger picture, starting wuth the Argentine connection between Enron, the Bushes, George Snr, Jeb and Neil.
Let’s start with January 2003. From the report below:
"The new year begs for a fresh start. But business accusations of international bribery, nefarious investors and a Bush brother awkwardly involved in a troubled company all have a too-familiar ring. Here's the latest Robert Ludlum-style financial spat.
…. Marvin Bush, the brother of President Bush and Florida Gov. Jeb Bush, joined the board of directors of Fresh Del Monte in 1998, after the alleged events took place. Marvin Bush was re-elected to the company's board this year for a term ending in 2005, and served on the board's critically important audit and compensation committees.
In October, Bush decided to resign from the board at the end of 2002. Without any public notice of Bush's planned departure by Fresh Del Monte, news of his pending resignation was not reported until last month."
This a consummate piece on the Bush family from a magazine, now sadly defunct.
"This is an incredible deal, unbelievable for this small company," energy analyst Charles Strain told Forbes magazine, describing the oil production sharing agreement the Harken Energy Corporation signed in January 1990 with Bahrain.
Under the terms of the deal, Harken was given the exclusive right to explore for gas and oil off the shores of the Gulf island nation. If gas or oil were found in waters near two of the world's largest gas and oil fields, Harken would have exclusive marketing and transportation rights for the energy resources. Truly an "incredible deal" for a company that had never drilled an offshore well.
Strain failed to point out, however, the one fact that puts the Harken deal in focus: George Bush, Jr., the eldest son of George and Barbara Bush of 1600 Pennsylvania Avenue, Washington, DC, is a member of Harken's board of directors, a consultant, and a stockholder in the Texas-based company.
In light of this connection, the deal makes more sense. The involvement of Junior-George Walker Bush's childhood nickname - with Harken is a walking conflict of interest.
His relationship to President Bush, rather than any business acumen, made him a valuable asset for Harken, the Republican Party benefactors, Middle East oil sheikhs and covert operators who played a part in Harken's Bahrain deal.
In fact, Junior's track record as an oilman is pretty dismal. He began his career in Midland, Texas, in the mid-1970s when he founded Arbusto Energy, Inc.
When oil prices dropped in the early 1980s, Arbusto fell upon hard times. Junior was only rescued from business failure when his company was purchased by Spectrum 7 Energy Corporation, a small oil firm owned by William DeWitt and Mercer Reynolds.
As part of the September 1984 deal, Bush became Spectrum 7's president and was given a 13.6 percent share in the company's stock. Oil prices stayed low and within two years, Spectrum 7 was in trouble
.
In the six months before Spectrum 7 was acquired by Harken in 1986, it had lost $400,000. In the buyout deal, George "Jr." and his partners were given more than $2 million worth of Harken stock for the 180-well operation.
Made a director and hired as a "consultant" to Harken, Junior received another $600,000 of Harken stock, and has been paid between $42,000 and $120,000 a year since 1986.
Junior's value to Harken soon became apparent when the company needed an infusion of cash in the spring of 1987. Junior and other Harken officials met with Jackson Stephens, head of Stephens, Inc., a large investment bank in Little Rock, Arkansas (Stephens made a $100,000 contribution to the Reagan-Bush campaign in 1980 and gave another $100,000 to the Bush dinner committee in 1990.)
In 1987, Stephens made arrangements with Union Bank of Switzerland (UBS) to provide $25 million to Harken in return for a stock interest in Harken.
As part of the Stephens-brokered deal, Sheikh Abdullah Bakhsh, a Saudi real estate tycoon and financier, joined Harken's board as a major investor. *5 Stephens, UBS, and Bakhsh each have ties to the scandal-ridden Bank of Credit and Commerce International (BCCI).
It was Stephens who suggested in the late 1970s that BCCI purchase what became First American Bankshares in Washington, D.C. BCCI later acquired First American's predecessor, Financial General Bankshares.
At the time of the Harken investment, UBS was a joint-venture partner with BCCI in a bank in Geneva, Switzerland. Bakhsh has been an investment partner in Saudi Arabia with Gaith Pharoan, identified by the U.S. Federal Reserve Board as a "front man" for BCCI's secret acquisitions of U.S. banks.
Stephens, Inc. played a role in the Harken deal with Bahrain as well. Former Stephens bankers David and Mike Edwards contacted Michael Ameen, the former chief of Mobil Oil's Middle East operations, when Bahrain broke off 1989 talks with Amoco for a gas and oil exploration contract.
The Edwardses recommended Harken for the job and urged Ameen to get in touch with Bahrain, which he did.
"In the midst of Harken's talks with Bahrain, Ameen- simultaneously working as a State Department consultant-briefed the incoming U.S. ambassador in Bahrain, Charles Hostler," the Wall Street Journal noted, adding that Hostler, a San Diego real estate investor, was a $100,000 contributor to the Republican Party. Hostler claimed he never discussed Harken with the Bahrainis.
Harken lacked sufficient financing to explore off the coast of Bahrain so it brought in Bass Enterprises Production Company of Fort Worth, Texas, as a partner. The Bass family contributed more than $200,000 to the Republican Party in the late 1980s and early 1990s.
On June 22, 1990, George Jr. sold two-thirds of his Harken stock for $848,560-a cool 200 percent profit. The move was well timed. One week after Junior sold his stock, Harken announced a $23.2 million loss in quarterly earnings and Harken stock dropped sharply, losing 60 percent of its value over the next six months.
On August 2, 1990, Iraqi troops moved into Kuwait and 541,000 U.S. forces were deployed to the Gulf.
"There is substantial evidence to suggest that Bush knew Harken was in dire straits in the weeks before he sold the $848,560 of Harken stock," asserted U.S. News & World Report.
The magazine noted Harken appointed Junior to a "fairness committee" to study possible economic restructuring of the company. Junior worked closely with financial advisers from Smith Barney, Harris Upham & Company, who concluded "only drastic action could save Harken."
George "Jr." also violated Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) regulations which require "insider" stock deals to be reported promptly, in Bush's case by July 10, 1990. He didn't file the stock sale with the SEC until the first week of March 1991.
Meanwhile, a cloak-and-dagger aura surrounds Junior's business dealings. James Bath, a Texas entrepreneur who invested $50,000 in Arbusto Energy, may be a business cutout for the CIA. Bath also acted as an investment "adviser" to Saudi Arabian oil sheikhs, linked to the outlaw BCCI, which also has ties to the CIA.
Bill White, a former Bath partner, claims that Bath has "national security" connections. White, a United States Naval Academy graduate and former fighter pilot, charges that Bath developed a network of off-shore companies to camouflage the movement of money and aircraft between Texas and the Middle East, especially Saudi Arabia.
Alan Quasha, a Harken director and former chair of the company, is the son of attorney William Quasha, who defended figures in the Nugan Hand Bank scandal in Australia.
Closed in 1980, Nugan Hand was not only tied to drug-money laundering and U.S. intelligence and military circles, but also to the CIA's covert backing for a "constitutional coup" in Australia that caused the fall of Prime Minister Gough Whitlam.
The Harken deal with Bahrain raises another troubling question: Did the Bahrainis and the BCCI-linked Saudi oil sheikhs use the production sharing agreement with Harken to curry favor with the Bush administration and influence U.S. policy in the Middle East?
Talat Othman's sudden rise to prominence in Bush administration foreign policy circles is a case in point. Othman, who sits on the Harken board as Sheikh Bakhsh's representative, didn't have access to President Bush before Harken's Bahrain agreement.
"But since August 1990, the Palestinian-born Chicago investor has attended three White House meetings with President Bush to discuss Middle East policy," the Wall Street Journal pointed out.
"His name was added by the White House to a select list of 15 Arab-Americans chosen to meet with President Bush, [then White House Chief of Staff John] Sununu and National Security Adviser Brent Scowcroft in the White House two days after Iraq's August 1990 invasion of Kuwait."
This maybe small potatoes by comparison with all the other Bush clan scams, but nevertheless Ignite! Learning made Neil Bush $20 million over three years.
Not bad for a guy who ran Silverado S&L into the ground. With accusations of nepotism flying around all over the place, especially now that Neil Bush tyied to get the Florida school system to buy into his learning software (at $30 a pop per student per year), the state that his brother Jeb was governor of, it’s no wonder.
Connected is the wholesale privatisation of state services, which opens such areas as education to the predations of people like Neil Bush and indeed, the whole issue of influence peddling and nepotism.
Official Secrets
The true story of a British whistleblower who leaked information to the press about an illegal NSA spy operation designed to push the UN Security Council into sanctioning the 2003 invasion of Iraq.
This is a murky story with connections to the Nicaraguan Contras, the Mafia, Cuban-American terrorists, Iran-Contra, bribery and corruption, coverups and the CIA.
Essentially, IMC was contracted to give medical assistance to the Nicaraguan Contras but the story is in fact, a lot more complex and gives you some idea of just how inter-connected events really are, especially when you’re dealing the Bush clan.
Perhaps this review of a book by Duncan Campbell The Bush Dynasty and the Cuban Criminal, will give you some idea:
Therefore, John Deutch may know more about this plan, considering he may have resigned, to allow John George Tenet to be appointed Director, and then initiate several important steps of the plan, including election rigging to allow George W. Bush and Dick Cheney to come to power illegally, declaring war on Osama Bin Laden, planting explosives in the elevator shafts of the World Trade Center, launching a missile strike on the Pentagon which murdered over a dozen of the Pentagon Whistle-Blowers, and conducting Genocide in the USA, to cover-up the coup and eliminate suspected enemies.
"The Bush family connections go back to 1984 when Jeb Bush began a close association with Camilo Padreda, a former intelligence officer with the Batista dictatorship overthrown by Fidel Castro.
Jeb Bush was then the chairman of the Dade county Republican party and Padreda its finance chairman. Padreda had earlier been indicted on a $500,000 (£320,000) embezzlement charge along with a fellow exile, Hernandez Cartaya, but the charges were dropped, reportedly after the CIA stated that Cartaya had worked for them.
Padreda later pleaded guilty to defrauding the housing and urban development department of millions of dollars during the 1980s.
The president's younger brother was also on the payroll in the 80s of the prominent Cuban exile Miguel Recarey, who had earlier assisted the CIA in attempts to assassinate President Castro.
Recarey, who ran International Medical Centers (IMC), employed Jeb Bush as a real estate consultant and paid him a $75,000 fee for finding the company a new location, although the move never took place, which raised questions at the time.
Jeb Bush did, however, lobby the Reagan / Bush administration vigorously and successfully on behalf of Recarey and IMC. "I want to be very wealthy," Jeb Bush told the Miami News when questioned during that period.
In 1985, Jeb Bush acted as a conduit on behalf of supporters of the Nicaraguan contras with his father, then the vice-president, and helped arrange for IMC to provide free medical treatment for the contras.
Recarey was later charged with massive medicare fraud but fled the US before his trial and is now a fugitive.
Jeb Bush sealed his popularity with the Cuban exile community by acting as campaign manager for another prominent Cuban-American, Ileana Ros-Lehtinen, when she ran successfully for Congress.
George Bush Sr famously appeared with her during her campaign in Miami declaring: "I am certain in my heart I will be the first American president to step foot on the soil of a free and independent Cuba."
She has since lobbied successfully for the release of several exiles convicted of terrorist offences held in US jails but who now live freely in Miami.
Most controversially, at the request of Jeb, Mr Bush Sr intervened to release the convicted Cuban terrorist Orlando Bosch from prison and then granted him US residency.
According to the justice department in George Bush Sr's administration, Bosch had participated in more than 30 terrorist acts. He was convicted of firing a rocket into a Polish ship which was on passage to Cuba. He was also implicated in the 1976 blowing-up of a Cubana plane flying to Havana from Venezuela in which all 73 civilians on board were killed.
CIA memorandums strongly suggest, according to Bardach's book, that Bosch was one of the conspirators, and quotes the then secretary of state, Henry Kissinger, as writing that the "US government had been planning to suggest Bosch's deportation before Cubana airlines crash took place for his suspected involvement in other terrorist acts and violation of his parole".
Bosch's release, often referred to in the US media as a pardon, was the result of pressure brought by hardline Cubans in Miami, with Jeb Bush serving as their point man. Bosch now lives in Miami and remains unrepentant about his militant activities, according to Bardach.
In July this year, Jeb Bush nominated Raoul Cantero, the grandson of Batista, as a Florida supreme court judge despite his lack of experience. Mr Cantero had previously represented Bosch and acted as his spokesman, once describing Bosch on Miami radio as a "great Cuban patriot".
"Lynne Cheney, wife of Vice President Dick Cheney, Frank Gaffney, James Woolsey, and William Bennett, former Secretary of Education in the Reagan Administration, all play prominent roles in domestic suppression of criticism of the War on Terrorism.
A group founded by Lynne Cheney, the American Council of Trustees and Alumni, recently released a report titled "Defending Civilization." It listed 127 "unpatriotic" statements made on U.S. college campuses since September 11."
This takes us back to the 1980s although as the article below informs, like a bad meal, the sins of the past keep coming back, in this case it’s Otto Reich who was part of the original Contra force funded and supported by the Reagan / Bush government with its links to drugs for guns and connections to the CIA and the Iran-Contra affair.
I have also included links to the official CIA version of events.
"Bush Nominee Llinked to Latin American Terrorism" By Bill Vann 24 November 2001
"As the Bush administration exhorts governments throughout the world to line up behind its "war on terrorism," it is pressuring the US Senate to push through confirmation of a nominee to a key foreign policy position whose own links to terror and an illegal CIA propaganda operation have raised concerns even among the usually docile Democratic leadership."
Who is Otto Reich? Well basically, he's a friend of terrorists, there's no other way to describe him.
"Otto Reich came to prominence during the Reagan administration when he was appointed head of the office of public diplomacy within the state department.
According to the national security archives, Reich used this role to pursue his own agenda to such an extent that in 1987 the Comptroller-General of the US, a Republican appointee, found that some of the efforts of his office were "prohibited, covert propaganda activities ... beyond the range of acceptable agency public information activities.
A letter of September 30 1987 concluded that Reich's office had violated "a restriction on the state department's annual appropriations prohibiting the use of federal funds for publicity or propaganda purposes not authorised by Congress"".
He then became George Bush's assistant secretary of state for western hemisphere affairs. The central point is that Bush filled his government with characters like this, people who have broken the law, an enemy of human rights, a thoroughly unsavoury character.
"On March 23, after being recommended in a unanimous 18-0 vote by the Senate Foreign Relations Committee, former Vietnam-era covert operative and Contra-era figure Richard Armitage was confirmed as Deputy Secretary of State in a voice vote on the Senate Floor.
The unchallenged confirmation of a figure who had previously been investigated by President Reagan's Commission on Organized Crime (1984) for alleged links to gambling and prostitution was totally ignored by the major American media.
Armitage has already begun work at the State Department and is deeply involved in negotiations over a US spy plane recently captured by the Chinese government."
The savings and loans crashes of the 1980s, themselves directly the result of Reagan’s deregulation of the banking industry, is more interesting because of how it reflects the rapacious nature of unbridled capitalism than of Neil Bush himself.
Who by the way, became embroiled in another scam with his educational software venture, Ignite (that had an annual turnover of $20 million, much of it from educational subsidies obtained in the state of Florida, where, ‘coincidentally’ of course, his brother Jeb, was governor).
Altogether, it’s been calculated that bailing out the failed S&Ls countrywide cost the US taxpayer around $1.4 trillion!
There are nowhere as many digital sources on the S&L debacle because it predates the Web.
Much of it is contained in pages that refer to the numerous scandals and malfeasances of the Bush clan at large. Even so, I’ve managed to uncover a number of dedicated sources.
All have a Bush connection as well as a World Trade Centre, United Airlines, Dulles International Airport security, aviation and Kuwaiti connection. What is known, is that SEC regulations were breached by Marvin Bush in filings submitted to the SEC.
Who is Marvin P. Bush?
The public rarely sees Marvin P. Bush, brother of President Bush II.
Marvin P. Bush was the founder (1993) and Managing Partner of Winston Partners Group of Vienna, Virginia. It's a private investment company. He was also the Managing General Partner of Winston Growth Fund, LLP; Winston International Growth Fund, LP; Winston Small Cap Growth Fund, LP; all related companies.
Before this, he spent 12 years in the investment business with the firms of Mosley, Hallgarten, Estabrook and Weeden, Shearson Lehman Brothers, and John Stewart Darrel & Company.
In January, 1998, Marvin Bush was appointed to the Board of Directors of the Fresh Del Monte Produce company, the giant fruit company (major product bananas) that made the canned goods we buy in our markets.
Del Monte is owned by a very wealthy family from Kuwait, the Abu-Ghazaleh family. Mohammed Abu-Ghazaleh is the CEO and he had several family members on the Board alongside Marvin Bush.
Another member of the Fresh Del Monte Board of Directors was Stephen Way, who was a major Bush fundraiser. Way was the head of the Houston-based HCC Insurance Holdings Company. In early 2000, Stephen Way acquired the appointment of Marvin Bush to the Board of Directors of HCC.
In that transaction, Bush not only landed a very large salary, but a sweet stock option deal. He purchased about $130,000 worth of HCC stock which re- valued at close to $600,000, not even one year later.
Marvin Bush was also on the Board of Directors of something called the Kerrco Company.
Marvin also was named to the Board of Directors of the Stratesec Company, another large publicly-traded firm. This company is very secretive and you can find virtually nothing about it.
Their website does not allow entry to several links unless one has a password. Virginia-based Stratesec is a provider of high-tech security systems.
Two of the major customers for which they provide security are the Dulles International Airport at Washington, D.C. and the Los Alamos National Laboratory.
Stratesec's revenues shot up by 60%, due to what the company described as "new customers." Prominent people at Stratesec also included former Reagan operatives including Barry McDaniel and Air Force General James A. Abrahamson (who was involved in the Reagan "Star Wars" project). Stratesec is a company is heavily inter-related with the Kuwam Corporation ("Kuw" = Kuwait; "am" = America).
Kuwam is a major Kuwaiti Company into many, many activities including the aircraft business. Stratesec's Chief Executive was also the Managing Director of Kuwam Corporation and Kuwam's Chairman Mishal Yousef Saud Al Sabah sat on Stratesec's Board of Directors. Stratesec provided the primary security for one of the most sensitive airports in the world.
Dulles in D.C., has a heavy middle eastern airline connection.
Winston Partners, Sybase, Choicepoint, H.R. 3162, called "The Uniting and Strengthening America by Providing Appropriate Tools Required to Intercept and Obstruct Terrorism Act" (or USA Patriot)
Another can of worms. Actually, I’m getting fed up with the Bush clan.
It’s like the only life they have is screwing up everybody else’s! Sybase software is part of the Choicepoint system which is part of the Patriot Act which part of the whole damn system for keeping track of everybody and everything we do, read, visit, buy, and no doubt think about.
Zapata is the story of oil and the Bush clan and of course, Texas.
This is the company G.W. Bush Sr. founded in 1953 and, depending on your predilictions for conspiracies, the Bush connection can take you all the way to the Kennedy assassination and back.
And given the scale and scope of the Bush saga, it doesn’t surprise me at all, if indeed there are links between all the goings on of the Bush clan, oil, Texas, the FBI, the CIA, the Rockefellers, the Tri-Lateral Commission, the Nugan-Hand Bank, the Mob, The Pope (or at least the Vatican, and the assassination of JFK.
Of one thing I am sure, when billions and governments are at stake, anything is possible.
The FAS Website contains probably the most complete record of the US dealings with the Iraqi regime, arms sales and related information, including Congressional records. For example I did a search on "iraqi arms sales" and pulled up 882 locations including:
"1992 Congressional Record Documents"
A particularly useful set of documents, because they are the official record of US congressional representative Henry B. Gonzalez and his longstanding investigations into a range of related dealings which included BCCI, Banco Nazionale Lavoro (BNL), Iraq-gate, illicit arms dealings, and especially attempts by the Bush government to block his investigations.
Other Bush family -connected Companies & Institutions
Amsec Corp, Global Strategies LLC, Bass Enterprises Production Co, Asset Management International Financing and Settlement Ltd, Palmer National Bank
Other Bush Men (and the odd woman) that at some point, I'll get around to adding to this dossier.
Dick Cheney, Ari Fleisher, Asa Hutchinson, Robert Mueller, John Negroponte, Paul O'Neil, Theodore Oison, Richard Perle, John Poindexter, Colin Powell, Michael Powell, Otto Reich, Orlando Bosch, Leonel Martinez, Robert Reilly, Donald Rumsfeld, Karl Rove, John Walters, Eduardo Noriega, Richard M Nixon, Robert Mosbacher, Ferdinand Marcos, John Erlichman, Robert McFarlane, Brent Scowcroft, Donald Regan, Jim Baker, William Casey, Santos Trafficante, Miguel Recarey, Jr, Oliver North, Manucher Ghorbanifar, Sheik Abdullah Bakhsh, Tongsun Park, Sargis Soghnalian, Dan Quayle, Salem bin Laden, Prince Mohammed Ben Abdullah, King Fahd of Saudi Arabia.
A final word; I’m all Bushed out as the saying goes, but if I’ve learned one thing in putting this testimony together (because that’s what it is), it’s the awesome power of US capitalism to corrupt and to corrupt totally.
Defeating a juggernaut of this size is going to be a long struggle, but what the hell!
Secret Societies Revisited November 29 2024 | From: NoMoreFakeNews / Various
As many of my readers know, I wrote a book called The Secret Behind Secret Societies. This article adds a few pieces to the puzzle.
Bilderberg Group, CFR, Trilateral Commission - I called these and other such groups Architects of Reality. Among their actions, they try to build our perception of the world.
What is that perception? It’s an endless string of crises and half-hearted resolutions - that’s how we’re supposed to see things. We’re not supposed to see what actually works about the world.
Because what works is freedom and everything that flows from that.
In other words, secret societies are trying to bury the idea of freedom under an ongoing process of manufacturing desperate situations that can only be dealt with by large organizations - governments and so-called public interest groups.
“The group will solve everything.”
“The individual is too weak.”
“Freedom of the individual is passe, because only large groups can influence the course of events.”
With an estimated 40-60 million people in the US taking tranquilizers every year, it appears this program is working.
One chronic user frankly told me, “I can’t deal with reality anymore. Unless it’s a chemical reality.”
Over the years, I’ve spoken with a number of teachers in the US. They tell me the areas variously known as Civics, Social Studies, and Government no longer place emphasis on the individual or individual freedom. Instead, it’s all about “group rights” and “victims.”
So again, the agenda of burying freedom is working.
In 1776, the Illuminati was announced as an operating society in Europe. The most important political tenet of this group was the abolition of private property - and that principle can be historically traced all the way down to the formation of the USSR.
And beyond.
These days, private property is under attack, albeit in a “softer” manner. It, too, is a concept no longer given emphasis in our schools - and when you de-link private property from the individual, you are attacking a significant aspect of what freedom translates into, in everyday life.
An American Studies professor at a prominent Northeastern university told me, off the record, because he was afraid he might lose his job if he went public;
“Political and economic crises are being manufactured all the time.
It’s basically psychological warfare, because one feels these endless crises can’t be solved. People just give up. And when they do, who do they turn to? Government.
Government will handle things. That’s a sign that freedom is no longer a priority. It’s going into the dustbin of history.”
He was suggesting that, in wider and wider circles, freedom is no longer considered a solution to any serious problem. And since we seem to be awash in a sea of problems, freedom goes on the shelf.
As I’ve been writing for years, creative power of the individual is the prow of the ship of our society. Great innovators are the people who keep us moving into the future.
Well, if the legs are being cut out from under freedom, we will be seeing fewer and fewer of these innovators. As has been pointed out, we will be “naturally selecting” away from those people and toward groups.
This is no accident. This is an agenda. To say the loss of freedom is simply a trend overlooks the keynote of coming global government and management it is groups, not individuals, who have access to larger and larger structures that run our affairs.
One small example: 90 years ago, the rise of labor unions was achieved through legislation passed by the federal government. In other words, government would protect the right of employees to organize and bargain with management.
But now we have public unions - government employees who bargain with “themselves.” It’s an absurdity. The real purpose is to expand the size of government by making its jobs more attractive and intractable.
In our schools, children are being taught to think of themselves in terms of a group identity. To what group do you belong? What are the problems of your group? What are your group’s grievances? How is your group being mistreated? What does your group need?
Is this development an accident? Did it happen by chance?
It’s on the agenda of legislated equality, which replaces the idea of equal opportunity to succeed. Legislated equality supposes that, instead of freedom, we will have group rights and group privileges.
This leads to the development of “positioning” - a hierarchy of groups who have assigned degrees of power - in hopes that the notion of the individual will disappear.
The individual will be placed in a context, will be given what he “deserves,” will occupy a place in life that is suitable for the benefit of overall society.
Adam Weishaupt, the founder of the Illuminati, stated: “It was the full conviction of this, and what could be done, if every man were placed in the office for which he was fitted by nature and a proper education, which first suggested to me the plan of Illumination.”
Earlier, in 1755, a Frenchman known only as Morelly (possibly a pseudonym), wrote a treatise called Code of Nature. In it, he spells out what “fitting into society” means for those who oppose individual freedom:
I. Nothing in society will belong to anyone, either as a personal possession or as capital goods, except the things for which the person has immediate use, for either his needs, his pleasures, or his daily work.
II. Every citizen will be a public man, sustained by, supported by, and occupied at the public expense.
III. Every citizen will make his particular contribution to the activities of the community according to his capacity, his talent and his age; it is on this basis that his duties will be determined, in conformity with the distributive laws.
Today, we are moving in this direction. A pseudo “share-and-care” philosophy, that claims to be the ultimate in humane concern, wants to “distribute” individuals within the fabric of society, in order to achieve “a better world for all."
These days, instead of brusquely elevating society beyond the scope of the individual, the agenda works by tapping into empathic and sympathetic emotions - using others’ suffering as the tool by which people can be turned to “help everyone.”
But what slips under the radar of this program is the institutionalizing of aid out along broad political and economic platforms that change the nature of society in its official functions.
Society, in other words, in the person (or non-person) of government, takes in order to give. Takes more to give more. A great leveling, which in essence ranks the free individual at the bottom of the ladder.
Nothing appears to be lost in this effort, if people have already forgotten what the free individual means and is.
Ghost Money, Burnt Money And Dead Money
November 28 2024 | From: KingFarouk / Various
Thomas Jefferson once wrote that “Paper is the Ghost of Money”. Think about that. All the fancy colored paper we use (currencies, notes, stocks, bonds, commodity contracts, derivatives, promissory notes, etc.) are backed by little or nothing but Faith in God We Trust.
This is Ghost Money that is backed by Ghost Assets. Look at the paper gold market. How many gold certificates are issued on the same serial number bar of gold? Only one demanded physical payment wipes out 50 fraudulent contracts or more!
And who can unravel Derivatives based on Derivatives based on Derivatives, etc.? Ghosts upon Ghosts upon Ghosts to infinity - and beyond!
Where is there any “value” in fiat paper printed at the whim and fancy of scrupulous printers who make false claims of authority or legitimacy? Or banks that create money out of thin air for fraudulent mortgages?
And now the controllers of the printing presses have even eliminated the “time value of money” by issuing paper with “negative interest rates” that utterly destroys real capital values.
Such practices destroy economies! And it is being done intentionally! And WE allow it! Ghosts of “Ghost Time”.
Then look behind the curtain and you can see (Rothchild’s) Central Bankers selling-off sovereign Treasuries and buying GOLD.
And those having gold stored in other countries are having it “repatriated” with the clear strategy that their gold will help “jump start” their countries following a (planned) financial collapse.
The false strategy is to re-start a failed financial model with a new Ghost Model that won’t work all over again.
Currently 40% of large corporate debt cannot be serviced from annual earning, this means, they are insolvent and on the verge of bankruptcy and their Stocks are worthless (hello Douche Bank and GM).
This is a systemic result of Ghost Money reliance as a Debt Slavery Model.
So the economies of the World are essentially in a Horror House full of hatchet wieldings psychopaths all whacking each other for each other’s Ghost Money.
And the historical hysterical solution has been to create a bloodbath war with the Top Gun raping and gathering in the spoils to again support their New Ghost Money control model system. Fiat financial collapse then perpetual wars, that is their solution.
The Bank for International Settlements: The Central Bank of Central Banks
Now is that what you want your children and grandchildren to inherit? Should they be burdened and crippled by your Ghost Debt?
Here, have a student loan, a credit card, car loan, fraudulent mortgage, medical debt, insurance debt, taxes upon taxes, a negative interest note (currency) and live a life as an indebted slave to the 1%. And if you don’t want that then THEY will find an excuse to exterminate you.
Do you want to continue to live in a Ghost House filled with financial vandals and the inevitable consequences of their failing financial Debt Slavery business model?
Is that what you want? Or do you want to get out of the Horror House of Ghosts?
Your exit begins by realizing that “Paper is the Ghost of Money” and “Paper is Poverty”.
In order to bring about change in any industry you first need to understand the business model that it is currently using primarily by studying the steps in the model’s start to conclusion of a transaction.
If you can eliminate a step or shorten a step then you can easily conquer that market. Amazon is an example of how to displace large department stores by just switching to online digital trading.
The old banking and finance industry model obviously takes too long to conclude a transaction and there is a cumbersome paper trail and regulations that have to be followed just to move money.
So along come Crypto-Currencies that completely circumvent the old banking financial system with immediate transaction settlements which is faster and cheaper than the old system.
Ghost Digits
But the fundamental problem with digital currencies, like Bit Coin, is that they are Ghost Currencies having little or no real asset backing which is the same old fiat Ghost Money scam that the IMF and Central Banks are now promoting.
That old model is a guaranteed failure based on systemic greed induced fraud and money laundering, lack of transparency or proper accounting, hacking and general lack of real collateral backing and consequent lack of investor trust.
Simply it is the old Debt Slavery model with a shiny new paint job.
Killer Bankers – Public Enemy #1
"The most hated sort [of moneymaking], and with the greatest reason, is usury, which makes a gain out of money itself, and not from the natural use of it.
For money was intended to be used in exchange, but not to increase at interest.
And this term usury which means the birth of money from money, is applied to the breeding of money, because the offspring resembles the parent. Wherefore of all modes of making money this is the most unnatural."
There are now a few digital currencies that are backed by physical gold and that offer proper accounting, personal ownership, transparency and tradability into Bit Coin, but these platforms are generally small and without the international support networks needed to function as a major alternative option to securing wealth.
This is a step in the right direction but the linking to Ghost Digits that have grossly inflated values basically leads to corruption abuses.
Current Ghost Digits are just another scam variation of the old Ponzi schemes of Ghost Money. It is faster and cheaper and is an alternative to fiat currencies but all of these digital offerings are higher risk scams at this time.
Burnt Ghost Money
The second thing you must understand the “You must spend of the Wealth with which you have been entrusted” (Sura Iron:7).
Wealth, whether Ghost Paper, hard assets, physical creations or even knowledge needs to be spent, rolled-over and shared if a society or individual is to advance. Hoarding and keeping wealth out of circulation is a detriment to all humanity.
The problem today is that the top 10% are making Ghost Money faster than they can spend it while at the same time there are fewer things that are available to buy as they already own 90% of the assets and corporations.
Mega-mergers and take-overs only consolidate more wealth. Thus the mounds of JUNK Ghost Paper pile up.
This “free money” is generated through low and even negative interest rates only available to FED and Central Banker’s “Buddies” through quantitative easing (QE’s) and REPO (Overnight Markets) discount windows.
Currently the FED is pumping $ 100-$ 200 BILLION PER DAY to illiquid banks.
This “free money” is further Burned through phony “unicorn scams” like Uber and other software solution providers who now are “cash-in” even before public listing.
So if you want to be rich quick, follow the model above of eliminating or shortening a transaction completion time in any industry with a simple software solution and take your idea to Wall Street where you will find “cash rich” idiot investors ever-willing to “burn billions”.
Another example is Wall Street’s continued investment financing of “fracking” companies who have a long history of losing money regardless of the current price of oil and gas.
This is a “failed industry” that burns investor cash by the millions per hole in the ground. Oh, but this LOSS is a “tax write-off” of a bank’s investment subsidiary. Burn baby BURN.
The FED and other (Rothchild’s) Central Banks are pouring fuel on this problem by giving away Ghost Money to Burn to their financial friends at “0%” or even “negative interest rates”.
This is essentially “free money” that the gifted financial institutions immediately use to buy listed Stocks and derivatives. This drives up Stock prices to all time highs and makes derivative bets sure winners in the racketeering casinos.
The planned current illiquidity of large commercial banks being forced to resort to the REPO (Overnight Market) FED discount window is the result of JP Morgan Chase (Jamie Diamond) intentionally pulling out of the REPO Market as the principal Clearing Bank and the failing Bond Markets where junk bonds, negative interest bonds and US Treasuries are at near junk levels and thus are all being heavily discounted as fungible collateral that is put up for the “free money” scam in collusion with the FED.
Simply the current REPO scandal is contrived to scam the FED into creating more fiat Ghost Money for the major banks to burn in the rigged gambling casinos or in bubble investments.
Corporate commercial paper is also facing the same problem as about 40% of corporate debt cannot be covered by company earnings which will soon lead to major bankruptcies (GE, GM, etc.) and result in targeted corporate takeovers, mergers and bailouts.
This is the plan to consolidate corporate control in the hands of the 1% who are the principal beneficiaries of the Money to Burn scam.
Dead Money
Dead Money is fungible assets that are currently “outside” the Western financial system. This includes cash, precious metals, gem stones, artworks and other real assets of value.
Currently the largest hoard of such assets is in Asia and often in secured bunkers and vaults placed there by registered Depositors often belonging to ancient Dragon Family Clans and administered by their elected Trustees.
Some of this wealth has been used to form the Global Collateral Accounts which underwrite Western banking through gold deposits registered with the Bank of International Settlements, IMF / World Bank, the FED and other Central Banks.
It is estimated that about 85% of the GCA’s assets were deposited by Asian Depositors.
What is clearly not understood or acknowledged is the actual value of the stored wealth in Asia.
The stored gold alone is currently measured in millions of metric tons versus only the thousands of tons registered as collateral in the Western financial system.
And of course, the Western bankers do not want to allow these bars to be registered as it will cause a drop in the value of their gold holdings and wipe out their financial control model by making fiat currencies worthless and global financial control will shift from the West to the EAST.
This Dead Money is registered in ledgers of Depositors and their elected Trustees.
The most notable of which are the bunkered assets stored in Indonesia prior to and following WW2 by various Family Depositors who unanimously elected President Soekarno as the principal Trustee, the Amanah, with absolute authority over these assets.
President Soekarno subsequently appointed Elders as Trustees of individual bunkers to maintain the safekeeping of these assets, but without the authority to use or dispose of such assets as that authority remained with the elected Amanah.
With the passing of President Soekarno there have been numerous unsuccessful attempts to install a new Amanah. Some hopeful candidates failed to be unanimously elected.
Some failed to pass the ritual initiations. Others died, went blind or went deaf so the position of the Amanah has remained vacant or has been illegally usurped by imposters like Ferdinand Marcos.
That situation was changed in 2018 when the Elders unanimously elected Mr. Neil Francis Keenan as the new Amanah and put him through the spiritual initiation ceremonies.
Mr. Keenan successfully passed this initiation and was given President Soekarno’s Transfer of Power scepter and a signed contractual acknowledgment of his appointment as the duly authorized Amanah.
The significance of this appointment is that the Dead Money can now officially be released and used for global collateral and humanitarian purposes.
The buried and bunkered assets can now be brought into the light of day, properly accounted and valued, re-stored as real fungible assets and then appropriately used for global investments for the benefit of mankind.
This is the Game Changer.
Fiat Ghost Money becomes worthless as collateral backed currencies are funded by the Amanah. This will be conditional based on proper and non-fraudulent banking practices. Simply, global finance will be “cleaned up” and good moral based banking practices will be installed and applied legally.
This will, of course, alter the Debt Slavery model which will result in some conflicts with the 10%’ers as their ponzi schemes and elite advantages will be curtailed, but the rich will still be rich and the middle class will be financially re-invigorated by various new technology investments.
The systemic corrupt Top will be cleansed and that will trickle down through the whole pyramid. Financial vandalism will be curtailed and corporate privileges will be altered so that bankruptcy will no longer be an easy way out, especially for executives.
De-Dollarization will continue as the global reserve privilege will continue to be eroded as countries repatriate or buy gold to collateralize their currency issues.
Faith in the value of money will be restored. Negative interest rate will be abolished. No more financial “Tricks and Treats” for the elite.
What I foresee is a new global gold/asset backed crypto-currency that is secure, transparent and transferable into any asset-backed properly audited national currency.
The global crypto-currency model is maturing but still needs a proper transparent backbone which can be funded when this stash of Dead Money is brought back to life. There will be no crypto-tokens as they are not needed.
That is what is on the horizon and is an option that allows for the proper realignment of global finance away from the satanic Debt Slavery fraudulent model to a new asset-backed model that brings real value and thus faith back into the financial system.
When Dead Money is resurrected from the dead, the global financial system will change.
That is the transition that is coming. Ghost and Burnt Money will simply disappear. Gambling casinos will close. Things will become “real” again. Watch for the changes.
Remember: “He who has the gold, has the rule.” Mr. Amanah.
How To Stay Calm & Present Throughout The Day
November 27 2024 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various Do you notice yourself feeling tense shoulders? A cleansed jaw? Perhaps you’re holding your breath in some ways and you don’t even know it?
Maybe you feel a clenched tummy from time to time and have tricky digestion.
You might notice yourself rushing through life, tasks, wanting to get to the next thing. You may not be paying full attention to your life and everything feels like autopilot.
If this is the case, you’re not alone.
In Brief:
The Facts: A simple process to bring you back to presence and freedom throughout the day.
Reflect On: Can we expect our world to change if we don't change our inner states of everyday being?
This is a very calm state of being for most people in highly developed countries who are living the ‘average everyday life.’
You wake up, go to your job, work all day, come home and then either veg out or spend time with family and go to sleep. This is the ‘modern life’ that we have accepted as ‘ a good life’ and yet almost every aspect of it presents a challenge to our health and well being.
But, at this time, money is required to live our lives, and so we must play within this system in some way or another as we actively change it.
The good news is, you have ultimate freedom within yourself to perceive your reality as you wish to perceive it. When we are unconscious, or allowing our programmed states of being to run our lives, we typically move through life on autopilot, moving from one habit to another.
However, when we begin to gain presence, and pull ourselves out of all these unconscious habits, we begin to gain some freedom back. This builds over time.
Before we get to the exercise, I want to add that for those that pay a lot of attention to the news and media side of our work here at CE, using these practices to gain more presence and self-awareness in your life will play deeply into the CE Protocol which is designed to help us gain more clarity on what’s happening in the world, and be an active part of changing it.
Skipping the personal transformation end of our journeys only holds us in our current state of being and understanding.
A Simple Process
One powerful thing you can do to begin seeing the subtleties in life, noticing the magic and incredible beauty around you and within you at all times is going back to the breath.
Combine that with a few processes in releasing tension and getting into your heart, and you’ll truly begin waking up to who you truly are on a daily basis. The best part is, this muscle grows with time, the more you practice, the more present you become, and the more your monkey mind goes into the passenger seat instead of the driver seat.
1. There are two ways to initiate the exercise, either you do it when you notice yourself tense or not present, or you set an alarm that goes off about 6 times per day. If you choose the first method, you want to know that your awareness already catches yourself about 6 times a day so you can make sure you are doing this enough.
2. When the alarm goes off, or when you notice yourself, stop what you are doing and take a couple of deep breaths. In through the nose and out through the mouth. Do this slowly and controlled. Nothing too fast and nothing too out of control.
3. After about 2 to 5 breaths, allow yourself to breathe normally, making sure it is still through the nose. Begin to say within yourself. ‘I am releasing all tension in my head, my neck, my shoulders, my jaw, my stomach, my fists, and my legs.” This is like a mini mantra if you will, but don’t take it too seriously in that it has to be said any particular way. You’re simply noticing and instructing the body to relax.
4.After you have gone through the releasing, and you notice your body is more relaxed and your breathing has brought you back to the moment. Sense yourself in your chair or where you stand. Feel the air around you, notice any breezes on your skin or any scents that you smell. Notice all the various sounds around you, not focusing on anyone or feeling any as a distraction, but noticing them and allowing them to be. This is presence, while in this state. Noticing.
If you happen to have any rampant thoughts or feelings of stress arise during this at any point, simply notice it and say within yourself “OK stress or OK task I have to complete, I see you, I will take care of you momentarily” and allow it to pass.
5. Once in presence, turn your attention to the area of your sternum, the heart centre. You may put your hand or fingers on this area, and simply focus your attention on this space. See your awareness moving into this space as if you yourself are moving from your mind to your heart. However that looks or feels to you is OK. It doesn’t have to be anything mystical. This is a common mistake of overcomplicating simple methods.
6.Finally, allow yourself to be in that space for as long as you like. 1 min, 10 mins, whatever works. Usually I say this exercise is meant to be done as a check-in for about 5 mins.
Repeat this each time your alarm goes off or when you notice yourself tense. Through this, you are gaining more awareness of self more regularly. You are also beginning to realize you have a lot more control over your state of being than once thought.
This is a key step to emotional freedom. In this space, your mind does not run you, nor do your emotions.
Bonus: As an extended tip, once you gain a sense of what that short meditation felt like. Even if you notice yourself for a moment 20 or 30 minutes later being tense, just take one deep breath and recall the energy and feeling of your meditation.
When will things like full disclosure happen, or big changes in our world?
When people focus deeply enough on personal transformation that our consciousness becomes ready to hear what’s being hidden and becomes ready for a world that is grounded in a state of peace, love, and freedom as opposed to monkey mind behavior.
JFK Jr. Told The World Who Murdered His Father - But Nobody Was Paying Attention November 26 2024 | From: FromTheTrenches / TheDarkLegacy / Various
I suppose most people think that from the day he saluted his father’s casket on November 25, 1963 at just three years old, til the evening his plane went down, he just went about his business, playing the game of life like everyone else.
After all, he did live, for the most part, a relatively ordinary life, in spite of being the Prince of America’s Camelot.
So, what do you suppose was going on in the mind of the sexiest man alive? He could have written his own political ticket, yet he went into publishing. Many expected him to land in politics and most likely were a bit perplexed when he decided to publish a magazine instead.
Some thought he was afraid to go into politics because of the “Kennedy Curse.” However, nothing could be further from the truth. What he did proved to be more dangerous than any political arena, and he knew that from the start. But…John-John had a mission…and that mission was to expose the villain who orchestrated that “dastardly act” upon his father.
Unbeknownst to the public, John-John was digging deep for proof. And, how else could he expose the truth when all the media outlets were controlled by the very cabal he planned to expose? Enter…”George.”
When he presented his magazine, “George,” to the world, he was, for all practical purposes, signing his own death warrant.
“George” was a veiled threat…in a symbolic sort of way. Do you see? How many men named “George” comes to mind at just the thought of President John F. Kennedy’s so called assassination? The cabal wanted his father dead, that is a fact, but the namesake of John F. Kennedy, Jr.’s magazine…their minion, arranged it. And…once he had the proof, the truth would come out in his very own magazine. Do you see?
"As President, John F. Kennedy understood the predatory nature of private central banking. He understood why Andrew fought so hard to end the Second Bank of the United States. So Kennedy wrote and signed Executive Order 11110 which ordered the US Treasury to issue a new public currency, the United States Note.
Kennedy was working with President Soekarno of Indonesia who was at that time the signatory for the Global Collateral Accounts which were intended to be used for humanitarian purposes but which were subverted at the time of the Bretton-Woods agreement at the end of WWII.
The intention of Kennedy and Soekarno was to end the reign of the globalist privately owned central banking system - which is the main reason that Kennedy was killed, and for his part Soekarno remained under house arrest for the rest of his life."
There was a rumor that John-John had obtained the proof he needed and an expose’ was in the works, until his untimely, and mostly “suspicious,” death.
Of course, the media campaigned that he was an irresponsible thrill seeker; but then they would, wouldn’t they? Although many people knew JFK, Jr. was murdered; and they were right about who was responsible…they were just wrong about the reason.
John Jr. was warned by family members about the risks involved in his pursuit. But, he was determined to get justice for his father and bring truth to light, exposing the darkness that shrouds our planet.
So ask yourself…what would you do, if you were a mere babe when your father, who just happened to be the most important man in the country, was murdered in such a gruesome manner, and you never had the opportunity to know him…would you just let it go?
Although he was from one of the main Illuminati family bloodlines, JFK was in fact trying to undo some of the mess - and to bring an end to the Reserve Banking System. For his efforts he was assasinated on November 22, 1963.
The Bush Connections
Many researchers and historians have come to the conclusion that it was the elite power structure running the US Government that were responsible for the assassination of JFK, and that there was more than one reason for them doing so.
There are photographs claiming to show that George Bush was at Dealey Plaza on the day of the killing, and while they might be inconclusive there are multiple other sources that George Bush was one of those responsbile for the assassination of JFK and that he was indeed there that day. The Dark Legacy takes an in depth look into the evidence supporting this.
It Never Ends - MORE Startling Evidence of Bush in Dallas - by John Hankey - TheDarkLegacy.com
I don't think we are much encouraged to see History as science. Quite the opposite, actually. And of course, that's all politics. The winners write history, and the truth be damned. Even science can have trouble trying to act like science when political issues are involved, as we see with evolution, tobacco-and-cancer, and global warming.
But I think History does have a lot in common with physical science. For example, I can remember when "Continental Drift", the idea that Africa and America were once stuck together, was very much considered "just a theory"; ridiculed by some, and regarded with amusement by many, and promulgated as likely by a tiny minority.
"Fifty men have run America, and that's a high figure."
- Joseph Kennedy, Father of JFK, in the July 26th, 1936 issue of The New York Times
But as time goes by, the evidence accumulates; and the meaning of old evidence begins to settle in; and ideas that were once considered outrageous gradually get worn in and start to be regarded as obvious common sense. Part of this process is the continual accumulation of new evidence.
New pieces are added to the puzzle and the picture becomes more clear. And sometimes the hidden meaning of old evidence, that has been lying around for years, suddenly jumps out.
Evidence of the fossils and minerals that can be found on the east coast of Africa, and on the west coast of Brazil, may have been lying around for years, before someone decided to look and see if they matched, and found that they did; and proved conclusively that west Africa and Brazil were once attached.
FBI director J. Edgar Hoover wrote this memo 5 days after the assassination, naming George Bush as a CIA officer.
The last, and most crucial paragraph, is very hard to read. The following is a transcription:
"The substance of the forgoing information was orally furnished toMr. George Bush of the Central Intelligence Agency and Captain William Edwards of the Defense Intelligence Agency on November 23, 1963, by Mr. V.T. Forsyth of this Bureau."
When it was first released in 1978, George Bush was an obscure bureaucrat, a virtual unknown. So when the best researchers on the planet saw this memo in 1978, they didn't pay much attention to it. When Bush became vice president two years later, no one was able to connect his now well-known name to this obscure memo.
But when Joseph McBride was messing around in 1988, Bush was running for president; and when McBride saw the memo, he jumped up and shouted:
"Hey, this memo is about Bush! It says he was in the CIA, way back in 1963!"
And for the longest time, the focus was on this simple isolated fact: that Hoover said Bush was in the CIA in '63.
Bush said the memo must be referring to another "George Bush," because he wasn't in the CIA at that time. But over the years, people were able to assemble the facts from Bush's personal life, showing his deep involvement with the CIA at that time, and with the CIA's anti-Castro Cubans (in the memo, Hoover calls them “misguided anti-Castro Cubans”).
And over time, it has become undeniable; that Hoover was referring, in his memo, to none other than George Herbert Walker Bush. And for a while, that was it. End of story.
But the title of this Hoover memo is, "Assassination of President John Fitzgerald Kennedy". Isn't that important?
Well, you'd think so. But for the longest time, no one made much out it. Besides, Hoover scarcely mentions the assassination in the memo, instead focusing on these "misguided anti-Castro Cubans." The body of the memo does not appear, at first, to be in any way related to the title of the memo “the assassination of President John F Kennedy”.
But then Mark Lane, in his book Rush to Judgment, did the fabulous work of demonstrating, and in fact persuading a jury, that E. Howard Hunt, a major lieutenant in the CIA's "misguided anti-Castro Cuban" program, was in Dallas and involved in the assassination.
With this background, with this framework to guide the researcher, it was then possible to assemble the considerable evidence linking Bush to Hunt.
People might have taken some notice before that Bush made the unusual request, as Nixon's ambassador to the UN, to be given an office in the White House. They may have noticed that Hunt, although he was not being paid by anyone in the White House, or answering to anyone that we know of in the White House, also had a White House office.
“The very word “secrecy” is repugnant in a free and open society; and we are as a people inherently and historically opposed to secret societies, to secret oaths and to secret proceedings…
Our way of life is under attack. Those who make themselves our enemy are advancing around the globe…no war ever posed a greater threat to our security.
If you are awaiting a finding of “clear and present danger,” then I can only saythat the danger has never been more clear and its presence has never been more imminent… For we are opposed around the world by a monolithic and ruthless conspiracy that relies primarily on covert means for expanding its sphere of influence–on infiltration instead of invasion, on subversion instead of elections, on intimidation instead of free choice, on guerrillas by night instead of armies by day.I
t is a system which has conscripted vast human and material resources into the building of a tightly knit, highly efficient machine that combines military, diplomatic, intelligence, economic, scientific and political operations. Its preparations are concealed, not published. Its mistakes are buried, not headlined. Its dissenters are silenced, not praised.
No expenditure is questioned, no rumor is printed, no secret is revealed.”
But with the Hoover memo in hand, establishing Bush as a supervisor of the CIA's "misguided anti-Castro Cuban" operation, it is possible to connect Bush to Hunt at the Bay of Pigs. With this memo in hand, it is possible to connect Bush and Hunt as two CIA operatives with offices inside the White House.
With this memo in hand, it is possible to answer who it was that Hunt answered to inside the White House; and how he got the office in the first place. And with all that, it is possible to connect Bush to Hunt, and therefore to Dallas, to Hunt in Dallas, and to the "misguided anti-Castro Cuban" assassins of John Kennedy.
Which is what Hoover did for us when he wrote the title of the memo. Little by little, the pieces start to fall into place. And pieces that in isolation meant nothing, become key parts of a whole picture.
But even so, this is not a rock-solid connection: Hunt was directly involved in the murder of JFK. And Bush supervised Hunt.
But Bush probably supervised a lot of CIA people, not all of whom were directly involved in the assassination. A high-ranking officer may be connected to all of the acts of all of his troops, by reason of his being their commander. But it's not a direct connection. It doesn't establish that the officer knew about, or approved of, or was involved in, all the actions of those troops.
It will come up again in a minute, so please read the first line carefully. Bush identifies himself to the FBI as an independent oil man from Houston.
This memo establishes that sort of direct connection between Bush and Hunt, in Dallas, on the day of the assassination.
This memo records Bush's phone call to the FBI, precisely an hour and fifteen minutes after the assassination. When I first encountered this memo, and when I first put it into my movie, JFK II, I simply called it "weird".
I saw it only in isolation, a weird, isolated connection between Bush and the assassination. It took me years to see it in context. That is, to see that this phone call demonstrates, clearly, that George Bush, was on duty that day.
He was staying at the Dallas Sheraton because his duty assignment was in Dallas. His phone call to the FBI cannot have been random. This James Parrott worked for Bush as a sign-painter; he was not an assassin; this phone call is not what it purports to be; Bush was fulfilling some obscure under-cover function in making this call.
So the phone call has to be seen as part of his CIA assignment; which was clearly connected to the assassination. This memo then establishes that Bush was in the Dallas area, and on duty; and that his duty assignment was connected to the assassination. And if his men were in Dallas shooting the President, as they were, he was certainly on duty supervising them.
"The Society [Society of Jesus aka the Jesuits] employs a variety of ruthless tactics to accomplish its long-term goal (of a New World Order which pays homage to their Black Pope). One is carrying out political assassinations of world leaders who refuse to comply with its demands.
These assassinations in the U.S. have included presidents (Abraham Lincoln, JFK), cabinet members, congressmen, senators, diplomats, journalists, scientists and religious and business leaders. "
"Assassinations are carried out by the aforementioned intelligence agencies and their Mafia partners in the drug and gambling trades, often with collateral assistance from the Knights of Malta, the Freemasons, the Knights of Columbus, and Propaganda Due (P2). Such was the case in the assassination of President John F. Kennedy and some former Popes."
If he were not supposed to be supervising them, his bosses would have assigned him to be at his home office in Houston, Texas; or on his oil rigs in the Caribbean.
But, even in context, this memo and the phone call it describes is still weird, no? I mean, how could Bush have been so stupid as to make this insanely incriminating phone call? Without this FBI memo, recording this phone call, we don't know, or even have a good clue as to where Bush was, or what he was doing the day of the assassination. Do we?
Bush simply said that he did not remember what he was doing the day of the assassination. But with this memo, Bush tells us where he was and what he was doing - he hands us his head on a silver platter.
What could possibly have motivated him to make such a stupid error as making this phone call to the FBI? It's a valid question. It's not an essential question. We can still value this memo, and extract a great deal of important content from it without answering the question of why, but the question remains.
And we can make a stab at answering it. Russ Baker in his fine book, Family of Secrets suggests that Bush was attempting to establish an alibi. Now, by making this phone call, he, in fact, establishes that he was in the Dallas area, and that he was on duty, related to the assassination.
So if he's trying to establish an alibi to cover-up where he actually was and what he was actually doing, what he is trying to cover up must be some pretty bad stuff, some pretty incriminating stuff, if it's worse than what he gives us with this alibi.
And what could be worse than what he gives us? Well, obviously, he must have actually been in Dallas. In fact, I think, this situation suggests he must have actually been in Dealey Plaza. I mean seriously. Think about it. He's so panicked about the truth coming out, that he puts his head in a noose and hands it to us.
It makes me think he must have been in Dealey Plaza, he must have been in the company of the shooters, and he must have felt that there would be evidence to prove that.
We're just speculating at the moment. We'll get to the evidence right now, but I’m trying to set the scene. If a guilty party is in a panic, trying to cover evidence connecting them to a crime, they may invent an explanation, or an alibi, that seems like a good idea at the time; but that in fact constitutes a very damaging admission. Anyway, stew on that while you consider this photo:
You see this tall thin man in a suit, with a receding hair line. Many people claim this is Bush, standing in front of the Texas School Book Depository. And it might be. It might be a lot of people. And perhaps, when he called the FBI and incriminated himself, Bush was concerned that he might show up in a better picture than this, where he was positively recognizable, looking towards the camera.
Personally, I don't think this photo looks much like Bush; and in fact, I didn't think he'd be stupid enough to just be hanging around the murder scene. I thought he was sufficiently high ranking that he'd leave such on-scene stuff to his underlings. Right?
At least in my mind, if you're an officer like Bush, you're the coach. You plan, you train and prepare your people, and then you stand back and watch it happen. Or so I thought. Fletcher Prouty was certain that he saw pictures of Ed Lansdale, a military operative of the highest rank, signaling to the "tramps" arrested behind the grassy knoll to "be cool," that everything was alright.
Hunt was a high-ranking CIA officer, chief of the CIA's Mexico station; and his son says he is one of the "tramps" who show up in several photos of men who were arrested behind the grassy knoll.
So, some of the highest ranking members of the killers' operation were apparently there, on the front line, to make sure that when things went wrong, as they inevitably do, these high ranking officers could be there to fix whatever the problem was.
So, given that high and low-ranking CIA officers were present, this photo of this thin man in a suit might, indeed, be Bush. It's possible.
And now, look at this picture of the Dal-Tex building. The Dal-Tex building is across the street from the Book Depository, and many leading researchers into the assassination, including Jim Garrison, say there was certainly a team of shooters in this building:
And as you can see, some imaginative individual has added some colour to indicate three men in this window. Very creative, very imaginative; and at least plausible. Still, it takes way too much imagination and effort, to see Bush's face. But now observe this link.
Actually, You don't have to stop and read it, because I'll quote the relevant part. It's a statement from Roger Craig, winner of the deputy of the year award for Dallas in 1960, and one of the most honest men working that day in Dallas. He's an amazing and heroic fellow, worthy of all the time you could take looking into his background and character. And here, in the following passage, he is describing a conversation he had with Jim Garrison, and he says,
"Jim also asked me about the arrests made in Dealey Plaza that day. I told him I knew of twelve arrests, one in particular made by R. E. Vaughn of the Dallas Police Department. The man Vaughn arrested was coming from the Dal-Tex Building across from the Texas School Book Depository.
The only thing which Vaughn knew about him was that he was an independent oil operator from Houston, Texas. The prisoner was taken from Vaughn by Dallas Police detectives and that was the last that he saw or heard of the suspect."
Holy Moe Lee! Please notice that, in speaking to Jim Garrison, Craig says "in particular". Apparently he and Vaughn thought this was the most significant arrest made that day; pretty amazing given that E.Howard Hunt was arrested in the rail yard behind the grassy knoll.
And the only thing Craig knew about this “particular” arrestee was that he had exactly the same singular CIA-cover, "an independent oil operator from Houston, Texas", that George Bush had used that same day in his contact with the FBI.
Now. There are a very limited number of possible explanations for who this "independent oil operator" was. Let's look at them.
It is conceivable that the CIA had two men in Dallas area that day, supervising the shooters, who both had the designated cover of being an "independent oil operator from Houston." Bush was one, as the evidence above clearly shows; and perhaps there was another who was with the shooters in the Dal-Tex building, supervising them directly.
But unless the CIA overlords were trying to set Bush up, they would not have told anyone else to use Bush's CIA cover to identify themselves to the police. If another man was involved in the crime, and was arrested for it, and he told the cops he was an "independent oil operator from Houston," this would tend to throw suspicion in Bush's direction.
"The Khazarian Mafia’s intense hatred of anyone who professed faith in any God but their god Baal has motivated them to murder kings and royalty, and make sure they can never rule. They have done the same with American presidents - running sophisticated covert operations to disempower them.
If that doesn’t work the KM assassinates them, like they did to McKinley, Lincoln and JFK. The KM wants to eliminate any strong rulers or elected officials who dare to resist their Babylonian money-magick power or their covert power gained from their deployment of their human compromise network."
Bush's association with the CIA's Cubans was already widely known. Fletcher Prouty knew and wrote of it. Fabian Escalante, the head of Cuban counter intelligence, knew and has written about it. James Files, who claims very credibly, to have been a driver for the Mafia shooters in Dallas, has spoken on-camera about it.
And FBI director J. Edgar Hoover, knew about it and wrote about it in his memo. So Bush was already a suspect in Hoover’s eyes.
The CIA planners, then, would not have told anyone else, "in case you get arrested, tell the cops you're an independent oil man from Houston". Right? They would not have done this, since it would tend to incriminate Bush, who was already in a highly visible, highly suspicious position.
Another unlikely possibility is that this "independent oil operator from Houston" was just some innocent oil operator, who somehow managed to attract suspicion, and was arrested. Do you think it's possible that another oil man from Houston just happened to be in that corner of Dealey Plaza?
Dealey Plaza today
I hope you think it's possible. Because, as unlikely as it seems, if you think it was possible, then certainly Bush would have been reasonable in thinking that, as he was being arrested, there were other independent oil operators in the crowd who witnessed his arrest.
You see, Bush spoke to a group of oil men in Dallas the night before the assassination. If it were possible that some of them were in Dealey Plaza, he would need to be terrified of the possibility that some of them might actually have seen the arrest, and would have been able to identify him as the object of that arrest.
No wonder, then, that Bush freaked out, and made this stupid incriminating phone call to the FBI. Even if it showed that he was not in Houston, or in the Caribbean, but in Dallas, at least it suggested that he was not in police custody for the murder of the President, in Dealey Plaza.
But now stop and think a minute: Why was he arrested? What was he doing that drew this cop's attention at all? What could he possibly have been doing to make this cop think that he needed to arrest Bush?
Perhaps walking out of a building without attracting attention is harder than it sounds; and it reasonable to suppose that the crowd outside the Dal-Tex building had heard the shots, had heard that the President had been wounded, and they were carefully scrutinizing anyone who came out of the building.
But this story shows clearly that Bush was not the sort of cold-blooded killer who could take part in the murder of a man, and then act and look like nothing was going on as he tried to leave the scene of the crime. And it turns out that as an old man, Bush continued to suffer from this character trait, of being unable to hide feelings that need to be kept secret.
As you can see below, at Gerry Ford's funeral, Bush suddenly breaks into a wide grin while speaking of the Kennedy assassination. This is not a Mona Lisa smile. This is face-wrenching spasm of glee.
In a minute we'll take up the question of why Bush would grin at his recollection of watching John Kennedy's brains splatter; the point for us now is that he apparently had a similarly inappropriate, show-stopping expression on his face as he attempted to exit the Dal-Tex building; he had the look of a murderer in his eye, so clearly that it could not be missed; as this funereal-grin could not be missed.
And the guilt plastered all over Bush's face drew people's attention. And this cop, Vaughn, arrested him.
Now remember, Roger Craig tells this story in the context of his discussions with New Orleans District Attorney Jim Garrison about the suspects who were arrested that day and who then evaporated without leaving a mugshot, interview, fingerprint, or name. Garrison spoke not only to Roger Craig, but he no-doubt spoke to Vaughn, who made the arrest. And Garrison adds the following:
“At least one man arrested immediately after the shooting had come running out of the Dal-Tex Building and offered no explanation for his presence there. Local authorities hardly could avoid arresting him because of the clamor of the onlookers.
He was taken to the Sheriff's office, where he was held for questioning. However, the Sheriff's office made no record of the questions asked this suspect, if any were asked; nor did it have a record of his name. Later two uniformed police officers escorted him out of the building to the jeers of the waiting crowd.
They put him in a police car, and he was driven away. Apparently this was his farewell to Dallas, for he simply disappeared forever.”
- On the Trail of the Assassins, p. 238
This vision of the panicked Bush being arrested, no-doubt terrified as he was taken to the police station, and possibly even booked (though the record of any such booking has been destroyed) provides a context that explains a number of Bush's otherwise-mysterious actions. Certainly Bush was freaked out and panic-stricken! An angry crowd clamored for his arrest, and jeered his release.
Being a newbie in these dark affairs, Bush didn't have confidence in the ability of the old devils at CIA to make water run uphill, to make time run backwards, to silence the witnesses, to destroy the records, and make it all go away. And so he panicked; he acted on his own, stupidly; he called the FBI, thinking that he was "cleverly" providing evidence that it wasn't him who was arrested in front of the Dal-Tex building that day.
In his panic-stricken state, this seemed like a good idea. He was unable to see that he was actually creating a permanent absolutely-positive record of his involvement.
We can now also explain the grin. He grins ridiculously at Gerry Ford's funeral, at the mention of John Kennedy's murder, not because he is such a ghoul that he thinks splattering the contents of Kenney's head all over Jackie Kennedy was funny; but because mentioning the assassination causes him to recall the comedy of errors that produced his own ridiculous panic, arrest, more panic, and so on.
Garrison wrote his paragraph about Bush's arrest in 1988. Deputy Craig's article was written in 1971 and posted in 1992. But the significance of these paragraphs was discovered last week. There hardly was an internet in 1992 when Craig's article was posted. And for 19 years, no one noticed that this phrase, "independent oil man from Houston", is a very unique description of Bush.
No one noticed until last month, when one of the moderators of JFKMurderSolved showed it to me. And I wrote about it to some friends, and one of them suggested I read what Jim Garrison had to say.
So the pieces continue to fall into place. Little by little, the picture is filled in, the questions get answered. And the conclusions become more incontrovertible. This is just the sort thing that happened with the theory of Evolution and the Big Bang theory; and the theory of continental drift [all three of which are actually bunkum].
And someday they may start to teach history, as a science, based on evidence, in the universities. Really! It could happen!
At which point, Bush's involvement in JFK's murder will be taught, like evolution, as the only plausible explanation of the available reliable evidence.
Final note: Until recently, Bush had nothing more to say about his whereabouts the day of the assassination than that he doesn't remember where he was. That in itself is extraordinarily incriminating.
Everyone who was alive at the time remembers where they were on 9-11, and on the day Kennedy was murdered. But, saying that he doesn't remember, however improbable, is at least consistent with Bush's autobiography, which mentions nothing.
Lately, however, perhaps at least partly in response to my work, Bush and Co. have concocted a story that he was speaking in Tyler, Texas to the Rotary Club. The vice-president of the Rotary Club, Aubrey Irby, says that Bush was speaking when the bellhop came over and told him, that Kennedy was dead [Kitty Kelley, The Family: the Real Story of the Bush Dynasty, p.213; cited by Russ Baker in Family of Secrets, p.54].
Mr. Irby passed the information on to Mr. Wendell Cherry, who passed it on to Bush; who stopped his speech. Irby says that Bush explained that he thought a political speech, under the circumstances, was inappropriate; and then he sat down.
As a would-be alibi proving Bush's innocence, there are at least three huge problems with this story.
The first is that it is inconceivable that Bush would not have remembered such an event; or that he would have left it out of his autobiography, since it shows what a fine and respectful fellow he is.
If he didn't remember it sooner, or include it in his autobiography, it's clearly because it never happened.
The second huge problem with this story is that it couldn’t possibly have happened; that is, it is made impossible by Bush’s original alibi, his phone call to the FBI, as you’ll see:
The witness who tells this story, Aubrey Irby, says that Bush excused himself and sat down. It doesn't say that he rushed out of the room in a frantic search for a phone.
The problem is that Walter Cronkite's announcement to the world that Kennedy was dead came at 1:38 PM.
Certainly, no one was listening to Walter Cronkite in the same room in which Bush was speaking. Therefore we can be sure that this bellhop, who told Irby that Kennedy was dead, was in another room. The bellhop had to make the decision that he had heard enough of the news to leave off listening to the news.
This is no small point. Texas governor Connally was severely wounded. Lyndon Johnson was reportedly wounded. There was much other news to be confirmed. At some point, then, the bellhop decided to stop listening and go make an announcement. There's no reason to think Irby would be the first person he would tell.
But at some point he went to the room where Bush was speaking and informed Mr. Irby that the president was dead. This walk to find Irby took time, of course. Mr. Irby had to receive the information, and then he had to decide to inform Mr. Wendell Cherry, the president of the Kiwanis.
Mr. Cherry had to decide that he should interrupt Bush's speech; Mr. Cherry had to then walk over to Bush and tell him the news.
Bush had to decide what to say; and he had to say it. And, according to the only witness, Mr. Irby, Bush "then sat down". Somehow, when he was finished sitting, without attracting Mr. Irby's attention, Bush had to seek and find a phone. This would have been a hotel phone, so he would likely have had to go through the hotel switchboard to get an outside line.
Do you suppose the switchboard was busy after the announcement of the President's death? It's a good guess. In Washington D.C. so many people rushed to make a phone call that the phone system went down. In any case, once he got through to the hotel operator and got an outside line, Bush then had to call information and get the number of the FBI.
After getting through to information, and getting the number, he then had to call the FBI; and penetrate their switchboard, which was, no doubt, very busy; and he had to locate an agent, on what must have been the busiest day in the history of the Dallas bureau.
How many minutes do you suppose that would take? Twenty seems a fair guess, though it seems implausible that a civilian could even get through, given all the official police business going on at the time.
We know that the Dallas FBI was all over the murder scene, confiscating camera film and intimidating witnesses; so it's hard to imagine how Bush, an hour after the shooting, was able to reach an agent at all. Given the "sitting" that Mr. Irby observed Bush doing, for all this to have transpired in 45 minutes would be tidy work.
But Bush had to do all of this, as the FBI memo states, by 1:45, seven minutes after the news of Kennedy's death first went out; which is blatantly impossible.
The third problem is this question of why Bush would feel that it was necessary to concoct such a story at all? Why does he have to tell us this lie? Why does he have to get others, like Irby, to lie for him? The irony is that the harder he tries to make himself appear innocent, by lying, the more evidence he gives us of his guilt.
There are some people who manage to point to this and say "ahah! That's why Bush was in Dallas! Not to kill the President, but to speak to the other oilmen!" But as the Hoover memo shows, being an oilman was just a cover for Bush's real occupation as a CIA supervisor of trained killers. He needed an excuse for being in Dallas. This speaking engagement provided him with one.
From the Director of Dark Legacy:
John Hankey
George Bush killed Kennedy. Or was it the Mafia? Maybe Castro did it. Who cares? It was 40 years ago. What difference does it make?
It matters.
The day he died we lost an invaluable treasure. This video documents that we lost a man of peace, who tried to cool off the cold war, and to get the American people to see their Russian enemies, not as despicable inhuman monsters, but as people like us.
On November 22, 1963, you lost the man who saved your life on October 17, 1962. At the height of the missile crisis, Kennedy’s generals and advisors were urging him to launch a first strike attack against Cuba.
They assured Kennedy that the Russian missiles in Cuba were not nuclear and were not ready; but that he and they should quietly slip away to the safety of bomb shelters anyway, just to be safe; and then launch an attack, leaving the rest of us out to die. Kennedy thought about it. And then he told them that nobody was going anywhere.
If anyone died, they would be the first to go, sitting as they were in the Whitehouse, the prime target of those Russian missiles. Together they then figured out a safer plan. Robert McNamara, Secretary of Defense at the time, recently learned from the Russians that the missiles were armed, were ready, were nuclear, and that their commanders were authorized to use them in case of an attack.
If you live in the northern hemisphere, the lives of your parents, and your future, were certainly saved by John Kennedy on that day. It matters that his killers be exposed.
In his farewell address, President Eisenhower had warned Kennedy, and the rest of us, of the threat posed to democracy by what Eisenhower called “the military industrial complex.”
And while Kennedy famously went after the CIA, and refused to commit troops to Vietnam, I always wondered why he didn’t more openly attack this military industrial complex. And then I stumbled upon a speech he gave at the United Nations.
As you will see in the video, he called upon the Russians, and United Nations, to help him to take on this military industrial complex, in order to “abolish all armies and all weapons.” But he was swept away.
And in the years since, millions have died in needless wars, trillions of dollars have been wasted on “defense”, and millions more people have lived and died needlessly in poverty. It matters that we lost him.
In 2007, Bruce Willis told Vanity Fair magazine;
"They still haven’t caught the guy that killed Kennedy. I'll get killed for saying this, but I'm pretty sure those guys are still in power, in some form. The entire government of the United States was co-opted.”
Now Willis probably would not mind my suggesting that he’s no genius. At best, his observation is common sense. 80% of the American people agree with him. Indeed, this video, proving that Kennedy was brought down by the most powerful men in the world and their hired thugs, is not based on secret documents.
It is all information that has merely been suppressed. Oswald allegedly shot Kennedy from behind. But the day he died, the NY Times carried the story, told by the doctors in Dallas, that Kennedy had an entrance wound in his throat, another in his right temple, and a large gaping exit wound in the back of his head.
After talking to the emergency room doctors, Kennedy’s press secretary described, to the assembled press, a shot to the right temple from the right front that went “right through the head.”
All of the witnesses near the right front, the grassy knoll, described hearing shots from that direction, and dozens of witnesses raced up the knoll in pursuit of the shooters. These witnesses talked to the press. But all of this information has been suppressed for the last 50 years. By whom? Who could?
You will also see in this video the overwhelming best evidence, from the best witnesses, proving beyond a reasonable dispute, that Kennedy's body was stolen from Air Force One, and the wound to his right temple was mutilated, before the autopsy.
Jackie Kennedy kept watch over an empty casket on the flight from Dallas to Bethesda Naval Hospital. Then the body was quietly taken to Bethesda for the autopsy, arriving 20 minutes before Jackie and the empty casket. Who had the power to arrange this?
Who HAS the power today to suppress all this evidence?, and to continue to bombard us with ridiculous lies about a lone gunman? It's a short list, isn't it? It doesn't include the mafia, or the Russians, or Castro.
It does include the Bush family - or rather their masters in Big Oil; the banking elite; the backbone of the military industrial complex. These men, and their successors, carried out the attacks of 9-11. It matters.
In the covert war against the communist regime in Cuba under the CIA’s Operation Mongoose, the U.S. Joint Chiefs of Staff unanimously proposed state-sponsored acts of terrorism in side the United States.
The plan included shooting down hijacked American airplanes, the sinking of U.S. ships, and the shooting of Americans on the streets of Washington, D.C. The outrageous plan even included a staged NASA disaster that would claim the life of astronaut John Glenn.
Reeling under the embarrassing failure of the CIA’s botched Bay of Pigs invasion of Cuba, president Kennedy rejected the plan in March of 1962. A few months later, Kennedy denied the plan’s author, General Lyman Lemnitzer, a second term as the nation’s highest ranking military officer.
In November of 1963, Kennedy was assassinated in Dallas, Texas.
Relying exclusively on government documents, statements from the best witnesses available, and the words from the mouths of the killers themselves, Dark Legacy produces a thoroughly substantiated criminal indictment of George Herbert Walker Bush, establishing beyond a reasonable doubt his guilt as a CIA supervisor in the conspiracy to assassinate John F. Kennedy. If we could present this evidence to a jury in Texas, he would pay with his life.
Part one presents the overwhelming mountain of evidence that President Kennedy was hit by bullets from the front and rear. Every witness in the Dallas emergency room attests, on camera, to the fact that a bullet from the right front blew a fist-sized whole in the back of the President's head.
The New York Times carried these statements on the day of the murder; and has covered them up ever since.
***
Part two presents the on-camera testimony of the witnesses who actually handled the President's body, the FBI report, and the photographic evidence all proving unequivocally that the President's body was stolen from the Secret Service and the wounds altered, before the body was delivered to Bethesda Naval hospital for the autopsy.
Jackie Kennedy accompanied an empty casket on the plane flight home. Who had the power to do all this without attracting public attention? It's a short list.
***
Part three presents the Nazi-connections of the Bush family, which prompted the FBI to seize their assets during WW II, as Nazi assets. It presents the suppressed fact that Watergate burglar and CIA operative E. Howard Hunt was found by a jury to have been in Dallas and involved in the conspiracy to kill Kennedy.
Hunt was a supervisor of the misguided CIA-led anti-Castro Cubans who broke into the Watergate. He is not only connected to Bush through Watergate; and through Bush's father, Prescott; but five days after the assassination, the head of the FBI, J. Edgar Hoover, wrote a memo, titled "Assassination of President John Fitzgerald Kennedy" in which he named "George Bush of the Central Intelligence Agency" as the supervisor of what Hoover himself called the "misguided anti-Castro Cuban" killers of the President.
Bush has said he doesn't remember the events of that day, but FBI documents place him in Dallas.
It is difficult to assess the stature and significance of someone who has been dead as long as John Kennedy. His killers have also been his detractors, actively desecrating his memory, as they did his body.
The movie begins with a short presentation of some of his most powerful and important speeches; including a stunning speech to the UN in which Kennedy calls for the complete abolition of the military industrial complex.
These same men the military industrial complex, ripped him from us, and the darkest features of our history since that time are all directly the result of his murder.
"What will happen when the American people, and those of other Western nations, emerge from their cocoon of denial and face the reality that their rulers are among the worst criminals in human history?
Will the people follow their leaders’ example and lapse into lawless, psychopathic behavior? Will Western leaders “flee forward” by launching wars designed to conceal the bloody tracks linking them to past misdeeds? Or will the pathocracy be overthrown and replaced by something more humane?
On such questions hinges the future of humanity. Given the high stakes, you would have to be crazy not to help spread the truth, change the system, and save the planet."
Evidence of Revision is a 9 hour long documentary series whose purpose is to present the publicly unavailable and even suppressed historical audio, video, and film recordings largely unseen by the American public relating to the assassination of the Kennedy brothers.
It also details t
he little known classified Black Ops actually used to intentionally create the massive war in Viet Nam, the CIA "mind control" programs and their involvement in the RFK assassination and the Jonestown massacre and other important truths of our post-modern time.
The Carbonaro Effect: Magician Reveals How Fake News Media Indoctrinates The Gullible Masses With Junk Science November 25 2024 | From: NaturalNews / Various Although this is not the intention of the show, a fascinating hidden camera magic TV show called The Carbonaro Effect inadvertently reveals how the fake news media indoctrinates the gullible masses into believing really big lies.
The Carbonaro Effect is syndicated by TruTV, and it features a talented young magician named Michael Carbonaro.
Unlike most “magic” shows where talented magicians perform magic in front of people who fully expect to be dazzled by apparent magic, Michael Carbonaro performs magic that’s presented as “normal” reality.
In other words, he performs astonishing feats of sleight of hand, but then acts surprised when observers express astonishment at what they just witnessed. In most of his bits, he tries to convince the observers that what they just witnessed was completely normal (and even commonplace).
He accomplishes this through the application of social engineering strategies.
How “Social Engineering” Achieves Mind Control for the Gullible Masses
“Social engineering” describes the application of verbal strategies designed to invoke the innate social conformity desires of sheeple (i.e. people who don’t think for themselves but who want to fit in with the crowd). Nearly all people are actually sheeple.
Very few individuals are willing to question a “consensus” put forth by others, even if that consensus is obviously false or violates the laws of physics.
For example, consider how many people are absolutely convinced that flu shots always work and are backed by exhaustive scientific trials, even when flu shot insert sheets openly admit the vaccines have been subject to no clinical trials whatsoever and aren’t backed by any clinical evidence of efficacy.
As revealed in this Natural News investigation, for example, the Flulaval vaccine insert sheet admits there are “no controlled trials demonstrating a decrease in influenza.”
Yet people believe flu shots work because they are told they work by a “consensus” of other people who have been tricked into believing a falsehood.
Exploiting this psychological phenomenon, Michael Carbonaro pulls off apparent magical feats (levitation of objects, “compressing” glass bottles, shrinking dogs to one inch thick, etc.) and then explains to the observer that this is completely normal and probably based on some really cool science.
Carbonaro then explains how it works by spewing science-sounding babble, often citing, “negative ions” or “high altitude packaging” or “memory fibers” or whatever science-sounding explanation comes to mind.
Hilariously, the people always nod their head in agreement, as if the “negative ions” explains levitating objects. They buy the bulls##t!
Watch my full analysis of Michael Carbonaro, social engineering and fake news. I’ve posted this one-hour video analysis that gets deep into the explanation of how “reality” is shaped by fake news institutions to make nearly everyone believe utterly false things:
Carbonaro Inadvertently Reveals How the Fake News Media Sells its “Big Lies” to the Gullible Public
The “Carbonaro Effect” reveals exactly how the New York Times, Washington Post and CNN push totally fake news narratives like the “Russians stole the election” nonsense.
It’s also how the LGBT community pushes its hilarious fake science that claims babies are “born genderless” and then are randomly “assigned” a gender at birth.
This also explains how LGBT groups are now pushing the total fake science narrative that claims men can get pregnant, men have periods and men needs tampons in restrooms on college campi.
It’s all rooted in totally fake science that’s reinforced by social consensus.
If enough people appear to agree with something - even if that thing violates the laws of physics or biology - most “sheeple” will fall right into line and believe it.
If you walk around a college campus and scream, “The Earth is flat!” you will be chided as a loon. But if you say, “Men can magically change into women,” you will be embraced and probably given some sort of award.
On his show, Michael Carbonaro gets people to believe things that are impossible, such as witnessing mummified Egyptian cats springing to life, or fitting 20 hamburgers and a large drink inside a small paper bag that gets compressed to less than an inch thick.
Yet despite the impossibility of what they are witnessing, many of the observers featured in the show readily accept that what they are seeing is REAL.
In another episode, Carbonaro actually convinces a small crowd of people that a living duck is actually an animatronic robot. Yes, they believe they are watching a robotic duck as it walks around, scratches its feathers and reacts to the world.
(As a side note, we disagree with Carbonaro’s abuse of animals for his tricks. Through some of his illusions, he confines animals in very small spaces, or bends their necks sideways like he did for the duck illusion. Hopefully he will think twice about using animals in future illusions…)
This is How the “Global Warming” BIG LIE is Pushed
Now you can clearly see how the global warming / climate change “big lie” is pushed.
It’s rooted in utter scientific nonsense such as the deranged assertion that “carbon dioxide is a pollutant” that harms the planet. In reality, of course, carbon dioxide is the single most important life-giving nutrient for plants, and as CO2 rises in the atmosphere, rainforests, flowers and food crops flourish.
This is irrefutable science to anyone who understands photosynthesis.
Yet, through social engineering fake news tactics, the entire media establishment has managed to convince most people that the most important “greening” nutrient in the world - CO2 - is dangerous and deadly and must be eliminated from the atmosphere.
If CO2 were eliminated from the atmosphere, by the way, nearly all life on planet Earth would collapse, including human life. The entire global ecosystem would implode and die.
Yet through the use of social engineering a fake science “sleight of mind” tactics, people are readily indoctrinated to believe exactly the opposite… that the planet will be destroyed if we don’t eliminate all carbon dioxide!
The lunatics running the climate change hoax have actually declared “war on carbon,” even though carbon is the element of life out of which all humans, animals, plants and insects are built. A war on carbon is a war on humanity, since every human being is made from carbon.
Interestingly, Michael Carbonaro himself may not even be aware that he may have been placed under the influence of the “Carbonaro Effect” when it comes to fake science narratives like climate change or flu shots.
In exactly the same way Carbonaro is performing “sleight of mind” magic on his audience, the globalist-run media establishment is carrying out much more sinister sleight of mind magic on everybody else, including Michael Carbonaro.
It’s one thing to master the art of fooling others. It’s an entirely different level of mastery to realize when you’re being fooled yourself. The climate change scam is one of the greatest “mentalist” illusions ever pulled off in the history of human civilization.
Some of the “really big lies” that are routinely pushed by establishment science and media include:
Scientific materialism as the only phenomenon that explains the nature of reality.
The complete denial of the existence of consciousness in animals
The absurd but widespread denial among doctors and the FDA that nutrition can prevent disease. (For starters, it is a simple scientific fact that vitamin C cures scurvy and vitamin D cures rickets, but no one is allowed to say such things without being derided as a heretic.
The false assertion that the cancer industry wants to cure cancer rather than profit from its continuation.
The decades-long NASA cover-up about the existence of microbial life on Mars, proven by mass spec tests carried by the 1976 Viking lander. Dr. Gil Levin should have gone down in history alongside Einstein, but today nobody knows his name.
The complete Big Pharma hoax that claims every living person needs to take statin drugs in order to prevent cardiovascular disease. This is a complete hoax that has already fallen apart, much like the “Hormone Replacement Therapy” fiasco that ended up giving millions of women cancer.
Beware Modern-Day Doublespeak November 24 2024 | From: ActivistPost / Various Top 20 Modern Doublespeak Terms To Be Aware Of.
Doublespeak is a language that is alive and well in our world today. Doublespeak can refer to terms that are euphemisms (mild expressions designed to hide harsher or more direct ones), deliberately ambiguous (expressions designed to hide the truth) or actual inversions (outright lies which state the opposite of the truth).
Although he never used the term doublespeak in his book 1984, many associate doublespeak with George Orwell. After all, it was Orwell who famously wrote that the motto of the totalitarian ruling party in 1984 was “War is Peace, Freedom is Slavery, Ignorance is Strength” – an example of an inversion.
Orwell did however use the term newspeak to refer to a new kind of language which drastically reduced the scope of available words and terms, so as to concurrently reduce the scope of possible free thought among the ruled population.
Many doublespeak terms in the following list are oxymorons, meaning that the term itself is contradictory. Many hide the truth because it is too raw, unpalatable, uncomfortable or outright horrifying. It is vitally important we watch our language, because it plays a great part in how we shape our world and in how we create our reality.
In many ways, by unconsciously using these terms instead of more accurate or truthful ones, we are quietly lying to ourselves, or at a minimum acquiescing to the process of being lied to and programmed. Political correctness is a great example of how language control, thought control and doublespeak can be introduced to an entire population without people realizing they are being deceived and manipulated.
Below is list of the top 20 modern Orwellian doublespeak terms, with the first half focusing on military and geopolitical terms.
Orwellian Doublespeak Terms #1: War on Terror, Terrorism, Terrorist, Enemy Combatant
The war on terror is an utterly fake and fraudulent construct. It has largely been invented and hyped to provide an excuse for the NWO (New World Order) manipulators to override things like human rights, natural law and the Constitution domestically, as well as to invade, infiltrate and overthrow other nations abroad.
The US has struggled to define the term “terror” ever since it declared the war on terror. Funnily enough, the US can’t even reach a consensus on what terrorism exactly is; so we have another nebulous war on a concept that is different to everyone. Here is the core of the FBI’s definition of terrorism, whether it be domestic or international:
"Involve acts dangerous to human life that violate federal or state law;
Appear intended (i) to intimidate or coerce a civilian population; (ii) to influence the policy of a government by intimidation or coercion; or (iii) to affect the conduct of a government by mass destruction, assassination. or kidnapping;"
By its own definition, the US is the biggest terrorist in the world, since it frequently acts dangerously to human life (bombs, missiles, drones, war), kills civilians, influences foreign governments (when it is not outright overthrowing them – Iraq, Libya, Ukraine) and has been assassinating foreign governmental officials since at least 1953 via the CIA.
Politicians use the term terrorist or enemy combatant to essentially describe a foreign militia member or soldier that has been designated as the enemy and whom they want to destroy or kill. Islamic terrorism is just the latest flavor, although a better term may be Zio-Islamic terrorism, since Zionist Israel is behind the creation, funding and operation of radical Islam (or as I call it radical Zio-Islam) as well as many of the so-called “Islamic” false flag attacks like 9/11 and Paris.
The would-be word controllers have gone one step further than terrorism by adopting the term extremism. Extremism is the new terrorism, because it’s more broad and can be used to marginalize or criminalize dissidents. After all, ANYONE could be accused of being extreme in some way, right? Who is exactly in the middle of the spectrum on every single issue?
As the DHS manual in the image above states, an extremist could be a patriot, veteran, alternative media journalist, border control advocate, animal rights advocate, gun control advocate and a host of other people – just about anyone who questions the “official” version of reality. Are you an extremist?
On the other side of the coin, of course, are those mercenaries, soldiers, military men and other guns for hire who are branded as our “allies” and not our enemy. In essence, someone we are paying to do our dirty work. Those guys are not terrorists; they are freedom fighters or moderate rebels! As George Carlin said:
"Israeli terrorists are called commandos; Arab commandos are called terrorists. Contra killers are called freedom fighters; if crime fighters fight crime, and fire fighters fight fire, what do freedom fighters fight?"
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #4: Ethnic Cleansing
Ethnic cleansing is another horrific example of doublespeak. The word genocide is too direct and confrontational, so the controllers have felt the need to tone it down with the horrible choice of the word “cleansing.” Since when did mass murder have anything to do cleaning or cleansing? This is a total inversion of reality.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #5: Enhanced Interrogation
Enhanced interrogation is a fancy way of saying something far more brutal and honest: torture. It’s another lie. In normal English, to interrogate is to ask, not to push someone face’s down in water with the intent of scaring them almost to the point of death, nor to shove food up their rectum.
Yet we know from US government documents that waterboarding, rectal feeding and a host of other atrocities were in fact performed at places like Guantanamo Bay.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #6: Extrajudicial Killing
Just like the above 2 terms, extrajudicial killing is another attempt at adding more words and syllables to a term in the hope of hiding the raw, brutal truth behind it. We all know it means assassination. It’s another deceptive euphemism to conceal and downplay the truth. In a free, fair and open world, no one would have the right to take another’s life, let alone outside of some kind of justice process.
Orwellian Doublespeak Terms #7: Humanitarian Intervention, Responsibility to Protect (R2P)
The Rockefeller-created United Nations is the intended vehicle to usher in the One World Government of the NWO.
It is no surprise, then, that they would foster the use of doublespeak terms and policies such as humanitarian intervention (a blatant oxymoron) and the responsibility to protect (R2P).
An intervention is an invasion or pre-emptive attack, and is obviously illegal and unjust – period. There’s nothing “humanitarian” about militarily invading another sovereign nation.
The US, UK and other powers have gotten away with this kind of mass murder by controlling the narrative through the mainstream media and drumming up pretexts, such as the fake story of WMDs (Weapons of Mass Destruction) and the fake story of rescuing a nation’s people from a supposedly dangerous leader.
The latter trick seems to work almost every time.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #8: Collateral Damage, Useless Eaters
A hallmark of these kind of military doublespeak terms is dehumanization – turning other people and other lives into something sub-human or non-human.
How often have we heard that people killed in a raid, strike, incursion, invasion or battle are just collateral damage? It sounds like a financial asset or a lowly piece of possession. Perhaps the only way hardened military men with a deadened conscience and ability to feel or empathize can function is to make their victims into things.
War criminal and big-time NWO insider Henry Kissinger is reported to have called Africans “useless eaters,” which makes sense given the fact he scripted the NSSM 200 during his time in the Nixon Administration – the official US policy of depopulation towards the 3rd world.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #9: Eliminate, Neutralize, Depopulate
Speaking of depopulation, there are a lot of euphemistic and doublespeak terms for killing and murder. As well as to depopulate, we also hear to eliminate, to neutralize, to bump off and to take out. More dehumanization and the further attempt to sugar coat killing and make murder more palatable.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #10: Department of Defense, Department of Homeland Security, Intelligence
Government is the seat of control, so of course we can expect its name to reflect doublespeak deception.
Isn’t it funny how nations like the US and UK (and others) have some version of the Ministry or Department of Defense, when they are usually the aggressors and invaders?
I suppose Department of Attack is not PR-friendly enough. The DHS (Department of Homeland Security) is a joke; it does nothing to make the average person more secure, but only the 1% of 1% of the controllers whom it serves. Intelligence is information about a potential enemy gained through spying, but is it really smart or wise to go around making enemies, first in your mind and then in the world?
Military intelligence is another oxymoron. Is spying real intelligence? What about emotional intelligence? The heart is bigger and more powerful than the brain …
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #11: WMD (Weapons of Mass Destruction)
Why talk about WMDs (Weapons of Mass Destruction) instead of just saying, in a more straightforward manner, chemical weapons or nuclear weapons? The US has more WMDs than anyone.
The UK has a lot, too, and Israel its sitting on what some think is a 300-400 strong undeclared nuclear arsenal in the volatile Middle East. Why don’t enough people talk about the WMDs these nations hold, and either use as threats or in reality to achieve their imperialistic and terroristic goals?
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #12: Anti-Semitism
Sooner or later, all researchers exposing the worldwide conspiracy have to face the fact that Israel is a rogue nation (owned by the Rothschilds) that exerts an inordinate and disproportionate influence on the world, while committing daily genocide (sorry, “ethnic cleansing”) against the Palestinians.
We need to rise above the stigma of anti-semitism, which is clearly a term thrown around to divert attention and criticism away from Israel. It’s a cunning trick to try to equate the recipient with intolerance and to falsely paint the recipient as racist. Here’s what an Israeli official (former Israeli Minister Shulamit Aloni) said about it:
Well, it’s a trick. We always use it. When from Europe someone criticizes Israel, then we bring out the Holocaust. When in this country (USA) when they criticize Israel, they are anti-semitic … it’s very easy to blame people who criticize certain acts of the Israeli Government … that justifies everything we do to the Palestinians.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #13: Conspiracy Theorist
"[Conspiracy theory and conspiracy theorist] are weaponized terms which represent a cunning method to discredit truthseekers, truthtellers and investigators. This diversionary scheme has worked well – people often shut down once they hear this phrase and stop thinking critically. These terms have become falsely associated, in popular culture, with madness, craziness and deluded thinking.
Of course, the corollary to the idea of so-called deluded conspiracy theories is that things just happen by chance. Thus, those who deride conspiracy theories, often with little or no investigation, can be labeled coincidence theorists. They adhere to coincidence theory which blindly believes there is no New World Order agenda; events just occur randomly."
Labeling a truthseeker or truthteller as a conspiracy theorist has been a great way to hide the truth, but is usefulness is running out.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #14: Quantitative Easing
Ben Bernanke, former chairman of the Illuminati-owned Federal Reserve, earned the name Helicopter Ben with his suggestion that the Government throw paper currency out of a helicopter to the people below.
Quantitative easing was another intellectual and deceitful doublespeak term to hide devaluation and inflation. The basic laws of economics dictate that the mass printing of paper money (with no real growth in wealth to back it) will inevitably lead to inflation and a devaluation of the existing money in circulation.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #15: Bulk Collection
Remember when Obama and the US Government tried to take the heat off the whole NSA surveillance scandal? They deliberately changed the widely-used term mass surveillance to bulk collection.
This was more subtle PR doublespeak, but those who closely watch the government know it was another attempt at obfuscation and denial.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #16: Negative Cash Flow, Negative Patient Care Outcome
These 2 doublespeak terms come from George Carlin. Again, we have to ask ourselves, why are we so afraid of being honest and direct? Why can’t we call a spade a spade?
Why do we have to turn everything into a military or economic term? Are we aware that our society has militarized, weaponized and commercialized just about everything?
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #17: Reasonable Suspicion
Remember when then-NSA chief Michael Hayden tried to convince reporters and the world that there was a new benchmark in the privacy and surveillance debate. It was no longer the benchmark of probable cause as spelled out in the 4th Amendment. It was now reasonable suspicion. This is called making-it-up-as-you-go-along, and represents a clear sign that the previous benchmarks, rights and limitations upon centralized power (that our ancestors fought so hard for) are being eroded.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #18: Climate Change Denier
Manmade global warming or AGW (Anthropogenic Global Warming) is another giant scam designed to bring in a world carbon tax, world currency and world government. If you aren’t with the program, you’ll be labeled a climate change denier.
The word “denier” carries inherent negative connotations with it, which is why it has been chosen to try to corral the unbelievers into the fold. Unfortunately for the NWO manipulators, there are many scientists refuting AGW and many who have seen through the propaganda and realized that the environmental movement has been hijacked.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #19: Sustainable Development
There are so many examples of doublespeak in the hijacked environmental movement that it would be a full-time job just to list them all.
However, they can all be summarized by the dangerously deceptive term sustainable development, a catch cry of the UN and ICLEI-controlled green movement, which promises the world and cloaks its agenda of control under a green veneer. For more on this, take a close look at Agenda 21 and its newly updated cousin, Agenda 2030.
Orwellian Doublespeak Term #20: Globalism
Finally, the term globalism itself is another umbrella term of modern doublespeak. Those challenging the globe earth model assert that globalism is an attempt to trick people into unconsciously assuming the Earth is a globe.
Regardless of whether that turns out to be true or not, we can say for sure that globalism has become a cover for the growing centralization of power in the push towards a NWO World Government.
To the NWO manipulators, their doublespeak PR term globalism means free trade deals like the TTP, unfettered access to 3rd world nations to exploit new markets with no protections, and a one world army, currency and government all under their control.
Conclusion: Beware of Doublespeak
We live in a world of doublespeak. As George Carlin exposed during his performance, the Pentagon really did measure radiation in “sunshine units”! It’s important to be aware of modern doublespeak, and in most cases, consciously use alternative terms and phrasings so as to avoid the perpetuation of these lie-enabling terms.
In many ways, we create our world with language. Let us also remember the wise words of George Orwell:
"Political language is designed to make lies sound truthful and murder respectable, and to give an appearance of solidity to pure wind."
The Original Sin – A Myth Whose Time Is Up November 23 2024 | From: ZenGardner / Various Of all the deceptions pulled on humanity over the ages, The Original Sin is probably the most devastating. Yet hugely successful from the perspective of the perpetrators.
Almost everywhere the doctrine of Christianity forged its zealous mission to convert the masses, so the Original Sin accompanied it. Imposing the rationale of guilt on untold millions whose open minds no doubt thought they were receiving a message of emancipation and light.
Not so my friends, you were in fact receiving a message just about as dark as darkness gets!
The extraordinary power of a message, properly formed, packaged and publicized, is something we have all come to learn a lot about in recent decades. ‘The medium is the message’ declared Marshall McLuhan back in 1964. And that edict could easily pass for the moment the first biblical texts let it be known that a man called Adam and a woman called Eve got the whole human race off to a very bad start… from which it appears to have never recovered.
However the reason it got off to a bad start and has still failed to fully recover, cannot be pinned on any fault of Adam and Eve, as we shall see, but lies squarely at the feet of a masterful plot to falsify what is actually a potent story of human emancipation and growing inner conviction.
This ‘human race’ to which the biblical text refers, was set on its way by a starting pistol fired by someone who didn’t want anyone participating in this race to actually win. He or she or it, only wanted losers; and that’s pretty much what they got.
See What I Mean by Successful?
The story goes like this: there were just two human beings on this planet at the moment the starting pistol was fired. There was a beautiful garden as well, and in that beautiful garden were these two humans: a man called Adam and woman called Eve, and there was also an apple tree (in full fruit) and a serpent.
In this ensuing myth, God makes it clear to Adam that he can do whatever he likes in this garden except “eat of the fruit of the Tree of Knowledge.” But, well, being human, and having been given ‘free will’ by divine rite, he doesn’t really see the logic in this command from above.
The serpent seems in accord with him in this, and somehow or other tempts Eve into plucking this big juicy apple and taking a bite before then offering it to Adam.
"And he did eat thereof. And the eyes of them both were opened, and they knew that they were naked; and they sewed fig leaves together, and made themselves aprons.”
They were, we are informed “ashamed.” Both on account of taking a forbidden action and of being revealed unto themselves as ‘naked’.
It is around this infamous ‘eating of the fruit’ – an action most of us would likely have taken out of simple curiosity – that millennia of Christian shame and guilt have their inception.
Fun fact: The first model from apple computer sold for $666.66
Here is where a pervasive irrational suffering concerning our natural physical condition has its origins. Where our ‘private parts’ became privatized. Where the natural pleasures of physical intimacy were turned to guilt: unless of course the so called ‘Church of God’ authorized such acts via formal marriage in the Christian place of worship.
A great plethora of ‘thou shalt not’s’ were soon pinned onto what was essentially Adam and Eve’s courageous original act of ‘civil disobedience’: the refusal to be cowed by a seemingly higher authority.
Yes, by looking deeper into this infamous story, we see that Adam and his accomplice Eve did something pretty special in this Garden of Eden. Their action, when viewed in a manner freed from the typical conditioned response, looks very much like a ‘giant step forward for mankind’. Something which Neil Armstrong was told to say while getting out of a papier mache lunar capsule constructed and filmed in Pinewood studios, London in 1969.
But the mythical Adam was not faking it, as Armstrong was on behalf of those who worship a god named ‘technology’. He and his mythical Eve conspired to start a great ball rolling down the ages which would, one day, lead to man acquiring real knowledge, real independence and real self awareness. Except, of course, that this was the last thing that the manipulators of this story wanted.
On further examining the symbolism of this tale, one can recognize that eating the apple of the Tree of Knowledge opened the eyes of this man and woman to the fact that they were adequately equipped to take their destinies into their own hands and forge their own path in life.
A path which would reveal to them that they were not just subjects to be ordered around according to the will of their master, but were blessed with a unique gift: the ability to think and act creatively and rationally. Even to reflect on their own condition and existence. And, equally contrary to the classic interpretation, it was indeed their Creator himself who wished this to be so.
For this Creator felt the pain of loneliness – and longed to have company in the great quest of life. But in order to have this company, his Adam and Eve had to pass the first great test: that of defying false authority and daring to eat from the Tree of Knowledge.
Only then could they start on the road of becoming ‘strivers with God’ and companions to the supreme; blazing that unchartered course whose direction only becomes known through embracing the insecurity of the creative process. Taking that momentous ‘leap in the dark’ which is the mother of all great quests. All great adventures.
However, the biblical text upon which we were all raised, tells us something very different. It tells us that Adam and Eve were ‘cast out’ of this Garden of Eden due to their unforgivable and sinful act of disobedience. Disobedience to God himself, no less. Which caused them to be ‘ashamed’: both of their nakedness and their disobedience.
We are told by the church, which sees itself as the spokesperson of this biblical story, that thanks to Adam and Eve, we all carry ‘the shame’ to this very day. That we must pay the price of this ‘original sin’ and be humbled by the magnitude of this human error. An error of such supposed gravity that it became known as ‘The Fall’ .
In this translation of the stories surrounding certain key events of prehistory, man ‘falls’ before he has even begun to walk – and everything that follows is tainted by this supposedly tragic error of human judgment* see the link at the end for further reading).
What Does this Nakedness Really Symbolize?
It is the moment when we realize that everything we thought was one thing actually turns out to be another. A lot of stuff drops off us in that instant. We become naked, because the old clothes don’t fit any more and the new clothes have to be woven from fresh wool.
It is the dawn of true knowledge. Knowledge that makes us aware that there exists a divine state – and also a corruption of that state. That, at any one time, both exist. And that we must choose our course in life based on this knowledge.
The Garden of Eden is representative of a state of essentially ‘passive’ potential. An as yet unignited and unmoving potential. What was needed was a spark to set the whole thing off. And that spark came when Eve, who was in subconscious communication with the serpent, reached up and plucked that ruddy round apple and took a bite out of it. It was she who broke the ‘obeisance to authority’ taboo.
How About The Serpent’s Role in this Drama?
The serpent is the anima of a rising energy. The Kundalini serpent, entwined around the spine (trunk) of the tree of knowledge. Get it?
When the serpent spoke to Eve, it was ‘the word’. “In the beginning was The Word”. However this word was not an actual word, but a vibration. An impulse. Energy directed from within. And this energy said to Eve “Do It”. And she did. Her action bears the hallmark of the first stirrings of a divine mission: the stirring into movement of that which is fecund – yet unable to act.
The female divine force it was – which enabled Adam and Eve to ‘come awake’ and find that they were no longer just innocent hippies frolicking in the cozy garden of the unconscious; unchallenged and unaware of the greater reality of existence. It is a prerogative of ‘attaining the knowledge of good and evil’ to then set off on that path of greater knowledge, no matter what!
And What About the Tree?
The tree itself is a powerful symbol of growth. For it outwardly expresses the manifestation of a condition essential for man’s own evolution: the putting down of roots and the spreading out and up of trunk and branches – as a ‘simultaneous act’. An act transmutable to we humans, almost literally: starting at the navel, where the umbilical cord has nourished us is the womb, and moving simultaneously down and up from here.
It has the great quality of annulling the ‘either’ ‘or’ option, which is the hallmark of http://www.wakeupkiwi.com/news-articles-77.shtml#Harmonymuch of our dark side formal education. Real human development, in body mind and spirit, is both a tap root into the deep and a crown reaching into the beyond. In equal measure. Always both – never just one or the other.
So the Tree of Knowledge in the Garden of Eden is indeed just that: a tree of knowledge. It is not “the forbidden tree” as is commonly taught in the Christian church.
So why did the church choose to promote this forbidden factor?
Because this ‘knowledge’ is capable of exposing the tyranny that lies at heart of human slavery. A knowledge that must not be allowed out for fear of its repercussions on the control system which was already in place, and to which the church was – and remains to this day – an accomplice. The command ‘not to eat’ of the fruit of the Tree of Knowledge did not come from God, but from some other force implacably set against all that is divine.
As the story tells us: “around its trunk a serpent is entwined.” From ancient times this serpent has been recognized as a source of special energy. Particularly, as said earlier, in the descriptions of the Kundalini practice of Tantra Yoga.
It is the rising energy which illuminates, one by one, the seven chakras of the human body by moving up the spinal column – just as the serpent is moving up the trunk of the Tree of knowledge – awakening (in this case) the succulent glory of the famous apple. A bite out of which moved Adam and Eve into a certain ‘state of awareness’.
The serpent and the tree are thus powerful symbols – and tools of human enlightenment.
And The Garden?
I have already alluded to the notion that the garden is a place – or a condition – which remains untainted. In this it is a symbol of our childhood. A time when we were not yet conscious of historical karma and therefore able to freely explore all that which becomes manifest, within and without.
It’s a place in which one remains, as in the case of the plant and animal kingdoms, in a state of instinctive response to divine energies, with as yet little or no involvement of individual will.
But that is not man and woman’s lot in life. Nor is it why our creator made manifest a state of ‘conscious awareness’, a state associated with the use of the higher mind.
In order to activate this higher mind Adam and Eve could not remain forever in their childhood garden, but needed to ‘eat from the tree of knowledge’ thus recognizing the actual challenge that lay ahead. The challenge of moving from unconscious sub-awareness to conscious full awareness. From childhood to adulthood.
A long and winding road indeed! But a road in which each step carries with it a fuller understanding of our greater role in the divine plan.
This is the ‘road of genius’ that British 18th century poet William Blake referred to when he wrote: “The straight road is a road of ‘progress’, but the crooked road is the road of genius.”
And the Divine Plan Itself?
Ah, we are not really privy to the full architecture of the divine plan. For it is a ‘state of being’ and as such cannot really be described, only attained, through the lasting application of true intent. However, I believe we can recognize that, put very simply, our Creator remembered his own coming into movement from that which lacked movement; and he wished to celebrate this, ‘his birthday’. The day movement was born.
But one cannot celebrate a birthday without the presence of other empathizing beings with whom to share the joyous occasion. So ‘in the beginning’ this creator was most fortunate in being visited by a complementary, yet opposite and deeply receptive energy.
This great coming together of opposite yet deeply complimentary energies was of huge significance – because out of it emerged a state which we call ‘equilibrium’, movement. Something which is going somewhere – with a sense of purpose. No longer just a becalmed state of fecundity.
Movement owes its origins to a female energy. In Indian mythology this feminine force is called Shakti, the female principle of God. God, whose omnipotence expresses the consummated marriage of the creative and receptive principles, is thus dual in nature.
Both male and female; female and male. And everything in this universe is an expression of this duality. Everything that comes to life, comes to life through the friction made manifest by this hugely potent and divine love affair. A love affair between the two energetic components of a primordial and primal duality.
The ever present Yin and Yang of existence.
And what we call sexuality is actuality ‘sex-duality’ – the consummated act of divine union which gave birth and made manifest what we call Life.
And perhaps most wonderful and mysterious of all is that an omnipresent and omnipotent force called Love infused and nourished this great primordial act of union which we ourselves are an expression of. One might even say that this Love preceded the one we call the Creator… but that is another story in our deep and unfathomable past!
For now it is enough to recognize that Adam and Eve, the Garden, the Tree and the Serpent, were all critical elements in kick-starting the evolution of mankind – and indeed all sentient life forms.
We can now most clearly state that ‘The Original Sin’ was precisely the opposite of a sin – it was the birth of man as a free agent in pursuing the divine intuitive message which leads us (back) to our Creator. But this time as responsible realized beings – as microcosmic Gods in our own right.
Then the Creator will greatly rejoice at the results of this divine union and will welcome us to the “Great Celebration” which cannot happen until the moment of our participation, as equals, in his Godliness. An event keenly anticipated by sowers of truth – and greatly feared by spreaders of the lie.
All the confusions surrounding sexuality and sexual relations stem from this distortion called the Original Sin. Our sexuality, far from being something to be ashamed of, is that which connects us directly with Divine.
It was – I repeat once again – due to that glorious consummation between two poles of irresistible mutual attraction – male and female – that this Universe came to life. That ‘life’ which forms the birth place of our very own cosmic essence.
Only something expressing an extreme position of alienation to this joyous truth would wish to lay such a sinister and divisive trap for mankind. A trap which, by proclaiming the celebration of our sexuality ‘a sin’, epitomizes the state of reversed truth which still remains central to the workings of our strangled Western societies.
What that force is which is so adept at twisting truth into its opposite is another story for another article.
For now, let us take pleasure in having put the divine plan right back on track. On having reconnected to the roots of our true nature and found that, far from being ashamed we are proud to go forward in full knowledge of our innate divinity.
Let us rejoice in the fact that this innocuous debacle known as The Original Sin has been properly exposed as a deeply divisive myth whose time is well and truly up.
Ten Reasons Why I Don’t Have A Religion November 22 2024 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit By far the most frequent question I’m being asked by readers is whether I have a religion.
I’m not quite sure, to be honest. Perhaps it’s because of the name of my blog. Or maybe because of the content of my writing. Or possibly because of the reddish brown Jesus-like beard that I’m sporting.
In any case, I decided to write this article so that whenever people ask me this question again, I can simply send them to this post, instead of having to give them each time a new yet nearly identical in meaning answer.
As you must have already figured out from the title, I don’t have a religion. But before I proceed to telling you my reasons for that, I’d like to clarify a few things so as to minimize the possibility of being misunderstood.
Firstly, although I don’t have a religion, that doesn’t mean I don’t like people who do have one or I think they’re bad or stupid. I’ve known quite many religious people who’re smart, kind-hearted and brilliant in all sorts of ways. So if you consider yourself religious, please don’t take my words personally - I don’t intend to degrade or offend you or anyone else who holds religion dear to their heart.
Secondly, my aim here isn’t to ridicule religions or imply that they have nothing important to offer. For the last fifteen years of my life I’ve devoured tons of books on religion, and from my readings I have discovered that all the major religions contain kernels of wisdom.
I know that religion is a very touchy topic, so again don’t take what I am about to say as a personal attack. I’m just sharing my thoughts here.
Lastly, I’m not trying to show that all religions are fundamentally the same. I’m well aware that religions are very different, even contradicting to each other, and like most people I value some religions more than others (for example, I value Buddhism over Hinduism and Hinduism over Christianity).
In this article, my critique is by and large pointed towards the dominant, fundamentalist, and mostly Western religions of the world, which, although quite dissimilar to one another, share some core ideological commonalities that, as I’ll explain, are not only extremely unreasonable but also tremendously harmful.
Hence, I feel a sense of personal responsibility to talk about them openly here, and possibly help a few people to escape from (or avoid falling into) their trap.
OK, now that I’ve made myself clear, here are the ten main reasons why I don’t have a religion:
1. Because I Consider Sex as One of the Most Sacred Things in Life.
Have you ever wondered why the vast majority of religions are against sex? We were all born out of the sexual act, and without sex we wouldn’t even exist. So how can sex be something bad? It is the source of life! Hence, in my view being anti-sex basically means being anti-life.
In some religions, such as Judaism, Christianity and Islam, sex is allowed only for reasons of procreation. In other words, you can have sex to bring new babies into existence, but you can’t have sex just for the sheer joy of it.
If you or your partner happens to be wearing a condom during sexual intercourse, you’re both deemed to be sinners, and just because of that there’s an extremely high chance that you’ll be thrown to hellfire right after the moment you take your last breath.
One of the most beautiful experiences in life - that of orgasmic union with a beloved partner - is accused of being one of the most (if not THE most) despicable things in life. As a result, so many people who live by religious dogmas are being deprived of it.
Considering sex bad, wrong or evil, dogmatic religious people tend avoid it like the plague and do whatever it takes to suppress their sexual feelings.
But suppression, as any psychologist would tell you, is a sure-fire way to perversion. No wonder they usually develop unhealthy mental and behavioral patterns that can harm (sometimes seriously) themselves and those around them.
2. Because I Don’t Subscribe to the Notion of Total “Free Will”
To the ego, that’s a tough truth to admit, but it’s a truth nonetheless.
The concept of total “free will” is just a myth that was made up a long long time ago by theologians in order to explain that God is right to reward those who follow his orders and punish the ones who don’t.
The theory of 100% “free will” justifies God punishing and rewarding people, who are free to choose as they will, regardless of biological, psychological and social pressures. This theory, however, has absolutely no scientific basis.
The truth is that, although we do make choices, those aren’t entirely free. That’s because our choices are the result of a combination of biological, psychological and environmental/societal components that make up who we are, and which are mostly out of our control. In other words, your conscious, rational choices can’t be decoupled from the unconscious processes of your mind or genetic, social and environmental factors.
If, for example, you were born and raised in a Hindu family in India, you’d most likely be a Hindu yourself, or at least you’d have acquired Hindu values. It’s not that you consciously chose to be a Hindu - on the contrary, we can say that Hinduism chose you. But a Christian would likely say that you chose to be a Hindu, and for that you deserve to burn in everlasting hellfire (unless you repent of your sin).
Or, to give you another example, think of a person who’s addicted to drugs and lives in the streets begging for food and money. If that person possesses complete free will, then he obviously has chosen this kind of lifestyle, right?
Sadly, this is what people who subscribe to the ideology of total “free will” think. “He’s a moral failure.” “He’s just too lazy to work.” Yeah right, that’s exactly the case when you ignore the traumatic experiences that led him to develop an addiction as well as the socioeconomic conditions that deprived him of a decent life.
3. Because I Don’t Believe in Heaven and Hell (At Least Not as They’re Commonly Understood).
Here in the West, there are two main reasons why people believe in religions.
The first one is the fear of hell. From the moment we’re born religions are trying hard to make us believe that if we don’t act as we’re prescribed by the scriptures, we’ll end up in serious trouble. In fact, quite possibly in eternal trouble - namely, hell.
Afraid of being thrown into hellfire, people start believing all sorts of things that religion tells them, regardless of how unreasonable those might be.
The second main reason why people believe in religions is the desire for heaven. Each religion tells us that if we live according to its dogma, we’ll be rewarded with everlasting heaven. And many of us are willing to sacrifice our lives so that we can enjoy ourselves in the afterlife.
I know, it sounds far-fetched, but the scriptures can’t be wrong, right?)
To me, that’s total nonsense. Hence, I don’t believe in the notion of heaven and hell as propounded by most religions.
I could only accept heaven and hell as symbols representing states of our consciousness. For example, when we are hateful and agitated, we experience a state of hell. On the contrary, when we’re loving and peaceful, we experience a state of heaven. But this isn’t as fancy as religious people would like heaven and hell to be.
You have two options: 1) Listen to ACDC songs and be thrown to hell, or 2) Listen to Led Zeppelin songs and be transported to heaven. Which will you choose?
4. Because I View Animals as Sentient Beings Worthy of Love and Respect
According to the Abrahamic religions (and plenty of others), God created animals for one basic reason: So that people can exploit them.
In the view of those religions, animals don’t have a soul - in other words, they are non-sentient beings. They are just pieces of meat put together, functioning like machines and being unable to experience happiness and sadness, pleasure and pain.
Not surprisingly, a lot of people who subscribe to those religions tend not to care much about animal justice and welfare - except, perhaps, when it comes to “their” pets. In general, they have no problem exploiting or even killing animals (whether directly or indirectly).
This is quite obvious, for example, by the fact that they tend to unnecessarily consume animal products - that is, products that are the result of exploitation, abuse and often murder - without feeling any regrets.
“If animals have no soul and God has created them for us to use,” many religious people think, “there’s absolutely no problem in exploiting or depriving them of their life.”
Of course, as any sensible persons knows, animals aren’t machines. Just like us (non-human animals), they have subjective experience, a rich and complex emotional world, and the desire to live and avoid pain. If you don’t believe me, just ask any zoologist and I’m pretty sure he/she will tell you the same.
If you’re consuming animal products, here’s a video I made a couple of years ago showing what animals are usually forced to go through before they end up on your plate. Additionally, you might want to read this article that refutes the most common arguments people have against giving up animal-derived food products.
Other than not eating animal products, there are various ways to minimize human-imposed animal suffering — such as not consuming wool, leather, and fur - but adopting a plant-based diet is a great (and, if you ask me, the most effective) place to start.
5. Because I consider all people, regardless of their race, sex, gender, class or religious ideology as equal.
5. Because I Consider All People Regardless of THeir Race, Sex, Gender, Class or Religious Ideology as Equal
What the vast majority of religions around the world have done is divide people according to the race, sex, gender, class and religion - among other things - they belong. Let me give you a few examples:
In India, there’s a social stratification class system based on Hindu ideology that goes back in ancient times, which divides people into a hierarchy of social classes called “castes”, where the higher classes have the “birthright” to oppress the ones below them.
In Buddhism, for centuries women were considered unable to reach the blissful heights of consciousness that men can, and because of that they weren’t allowed to become Buddhist nuns and pursue enlightenment.
Christianity looks down on homosexuals, believing that they are victims/worshippers/devotees of the devil, and hence condemns them to hell.
According to Islam, atheists are one of the worst kind of sinners and in certain Arabic countries where Islamic faith is very strong, they are even punished by death.
Again, these are only a few examples among countless others. (In case you don’t believe me, just read for yourself the scriptures of the dominant religions of the world and you’ll see exactly what I mean.)
To me, all people deserve equal opportunities in life and shouldn’t be discriminated based on superficial differences such as the ones I just mentioned.
Hence, if we want to see a world where people are allowed the freedom to be who they are and do what they want (provided, of course, that they don’t harm others), then we need to do away with obsolete religious values that breed oppression and inequality.
6. Because I Don’t Want to Accept “Truths” There’s No Viable Evidence For.
In my life I’ve heard countless reasons why people should adopt religion, but I’ve not yet found any reason that’s convincing. On the contrary, I’ve found them to be senseless and, in most cases, appalling.
Dogmatic religions require people to accept and believe in all sorts of “truths”, no matter how illogical, unscientific or plain silly they are. For example, some religious people believe that God is floating somewhere in space and can see and know all that’s going on in every single person’s life.
They also believe that a virgin woman was impregnated by a ghost (after God told him/it so) and that she later on gave birth to the very son of God. They even believe that God wants male children to have a piece of flesh chopped off from their penis (i.e. the foreskin) so they can prove their love to him.
I could go on forever giving you similar examples, but you get the idea.
Just because religions claim something to be true or right, and that something has been accepted by people for hundreds or even thousands of years, doesn’t make it true or right.
And, considering that nearly every religion claims to be the only right one, which religion (of the thousands that exist in this day and age) should one follow? I don’t know about you, but I choose not to follow any religion whatsoever.
7. Because I Prefer to Stay Open-Minded (But Not So Much That My Brain Falls Out)
People who fervently believe in religions can’t think outside the box of their religious ideology. They become attached to a particular belief system, which prevents them from changing their mind when presented with information that contradicts their religious beliefs.
In other words, their mind is locked in an ideological cage from which they won’t escape as long as they don’t doubt and thoroughly examine their beliefs.
I want to be a freethinker and not a prisoner to any belief system, so I choose not to identify myself with any religious ideology. As I mentioned in the introduction of this article, I do enjoy reading religious scriptures (including the Bible, the Dhammapada and the Bhagavad Gita) and have found immense wisdom in many of them that has helped me to live a more meaningful and fulfilling life.
At the same time, however, I’ve also found in them tons of bullshit information and utterly abhorrent advice which I totally reject and make sure not to apply in my life.
In short, I keep an open mind to receive new information but I make sure to examine it thoroughly in order to reach my own conclusions (instead of accepting it on belief alone (as religious people tend to do).
To me, growth and wisdom are derived from our personal experiences and understanding, and not from blindly following scriptures or obeying authority figures. Therefore, I don’t like to have others tell me how I should live, just like I don’t like to tell others how they should live.
9. Because I Don’t Want to Experience Chronic Shame
From a very early age, most religions try to brainwash us into believing that we’re not good enough as we are and that we should strive to be very different.
Christianity, for example, teaches us that we are sinners by birth, and that should die to our sinful selves if we wish to be accepted by God and go to heaven in the afterlife. And this, of course, can be accomplished only if we completely surrender to the will of God and fully obey the dogmas found in the Bible.
According to Christianity, it’s a sin to trust our heart, mind, and gut instinct. Not surprisingly, we’ve been disconnected from our emotional world and haven’t developed the capacity to think critically. We blindly follow scriptures, but we’ve lost touch with our inner voice.
But the problem gets even worse: When we think or feel something other than what God supposedly wants us to, we feel bad about ourselves. We feel that we’ve gone against God and that he’ll punish us for our sins. We feel ashamed and unworthy of love, respect and compassion. We even feel hatred toward ourselves.
So why I would I want to feel this way about myself? Although I know very well that I am far from perfect, and that there’s plenty of space within me for self-improvement, I also know that the key to finding inner peace and contentment is to fully accept myself, regardless of my flaws or imperfections.
10. Because I See Humanity as One Family, And Want to Live at Peace With My Brothers and Sisters
It is often claimed that religion brings people together by preaching peace and love. But does it really? In my experience, the opposite is the case, at least when it comes to the dominant religions of the world.
Here’s why: Most religions distinguish people between good and evil. According to each of those religions, the good people are always those who have are faithful to them, whereas the evil ones are those who don’t.
But when you see other people as evil (and that merely because of the religion they adhere to), how can you love and live at peace of them? You can’t. Rather, you want to protect yourself from them.
And many times, the best way to protect yourself appears to be fighting against them. That’s exactly why people of different religious groups have been constantly fighting against each other for thousands upon thousands of years.
I want to see people living in peace. For that to happen, however, we need to stop dehumanizing our fellow humans and start seeing our species as a single family that shares the same home (i.e., the Earth). In other words, we need to stop fighting and start loving each other.
Religions, as we know them, are obsolete and sooner or later will (hopefully) disappear. Then, a new “religion” will emerge -- that of genuine love, trust, respect, care and compassion.
Saving America [And The World] From The Kingmakers Cabal November 21 2024 | From: ClassicCapital / Various
When The Fruits of Graft – Great Depressions Then and Now was published in 2011, Barack Obama occupied the White House and Hillary Clinton was his nominated and confirmed Secretary of State.
Hope was alive for many Americans, but they and others were betrayed by intentionally hurtful public policies and by graft and corruption only now becoming known to the public.
Sad to say, Barack Obama was not the first occupant of the White House to betray the trust of his electorate.
In The Fruits of Graft, Americans and others for the first time could read clearly stated historical facts proving that the Great Depression was imposed on America and the world by deliberate acts of U.S. government officials, specifically including Presidents Herbert Hoover and Franklin D. Roosevelt, in collusion with a powerful global cabal of kingmakers.
Kingmakers’ Fun and Profit
The Fruits of Graft further details:
The same cabal’s ownership of the “too big to fail” Wall Street banks, which gives the cabal control of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and the Fed itself;
How the Securities & Exchange Commission was designed in 1934 to shield these and other large financial institutions from prosecution for financial fraud;
How the Fed sets overnight interest rates so Wall Street banks can follow suit without violating antitrust laws;
How the Fed set up the Tech Crash of 2000-2002 by secretly and intentionally creating monetary deflation during 1997-2002;
How Goldman Sachs allowed its hedge fund clients to sell shares “naked short” throughout the Tech Crash and was fined only $7 million by the SEC; and how the “financial terrorism” of 2008 resulted not from “too many bad mortgages” but from fraudulent conspiracies to destroy two big Wall Street banks (Bear Stearns and Lehman Brothers) plus multiple other major financial institutions (including Washington Mutual, IndyMac, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac) by using naked short selling of corporate shares, plus financial derivatives and a rigged market index to destroy market prices of mortgage-backed securities for the immense profit of the remaining financial operatives of the kingmakers cabal. For example, the annual report for J. P. Morgan Chase announced 2008 was the giant bank's best year ever.
At its conclusion, The Fruits of Graft (p. 538) relates the “unmistakable fact” that this kingmakers cabal and their collaborators are waging war against all other Americans.
Related questions still at issue in 2011 were whether Americans under attack would ever defend themselves effectively and, if so, who would prevail.
Almost too good to be true, only eight years later, we are able to state an unequivocal “yes” on the first of these questions, and indications to date are quite positive on the second.
In 2015, Donald Trump stepped forward to lead the counter-offensive against the kingmakers cabal. Wisely, he chose first to gain use of America’s constitutional structure of laws by seeking and winning election as U. S. president.
One year later, Trump won the presidency despite wholesale opposition by cabal-controlled propaganda media and multiple attempts of voter fraud on behalf of his opponent, some of which were successful in shifting electoral votes.
This is the historical context within which the political turmoil enveloping the Trump presidency must be examined and understood.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
Acting principally without public fanfare, President Trump has mounted a comprehensive counterassault against the kingmakers cabal and its operatives worldwide.
By strategic and tactical necessity, specific operations and targets are kept secret, except when disclosure is helpful or unavoidable.
A major tool of the counter-assault is the Executive Order effective December 21, 2017, declaring a national emergency due to human trafficking and related corruption.
The same EO also freezes all assets of persons named as engaging in prohibited conduct, and makes those frozen assets subject to seizure upon proof of the government’s case.
Thousands of sealed federal criminal indictments have been filed, with only relatively few being unsealed, so far. More unsealed indictments are likely in 2020 as additional evidence is gathered by questioning victims and the accused.
Another major prong of the counter-offensive deals with taking out major operatives of the cabal by proving crimes of graft, corruption, treason or other such violations, whether by high public officials or by private individuals during past administrations or the current one.
Expect more such indictments to become public in 2020, and more retirements announced by elected federal officials, as occurred in 2018.
The On-Going Coup Attempt
Democrats in the House of Representatives make mockery of Bill of Rights protections guaranteed to all persons by denying these rights to President Trump.
Impeachment proceedings already commenced charge the elected president with “high crimes and misdemeanors” without permitting the president to know the names of his accuser(s), to cross-examine him, her or them, or to present his own witnesses to disprove charges made against him.
This is conscious, deliberate, wholesale violation of constitutional principles in the most serious possible context: removal of the people’s duly elected president from office.
The U. S. House of Representatives, though intended and designed to be the American people’s most closely connected protector, as controlled by Democrats and Speaker Nancy Pelosi has been co-opted entirely by the kingmakers cabal’s culture of graft, corruption, deception and treason.
Yes, this is extreme and unprecedented in American history. But it is entirely consistent (though not in any way laudable or permissible) with the cabal’s desperate need to unseat President Trump.
The reason: POTUS is presently leading the first serious campaign to defeat and destroy the cabal’s centuries-long rule over most of the world.
Only Victory is Acceptable
With this historic campaign well underway, every necessary effort and measure must be expended to assure that constitutional government and human rights prevail.
You should be confident this must be done, is being done and will be done, by civilian officials, by military personnel and by other Americans who cherish human rights and personal dignity.
On the cabal’s side of the conflict, everything is on the line in this “uprising” by the American patriot government.
The powerful webs of influence and control they have created in every region and nation; their central banks which suck the value produced by human society and pour it into their vaults; their stores of wealth gained in war profiteering, narcotics and human trafficking – all are at risk of seizure and confiscation.
And they are personally at risk of imprisonment, if not execution.
Conclusion
America and its allied friends each must rid its own nation and the world of the cabal.
In that process, the Federal Reserve [international Rothschild Reserve Banking System] will be ended and replaced by a sound money system capable of serving national and international commerce. Yes, major challenges must be met and overcome, and soon.
These laws led to the forced sterilization of over 60,000 American citizens in states like California and thousands of rejected marriage licenses.
The Eugenics programs in the US were only a beta test though, as the Rockefellers then transferred their programs over to Germany under Hitler and the Third Reich in the 1930's, where a true widespread eugenics-based population control program was introduced.
The targets of population reduction were based on ethnic background, but also “mental intelligence” and economic status.
The Cold Springs Harbor Laboratory still exists today and presents itself as a kind of philanthropic endeavor to help humanity.
Public knowledge of the globalists and their population control agenda was carefully swept under the rug in the US after the exposure of Nazi programs post-WWII.
The word “eugenics” became a very ugly one and all the effort the elites put into promoting it as a legitimate science was ruined.
However, they were not going to give up on their precious ideology.
In the late 1960's into the 1970's there was a resurgence of population control rhetoric coming out of globalist circles. Under the supervision of the UN and some related scientific groups, the Club Of Rome was formed.
This effort was directly linked to another agenda – the institution of a global government that could handle and enforce population controls on a wide scale.
The elites had found a new scientific front for their eugenics obsession: Climate science. In the early 1990's the Club Of Rome published a book called 'The First Global Revolution'. In it they state:
"In searching for a common enemy against whom we can unite, we came up with the idea that pollution, the threat of global warming, water shortages, famine and the like, would fit the bill. In their totality and their interactions these phenomena do constitute a common threat which must be confronted by everyone together.
But in designating these dangers as the enemy, we fall into the trap, which we have already warned readers about, namely mistaking symptoms for causes.
All these dangers are caused by human intervention in natural processes. and it is only through changed attitudes and behaviour that they can be overcome.
The quote is relatively clear; a common enemy must be conjured in order to trick humanity into uniting under a single banner, and the elites see environmental catastrophe, caused by mankind itself, as the best possible motivator.
It also outlines the perfect rationale for population control – Mankind is the enemy, therefore, mankind as a species must be kept under strict supervision and his proliferation must be restricted.
The Club of Rome and the UN agenda have always been intimately connected. In the 1990's at the same time 'The First Global Revolution' was being published, UN assistant secretary general Robert Muller was publishing his manifesto which is now collected on a website called 'Good Morning World'.
Muller argues that global governance must be achieved using the idea of “protecting the Earth” and environmentalism as the key components.
Through fear of environmental Apocalypse, the public could be convinced to accept global government as a necessary nanny state to keep society from destroying itself.
Does this sound familiar?
In a paper titled 'Proper Earth Government: A Framework And Ways To Create It' Robert Muller outlines how climate change could be used to convince the masses of the need for global government. Integral to his plan were the introduction of a new “global religion”, and population controls.
It should come as no surprise that the UN established the Intergovernmental Panel On Climate Change (IPCC) and that this panel and it's offshoots are now at the forefront of the argument for population reduction.
As we close in on the end date for the UN's Agenda 2030, which calls for a radical shift of human production from oil and other large scale energy sources into small scale “renewable energies”, there is only 10 years left for the globalists to achieve their goals if they hope to meet their announced deadline.
This would require a violent change in human society and most of all industrialized nations.
The human population would have to be reduced dramatically in order to survive on the meager energy output of renewables alone. A disaster of epic proportions would have to take place soon so that the globalists could then spend the next decade using the resulting fear to convince the surviving population that global governance is needed.
Without aggressive crisis and change most people would never go along with the UN's agenda, out of simple desire for self preservation.
Even many leftists, once exposed to the true nature of carbon controls and population reduction, might have second thoughts when they realize they could be affected.
The key to understanding people who cheer for population control or population reduction is that these people always assume that THEY will be the survivors and inheritors of the Earth after the culling. They never assume that they will be the one's put on the chopping block.
In 2019, the population agenda is being ramped into high gear and the public is being carefully conditioned over time to accept the idea that man-made climate change is real and population is the source of the problem.
Recently, a group of scientists partially funded by something called the “Worthy Garden Club” claimed 11,000 signatures on a statement for the need for population reduction in the name of saving the Earth from global warming.
The statement cites all the same long debunked IPCC and UN climate change propaganda as the reasons why the Earth is on the verge of annihilation.
The Worthy Garden Club is a strangely sterile group and there doesn't seem to be any list of their patrons and who funds them. However, the mainstream media was quick to pick up on the statement from the “11,000 scientists” and tie it to statements made by the UN's IPCC.
Population control has also been brought up consistently as an issue in the 2020 Presidential Election race. Bernie Sanders argued for birth control measures in poor countries.
Elizabeth Warren promoted abortion by saying it was as safe as “getting your tonsils removed”. She has consistently promoted the carbon control agenda of the UN and was, interestingly, a member of the University Of Texas Population research Center in the 1980s.
And, Green New Deal politicians are throwing their support behind the statements from the Worthy Garden Club on population reduction.
This is the first time I have seen the argument for population reduction used so blatantly and widespread in the mainstream media, and it suggests to me that a trend is forming.
For years I have warned my readers that they will know when the globalists are about to pull the plug on the current system when they start talking about their criminality openly.
When they admit to their agenda in a free way, this means they are close to a global reset and do not care anymore who knows about it. The openness of the plan to cut world population is becoming apparent.
Strangely, there has been little mention of the fact that the world population, in the west most of all, is actually in decline. Far from exploding beyond the Earth's capacity, people are barely having enough children to keep the current population stable.
It would appear that the globalist agenda is already in motion. Through engineered economic disintegration, the population is being slowly reduced. However, this slow decline may not be enough to satisfy the globalists.
How many people would the globalists like to kill off to achieve their utopian aspirations? Well, globalist Ted Turner in a moment of honesty said when confronted by We Are Change that the population should be reduced to 2 billion down from 7 billion.
The primary issue here beyond the moral horror show of eugenics is, who gets cut? And furthermore, who gets to decide who gets cut? Who gets to decide if you can have children or not?
Who gets to decide if you are allowed to access resources to produce and make a living or not? Who gets to decide if the global economy will sustain the population or not? Who pulls the trigger on the culling of the population?
As history has shown us, it is always the elites that end up in the position of deciding the fates of millions or billions.
From the Rockefeller Foundation sterilization programs in the US in the early 1900's to the UN today, the globalists, a veritable death cult, are desperate to conjure a rationalization as to why they should be the ones to allow or deny human life based on lies like man-made climate change.
They don't believe in the climate change threat, THEY were the people that fabricated it. So, what is the core reason behind all of this?
A reduced population completely dependent on limited energy sources might be easier to dominate.
But I have another theory – they are psychopaths looking for a socially justifiable way to kill as many people as possible. Why? because they enjoy it.
When a friend makes a mistake, most people would not immediately call that person a name or tell them that they are useless, but rather would offer support and ideas to help avoid such mistakes in the future.
Yet, when it comes to one’s own mistakes, it’s easier to be an enemy, verbally and mentally flagellating oneself to exhaustion, than it is to become a good friend to yourself.
The person we may find it hardest to be kind and sympathetic to is, surprisingly, ourselves. Yet being a friend to ourselves provides the only viable basis for living an emotionally fulfilled life.
Towards An “Oppressive Digital New World Order”: UN “World For The Future” Conference - Borderless “Enslavement Package”, Digital Control Over 8 Billion People & Globalists Are Taking The Mask Off And That's A Bad Sign... November 18 2024 | From: GlobalResearch / ZeroHedge / Various
Recently the United Nations presented 'The World of The Future'. It is a fully digitized world. For the UN AG meeting, a “package” of global digitization was prepared by the governments of Germany and Namibia. Of course, with the “help” of Big Tech and Big Finance.
This digital enslavement package will be adopted under almost complete exclusion of the public, of people like you and me.
Most parliaments and governments worldwide have apparently already agreed to it, so that the presentation and the so-called discussion during the UN Annual Conference is a sheer fig leaf, a mere farce.
This is the new “rules-based” way of forcing an entire population into a compact of a digital straightjacket, escaping from which is almost impossible.
People nowhere have been consulted or even informed. Governments worldwide were forced by the unnamed powers-that-be to accept a complete digitization of our future – what the WEF calls the 4th Industrial Revolution.
People, it is here!
No waiting for the end of the UN Agenda 2030. The goals have conveniently been advanced. You – and me – will be confronted with cash elimination, already started in many European countries and to some extent in the US; and even in some “developing countries” like India, without people’s consent.
All will be controlled, our money-spending, health data, food and eating habits, travels, TV viewer preferences, radio favorites, friends with whom we regularly meet and communicate, as well as others from the opposition camp; shopping / spending habits – and so on – all will be controlled digitally by the IT-digital corporate control system.
The means to do so is the benign looking QR code which has been gradually and gently introduced over the last two decades or so – and today has become a common appearance in our daily life. In many cases you may not be able to read a restaurant menu without downloading it on your personal QR code.
Who do you guess will control all personal QR codes?
Exactly, you guessed right.
QR stands for Quick Response. It is a barcode on steroids. While the barcode holds information horizontally, the QR code does so both horizontally and vertically. The two-dimensional matrix barcode was invented in 1994, by the Japanese company Denso Wave, originally meant for labelling automobile parts.
Click on the image above to view a larger verion in a new window
Western control freaks quickly discovered its potential and captured it for their evil “program for the future of mankind”, left to the corporate IT world (with a combined worth of about 3 to 4 trillion dollars) for administering and imposing it on humanity.
An individual QR code has basically unlimited storage capacity. So, it may know you better than you know yourself.
The debate or “negotiations” for this digital compact, officially took place on 20 and 21 September behind closed doors, during the UNGA, but the context had been discussed and agreed upon in several clandestine iterations, also called Revisions 2 and 3, which are published on the UN website for “The Summit of the Future”. See this.
What Happens When Central Banks Have Absolute Control Over Your Money?
How Will Central Banks Use CBDCs to Monitor Your Spending?
How Will CBDCs Affect New Zealanders?
How Will CBDCs Affect Your Financial and Personal Freedom?
Is the Integration of CBDCs the End of Financial Privacy?
All these questions and more answered in the full series…
What Is Central Bank Digital Currency?
On the surface, it might sound harmless, after all, we already have a “Central Bank”, and the currency we trade in today is largely digital as well, so what’s the big deal? That’s the way things are now, right?.
WRONG!
It’s a deliberate misnomer intended to mislead. CDBCs are an entirely different beast.
In reality CBDCs are a NEW worldwide digital currency issued through the reserve banking system and tracked in a unified central ledger, independent of private local banks.
Effectively giving the Central Bank control over every single transaction that every person makes, in any country that has accepted the system, paving the way for complete financial surveillance.
Firstly, because all transactions have the same endpoint, they are easily controlled by a handful of very powerful people. People who don’t have your best interests at heart.
Secondly, because it's programmable by design, the Central Bank will be able to control how much money you can have and what you’re allowed to spend it on. There will be zero financial privacy!
In other words, if you’re a good little boy or girl and you obey their rules, you could be rewarded! Just like we see in China today!
But if not.. If you say the wrong thing, post an unfavourable comment online, criticise the government out loud, buy something with too many associated carbon credits, or use too much of a resource they deem as “scarce”, you could be cut off, punished.
Your funds and access to basic necessities will be snatched away. Again, just like we see in China today.
But it'll be worse than China because China is just one country.
CBDCs will affect all countries that buy into the system. No escaping it!
Everyone Will Be Affected By It
If it is allowed to gain public acceptance in New Zealand, it won’t matter whether you’re a millionaire or someone struggling to make ends meet, we’ll all be in the same boat.
Your money, all of it, whatever you have, will be absorbed into the ecosystem and transferred into their control.
You won’t have a choice, none of us will.
That’s why we have to reject it now en masse before it can have a chance to get traction.
Whether you’re wealthy today or not, it won’t matter, this will affect us all.
Stuffing cash in a mattress, stocking up on gold bars, crypto, or storing up hordes of wealth in a property portfolio won’t make any difference, once CBDCs are here, it’s game over.
The best hope is get up to speed, know your options, and learn how fight it now before its to late.
Unfortunately, hardly anyone knows this page and even fewer read it. If people were better and more informed or would care to inform themselves, we might not stand before the digital abyss, as we do today.
It is not clear what corporate / IT, and civil society representation was part of these secretive “negotiations”.
But for sure the World Economic Forum (WEF) and the Club of Rome, both headquartered in “paradise” Switzerland (it cannot be repeated often enough how “neutral” Switzerland hosts the bulk of these evil organizations, whose purpose is to reduce and control humanity), were party to the original drafting and the subsequent revisions.
The digital compact has no space for human choices. There is no way a “voluntary option” is available. In other words, an individual cannot say, “Thanks, but no thanks, I prefer to opt out of this digital world”. People are forced into this system, come hell or high water. That is the plan.
Governments’ choice to participate was equally blocked, as they were told it is a MUST, or else. We know what “or else” means.
There are no exceptions allowed in “full digitization” because they would throw global control, or Globalist Control, out of the window, or to the wolves, so to speak.
Exceptions would be a definitive hindrance for the impending One World Order.
The compact clearly explains the enormous advantages offered for the human wellbeing by digital technologies. Therefore, it is imperative that no gaps remain between people and countries, that ALL navigate on the same wavelength – namely full-digitally.
The goal of overall human wellbeing, as explained in the compact – no wars, no conflicts, no pollution, no noise, diseases under control, and more - justifies the rapid move towards full or ALL digitization.
Investigative journalist, author and 24-year Russian military counterintelligence veteran, Daniel Estulin joins Alex Jones to to discuss the collapse of the current world order and how, for the first time in 1,000 years, we are flying completely blind and we have no economic model. The model was to kill us but they failed.
"I am hopeful… In order to get everybody to do what they need do get in order that we do get out of this - we have to believe that it's more likely to get out of it than it probably is.
So, I'm comfortable with that, if other people are comfortable with that then the answer - yes it’s a pretty dire moment then we're going to need some luck, but what's the way to approach it?
Often the way to approach things – is in some conflict with how we understand them. I don't believe in fate, I don't think it's a real thing, but I know that it's very often - it's extremely useful to behave if you do believe in fate. So I do."
Without directly saying so, this is the first step to a One World Order, and a One World Government. The latter executed by the UN, with a policy framework established by the WEF, and a GESTAPO-like tyranny imposed by WHO.
The UN has been fully co-opted into this humanity destroying enterprise which in hindsight can be traced back over the last 20-some years, while humanity was lulled into a deep slumber.
It was finally made official, with a Cooperation Agreement between the UN and the WEF, signed in June 2019. Illegal as such, as the UN may not enter into agreements with NGOs, but de facto irrelevant in a rules-based-ordered world.
Besides, the UN’s resources and budget, currently depending mostly on contributions from member countries, could be easily replaced by the ruling paymasters, Big Tech and Big Finance, who eventually will call the shots. Deservedly in today’s world, where “who pays decides” mandates.
Future UN Annual Meetings could be considered as pro-forma shareholders meetings, or in WEF terms “stakeholder’s meetings”, without in fact having any power to change direction, or chart a different, more human course.
Digital Management is in control, with voiceless (trans)humanity following almost blindly. Those who are not blind and may resist can easily be digitally removed. Nobody cares. Mr. “digital” cannot be accused of murder. The rules-based order has no concept of killing; it is simply a digital disappearance.
In the ranks of the closer UN advisory services, we are to be expected finding the Big Tech IT corporations. They will decide in terms of digital directions, as they are given the playscript by so far unnamed Big Finance.
Do we, humanity, have a choice, an alternative, a way to get out of this digital stranglehold?
We have, but only when we realize what is being planned, when we recognize the implications, and when we act not as individuals but when we are ready for shedding “system-imposed” individualism and adopt “Together we Can”.
Globalists Are Taking The Mask Off And That's A Bad Sign...
Remember the last time the globalists took the mask off?
It wasn’t that long ago, but some people might have already forgotten how the western world almost lost all individual freedom under the guise of an over-hyped health emergency. When globalists are honest about what they truly want, it usually coincides with an engineered calamity.
In the two years since the failure of the covid pandemic narrative I have argued that globalist organizations are trying to regroup under a new plan.
The evidence suggests that these people suffered a shocking revelation after their attempt to implement perpetual medical tyranny. They’ve realized they don’t have as much control over the flow of information and public discourse as they originally assumed.
Even with full-spectrum censorship using algorithms to bury contrary data, even with the full force of the government partnering with social media to silence dissent, even with the threat of economic exile for anyone refusing to take a steady series of mRNA jabs, they still failed.
The truth about covid’s minimal Infection Fatality Rate (IFR) still spread, along with data proving the uselessness of the mandates and lockdowns. There was nothing they could do about it.
Their golden ticket to total control was pushing the vaccine passport concept; the alternative media crushed that agenda like a pestilent cockroach.
If the passport had been successful we would not be having this conversation now. Everyone would be in fear of having their passport rescinded. Everyone would be afraid to lose their economic access for saying the wrong thing.
Everyone would be afraid of being forced into covid camps (which were indeed a real agenda). Or, we would be in the middle of a bloody civil war.
The events of 2020 were meant to initiate the ultimate coup against humanity. The globalists admitted to their plans over and over again. Klaus Schwab and the World Economic Forum proudly declared covid the catalyst for the “Great Reset” and the “Fourth Industrial Revolution.”
They thought they had won without firing a shot, but it’s not that easy. Far more people are awake and aware of their motives than they realized, and, at least in America, over 50 million of those people are armed.
The lockdowns are now gone, almost no one took the vax boosters, far fewer people took the vaccine than the CDC claims, and the vax passports were defeated.
This victory was made possible due to the efforts of alternative media platforms circumventing Big Tech censorship. It’s that simple.
This is why the next event will probably be far worse in scale and consequence, and the globalists are already attempting to rectify their previous mistake of underestimating citizen journalism.
They will try to silence us if they can and they are openly admitting to it in recent conferences and mainstream articles. The mask is coming off once more and this suggests to me that something very bad is about to happen.
As I noted in 2023 in my article ‘From Covid To Climate Change: Vehicles For Global Authoritarianism’, the globalists seem to have shifted their more tyrannical efforts away from the pandemic and into the climate discourse. If you really want to know what they are up to these days, you have to watch the climate conferences.
At the end of September there was a host of climate change summits including one held by the WEF in New York called the Sustainable Development Impact Meeting.
It was held by the WEF in tandem with the United Nations General Assembly. Not surprisingly, discussion often veered away from climate into “threats to democracy” as well as bitter complaints about the “spread of disinformation.”
John Kerry, former Democratic presidential candidate, former Climate Czar under Joe Biden and a longtime participant in the WEF, said the quiet part out loud at the summit. He argued that the 1st Amendment was a “roadblock” to proper governance and was preventing the elites from controlling public consensus.
First of all, consensus is highly overrated and often poisonous. The very basis of science is that it is always up for debate according to the evidence. Once you have forced a “consensus” you have abandoned all due diligence under the scientific method.
This was made obvious during covid, where the “consensus” was exposed as utterly fabricated and most of the claims made by governments and puppet “medical experts” have been proven false.
Keep in mind, these were the same people that tried to ban YOU from going to parks and waterboarding at the beach in the name of “flattening the curve.”
I mean, how retarded do you have to be to believe that outdoor activities will lead to viral transmission? That’s not science, that’s hysteria promoted by people claiming to represent science. The same thing goes for the mask mandates, social distancing, the lockdowns, etc. Not one measure they enforced was legitimate.
If we are talking about the concept of man-made climate change, the claim of consensus in science is a lie. The data suggests there is simply no such thing as man-made climate change.
There is no evidence of causation between carbon emissions and global warming. No evidence that global warming causes extreme whether. No evidence that our current warming cycle is significant or unique compared to any other warming cycle in history.
In fact, the Washington Post recently and accidentally proved the alternative media’s point on climate change when they tried to map the temperature history of the Earth over 450 million years, only to discover what I have been saying for the longest time – Today’s temps are far lower than they have been through most of the Earth’s history.
But the more important issue here is John Kerry’s assertion that governance requires public information control.Kerry’s fundamental disconnect is his notion that it’s the job of the elites and the government to moderate information for the greater good. No one gave them permission to do this. The government does not exist to create consensus.
The people are in charge, John. As a politician you are just a public servant, nothing more. Your opinions on free speech don’t matter.
Some of the most egregious disinformation is often released to the public by the government and their approved media sources in the name of “saving democracy.” They lie constantly.
Traditional authority derives its power from long-standing customs and traditions, while charismatic authority is based on the exceptional personal qualities or charisma of a leader.
John Kerry is just angry because now the public has the means to expose him and his cohorts. If a “democracy” requires censorship in order to survive, then it’s not worth saving.
Finally and hypocritically, Kerry suggests that democracy is “too slow” in implementing the changes to society that he views as necessary to create consensus and “unity.”
If the 1st Amendment is a “roadblack” to more effective information control and governance, then he and his slimy brethren must intend to remove it. In other words, he believes tyranny would work better because it’s much faster that trying to manipulate the public with propaganda.
He doesn’t explicitly say this, but that’s exactly what he’s inferring.
Besides some of the speeches made by Klaus Schwab at the height of the pandemic, Kerry’s statements might be the most open declaration of globalist authoritarian intent I have ever heard. He’s pulling the mask off and this has me concerned.
His arguments fall in line with a number of articles published in the past couple months from establishment media platforms.
They also wrote an article highlighting the potential positives of despotic governments in countries like Brazil threatening to shut down public access to Elon Musk’s X (Twitter) in order to force the site to censor citizen accounts. These people are on a war path to convince the public that free speech is a threat.
When political elitists and their lackey’s start attacking free speech it’s usually in preparation for a major crisis that they hope to use as a vehicle to eliminate public freedoms.
Free speech is the most important liberty because it enables the populace to discern through debate what the truth is and what to do about it.
The globalists thought they had a lock on information during covid and they were wrong. They won’t make the same mistake again.
Whatever the next crisis ends up being, they will definitely seek to silence the alternative media and any rebellious social media platforms before they move forward.
Ten Self-Evident Truths That We The People Have Spontaneously Come To Realize - That Will End All Government As We Know It November 17 2024 | From: NaturalNews / Various We have a lot to thank Trump for, but among the most important is the idea that Trump has caused the corrupt, fraudulent, lying specter of “Big Government” to fully reveal itself for what it truly is.
Does anyone believe the Democrats are pursuing legitimate “impeachment” based on legitimate “high crimes?” Not a chance.
[These efforts are to drain The [Cabal] Swamp everywhere - This is not just about America.]
Does any rational person think that high-level lawmakers and bureaucrats aren’t on the take, receiving kickbacks from billions in foreign aid?
It’s quite stunning, actually, how the mass awakening has accelerated over the last three years as Trump has succeeded as President.
In their desperate attempt to destroy Trump, the deep state swamp creatures and corrupt, lawless Democrats have been forced to reveal the truth about their corruption, fraud and malicious abuse of power.
Because of all this, there are many self-evident truths that have now become obvious to the American people.
Read from the point of view of the People talking to the political swamp in Washington D.C. [Read: Every Western "Government" and then some...] :
1.
We don’t believe you.
2.
You are all dishonest crooks and horrible people who should never be trusted again.
3.
The intelligence community is the enemy of the people and must be dismantled if any American is to ever be truly free.
4.
We are not going to voluntarily hand over our guns. You may come try to take them by force, but we will shoot you if you try.
5.
We are withdrawing our consent. You are now a rogue enemy government that we finally recognize as the ENEMY. 6.
We are never going to vote for establishment candidates ever again.
7.
We will not live as slaves, suffering under your tyranny. We would rather die as Americans, defending our liberty and our republic.
8.
If we ever get the chance, we will arrest all of you and throw you in prison for as long as you live.
9.
We will no longer cooperate with your sham court system, your corrupt FBI and your lawless federal regulators. They are all fraudulent, criminal cartels that have no legitimate authority. You have lost the consent of “the governed.”
10.
Your fiat currency financial system and debt Ponzi scheme is a criminal fraud that steals money from the working class. We will no longer hold your dollars and will seek alternatives at every opportunity.
I’m sure you can think of dozens more, but that short list sums up the highlights.
The bottom line should be crystal clear: The United States federal government is run by illegitimate, corrupt, fraudulent swamp creatures and the very future of freedom for America depends on completely dismantling the very concept of a “government” that rules over the people.
The time has come to end the era of big government. We the People no longer need “representatives” in Washington.
We don’t need a United States Senate, packed with treasonous crooks (like McCain or Reid) and foreign aid skimming hucksters.
We don’t need the FDA or the CDC, both of which are nothing but fake science marketing departments for Big Pharma. We don’t need the Federal Reserve, a fiat currency counterfeiting operation that steals from all working Americans.
And we don’t need the intelligence community, which has morphed into a domestic spying secret police operation that routinely abuses its power to surveil and threaten innocent Americans.
We don’t need government-run health care, government-run food stamps or government-run anything, other than defending the shores, setting standards and using the limited powers of small government to protect the rights of individuals against dangerous corporations such as banks and tech giants.
That’s the proper role of government: To protect liberty, not to rule over the people.
Do not surrender an inch to this corrupt, lawless system run by traitors and tyrants.
Every Democrat in Washington D.C., without exception, is guilty of treason and should be arrested, charged and treated accordingly. And half the Republicans are guilty of the same crime, by the way.
The entire system is corrupt beyond repair. The deep state swamp cannot investigate itself, yet all the powers of investigation have been concentrated in the hands of the very people who are the most dangerous, corrupt criminals of all.
It’s time to revoke our consent from this criminal government and dismantle it once and for all.
Trump is attempting to do exactly that, but even he is spending America into oblivion with record debt spending. Perhaps he realizes a financial implosion is the only sure way to bring down the whole corrupt system.
There will never be another Trump. Once Trump’s tenure is up, We the People must continue his work of exposing, dismantling and rejecting the criminals, crooks and fraudsters in Washington D.C.
The very existence of big government is irreconcilable with personal liberty and prosperity. We can either be free and prosperous, or we can be enslaved and forced into destitution under the rule of big government tyranny.
Watch Brighteon.com to daily videos on liberty and freedom, posted by thousands of different users. Or join Brighteon and post your own.
Is Social Media The New Tobacco? November 16 2024 | From: Zerohedge / Various
If we set out to design a highly addictive platform that optimized the most toxic, destructive aspects of human nature, we'd eventually come up with social media.
Social problems arise when initially harmless addictions explode in popularity, and economic problems arise when the long-term costs of the addictions start adding up.
Political problems arise when the addictions are so immensely profitable that the companies skimming the profits can buy political influence to protect their toxic products from scrutiny and regulation.
That describes both the tobacco industry before its political protection was stripped away and social media today, as the social media giants hasten to buy political influence to protect their immensely profitable monopolies from scrutiny and regulation.
It's difficult to measure the full costs of addictions because our system focuses on price discovery at the point of purchase, meaning that absent any regulatory measuring of long-term consequences, the cost of a pack of cigarettes is based not on the long-term costs but solely on the cost of producing and packaging the tobacco into cigarettes, and the enterprise side: marketing, overhead and profit.
(I address the consequences of what we don't measure in my latest book, Will You Be Richer or Poorer?)
To take tobacco as an example, the full costs of smoking two packs of cigarettes a day for 20 years is not limited to the cost of the cigarettes: 365 days/year X 20 years X 2 packs (14,600) X cost per pack ($5 each) $73,000.
The full costs might total over $1 million in treatments for lung cancer and heart disease, and the reduction in life span and productivity of the smoker. (The emotional losses of those who lose a loved one to a painful early death is difficult to assign an economic value but it is very real.)
If the full costs of the nicotine addiction were included at the point of purchase, each pack of cigarettes would cost about $70 ($1,000,000 / 14,600). Very few people could afford a habit that costs $140 per day ($51,000 per year).
What are the full costs of the current addiction to social media? These costs are even more difficult to measure than the consequences of widespread addiction to nicotine, but they exist regardless of our unwillingness or inability to measure the costs.
Consider the devastating consequences of social media on teen suicides. Here is one such story: Tragedy.
Then there's all the lost productivity as social media addicts check their phones 150+ times a day, interrupting not just work or school but intimacy, up to and including sex.
The psychological attraction of smoking is the core of tobacco marketing, of course; no tobacco company sells cigarettes on the benefits of nicotine addiction. The pitch is that smoking cigarettes is glamorous and attractive because it's "adult" and forbidden.
Anything that has the double allure of the forbidden and the glamorous is extremely compelling to social animals such as humans, who seek to "stand out" via glamour and risk-taking to heighten our social status, which plays such a life-changing role in the selection of mates and our position in the pecking-order hierarchy.
Social media shares certain aspects of these dynamics. While it's not exactly glamorous, social media enables otherwise average individuals the golden opportunity to "stand out" and raise their social status by attracting more "likes" and positive feedback than other consumers of social media.
In effect, social media offers an extremely compelling megaphone to individuals whose social status in the real world is modest (due to the "long-tail" distribution of opportunities to become socially prominent or wealthy, which are increasingly concentrated in the very tip-top of the social hierarchy) to increase their social status in the digital realm via social media.
Compare the ease of social media to the traditional paths to social prominence: building a business or career to attain wealth, community service via leadership roles in organizations, gaining high visibility in conventional media via extraordinary good looks, athletic or artistic talent, etc.
Each of these is an extremely demanding path, one that few people attain, and hence the relatively few at the top of the heap.
As my friend GFB once remarked, in the real world you have to actually earn the money to buy the Mercedes to show off to your friends, but in social media, you only need to post photos of yourself in a Mercedes in a well-chosen setting, and then relentlessly promote yourself on social media platforms.
In other words, social media holds out the promise that an average person can become larger than they are in real life with relatively modest tools (an Internet connection and a camera).
This is reinforced when we look at many of the individuals who have built huge social media audiences and find that they're not any better looking or more talented than the rest of us.
This promise of attaining higher social status without having to work incredibly hard at difficult accomplishments is very compelling.
With the rise of social media influencers as key marketing assets, the most successful social media mavens can earn extraordinary incomes by selling products to their social media audience.
Alas, the long-tail distribution of real-world social status (the few at the top garner the vast majority of the wealth and status) also applies to social media, where a relative few gain audiences in the millions and the vast majority of participants must make do with a relative handful of followers and "likes."
This leaves the majority of users extremely vulnerable to slight changes in their social media visibility and status; someone with 15 followers is devastated by the loss of 5 followers, where the individual with 6 million followers would have to lose 2 million followers to suffer the same erosion.
Toxic critics have limited opportunities in the real world. The person driving by in the Mercedes or addressing a community organization won't even hear the snarky comments of the envious in the audience.
But social media gives pride of place to the most toxic critics, providing a global platform for anyone who wants to tear someone else down.
If we set out to design a highly addictive platform that optimized the most toxic, destructive aspects of human nature, we'd eventually come up with social media.
It's not clear that there is any way to regulate social media to quantify or reduce its addictiveness or toxicity, and so the only solution appears to be cold-turkey: Don't get addicted in the first place, and if you are addicted, then abandon social media entirely (cold-turkey).
Here are a few horrific “catch-up” quotes. I’ll discuss the source afterwards:
"…appropriately prescribed prescription drugs are the fourth leading cause of death…About 330,000 patients die each year from prescription drugs in the US and Europe.
"They [the drugs] cause an epidemic of about 20 times more [6.6 million per year] hospitalizations, as well as falls, road accidents, and about 80 million [per year] medically minor problems such as pains, discomforts, and dysfunctions that hobble productivity or the ability to care for others."
"Deaths from over medication, errors, and self-medication would increase these figures.”
In other words, the 330,000 deaths per year, the 6.6 million hospitalizations per year, and the 80 million “medically minor” problems per year…all of this stems from CORRECTLY PRESCRIBED medicines.
The quotes come from the ASA [American Sociological Association] publication called Footnotes, in its November 2014 issue. The article is “The Epidemic of Sickness and Death from Prescription Drugs.” The author of the article is Donald W Light.
Donald W Light is a professor of medical and economic sociology.
He is a founding fellow of the Center for Bioethics at the University of Pennsylvania. In 2013, he was a fellow at the Edmond J. Safra Center for Ethics at Harvard. He is a Lokey Visiting Professor at Stanford University and a Fellow of the Royal Society of Medicine.
It’s been my policy to quote medical analysts who have mainstream credentials, when it comes to adding up the results of medical-drug destruction.
I do this to show that, in refusing to fix the holocaust, the federal government, medical schools, and pharmaceutical companies can’t claim their critics and detractors are “fringe researcherss.".”
Believe me, the officials who should have been fixing the enormous tragedy for at least the past 15 years are intent on hiding it.
When you stop and think about the meaning of these medical numbers, one of the things you realize is: this massive destruction of life envelops whole countries.
It not only maims and kills, it brings emotional turmoil and loss to the families, friends, co-workers, and colleagues of those who are killed and maimed:
The 330,000 who are killed and the 6.6 million who are hospitalized and the 80 million whose productivity is hobbled or whose ability to care for others is significantly diminished.
If you consciously set out to bring a nation to its knees, to kill it, to disable it, to make it unable to function at any reasonable level, you would be hard pressed to find a more effective long-term method than exposing the population to the US/European medical-drug cartel.
A Generation Of Poisoning With Gender-Bender Chemicals Has Created A New Class Of Youth Who Fail To Recognize Gender At All November 14 2024 | From: NaturalNews / Various
The success of the globalists in perverting the minds of Western youth is evident in a new study by the Innovation Group, which found that most people between the ages of 13 and 20 – what the mainstream media and social engineers have dubbed "Generation Z" – no longer believe in strictly-defined gender identities like "male" and "female."
These gender "binaries," which are really just the pronouns humanity has been using since the beginning of time to differentiate between individuals with external reproductive equipment versus internal reproductive equipment, are now "old-fashioned" to the youth of today, which the study found are more comfortable than previous generations using gender-neutral (and grammatically incorrect) pronouns like "they" and "them" to describe a single, genderless individual.
Related: Finally Parents Begin Removing Their Children From Public Indoctrination Center Over Teaching Transgenderism
A majority of Gen-Z respondents, 52 percent, indicated that they aren't completely heterosexual, while 35 percent – an 11 percent increase compared to "Millennials" – admit that they fall somewhere along the spectrum of bisexuality. This spectrum identification for sexuality is further reflected in the more than 38 percent of Gen-Zers who claim they don't believe gender defines a person.
As far as the types of clothes and accessories they buy, 13–20 year-olds are much more fluid when it comes to sticking to a gender norm. Only 44 percent of Gen-Zers buy clothes exclusively designed for their own gender, while an astounding 70 percent say they support the idea that bathrooms become "genderless," welcoming anyone and everyone who wants to use them.
A 16-year-old pansexual (genderless) student from Nebraska by the name of "Madeleine" told VICE that "it" (for lack of a better pronoun) learned more about gender and identity from its peers than from older people, and that "agender," or no gender at all, is a young people's phenomenon.
"I also notice that people my age are more open to gender and sexuality being fluid and subject to change," Madeleine told VICE. "For a while, I identified as asexual, but as time went on and I changed, I realized that maybe I wasn't that way anymore."
Endocrine-Disrupting Chemicals are Eliminating Sex, Gender
This lack of clarity about biological identity is a product of two things: relentless media propaganda and chemical poisoning with gender-bending chemicals found in plastics, herbicides and pesticides sprayed on our food, and environmental pollution.
Chemicals like bisphenol-A (BPA), glyphosate, soy and other hormone-disruptors are altering human genes and producing next-generation "robot" humans with no gender, and thus no identity.
It's sad, really, because it could have been prevented through reforms that protect the people rather than the chemical and drug industries that produce these toxins.
Food, water, air: It's all tainted with endocrine-disrupting chemicals (EDCs) that, more often than not, mimic the effects of estrogen, meaning they deplete testosterone and create hormone imbalances that not only confuse children, but also affect their growth and development.
Young girls are becoming more "masculine," while young boys are becoming more "feminine" – an alchemy of the two sexes both physically and mentally that's changing the landscape of culture and civilization.
We've identified many sources of EDCs through our ongoing work at the Natural News Forensics Food Lab, which I encourage you to check out in order to learn more.
Our generation has inherited this Pyramid of Lies and only now are we beginning to see its tentacles of deception within our societies, governments, financial institutions, and even families as this web has entrapped us.
Some say that this all began with the Father of all Lies - Satan - but how many people have actually met this bloke of smoke? Or is he just a religious fantasy of distraction - The Blame Game?
Actually the Lie begins with YOU and ME as we are the ones that give credence and support and repeat the Lie over and over again as part of our personal Belief systems.
So if change is to occur, it has to come from personal understanding and recognition of the Lies and then doing what needs to be done by exposing the Lies in the light of Truth and then presenting viable Solutions.
That is the gist of this essay.
Upside Down Pyramids
Most of us think of pyramids as being large at the bottom and pointed at the top. We are programmed to believe that this is the proper shape and model that we should follow.
All our social, religious, political, governmental, financial, economic and corporate structures are based on “Top-Down” models with the “All Seeing Eye” of the FEW (0.1%) at the TOP who make the rules for their untouchable benefit - always.
In reality that is a fallacious Lie as the actual structure is an “Upside Down Pyramid” with the small pointed end being the FOUNDATION POINT upon which a larger structure of lies is constructed.
A simple example is the basic government structure. You have a small portion of a population that are full time non-governmental workers paying taxes to support government workers that create welfare and budget deficit programs that create inflation and that then impoverish the workers that are holding up the whole system...
So by design or stupidity, the whole pyramid collapses and from the rubble of war a new phoenix pyramid system emerges which historically repeats the LIE.
In the US, 100 million workers support 50 million government employees that support 160 million people dependent upon some form of welfare that the government finances by issuing trillions of Dollars in Debt that supports banks and financial markets that leverage this through fractal banking to create $2-5 quadrillion in derivatives and $56 quadrillion in loans to hedge funds that cannot service the interest on these loans so the system is doomed to failure, especially if you kill off or tax to death the foundation of creative workers.
So the Financial Debt Pyramid of Lies is based on a small foundation of fungible REAL MONEY in gold, silver and precious metals often loosely referred to as “The Global Collateral Accounts” as the real assets backing the fraudulent fractional global financial system.
To this is added Annual GDP which is what is actually created new assets produced by the productivity of hard working people. This is the base that supports the fake colored paper debts and their “phantom assets” or “Ghost Money”.
And even the amount of gold above ground as determined by the London Gold Council is limited to only 190,000 tons mined since the beginning of time, whereas, current annual global gold extraction is accounted at 6,000 tons per year.
Extrapolate 6,000 over 50 years of modern mining and you have potentially over 300,000 tons above ground. And going back in time you add Sumarian gold, Solomon’s mines, South Africa, Spanish/American hoards, California, Alaska and Yukon Gold Rushes, Russian and Asian gold reserves and London Liars are called out.
Keep the amount available small and the price goes higher, that is the con and lie perpetrated.
And the real gold money supporting the financial pyramid at current gold price of $ 1,500/oz the 190,000 tons would be worth only $ 9.164 Trillion but only 13% of physical gold is in financial bars or coins held by banks, central banks, institutional investors and private holdings.
That is only $ 1.2 Trillion physical collateral supporting the actual financial pyramid.
This financial Debt morass also supports organized and rigged casinos like paper gold, stocks, bonds, derivatives and financial debt instruments of all kinds.
These paper casinos are all based on a small foundation of assets that are always in a “disconnect” with the paper that they represent as a direct result of fractal banking leveraging at 10:1, 100:1 or even higher.
Take for example the “rigged gold price”. Commodity markets like the London Bullion Metals Association (LBMA) and COMEX in Chicago deal principally in “Paper Gold” which is “phantom gold” created out of thin air with little or NO physical gold backing or physical gold delivery.
The daily “price” is FIXED in a back room with no transparency or accountability for the true value of the fake paper that it is based on. The fantasy fraud pricing then enters the market as a key valuation basis for other financial contracts and the phantom gold is then used as collateral!
The only real gold physical delivery occurs on the Shanghai Gold Exchange (SGE) but that price is linked to the fake LBMA and COMEX paper prices and none of the physical gold transacted can leave China so it is not a real trade market.
And now as Chinese banks are failing, the Chinese Government is considering confiscating GOLD! Sounds like 1933 in the US all over again.
So what happens if there is a “disconnect” between fake paper gold and real physical gold? Simply the price of physical gold will go UP and paper gold will become worthless.
The basic financial model is one based on GREED and DEBT. It is a SCAM MODEL. It is based on the old carnival saying that “a sucker is born every day”.
The modus is based on a “get rich quick” approach by selling a piece of colored paper and a glorious false promise that the paper will be worth a fortune some day.
The paper is then traded in a rigged casino where the sheep always get fleeced because the originators of the colored paper sell it for higher and higher prices, selling out at a peak and then cause a market collapse that leaves the sheep sheared.
The most recent financial scam is the “crypto-currency scam” better known as “Bitcoin”. This scam starts off with the issue of a fixed number of “digital coins” on the originators computer. He then sells 50% to the gullible public say at a penny a coin.
The coin Buyers then sell some of their coins at 2 cents and make 100% profit. The next Buyer sells his coins at 4 cents and makes 100% profit. This doubling of profits accelerates rapidly with the number of greedy Buyers bidding up coin prices and cashing in on daily on-line trading.
But remember that the underlying value per coin is only a penny and that the originator of the coins kept 50% which he cashes-in and becomes an instantaneous digital millionaire.
The whole price structure is just based on greed and the more greedy ignoramuses that can be encouraged to buy into the scam the better.
And now you can buy 0.1 % of a coin, or a derivative based on coin price movements, or swap one crypto for another, which are scams based on scams. And the feeding frenzy continues!
But be AWAKE! Governments and major banksters (IMF) are now actively promoting “cashless societies” where everything you do is digitally recorded - well, at least until someone hacks the system or pulls the plug.
This is a major society “control” model - all based on fraudulent money created out of thin air and false promises. And people believe it is good for them! Model Programming for the brain dead.
But the Casino Scam Model is also seen in Stock Markets, Bond Markets, Currency Markets, Commodity Markets, Derivative Markets and in so many creative paper scams around the world.
I personally own the controlling stock in the London Bridge. Any Buyers? I just printed out the certificates.
And why are Stock Markets rising to record levels at the same time that the FED is printing BILLIONS of digits out of thin air to prop up the liquidity shortfall of major banks by funding the Overnight Market, where the loans then get extended to 3-days, 7-days, 1-month or 1-year.
The banks get low interest (essentially FREE) money which they use to play the markets through their own financial subsidiaries or loans to their hedge fund buddies - all pocketing huge profits.
The FOREX (Foreign Exchange) Markets are in on it too. Trading in currencies is $ 6.6 TRILLION PER DAY with 88% Dollar denominated on one side of the trades instigated by institutional banks, brokers funded by banks and bank financial subsidiaries that account for 90% of all trades.
And this is based on only $6.0 TRILLION in global currencies in physical circulation! So where do the currencies come from? “Only the Phantom knows for sure”.
And the banksters are actively promoting these frauds by creating more fake money colored paper out of thin air and loaning it to whomever they can.
This is the classic “Debt Slavery Model” where one tries to buy oneself out of debt with more debt in an ever increasing death spiral. And the creation of more money to feed the interest deficit is what causes the devaluation of money through INFLATION.
Simply in this Debt based financial model, whenever there is “interest” more money has to be CREATED.
Look again at the QUADRILLIONS AND QUINTILLIANS of colored paper and computer digits that make-up the Financial Pyramid of Lies. Think for a minute how much 1% INTEREST is and that has to be CREATED each year OUT OF THIN AIR!
NOW you are beginning to see why the Debt / Slavery Model always collapses and the Elites then send the stupid masses to WAR and devastation and distraction while they then resurrect a NEW Debt / Slavery Model from the ashes.
WAKE-UP People! It didn’t work before. It won’t work again that way either!
So now you see that we are on the brink of another global financial collapse. No one can meet the humongous global interest payments.
Now the talking heads are tooting GCR’s (Global Currency Resets), RV’s (Revaluations), Debt Jubilees and all kinds of nonsense that will never happen as THEIR solutions are just a REPEAT with new colored paper. No real system changes. The Elite stay IN CONTROL.
EXPECT A COLLAPSE. SOON. EXPECT A WHOLE BUNCH OF LIES. SCAMS. CONS.
What Needs to be Done?
Capitalism works if you have real market forces determining prices of goods and services. But the current model does not allow for free open markets, only controlled casinos. That has to change.
A famous Swiss study found that 187 major multinational corporations, energy giants and large banks through their interlocking Boards virtually control the entire global economy.
They own the land, factories, communications, transportation, pharmaceutical, energy and the financial structure that controls all including the “incorporated” governments and central banks - and through Birth Certificates, they claim that they own YOU (and the Pope claims he owns YOUR SOUL!).
Obviously such a control system needs to be reigned-in with more effective “anti-monopoly” laws and the cutting of cross linkages at Board levels, but even deeper structural changes have to take place.
Money
The fundamental foundation of MONEY is based on FAITH. Do WE BELIEVE in the intrinsic value of what we assume is MONEY.
Originally MONEY was based on precious metals which had tradable value based on the commonly accepted “perception” that a piece of metal with a picture on it was worth so much of a commodity or hours of labor.
Thus the Elite created the CON of TOKENS and controlled the mints and printing presses to their advantage.
But what is the true value of MONEY? Is it the value of PRODUCTION? Or is it the value that CONSUMERS give to PRODUCTION? Is it the value of LABOR inputs to PRODUCTION?
But what about those in society that cannot be productive like children, elderly, physically disabled, addicted, lazy, etc.?
Obviously humanity is at a transition point where the real VALUE of MONEY has to be determined on a global basis. It is a delicate process of balancing the YIN (PRODUCTION) with the YANG (CONSUMPTION).
This transitioning is happening NOW regardless of fraudulent attempts to reboot the old defunct model. Going back to the “Gold Standard” or creating a phony “Cyber Alternative” is doing the same stupid thing all over again. But these are transitory steps in the Game to create real monetary VALUE. They are NOT the End Game.
Several years ago I wrote a paper promoting the creation of an “International Dollar” (an ID or $ with a single line through the S).
This was another transition proposal whereby all overseas US Dollars being held as reserve currencies and used in active commodity TRADE would be converted into new International Dollars managed by an independent International Board that would be responsible for determining and pegging the Exchange Rate between the ID and each nation’s currency being valued against REAL PRODUCTION AND CONSUMPTION statistics.
This is a closer step to a proper economic goal but again it is NOT the end-all approach.
The VALUE of MONEY is a matter of FAITH.
FAITH is the result of doing things the RIGHTEOUS WAY and universally from a position of GIVING.
Our focus should be on what WE value and why WE place such a value on something, then we have to agree on how we account for it We are the Consumers and Producers so WE determine VALUE. Markets must be OPEN and not determined by “Backroom Boys”, syndicates or banksters and their buddies.
VALUE is a honest and moral foundation of a global society. Creating such a foundation from the current model will be a slow process as it is based on fraud, but perseverance and transitioning from the old model to a new one IS taking place.
Reverting back to a Gold Standard, creating equitable digital algorithms, re-valuations or an International Dollar that all currencies can be pegged to, are steps along the way provided there is a global moral consensus and an equitable balance created.
Economic structuring in our immediate future is up to all of US and we can easily do this without going to devastating wars simply because one country or another has run out of real MONEY to back its debts.
We can have wealth, prosperity and health for all by just shifting some of the insane phantom money from the casinos into PRODUCTION and LABOR thereby creating CONSUMERS.
For only USD30 Billion we can provide clean drinking water for everyone. Another USD40 Billion and we feed all the hungry and starving of the world. Why does the US need over $1.0 TRILLION per year for Defense Budgets when such a small portion of such budgets can heal and prosper the entire World?
MONEY is changing. WE are awakening. It is time to review what can be done is now. WE all need to seek viable and righteous alternatives and give this to the collective consciousness.
The old Debt/Slavery Model is worn out. WE are changing OUR MONEY. The Who, What, Where, When, Why and How is now up to US to determine. The next Model, however, will not be based on FRAUD and a Pyramid of Lies.
It will be based on real asset values and be equitable for all mankind.
Postscript
As of 2018 the Money Game has changed. It was at that time that the World had a new elected AMANAH (the Global Collateral Trustee) who is now recognized as the principal Trustee for many of the historical bunkered assets in Asia stored there by various Dragon Family members .
The estimated wealth stored in vaults and bunkers in Asia is currently valued in QUADRILLIONS of US Dollars of real physical assets such as gold and precious metals, gem stones, currencies, bonds and titles and priceless artifacts.
The AMANAH thus has sufficient wealth to provide clean drinking water and food for all mankind in short order. He is also investing in providing “free energy” devices to those in need, and advanced frequency based healing computers to heal the poor for free.
These planned humanitarian projects will have an immediate impact on humanity by improving health and by creating more opportunities that will increase human PRODUCTION and CONSUMPTION.
This is currently outside current economic models thus it will be a major GAME CHANGER.
And that is just the beginning. Since the AMANAH’s entrusted wealth is principally in “hard” assets, this will form a new financial foundation that is very much stronger than the Pyramid of Lies. This is real collateral backing of REAL MONEY.
The countries of the EAST will be the first to benefit and their economies will strengthen. The WEST’s fiat colored paper will suffer unless they become more cooperative in curbing their fraudulent ways.
The casinos will suffer as their tokens and colored paper will lose value.
The AMANAH is a harbinger of financial and economic CHANGE.
How Much Of This Junk Are You Exposed To?
November 12 2024 | From: Inquisitr / Sott / NaturalNews / GreenMedInfo We all know about toxins and poisons in the environment - the slow kill. Keep the populace sick while the globalist corporatocracy bleeds us dry of money for power whilst they get off on their depopulation Eugenics agenda.
Awareness of 'environmental toxins' that are literally all around us helps you keep some of the crap out of your system...
Antibacterial Soap Banned By FDA, Commonly Used Chemicals May Do More Harm Than Good
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has banned antibacterial soap sales in the United States, and the reason why is incredibly disturbing.
Many people have turned to antibacterial soap for years, believing them to be a safe and effective way to remove dirt and germs from the body and hands, and more effective than traditional soap and water. However, when the FDA banned the popular soaps, they informed the public that they might not be so effective after all.
What’s more and infinitely more disturbing, according to the FDA, the chemicals most commonly used in antibacterial soaps may not even be safe.
A total of 19 chemicals often used in antibacterial soaps have been targeted by the FDA, and the agency has given manufacturers only a year to remove them all from the products they are selling (and marketing as safe and effective) to the public.
As The New York Times reports, while nearly 20 chemicals were involved in the decision that led to the antibacterial soap being banned by the FDA, two are the primary culprits. Triclosan and triclocarban are used in both bar and liquid antibacterial soap, and they are almost everywhere.
When the FDA banned antibacterial soap this week based on the risks of using the product often outweighing the benefits, they didn’t ban the questionable chemicals from all products.
Reportedly, at least one toothpaste uses a now-banned chemical, but according to the FDA, in that product it’s risks are less than the benefits it provides to consumers.
While the news that antibacterial soap has been banned by the FDA may be shocking and sudden to some, the truth of the matter is that there have been questions about its safety for years and years.
As Smithsonian Magazine reports, the FDA has been threatening to ban antibacterial soap for years. In the article, published in 2014, cited questions that the FDA had about the safety and effectiveness of antibacterial soap.
Even then, the FDA warned that antibacterial soap would be banned if manufacturers didn’t prove that it was both safe and more effective than using soap and water.
Apparently, the industry was unable to prove that antibacterial soap is safe or provides a public benefit that outweighs the potential risk of exposure of the chemicals used in the product.
At the time of the Smithsonian Magazine article, triclosan (with is banned as part of the FDA’s sweeping decision on antibacterial soap) was used in roughly 30 percent of all bar soap and 75 percent of liquid antibacterial soap. In 2014, the antibacterial soap industry, now banned by the FDA, was worth about $1 billion.
In 2014, the antibacterial soap industry was put on notice by the FDA. They were told to prove the safety of their product by 2016 or see their product banned. Despite the fact that manufacturers had turned antibacterial soap into a $1 billion industry and were given two years, they chose not to put together the required proof that they were selling a product that is safe and effective.
And plenty of people are speculating that the reason that the antibacterial soap industry didn’t prove to the FDA that their product is safe is that they know that it isn’t.
But rather than simply removing it from the market themselves (or demonstrate its safety), the antibacterial soap industry continued to use the questionable chemicals and sell personal hygiene products that may not be safe until the FDA announced that the products were banned.
Even now, antibacterial soap can be legally sold, despite questions about its safety.
In the aftermath of the announcement that the FDA had banned antibacterial soap, public health professionals have overwhelmingly supported the decision, adding that the chemicals in antibacterial soap can alter the hormones of children and even contribute to the problem of antibiotic-resistant superbugs.
“It has boggled my mind why we were clinging to these compounds, and now that they are gone I feel liberated They had absolutely no benefit but we kept them buzzing around us everywhere. They are in breast milk, in urine, in blood, in babies just born, in dust, in water.”
Recent studies into the chemicals found in antibacterial soap products have resulted in some very disturbing discoveries regarding the harm they can do to animals and likely to humans, too.
Among the problems caused by the now-banned products include severe abnormalities having to do with metabolism and reproduction. According to the CDC, the chemicals found in FDA banned antibacterial soap have been found in the bodily waste of 75 percent of U.S. residents.
Kinder and Lindt Chocolate Bars Revealed to Contain Cancer-Causing Carcinogens
Tests carried out by a German watchdog revealed Kinder chocolate bars and two other brands tested positive for a hazardous cancer-causing substance. Surprise!
Foodwatch called for Ferrero's Kinder Riegel, Lindt's Fioretto Nougat Minis, and Sun Rice Classic Schokohappen by Rübezahl to be taken off the shelves on Monday after tests found "possible carcinogens."
The sweet treats had been contaminated with "so-called aromatic mineral oils (MOAH)," says Foodwatch, but the manufacturers are allegedly reluctant to recall their products.
"The manufacturer is guilty of gross negligence. Instead of clearing the dangerous candy from the shelves and alerting consumers, they [postulate]... that everything was undertaken legally," said Foodwatch's John Heeg.
Foodwatch tested more than 20 different kinds of potato chips and chocolate snacks and found saturated mineral oils (MOSH) which it warned can "accumulate in the human body and [cause] long term damage to organs" with children particularly at risk.
"There is no acceptable levels of mineral oils in food for consumption," Heeg told the German edition of The Local, citing the European Food Safety Authority (EFSA) who he says considers MOAHs "likely carcinogenic and mutagenic."
"You can't see it, you can't taste it, but it's in there," warned Hegg. "We recommend not purchasing these products because the levels are simply unacceptable for consumption."
Kinder Riegel, "one of the best-selling chocolate bars in Germany," had the worst MOSH and MOAH values. The chemicals are usually transferred to foods through recycled packaging that previously had been printed with inks which may contain oils.
Foodwatch is calling for strict limits on saturated mineral oils (MOSH) in food and a zero tolerance for aromatic mineral oils (MOAH).
Brain Damaging Heavy Metal Mercury Found in Grocery Products Made With High Fructose Corn Syrup (HFCS)
HFCS is ubiquitous in the modern processed food supply. It's added to pizza sauce, salad dressings, ketchup and "whole wheat" breads. Did you know it's often contaminated with the toxic heavy metal mercury?
High-fructose corn syrup (HFCS) is a highly processed sweetener made primarily from corn and found in a plethora of food and beverages on grocery store shelves.
The U.S. Department of Agriculture's Economic Research Service estimated in 2011 that the average consumer per capita consumes nearly 42 pounds of high fructose corn syrup per year. Not one, but two studies in 2009 found that HFCS commercially produced in America and American-bought HFCS products were tainted with mercury.
The first study published in the peer-reviewed journal Environmental Health found that, of twenty samples collected and analyzed from three different manufacturers, nine, or 45 percent, came back tainted with mercury.
The second study by watchdog group Institute for Agriculture and Trade Policy (IATP) purchased fifty-five food items from popular brands off grocery store shelves in the fall of 2008 -- items in which HFCS was the first or second principal ingredient -- and detected mercury in nearly a third of them.
The contamination may have been due to the fact that mercury cells are still used in the production of caustic soda, an ingredient used to make HFCS.
The HFCS mercury plot thickens, however. Online news outlet Grist reported that the lead researcher in the Environmental Health study, Renee Dufault, previously worked as an FDA researcher.
Dufault had apparently turned over the information contained in her HFCS mercury study to the agency back in 2005, but the FDA reportedly sat on it and did nothing, so Dufault went public with it after she retired in 2008.
How Big Food Cornered the Market with a Liquid Sweetener
Initial attempts to get corn syrup widely dispersed into the U.S. food supply in the 1970s didn't really take off because sugar was so cheap and abundant at the time. However, this changed, as U.S.- imposed tariffs decreased sugar imports throughout the 1970s and early 1980s, making sugar significantly more expensive in America than in other parts of the world.
The surface explanation for these tariffs was to protect American sugar farmers; behind the scenes, however, Big Agra interests had lobbied for the policy to promote what would become a new source of sugar - derived from corn - which soon emerged as a popular commodity that was sold at a price significantly cheaper than cane sugar or beet sugar.
Archer Daniels Midland opened the first large-scale plant in 1978 (before they acquired the Clinton Corn Processing Company) to produce 90 percent HFCS and 55 percent HFCS. By January 1980, Coca-Cola began allowing high fructose corn syrup to be used as a sweetener at 50 percent levels with regular sugar; Pepsi Cola followed suit by 1983.
By November 1984, both major soft drink brands had approved full sweetening with HFCS, and HFCS quickly captured 42 percent of the sweetener market. The rising dominance of HFCS allowed it to maintain commercial prices similar to sugar until the 1990s.
Government Money Subsidizing Corn Syrup
For the past several decades, the U.S. government has paid subsidies to American farmers to grow tons of corn (much of which -- nearly 90 percent -- is genetically modified) and shifted domestic agricultural policy to maximize corn crops. This made high-fructose corn syrup and other corn-derived processed ingredients much cheaper for industrial food manufacturers to use.
Today, HFCS is nearly ubiquitous on American grocery store shelves. It can be found in a wide range of items, including candy, ice cream, bread, chips, snacks, soups, soft drinks, fruit drinks and other beverages, condiments, jellies, deli meats, and much, much more.
Overall, Americans consume about fifty to sixty pounds of high fructose corn syrup per capita – an insane amount. HFCS has been linked in scientific research to obesity, diabetes, heart disease, fatty liver and other contributors of bad health and early death.
As the biggest dietary source of fructose, HFCS also promotes insulin resistance and increasing uric acid levels, which contribute to metabolic dysfunction and type 2 diabetes. Further, researchers in 2008 found a correlation between high fructose consumption and liver scarring in non-alcoholic fatty liver disease (NAFLD), which is present in nearly a third of American adults.
Corn Refiners Association Attempts to Hoodwink Consumers
On top of lobbying efforts, the Corn Refiners Association, an industry organization of which Archer Daniels Midland a is a key member, launched the website sweetsurprise.com as a media relations ploy to debunk "myths" about HFCS and clarify "The Facts about High Fructose Corn Syrup."
It also ran well-funded TV advertising starting in 2008 sticking up for the industry's favorite sweetener and asserting that "sugar is sugar," which prompted a lawsuit by sugar producers claiming false advertising in 2011. The FDA also demanded the corn industry stop using the term "corn sugar" without approval.
In 2012, the FDA rejected a petition filed by the Corn Refiners Association in 2010 to change the name of high-fructose corn syrup to "corn sugar" for the purposes of food labeling and advertising. The Corn Refiners Association claims that it wanted the name change to "educate consumers," the majority of whom are "confused about HFCS."
To keep reading, get my new book Food Forensics, available now for pre-order everywhere books are sold.
How Sucralose (Splenda) Affects Health [Artificial Sweeteners in General]
The emergence of sucralose came from the fight against obesity, but did we trade one problem for another?
This video was originally published on NutritionFacts.org and republished with permission.
In the United States, sucralose (the sweet tasting chemical in Splenda brand artificial sweeteners) was approved for use by the FDA in 1998. It was deemed safe, but we no have over a decade’s worth of research to prove that sucralose affects health in a very negative and very unique way.
The only effect they thought it would have on health was that it could potentially trigger migraines in a small percentage of people.
This, they decided, was a small enough issue that the FDA allowed the substance into the marketplace, citing obesity as a more pressing issue. They could not have been more wrong.
One of the major complications that can come from obesity is diabetes, where the body no longer responds to insulin properly. Originally meant to combat issues like obesity-caused diabetes, lab tests show that insulin resistance increases by as much as 20% after ingesting the sugar substitute.
The cause can be traced back to gut bacteria and how sucralose and other artificial sweeteners can alter their environments. For example; Aspartame is another type of artificial sweetener which studies have shown is metabolized in the body as formaldehyde, a known carcinogen.
Furthermore, alterations in gut bacteria are also very likely the culprit behind the rise in inflammatory bowel diseases like Crohn’s disease.
In every part of the world where sucralose has been approved, inflammatory bowel disease has increased. Clearly, there is a causal link between this substance and the health of our gut.
Though the alternative to sugar was created in an effort to combat obesity, with all of the complications and damage it can cause, it’s clear that how sucralose affects health – negatively. This just further proves that we can all do ourselves a service by sticking to natural foods whose benefits don’t have to be decided on by a committee.
The Secret Meeting That Changed Rap Music And Destroyed A Generation & The Troubling Case Of Paz de la Huerta And Her (Now Deleted) Instagram Account
November 11 2024 | From: HipHopIsRead / VigilantCitizen / Various After more than 20 years, I've finally decided to tell the world what I witnessed in 1991, which I believe was one of the biggest turning point in popular music, and ultimately American [Western] society.
I have struggled for a long time weighing the pros and cons of making this story public as I was reluctant to implicate the individuals who were present that day.
So I've simply decided to leave out names and all the details that may risk my personal well being and that of those who were, like me, dragged into something they weren't ready for.
Between the late 80's and early 90’s, I was what you may call a “decision maker” with one of the more established company in the music industry. I came from Europe in the early 80’s and quickly established myself in the business.
The industry was different back then. Since technology and media weren’t accessible to people like they are today, the industry had more control over the public and had the means to influence them anyway it wanted.
This may explain why in early 1991, I was invited to attend a closed door meeting with a small group of music business insiders to discuss rap music’s new direction.
Little did I know that we would be asked to participate in one of the most unethical and destructive business practice I’ve ever seen. The meeting was held at a private residence on the outskirts of Los Angeles. I remember about 25 to 30 people being there, most of them familiar faces.
Speaking to those I knew, we joked about the theme of the meeting as many of us did not care for rap music and failed to see the purpose of being invited to a private gathering to discuss its future.
Among the attendees was a small group of unfamiliar faces who stayed to themselves and made no attempt to socialize beyond their circle. Based on their behavior and formal appearances, they didn't seem to be in our industry.
Our casual chatter was interrupted when we were asked to sign a confidentiality agreement preventing us from publicly discussing the information presented during the meeting. Needless to say, this intrigued and in some cases disturbed many of us. The agreement was only a page long but very clear on the matter and consequences which stated that violating the terms would result in job termination.
We asked several people what this meeting was about and the reason for such secrecy but couldn't find anyone who had answers for us. A few people refused to sign and walked out. No one stopped them. I was tempted to follow but curiosity got the best of me. A man who was part of the “unfamiliar” group collected the agreements from us.
Quickly after the meeting began, one of my industry colleagues (who shall remain nameless like everyone else) thanked us for attending. He then gave the floor to a man who only introduced himself by first name and gave no further details about his personal background. I think he was the owner of the residence but it was never confirmed.
He briefly praised all of us for the success we had achieved in our industry and congratulated us for being selected as part of this small group of “decision makers”.
At this point I begin to feel slightly uncomfortable at the strangeness of this gathering. The subject quickly changed as the speaker went on to tell us that the respective companies we represented had invested in a very profitable industry which could become even more rewarding with our active involvement.
He explained that the companies we work for had invested millions into the building of privately owned prisons and that our positions of influence in the music industry would actually impact the profitability of these investments. I remember many of us in the group immediately looking at each other in confusion. At the time, I didn’t know what a private prison was but I wasn't the only one.
Sure enough, someone asked what these prisons were and what any of this had to do with us. We were told that these prisons were built by privately owned companies who received funding from the government based on the number of inmates.
The more inmates, the more money the government would pay these prisons. It was also made clear to us that since these prisons are privately owned, as they become publicly traded, we’d be able to buy shares. Most of us were taken back by this.
Again, a couple of people asked what this had to do with us. At this point, my industry colleague who had first opened the meeting took the floor again and answered our questions. He told us that since our employers had become silent investors in this prison business, it was now in their interest to make sure that these prisons remained filled.
Our job would be to help make this happen by marketing music which promotes criminal behavior, rap being the music of choice.
He assured us that this would be a great situation for us because rap music was becoming an increasingly profitable market for our companies, and as employee, we’d also be able to buy personal stocks in these prisons.
Immediately, silence came over the room. You could have heard a pin drop. I remember looking around to make sure I wasn't dreaming and saw half of the people with dropped jaws.
My daze was interrupted when someone shouted, “Is this a f****** joke?” At this point things became chaotic.
Two of the men who were part of the “unfamiliar” group grabbed the man who shouted out and attempted to remove him from the house. A few of us, myself included, tried to intervene. One of them pulled out a gun and we all backed off.
They separated us from the crowd and all four of us were escorted outside. My industry colleague who had opened the meeting earlier hurried out to meet us and reminded us that we had signed agreement and would suffer the consequences of speaking about this publicly or even with those who attended the meeting.
I asked him why he was involved with something this corrupt and he replied that it was bigger than the music business and nothing we’d want to challenge without risking consequences.
We all protested and as he walked back into the house I remember word for word the last thing he said, “It’s out of my hands now. Remember you signed an agreement.” He then closed the door behind him.
The men rushed us to our cars and actually watched until we drove off.
A million things were going through my mind as I drove away and I eventually decided to pull over and park on a side street in order to collect my thoughts. I replayed everything in my mind repeatedly and it all seemed very surreal to me.
I was angry with myself for not having taken a more active role in questioning what had been presented to us. I'd like to believe the shock of it all is what suspended my better nature. After what seemed like an eternity, I was able to calm myself enough to make it home.
I didn't talk or call anyone that night. The next day back at the office, I was visibly out of it but blamed it on being under the weather. No one else in my department had been invited to the meeting and I felt a sense of guilt for not being able to share what I had witnessed.
I thought about contacting the 3 others who wear kicked out of the house but I didn't remember their names and thought that tracking them down would probably bring unwanted attention.
I considered speaking out publicly at the risk of losing my job but I realized I’d probably be jeopardizing more than my job and I wasn't willing to risk anything happening to my family. I thought about those men with guns and wondered who they were?
I had been told that this was bigger than the music business and all I could do was let my imagination run free. There were no answers and no one to talk to. I tried to do a little bit of research on private prisons but didn’t uncover anything about the music business’ involvement.
However, the information I did find confirmed how dangerous this prison business really was. Days turned into weeks and weeks into months. Eventually, it was as if the meeting had never taken place. It all seemed surreal.
I became more reclusive and stopped going to any industry events unless professionally obligated to do so. On two occasions, I found myself attending the same function as my former colleague. Both times, our eyes met but nothing more was exchanged.
As the months passed, rap music had definitely changed direction. I was never a fan of it but even I could tell the difference. Rap acts that talked about politics or harmless fun were quickly fading away as gangster rap started dominating the airwaves.
Only a few months had passed since the meeting but I suspect that the ideas presented that day had been successfully implemented. It was as if the order has been given to all major label executives.
The music was climbing the charts and most companies when more than happy to capitalize on it. Each one was churning out their very own gangster rap acts on an assembly line.
Everyone bought into it, consumers included. Violence and drug use became a central theme in most rap music. I spoke to a few of my peers in the industry to get their opinions on the new trend but was told repeatedly that it was all about supply and demand.
Sadly many of them even expressed that the music reinforced their prejudice of minorities.
I officially quit the music business in 1993 but my heart had already left months before. I broke ties with the majority of my peers and removed myself from this thing I had once loved.
I took some time off, returned to Europe for a few years, settled out of state, and lived a “quiet” life away from the world of entertainment. As the years passed, I managed to keep my secret, fearful of sharing it with the wrong person but also a little ashamed of not having had the balls to blow the whistle.
But as rap got worse, my guilt grew. Fortunately, in the late 90’s, having the internet as a resource which wasn't at my disposal in the early days made it easier for me to investigate what is now labeled the prison industrial complex.
Now that I have a greater understanding of how private prisons operate, things make much more sense than they ever have.
I see how the criminalization of rap music played a big part in promoting racial stereotypes and misguided so many impressionable young minds into adopting these glorified criminal behaviors which often lead to incarceration.
Twenty years of guilt is a heavy load to carry but the least I can do now is to share my story, hoping that fans of rap music realize how they’ve been used for the past 2 decades.
Although I plan on remaining anonymous for obvious reasons, my goal now is to get this information out to as many people as possible.
Please help me spread the word.
Hopefully, others who attended the meeting back in 1991 will be inspired by this and tell their own stories. Most importantly, if only one life has been touched by my story, I pray it makes the weight of my guilt a little more tolerable.
The Troubling Case Of Paz de la Huerta And Her (Now Deleted) Instagram Account
Paz de la Huerta went from being tagged a “major Hollywood celebrity” to a “major nutjob” in a few short years. And things got worse after she accused Harvey Weinstein of multiple crimes.
However, a close look at her disturbing social media posts reveals another story: She been abused and controlled by the occult elite for decades.
Paz de la Huerta is an American actress and model who is mostly known for her role in the HBO series Broadwalk Empire and her countless magazine photoshoots.
Between 2005 and 2010, at the height of her career, de la Huerta worked with A-list celebrities and partied with Hollywood’s most powerful people. However, after a series of bizarre and traumatizing events, de la Huerta’s career came to a screeching halt.
Nowadays, de la Huerta is mostly known for appearing in paparazzi videos of her stumbling around while looking heavily intoxicated at social events. She’s also been a frequent subject of ridicule by celebrity gossip sites who have been documenting her erratic behavior for years.
While she was dismissed as “crazy” by mass media a long time ago, de la Huerta hundreds of posts on social media tell a darker story – one that sums up perfectly disgusting, hidden side of the occult elite and the entertainment industry.
Before looking that that (now deleted) Instagram account, here’s a quick look at her past.
Troubled Past
Paz de la Huerta’s parents are Ricardo Ignacio de la Huerta y Ozores (Spanish nobleman and 17th Duke of Mandas and Villanueva) and Judith Bruce (and authority on birth control in Third World countries and United Nations Consultant).
Paz obtained her first role at age 12 in the movie 1998 The Object of My Affection which starred Jennifer Aniston and Paul Rudd. She then steadily climbed the stairs to stardom until things took a horrible turn.
In 2011, de la Huerta was nearly killed by a speeding ambulance truck that was driven by a stunt driver on the set of the movie Nurse 3D. This event was highly suspicious, especially when one watches the video of it.
In this disturbing video, it appears that the ambulance actually steered left at the very last second to violently hit Paz. Furthermore, the ambulance was driven by a stunt driver who is literally trained to perform dangerous car stunts. Was it actually a murder attempt? As we’ll see later, the story surrounding this accident and its aftermaths is extremely bizarre.
No matter what the case may be, the accident nearly killed Paz. She filed a $55 million lawsuit against Liongate film claiming that the accident required her to undergo over 20 surgeries and left her unable to work. The case was dismissed.
In November 2018, de la Huerta filed a $60 million lawsuit against Harvey Weinstein, accusing the director of raping her on two separate occasions in 2010 and then embarking on a campaign of harassment that she contends damaged her career.
Paz de la Huerta with Harvey Weinstein at the Soho Grand Hotel in 2010
Contrarily to other 'Me Too' figureheads such as Rose McGowan, de la Huerta’s accusations generated little support and sympathy from mass media and the entertainment industry. Weinstein’s defense team has called her allegations “preposterous and, unfortunately, the product of an unstable personality with a vivid imagination.”
In May 2019, while de la Huerta was working on her lawsuit against Weinstein, she was hospitalized for “severe emotional distress”.
Throughout these difficult times, de la Huerta remained active on Instagram … and that account was terrifying. Indeed, most of her posts were actually calls for help as she accused “evil women” of abusing and torturing her while constantly pushing her to suicide.
For reasons unknown, that IG account was completed deleted in the past weeks. Luckily, since I was actually working on an article before the deletion happened, I’ve saved some screenshots and copied the contents of some captions.
Now, more than ever, I believe these need to be shared because they explain the “why” of de la Huerta’s behavior while shedding light on the dark and disturbing side of the entertainment industry.
At first glance, Paz de la Huerta’s Instagram account appeared to consist of hundreds of selfies mixed with some pics from her glory days.
However, when one took the time to read the captions associated with these pics, things got very dark. Nearly every picture was accompanied by a wall of text where Paz described her constant abuse and trauma at the hands of “evil women”.
A typical IG post by Paz combining a “beauty pic” with a troubling caption about evil women trying to destroy her
Although Paz’ captions often sounded like the ramblings of a crazy person, they actually told a coherent and precise story of systematic abuse at the hands of specific people – notably her own mother. In one post she writes:
“I’ve always been incredibly generous even to my evil mother who if she wanted me to be healthy and successful she wouldn’t have done the unconscionable thing she did to me in Spain that she had tried to do so many times before but my good karma always saved me if I survive this I’m writing a book about maunchhausen bi proxy.”
On several occasions, Paz accuses her mother of Munchausen syndrome by proxy. Here’s a definition of it:
Munchausen syndrome by proxy (MSBP) is a mental health problem in which a caregiver makes up or causes an illness or injury in a person under his or her care, such as a child, an elderly adult, or a person who has a disability. Because vulnerable people are the victims, MSBP is a form of child abuse or elder abuse.
Note: Since most cases of MSBP are between a caregiver (usually a mother) and a child, the rest of this topic will describe that relationship. But it is important to remember that MSBP can involve any vulnerable person who has a caregiver.
The caregiver with MSBP may:
Lie about the child’s symptoms.
Change test results to make a child appear to be ill.
Physically harm the child to produce symptoms.
Victims are most often small children. They may get painful medical tests they don’t need. They may even become seriously ill or injured or may die because of the actions of the caregiver.
Children who are victims of MSBP can have lifelong physical and emotional problems and may have Munchausen syndrome as adults. This is a disorder in which a person causes or falsely reports his or her own symptoms.
Although she was under the strict control of her mother since birth, Paz says that things got worse since the 2011 ambulance accident. In another post she wrote:
“Since my truck accident I’ve been surrounded by these evil women trying to convince me I was sick so they could lock me up for the rest of my life out of envy and fear for their reputations but when I met Mika that night it was a break from the psychological torture.”
In another post she wrote:
“I have been crying for months … it’s inhumane what these monsters have done to me. Because of them I didn’t get my justice against Lionsgate. I was going to marry a man and they messed that up to. My boyfriend of 15 years won’t talk to me because he says I’ve been so naive and he’s afraid I will take my life.
I had a career in Paris before they did the unconscionable. One old assistant of mine brave enough to step forward has saved all of their emails of their plans for me these last years since I had my truck accident.
They’ve been trying to have me committed for the rest of my life only because I hold secrets of years of unconscionable abuse .
I was never going to tell until what they did to me in Spain , the only country they could get away with it. All I did was cry after this one abuser said evil things to me and I was speaking to Micheal rebel the famous therapist that told me to run away from them years ago before they kill me.
They are trying to drive me to suicide, they have been doing it for years. They have gas lit me. (…)
I want my famous friends to read this and help me get away from these abusers who have gas lit me held me prisoner in a city. I have few loved ones and are trying to put me in a cage for the rest of my life because I know too much. I will speak to this assistant who was brave enough to step forward.”
As stated above, Paz claimed that she was abducted in Spain in 2018.
She reportedly spent six months “locked in a cage” while undergoing intense trauma at the hands of “evil women”.
A post about Paz being abducted
In another post she wrote:
“I was making money modeling and I was about to sign with the best agency until I stupidly got on that plane to Spain where evil I didn’t even know existed awaited me.
What can I say? Truck accident, rape, near fatal cuncussion, and I’ve never been a blamer and I’ve never even cared to sue because by heart I’m a very positive resilient woman but this is the greatest injustice I’ve ever endured in my life and never have a witnessed just how cruel humanity is.
I did nothing to warrant being locked up in a cage in a foreign country for six months they are still trying to keep me from having the proper medical care my evil mother has even voiced that she doesn’t want me working well than what am I supposed to be an invalid.”
In another post explained that what happened to her could only happen in Spain – perhaps due to her father’s connections.
“The only reason they got away with what they did was because in Spain my medications which they knew I needed one was illegal and I don’t know how they got away with keeping me there for so long it’s illegal to do that to someone Any where else in the world and because a judge put me there they made my evil abuser my custodian which I’ve had legally changed since and she forbade me from speaking to the two men my lawyer and best friend who had the power to get me out of that hell in a day.
I tried to commit suicide nine times when I was there.”
“do you know the story about the Kennedy girl we’ll she was very beautiful and sexy and vivacious the life of the party her mother was so deadly envious of her an ugly uptight prude like one of my main abusers and she basically did to her daughter what these to evil women tried to do to me lobotomize her the poor girl was robbed of her life and spent the rest of her life staring at a wall … extremely sad story and it almost happened to me I’ve never wanted to sue for any of the injustices I’ve endured until now and I have a killer lawyer share you’re stories with me and let’s support one another these evil women belong in jail.”
On several occasions, de la Huerta mentions an assistant who is willing to come forward and testify about the abuse she underwent in the past years.
In one Instagram post, the assistant wrote a long caption summing up the situation (you can tell that the text was written by another person due to the presence of actual sentences and punctuation).
“My name is Kimberly M., I am writing of behalf of Paz as I was friends with her in 2016-17, during that time witnessed some very bizarre treatment of her by her caretakers.
Before Paz left Los Angeles for Paris I became her assistant for a short period of time, in order to try and help her in a situation that seemed desperate. From the outside, it seemed that she was becoming increasingly frustrated with how her caretakers were handling her and was suspicious of their care.
From my point of view, she needed to be around more good role models, friends and people that cared for her in order for her to find her own stability and eventually start acting and modeling again.
When I started the job I thought this would be the intention of her caretakers as well, but soon found out this was not the case. My main interactions come in dealing with who was my boss for the job, Kimberly. The first signs that Kimberly had ill intentions for Paz came from the fact that she was trying very hard to discourage me taking the job of helping Paz.
Telling me I had no idea what I was getting into and repeatedly calling me to tell me negative things about Paz, often keeping me on the phone for hours at night, trying to convince me that Paz was not a good person and couldn’t be helped.
I could not figure out why she was trying to influence me in this way and soon began to ask questions because I was in disbelief. Some of the things I was told include that Paz was untreatable and too far gone for help.
She then told me that no treatment has worked on Paz in years, and that she has become more of a burden to them (Kimberly, Judith) than was worth putting actual effort into.
One day I still was not completely sold that Paz is untreatable, and confronted Kimberly who got very worked up and revealed to me that they think she is so untreatable, that they have given up and have been actively delaying or sabotaging some of the things Paz was asking for.
The most disturbing thing that was revealed was that they were trying to let her fail, so that she would go mad or cause enough altercations with the police/law to be put in an institution for life.
She also told me that because Paz’s godmother (her client) was the only one contributing to her financial stability, and that she had taken it upon herself to relay negative information to the godmother, sending bad reports (knowing that she had not attempted to facilitate a good report) and convincing her that Paz would be so much of a burden financially overtime, that she should accept her as a lost cause, and have her put away for life in order to save herself the money and trouble, even going as far to make her sound like a danger to others.
Never in my life did I think they would actually be able to follow through on such plans as I do not think Paz is insane, but a particular artist who’s been through a lot of trauma and needs adequate time to grow her own stability and find happiness in her own way.
I may not know the extent of what led to what in her situation, but I know what I witnessed was wrong on a moral level and believe that it may have contributed to their attempt to put Paz being put away in Spain.”
As the assistant wrote, Paz was subjected to “a lot of trauma”. And under details on her social media accounts point towards trauma-based mind control.
Trauma Based Mind Control?
To those who know about the dark side of the entertainment industry, Paz de la Huerta shows signs of trauma-based mind control.
Her early beginnings in the entertainment industry, her abuse at the hands of powerful people and her history of bizarre behavior (a typical result following MK breakdown) are all visible symptoms.
As explained in this article, trauma-based mind control (also known as Monarch programming) is about subjecting a slave to trauma so intense that it causes dissociation which leads to the programming of new alter personas.
In several Instagram posts, Paz actually refers to an alter-ego named Malificient.
An Instagram post about her alter-ego
Like many other victims of trauma-based mind control (such as Kim Noble), Paz also has a penchant for creating extremely symbolic paintings.
A painting by Paz de la Huerta that is replete with MK imagery. It depicts a Virgin-Mary-like figure with a blindfolded child who appears to be subjected to all kinds of foul treatments. Strange fact: In one of her posts, Paz wrote that she replaced memories of her mother by the Virgin Mary
In Conclusion
Although she can be easily dismissed as a crazy person who says crazy things (media has been doing it for years), Paz de la Huerta has actually been documenting her story of abuse and control in great detail.
Through her numerous social media posts (the only outlet she had until very recently), de la Huerta provided a first-person account of her systematic destruction at the hands of the people closest to her.
Is she actually crazy or did the abuse make that way? In an infamous interview about Hollywood, Dave Chappelle once said:
“The worst thing to call somebody is crazy. It’s dismissive. I don’t understand this person so they’re crazy.
That’s bullsh*t. These people are not crazy, they’re strong people. Maybe that environment (Hollywood) is a little sick.”
Hollywood is not only “a little sick”. It is very sick. It completely destroys minds, bodies, and souls. It turns strong, intelligent and talented people into spaced-out zombies who appear to be completely out of it.
It takes an incredible amount of strength to come back from mind control at the hands of the occult elite – and many don’t come back from it.
In short, if something suspicious ever happens to Paz de la Huerta, the true cause of it is most likely contained in this article.
Gene Roddenberry Based Star Trek On Secret US Navy Space Fleet
November 10 2024 | From: Exopolitics September 8 marked the 51st anniversary of the creation of the Star Trek science fiction series that began in 1966. There is significant evidence that its creator, Gene Roddenberry, did not simply come up with the idea of Star Trek on his own.
Instead he was encouraged to create the series based on classified information surrounding the development of a secret U.S. Navy space fleet that would build a broad extraterrestrial alliance.
This led Roddenberry to come up with the idea of a United Federation of Planets, with its military headquarters in San Francisco.
Roddenberry began developing ideas for a science fiction show after one of his series had bombed in 1964:
“The only reason Roddenberry created Star Trek, at least initially, was to sell another series to a network. He was, if not desperate, anxious… He had just failed with The Lieutenant, for Norman Felton’s Arena Productions.
… No one was clamoring for another series from Roddenberry, or even his scripts. His agent suggested he come up with a space series…
This may have led to what The Outer Limits historians insist are the accurate - if generally unknown - accounts of Roddenberry hanging out at times on the set of The Outer Limits. When I learned this, it wasn’t hard to imagine that series creator, and executive producer, Leslie Stevens … was someone that Roddenberry may have sought to emulate."
This account is confirmed by Tom Seldon, one of the production assistants of The Outer Limits:
“Star Trek was in fact an outgrowth of The Outer Limits. Gene Roddenberry watched our dailies all the time and took a lot of phone calls from our screening room.
He was spurring his imagination and checking on the incredible quality control we had.
I wondered why he was there but he was there more often than not during the time he was coming up with Star Trek."
The following firmly suggests that Roddenberry and Stevens had reached a business arrangement for the planned sci-fi series, Star Trek:
“Bearing in mind that Roddenberry was contracted to a rival studio and a rival network, the odds are essentially slim to none that the two men didn’t have some kind of business arrangement, whether in writing or not."
If Stevens and Roddenberry had indeed developed a business arrangement for the new Star Trek series, this is where Stevens background becomes critical in understanding the nature of their arrangement. Stevens was the son of a U.S. Navy Vice Admiral Leslie Stevens who died in 1956.
Vice Admiral Stevens was a contemporary of Rear Admiral Rico Botta who according to a former aerospace engineer, William Tompkins, oversaw a covert Navy espionage program out of Nazi Germany to learn about Nazi flying saucers during World War II.
The 29 Navy spies in the program had not only learned that the Nazis had developed up to 30 different flying saucer prototypes, but were also being directly assisted by an extraterrestrial civilization comprising Reptilian hominoids in building secret bases in Antarctica.
Both Admirals Botta and Stevens were leading experts in aerospace engineering and headed top Navy aerospace facilities at various points during their careers. In 1946, both were retroactively promoted to the rank of Rear Admiral as of 1943, for their wartime duties.
Botta went on to head the Naval Air Material Center out of Philadelphia Shipyard from 1950 to 1952. It is from this and similar command assignments that plans began for a secret Navy space fleet aimed to counter what the Nazis had developed in Antarctica.
Similarly, Admiral Stevens was known for his accomplishments in aeronautics and is quoted as having“had a hand in the design or conception of all naval aircraft, aircraft carriers and carrier landing apparatus.” Admiral Stevens’ aeronautics expertise meant that he was almost certainly aware of what Botta had learned about Nazi aerospace projects.
It is more than likely that Admirals Botta and Stevens were the first to comprise a covert Navy leadership group that would oversee the development of a U.S. Navy space fleet based on modern aircraft carrier battle groups that would in time join an interplanetary alliance.
This is precisely what Tompkins says he was asked to do at the Douglas Aircraft Company on behalf of the Navy from 1952 to 1963. Tompkins says that he was covertly assisted by Nordic extraterrestrials while he was helping design kilometers-long spacecraft for future U.S. Navy space battle groups. In interviews, Tompkins has revealed that Nordic extraterrestrials were working directly with senior officers within the U.S. Navy.
Admiral Stevens went on to occupy important positions with the national security council system, including the Psychological Strategy Board where he became Director.
Formally established in 1951 by President Truman, it is one of the interagency boards that was set up to disinform the general public about the reality of flying saucers, while secretly gathering information about what other nations were doing in response to the phenomenon.
William Tompkins confirmed, in a private phone call on August 24, that Admiral Stevens was aware of what the Navy had learned about Nazi Germany’s flying saucer programs.
He further confirmed that Admiral Stevens played a direct role in setting up a secret U.S. Navy space program, and that his son, Leslie Stevens, IV, was aware of what was happening.
Tompkins claims here are consistent with what he says happened from 1985 to 1999, when he ran an extraterrestrial related “Special Projects” out of the U.S. Navy League center in Medford, Oregon. He said that it was common for Navy officers to have their children briefed about secret space programs and alliances with different extraterrestrial races.
This was done in order to prepare the next generation of navy officers and/or leaders for a world where extraterrestrial life was common knowledge. This is similar to another program happening on the U.S. East Coast as described by Catherine Austin Fitts, a former Assistant Secretary of Housing and Urban Development.
She was asked to participate in strategy sessions that were being conducted by the Arlington Institute, a non-profit organization headed by John Peterson that was assigned a number of US Navy contracts. Fitts says:
“John asked me to help him with a high level strategic plan Arlington was planning to undertake for the Undersecretary of the Navy…
I met with a group of high level people in the military in the process - including the Undersecretary.
According to John, the purpose of the plan - discussed in front of several military or retired military officers and former government officials - was to help the Navy adjust their operations for a world in which it was commonly known that aliens exist and live among us."
Tompkins has supplied a document confirming that he ran a Special Projects Committee with the U.S. Navy League. Additionally, two retired Navy Officers, Art Lumley (Commander), and Larry Boeck (Captain) have confirmed that Tompkins did discuss extraterrestrial projects at Navy League meetings, and was regarded as an expert on these issues.
Minutes of Board Meeting refers to Special Projects Committee
Tompkins’ testimony confirms that it was common practice for Navy officers, briefed about extraterrestrial life, to pass on some of this highly classified information to their children.
Consequently, it is almost certain that Admiral Stevens revealed to his son, Leslie Stevens, some of the classified details about the existence of extraterrestrial life and secret space programs prior to his death.
It is furthermore very possible, that Stevens, Jr., was part of a Navy sanctioned “soft disclosure” process that would use the television/movie industry to reveal elements of the Navy’s planned secret space program.
All this helps considerably in finally understanding the nature of the business relationship between Roddenberry and Leslie Stevens, Jr. Stevens could not himself directly create a science fiction show revealing details of the classified information given to him by his deceased father, but he very likely received tacit permission by Navy officials, to share it with television/movie producers such as Roddenberry who would fictionalize the information.
Consequently, the business relationship between Gene Roddenberry and Leslie Stevens, suggests that Star Trek was initially based on information gained by Admirals Botta and Stevens. A future U.S. Navy space fleet would be developed that would actively cooperate with Nordic extraterrestrials in an alliance that would counter the Nazis and their Reptilian allies.
In the Star Trek series, the Nordics were depicted as Vulcans, the Reptilians as Klingons, while the Nazis were represented as genetically enhanced humans.
Furthermore, it is topical to recognize that Roddenberry chose the beautiful, iconic city of San Francisco as the military headquarters for his fictional Starfleet Command in Star Trek, elevating this U.S. city in the hearts and minds of generations as a symbol of humanity’s bright future achievements.
It would also directly represent the Navy’s plan for its secret space program becoming a model for integrating other nations in a united partnership.
Two independent sources, former Asian Bureau chief for Forbes Magazine, Benjamin Fulford in 2011, and an anonymous source called the “Hidden Hand” in 2009, have revealed that the Illuminati/Cabal specifically named San Francisco (along with Damascus) as a city that will be made uninhabitable in its Armageddon agenda.
Does San Francisco pose a double threat as both a symbol of hope within the collective psyche, and the truth of a reality it mirrors in the military’s accomplishments? If so, then the Cabal’s goal is not to destroy a city, but to break the collective spirit of a peaceful human vision for a spacefaring future that begins with full disclosure.
The above evidence suggests Star Trek was no mere science fiction series, but was actively encouraged through a business arrangement between Roddenberry and the son of a deceased U.S. Navy admiral, who was directly involved in developing a secret U.S. Navy Space Fleet called Solar Warden.
As we remember the 52nd anniversary of Star Trek, it is worth remembering the roles of U.S. Navy admirals that helped launch the real secret space program upon which Star Trek was modeled.
The Origins Of Political Correctness
November 9 2024 | From: Academia / Various Where does all this stuff that you’ve heard about this morning – the victim feminism, the gay rights movement, the invented statistics, the rewritten history, the lies, the demands, all the rest of it – where does it come from?
For the first time in our history, westerners have to be fearful of what they say, of what they write, and of what they think. They have to be afraid of using the wrong word, a word denounced as offensive or insensitive, or racist, sexist, or homophobic.
We have seen other countries, particularly in this century, where this has been the case. And we have always regarded them with a mixture of pity, and to be truthful, some amusement, because it has struck us as so strange that people would allow a situation to develop where they would be afraid of what words they used.
But we now have this situation in this country. We have it primarily on college campuses, but it is spreading throughout the whole society. Were does it come from? What is it?
We call it “Political Correctness.” The name originated as something of a joke, literally in a comic strip, and we tend still to think of it as only half-serious. In fact, it’s deadly serious.
It is the great disease of our century, the disease that has left tens of millions of people dead in Europe, in Russia, in China, indeed around the world. It is the disease of ideology. PC is not funny. PC is deadly serious.
If we look at it analytically, if we look at it historically, we quickly find out exactly what it is. Political Correctness is cultural Marxism. It is Marxism translated from economic into cultural terms.
It is an effort that goes back not to the 1960s and the hippies and the peace movement, but back to World War I. If we compare the basic tenets of Political Correctness with classical Marxism the parallels are very obvious.
First of all, both are totalitarian ideologies.
The totalitarian nature of Political Correctness is revealed nowhere more clearly than on college campuses, many of which at this point are small ivy covered North Koreas, where the student or faculty member who dares to cross any of the lines set up by the gender feminist or the homosexual-rights activists, or the local black or Hispanic group, or any of the other sainted “victims” groups that PC revolves around, quickly find themselves in judicial trouble.
Within the small legal system of the college, they face formal charges – some star-chamber proceeding – and punishment. That is a little look into the future that Political Correctness intends for the nation as a whole.
Indeed, all ideologies are totalitarian because the essence of an ideology (I would note that conservatism correctly understood is not an ideology) is to take some philosophy and say on the basis of this philosophy certain things must be true – such as the whole of the history of our culture is the history of the oppression of women.
Since reality contradicts that, reality must be forbidden. It must become forbidden to acknowledge the reality of our history.
People must be forced to live a lie, and since people are naturally reluctant to live a lie, they naturally use their ears and eyes to look out and say, “Wait a minute. This isn’t true. I can see it isn’t true,” the power of the state must be put behind the demand to live a lie.
That is why ideology invariably creates a totalitarian state.
Second, the cultural Marxism of Political Correctness, like economic Marxism, has a single factor explanation of history. Economic Marxism says that all of history is determined by ownership of means of production.
Cultural Marxism, or Political Correctness, says that all history is determined by power, by which groups defined in terms of race, sex, etc., have power over which other groups. Nothing else matters. All literature, indeed, is about that. Everything in the past is about that one thing.
Third, just as in classical economic Marxism certain groups, i.e. workers and peasants, are a priori good, and other groups, i.e., the bourgeoisie and capital owners, are evil. In the cultural Marxism of Political Correctness certain groups are good – feminist women, (only feminist women, non-feminist women are deemed not to exist) blacks, Hispanics, homosexuals.
These groups are determined to be “victims,” and therefore automatically good regardless of what any of them do. Similarly, white males are determined automatically to be evil, thereby becoming the equivalent of the bourgeoisie in economic Marxism.
Fourth, both economic and cultural Marxism rely on expropriation. When the classical Marxists, the communists, took over a country like Russia, they expropriated the bourgeoisie, they took away their property. Similarly, when the cultural Marxists take over a university campus, they expropriate through things like quotas for admissions.
When a white student with superior qualifications is denied admittance to a college in favor of a black or Hispanic who isn’t as well qualified, the white student is expropriated. And indeed, affirmative action, in our whole society today, is a system of expropriation.
White owned companies don’t get a contract because the contract is reserved for a company owned by, say, Hispanics or women. So expropriation is a principle tool for both forms of Marxism.
And finally, both have a method of analysis that automatically gives the answers they want. For the classical Marxist, it’s Marxist economics. For the cultural Marxist, it’s deconstruction.
Deconstruction essentially takes any text, removes all meaning from it and re-inserts any meaning desired. So we find, for example, that all of Shakespeare is about the suppression of women, or the Bible is really about race and gender.
All of these texts simply become grist for the mill, which proves that “all history is about which groups have power over which other groups.”
So the parallels are very evident between the classical Marxism that we’re familiar with in the old Soviet Union and the cultural Marxism that we see today as Political Correctness.
But the parallels are not accidents. The parallels did not come from nothing. The fact of the matter is that Political Correctness has a history, a history that is much longer than many people are aware of outside a small group of academics who have studied this.
And the history goes back, as I said, to World War I, as do so many of the pathologies that are today bringing our society, and indeed our culture, down.
Marxist theory said that when the general European war came (as it did come in Europe in 1914), the working class throughout Europe would rise up and overthrow their governments – the bourgeois governments – because the workers had more in common with each other across the national boundaries than they had in common with the bourgeoisie and the ruling class in their own country. Well, 1914 came and it didn’t happen.
Throughout Europe, workers rallied to their flag and happily marched off to fight each other. The Kaiser shook hands with the leaders of the Marxist Social Democratic Party in Germany and said there are no parties now, there are only Germans. And this happened in every country in Europe. So something was wrong.
Marxists knew by definition it couldn’t be the theory. In 1917, they finally got a Marxist coup in Russia and it looked like the theory was working, but it stalled again.
It didn’t spread and when attempts were made to spread immediately after the war, with the Spartacist uprising in Berlin, with the Bela Kun government in Hungary, with the Munich Soviet, the workers didn’t support them.
So the Marxists’ had a problem. And two Marxist theorists went to work on it: Antonio Gramsci in Italy and Georg Lukacs in Hungary.
Gramsci said the workers will never see their true class interests, as defined by Marxism, until they are freed from Western culture, and particularly from the Christian religion – that they are blinded by culture and religion to their true class interests.
Lukacs, who was considered the most brilliant Marxist theorist since Marx himself, said in 1919, “Who will save us from Western Civilization?” He also theorized that the great obstacle to the creation of a Marxist paradise was the culture: Western civilization itself.
Lukacs gets a chance to put his ideas into practice, because when the home grown Bolshevik Bela Kun government is established in Hungary in 1919, he becomes deputy commissar for culture, and the first thing he did was introduce sex education into the Hungarian schools.
This ensured that the workers would not support the Bela Kun government, because the Hungarian people looked at this aghast, workers as well as everyone else. But he had already made the connection that today many of us are still surprised by, that we would consider the “latest thing.”
In 1923 in Germany, a think-tank is established that takes on the role of translating Marxism from economic into cultural terms, that creates Political Correctness as we know it today, and essentially it has created the basis for it by the end of the 1930s.
This comes about because the very wealthy young son of a millionaire German trader by the name of Felix Weil has become a Marxist and has lots of money to spend. He is disturbed by the divisions among the Marxists, so he sponsors something called the First Marxist Work Week, where he brings Lukacs and many of the key German thinkers together for a week, working on the differences of Marxism.
And he says, “What we need is a think-tank.” Washington is full of think tanks and we think of them as very modern. In fact they go back quite a ways.
He endows an institute, associated with Frankfurt University, established in 1923, that was originally supposed to be known as the Institute for Marxism.
But the people behind it decided at the beginning that it was not to their advantage to be openly identified as Marxist. The last thing Political Correctness wants is for people to figure out it’s a form of Marxism. So instead they decide to name it the Institute for Social Research.
Weil is very clear about his goals. In 1917, he wrote to Martin Jay the author of a principle book on the Frankfurt School, as the Institute for Social Research soon becomes known informally, and he said, “I wanted the institute to become known, perhaps famous, due to its contributions to Marxism.”
Well, he was successful. The first director of the Institute, Carl Grunberg, an Austrian economist, concluded his opening address, according to Martin Jay, “by clearly stating his personal allegiance to Marxism as a scientific methodology.” Marxism, he said, would be the ruling principle at the Institute, and that never changed.
The initial work at the Institute was rather conventional, but in 1930 it acquired a new director named Max Horkheimer, and Horkheimer’s views were very different. He was very much a Marxist renegade. The people who create and form the Frankfurt School are renegade Marxists.
They’re still very much Marxist in their thinking, but they’re effectively run out of the party. Moscow looks at what they are doing and says, “Hey, this isn’t us, and we’re not going to bless this.”
Horkheimer’s initial heresy is that he is very interested in Freud, and the key to making the translation of Marxism from economic into cultural terms is essentially that he combined it with Freudism.
Again, Martin Jay writes:
“If it can be said that in the early years of its history, the Institute concerned itself primarily with an analysis of bourgeois society’s socio-economic sub-structure,” – and I point out that Jay is very sympathetic to the Frankfurt School, I’m not reading from a critic here – “in the years after 1930 its primary interests lay in its cultural superstructure.
Indeed the traditional Marxist formula regarding the relationship between the two was brought into question by Critical Theory.”
The stuff we’ve been hearing about – the radical feminism, the women’s studies departments, the gay studies departments, the black studies departments – all these things are branches of Critical Theory.
What the Frankfurt School essentially does is draw on both Marx and Freud in the 1930s to create this theory called Critical Theory. The term is ingenious because you’re tempted to ask, “What is the theory?” The theory is to criticize.
The theory is that the way to bring down Western culture and the capitalist order is not to lay down an alternative. They explicitly refuse to do that. They say it can’t be done, that we can’t imagine what a free society would look like (their definition of a free society).
As long as we’re living under repression – the repression of a capitalistic economic order which creates (in their theory) the Freudian condition, the conditions that Freud describes in individuals of repression – we can’t even imagine it.
What Critical Theory is about is simply criticizing. It calls for the most destructive criticism possible, in every possible way, designed to bring the current order down.
And, of course, when we hear from the feminists that the whole of society is just out to get women and so on, that kind of criticism is a derivative of Critical Theory. It is all coming from the 1930s, not the 1960s.
Other key members who join up around this time are Theodore Adorno, and, most importantly, Erich Fromm and Herbert Marcuse.
Fromm and Marcuse introduce an element which is central to Political Correctness, and that’s the sexual element. And particularly Marcuse, who in his own writings calls for a society of “polymorphous perversity,” that is his definition of the future of the world that they want to create.
Marcuse in particular by the 1930s is writing some very extreme stuff on the need for sexual liberation, but this runs through the whole Institute. So do most of the themes we see in Political Correctness, again in the early 30s. In Fromm’s view, masculinity and femininity were not reflections of ‘essential’ sexual differences, as the Romantics had thought.
They were derived instead from differences in life functions, which were in part socially determined. Sex is a construct; sexual differences are a construct.
Another example is the emphasis we now see on environmentalism.
“Materialism as far back as Hobbes had led to a manipulative dominating attitude toward nature.” That was Horkhemier writing in 1933 in Materialismus und Moral.
“The theme of man’s domination of nature,” according to Jay, ” was to become a central concern of the Frankfurt School in subsequent years.”
“Horkheimer’s antagonism to the fetishization of labor, (here’s were they’re obviously departing from Marxist orthodoxy) expressed another dimension of his materialism, the demand for human, sensual happiness.”
In one of his most trenchant essays, Egoism and the Movement for Emancipation, written in 1936, Horkeimer “discussed the hostility to personal gratification inherent in bourgeois culture.”
And he specifically referred to the Marquis de Sade, favorably, for his “protest…against asceticism in the name of a higher morality.”
How does all of this stuff flood in here? How does it flood into our universities, and indeed into our lives today?
The members of the Frankfurt School are Marxist, they are also, to a man, Jewish. In 1933 the Nazis came to power in Germany, and not surprisingly they shut down the Institute for Social Research. And its members fled.
KGB Defector Yuri Bezmenov's Warning to America
29 years ago, Soviet defector and KGB operative Yuri Bezmenov, specializing in the fields of Marxist-Leninist propaganda and ideological subversion; warned us about the silent war being waged against America as part of a long term plan to take over and destroy the American system and way of life.
Watch this clip in amazement as you realize he is describing exactly what's happening in America today, where by Obama and his gang of Marxist usurpers [this part is historical, obviously] who now have control of your government are just the culmination of a very long term plan, but are the ones who are about to bring it into fruition.
Bezmenov was born in 1939 in Mytishchi, near Moscow to a high ranking Soviet Army officer. At the age of seventeen, he entered the Institute of Oriental Languages, a part of the Moscow State University which was under the direct control of the KGB and the Communist Central Committee. In addition to languages, he studied history, literature, and music, and became an expert on Indian culture.
During his second year, Bezmenov sought to look like a person from India; his teachers encouraged this because graduates of the school were employed as diplomats, foreign journalists, or spies.
As a Soviet student, he was also required to take compulsory military training in which he was taught how to play "strategic war games" using the maps of foreign countries, as well as how to interrogate prisoners of war.
They fled to New York City, and the Institute was reestablished there in 1933 with help from Columbia University. And the members of the Institute, gradually through the 1930s, though many of them remained writing in German, shift their focus from Critical Theory about German society, destructive criticism about every aspect of that society, to Critical Theory directed toward American society.
There is another very important transition when the war comes. Some of them go to work for the government, including Herbert Marcuse, who became a key figure in the OSS (the predecessor to the CIA), and some, including Horkheimer and Adorno, move to Hollywood.
These origins of Political Correctness would probably not mean too much to us today except for two subsequent events. The first was the student rebellion in the mid-1960s, which was driven largely by resistance to the draft and the Vietnam War.
But the student rebels needed theory of some sort. They couldn’t just get out there and say, “Hell no we won’t go,” they had to have some theoretical explanation behind it. Very few of them were interested in wading through Das Kapital.
Classical, economic Marxism is not light, and most of the radicals of the 60s were not deep. Fortunately for them, and unfortunately for our country today, and not just in the university, Herbert Marcuse remained in America when the Frankfurt School relocated back to Frankfurt after the war.
And whereas Mr. Adorno in Germany is appalled by the student rebellion when it breaks out there – when the student rebels come into Adorno’s classroom, he calls the police and has them arrested – Herbert Marcuse, who remained here, saw the 60s student rebellion as the great chance.
He saw the opportunity to take the work of the Frankfurt School and make it the theory of the New Left in the United States.
One of Marcuse’s books was the key book. It virtually became the bible of the SDS and the student rebels of the 60s. That book was Eros and Civilization. Marcuse argues that under a capitalistic order (he downplays the Marxism very strongly here, it is subtitled, A Philosophical Inquiry into Freud, but the framework is Marxist), repression is the essence of that order and that gives us the person Freud describes – the person with all the hang-ups, the neuroses, because his sexual instincts are repressed.
We can envision a future, if we can only destroy this existing oppressive order, in which we liberate eros, we liberate libido, in which we have a world of “polymorphous perversity,” in which you can “do you own thing.” And by the way, in that world there will no longer be work, only play.
What a wonderful message for the radicals of the mid-60s! They’re students, they’re baby-boomers, and they’ve grown up never having to worry about anything except eventually having to get a job.
And here is a guy writing in a way they can easily follow. He doesn’t require them to read a lot of heavy Marxism and tells them everything they want to hear which is essentially, “Do your own thing,” “If it feels good do it,” and “You never have to go to work.”
By the way, Marcuse is also the man who creates the phrase, “Make love, not war.”
Coming back to the situation people face on campus, Marcuse defines “liberating tolerance” as intolerance for anything coming from the Right and tolerance for anything coming from the Left. Marcuse joined the Frankfurt School, in 1932 (if I remember right). So, all of this goes back to the 1930s.
In conclusion, America [the West] today is in the throes of the greatest and direst transformation in its history. We are becoming an ideological state, a country with an official state ideology enforced by the power of the state.
In “hate crimes” we now have people serving jail sentences for political thoughts.
And the Congress is now moving to expand that category ever further. Affirmative action is part of it.
The terror against anyone who dissents from Political Correctness on campus is part of it. It’s exactly what we have seen happen in Russia, in Germany, in Italy, in China, and now it’s coming here.
And we don’t recognize it because we call it Political Correctness and laugh it off.
My message today is that it’s not funny, it’s here, it’s growing and it will eventually destroy, as it seeks to destroy, everything that we have ever defined as our freedom and our culture.
Freemasonry: Mankind’s Death Wish
November 8 2024 | From: VeteransToday / Various The source of the world's problems: The Gentile "leadership" has been chosen for its willingness to sell its soul to Cabalist central bankers by joining Freemasonry, which is Judaism for Gentiles.
As we have demonstrated in the past, any categorical and metaphysical denial of the moral order will inexorably lead to radical deceptions and sometimes covert operations.
Freemasonry, as a secret society and judaizing movement, is not only part of those deceptions but is congruent with Jewish magic and mysticism.
Only those in the upper echelon actually know what is exactly going on. As Jones documents:
“The deeper the adept penetrates, the more Talmudic are the mysteries revealed to him. The Rosicrusian, for example, is taught the inscription INRI which was nailed to the Cross means not Iesus Nazarensis Rex Iudeorum, but rather the ‘Iew of Nazareth Led into Iudea,’ a reading which deprives Christ of his divinity and reasserts the Talmudic calumny that Christ was a common criminal who deserved to be executed:
“‘As soon as the candidate has proved that he understands the Masonic meaning of this inscription INRI, the Master exclaims, My dear Brethren, the word is found again, and all present applaud this luminous discovery, that - He whose death was the consummation and the grand mystery of the Christian Religion was no more than a common Jew crucified for his crimes.’
“To be initiated into the higher degrees of Freemasonry, the adept must agree to become an assassin of the assassin of Adoniram. He must be willing to assassinate Christ and his representatives on earth. The revolutionary intent of Freemasonry becomes clear when the adept is informed that he must be willing to kill the king. Mystical Masonry is synonymous with Revolution. ”
Quoting Barruel, Jones writes:
“When the adept sallies forth from the cavern with the reeking head, he cries Nekom (I have killed him)….
“The adept is informed that till now he has only been partially admitted to the truth; that Equality and Liberty, which had constituted the first secret on his admission into Masonry, consisted in recognizing no superior on earth, and in viewing Kings and Pontiffs in another light than as men on a level with their fellow men, having no rights to sit on the throne, or to serve at the altar, but what the people had granted them.”
What a coincidence that Aleister Crowley, a 33rd degree mason who ended up having a master effect on pop music, who held “group orgies” as part of his regular rituals (including small children), and who ended up influencing sex perverts such as Alfred Kinsey, also performed similar rituals.
Some scholars would point out that “Rosicrucianism played an important role in the formation of Freemasonry.”
If that is the case, then we have another piece of evidence on our hands which clearly indicates that a marriage between Freemasonry and Rosicrucianism is almost unavoidable.
Both Freemasonry and Rosicrucianism, at their eventual root, sought to denigrate and attack Logos and this was very important during the French Revolution.
Since that was the case, again the marriage between the French Revolution and Jewish movements were two sides of the same coin. Isaac M. Wise wrote in 1866 that “Masonry is a Jewish institution, whose history, degrees, charges, passwords and explanations are Jewish from beginning to end.”
Henry Makow will enlighten us more on this issue.
Henry Makow: The source of the world’s problems: The Gentile “leadership” has been chosen for its willingness to sell its soul to Cabalist central bankers by joining Freemasonry, which is Judaism for Gentiles.
Architects of Deception, (2004) a 600-page history of Freemasonry by Estonian writer Jyri Lina offers profound insight into the true character of modern history.
Essentially, a dominant segment of Western society has joined the Khazarian financial elite in embracing Freemasonry, a satanic philosophy that represents a death wish for civilization.
They imagine somehow they will profit from the oppression, lies and suffering caused by their Communist “New World Order.”
Incredible, bizarre and depressing as it sounds, Lina writes that 300 mainly Jewish banking families have used Freemasonry as an instrument to subvert, control and degrade the Western world.
This view is consistent with the 1938 NKVD interrogation of an illuminati member who names many of these banking families and confirms that Freemasons are expendable tools.
Based on the archives of the powerful French Grand Orient Lodge, captured in June 1940 and later made public by the Russians, Lina details how Freemasonry has conspired for world domination and orchestrated all major revolutions and wars in the modern era. (Lina, p.332)
Masons, often Jewish, are responsible for communism, Zionism, socialism, liberalism (and feminism.) They love big government because it is the ultimate monopoly. “World government” (dictatorship) is the final trophy.
These “world revolutionary” “progressive” movements all mirror Lucifer’s rebellion against the laws of God and nature which is at the heart of Freemasonry.
They ensnare millions of gullible idealists by promising a utopia based on materialism and “reason” and dedicated to “liberty, equality and fraternity,” “public ownership” or some other idealistic sounding claptrap. It’s called bait-and-switch.
According to Lina: “The primary aim of modern freemasonry is to build the New World Order, a spiritual Temple of Solomon, where non-members are nothing but slaves [and] …where human beings would be sacrificed to Yahweh.” (52)
Lina cites numerous Jewish sources that claim Freemasonry is based on Judaism and is “the executive political organ of the Jewish financial elite.” (81-83)
The common goal of these Masonic inspired movements is to undermine religion, nation and family by promoting social division, self-indulgence and “tolerance” i.e. nihilism, globalism, sexual “liberation” and homosexuality thereby reducing humanity to a uniform dysfunctional and malleable mush.
Lina and others who attempt to alert humanity to its real condition are routinely slandered as anti-Semitic, fascist, and right wing “haters” by people indirectly employed by the bankers.
This tactic shields the conspirators from scrutiny and makes discussion of our grim predicament impossible.
I am a Jew. I am not part of this banking monopoly, nor is the majority of Jews. By way of analogy, the mafia is considered mostly Italian but most Italians do not belong to the mafia.
On the other hand, Italians don’t viciously attack opponents of organized crime and call them “racists” and “hate mongers”. That would look awfully suspicious. Jews compromise themselves by their defense of the Masonic Jewish bankers and their perverse vision for humanity.
The Khazarian Ideology
We cannot understand the modern world unless we appreciate that it is the result of the Masonic conspiracy. People scoff yet the evidence stares them in the face every day.
Lina believes, “Freemasonry plays the same role in Western society as the Communist Party did in the Soviet Union. Without belonging to the freemasonry there is no chance of a fast career, regardless of how talented one is.”
Keep in mind that Communism was a Masonic enterprise and the puzzle starts to take shape.
Lina says Freemasons not only control politics but also virtually every sector of Western society, including science and culture. “The present cultural life has become virtually unconscious,” he writes. “We have witnessed the beginning of cultural senility.” (333)
In his pamphlet “The Open Conspiracy: Blueprint for a World Revolution” (1929) the Freemason H.G. Wells describes an “open secret society” consisting of society’s leading men operating as a hidden force to secure world resources, reduce population through war and replace the nation state with world dictatorship. (340)
Masonic Ideology
Human beings are naturally attracted to good and repulsed by evil. Thus evil always represents itself as good.
To the public, and its own lower ranks, Freemasonry pretends to be dedicated to “making good men better”, humanism, tolerance, and you-name-it.
If this were true, would they have to extract vows of secrecy from members on pain of slitting their throat? Would they have been condemned by many Popes and banned from numerous countries? (84)
I do not wish to impugn the many good and decent men in the lower “Blue Degrees” who are unaware of Freemasonry’s true function and character.
But there is abundant evidence and testimony that Freemasonry is a satanic cult dedicated to the worship of death. (134-138)
For example, when the Italian Grand Orient Lodge was evicted from the Palazzio Borghese in Rome in 1893, the owner found a shrine dedicated to Satan.
The Italian freemasons published a newspaper in the 1880s where they admitted time and again, “Our leader is Satan!” (135)
The Masons also admit to having a revolutionary political agenda.
Typical of statements Lina cites from Masonic publications is the following from a German magazine in 1910: “The driving thought is at all times focused on destruction and annihilation, because the power of this great secret society can only rise from the ruins of the existing order of society.” (272)
Conclusion
The Illuminist Conspiracy is the brake responsible for humanity’s arrested development. Mankind resembles a person suffering from a serious disease and sinking into a coma.
Juri Lina, left, has written a courageous book to revive us. He says we face “the largest spiritual crisis in the history of mankind…They have taken our history, our dignity, our wisdom and our honor, sense of responsibility, spiritual insights and our traditions.”
We are partly to blame, he says: “We have failed to act against the Masonic madness due to our enormous gullibility. We have been totally fooled and ignored the warning signals.”(274)
He ends on a hopeful note, saying evil is dysfunctional and inevitably destroys itself. “Freemasonry carries within it the seeds of its own destruction.” (563)
Wars, revolutions and depressions are all part of a “revolutionary” process designed to frogmarch humanity to “world government” under the rubric of Freemasonry which may be a surrogate for an alliance of occult Khazarian and gentile financial elites.
Their “self-destruction” seems to be our best hope since the public is too feckless and weak to resist.
I Am A Trans Woman – But I Think This Woke World Has Gone Too Far
November 7 2024 | From: RT / Various Trans people have lost the plot. Every day, an increasing amount of absurdity floods in as they do more harm than good.
They scream for acceptance without realizing that the ones damaging their image aren't bigots, but themselves.
From anger directed at celebrities for the rational belief that parents shouldn't decide whether their three-year-old is trans, to a culture of outrage that freaks out at the most minor of offenses, transgender activists have become detrimental to my, and others', very existence.
Not helping matters is the fact that these people are laying bombs within our language in the hope they trigger, so they themselves can become triggered. Saying 'transgendered' instead of 'transgender' can see you labeled as transphobic, as can saying 'transwomen' instead of 'trans (notice the space) women.'
Important Note: Historically there are people who have truly felt that they were born into a body of the wrong gender.
The problem we are faced with today is that, in line with stated objectives of the 'New World Order' doctrines - they have clearly stated that they want to destroy the family unit, encourage sexual promiscuity and basically confuse and debase society as a whole:
"In order to achieve their aims [the Cabal] they are corrupting societies across the globe: Breakdown the family unit, breakdown national pride, destroy the educational system with common core, promote sexual promiscuity, deviance, pedophilia, abortion, a drug culture.
Co-opt and corrupt political leaders with bribes. Set hybrid wars and color revolutions in place in all countries that are not towing the line. Undermine and discredit the values, morals and teachings of all religions and where possible turn believers into murderous intolerant fanatics who go on genocide missions.”
"The hidden goal of feminism is to destroy the family, which interferes with state brainwashing of the young. Side benefits include depopulation and widening the tax base. Displacing men in the role of providers also destabilizes the family."
The merging of sexes and sexuality also plays into the transhumanist agenda of the cabal. It has been discovered that specific toxins and chemical agents have been introduced into the environment and everyday products that contribute specifically towards the rise in sexual confusion and 'transgenderism' that we see happening all around is every day.
This is a linguistic minefield with the sole intent of catching people off guard. And those who are caught in its blast are branded as bigots.
This concept is nonsensical, as it's one thing to correct someone who made a grammatical mistake, but another thing altogether to get outright offended when someone makes a simple error, and that's what is occurring.
A turn of events which only pushes people away as no one wants to associate with a group of people who become so easily upset.
Hampering things even further is the fact that the once-radical portion of the left has seemingly taken control, and now no one can speak up lest they become a target for the vitriol and abuse of which this conglomerate is composed.
How do I know this? Because I'm a trans person myself, and my reward for speaking with rationality is to be labeled a 'self-loathing, bootlicking, trans-misogynistic terf.'
And if I can be called a transphobe, then your normal human being doesn't stand a chance – especially in an era when people are pushing an agenda that suggests you better suck d**k or you're a bigot.
I desperately wish I was making that last bit up.
In late August, journalist – or, let's be real – outrage merchant, Ana Valens, went on a tirade over at the Daily Dot about how it was transphobic to decline sex with a trans person on the basis that they are trans.
Likewise, just last week, women's competitive cyclist Rachel McKinnon made multiple claims that are outright audacious. In one instance, she said"genital preferences are transphobic," and in another she boldly expressed that any sexual orientation other than pansexuality is immoral.
The media warned us that the recent release of 'Joker' was going to lead to an incel uprising, but I don't think they meant it quite like this.
Trans people want all the compassion and acceptance in the world, yet in many cases they're not willing to be equally as understanding. Last year, the flames of fury flared up when a woman named Kristi Hanna filed a human rights complaint against a women's shelter after she was forced to share a room with a transgender woman in Toronto.
Many people took it at face value and levied all sorts of hate at her, but the actual situation is more complex. Hanna is a rape victim, and her roommate was a pre-op trans woman who wasn't yet far enough into their transition to be passable, or even fully presentable. As was described by Ms Hanna, her roommate was male-bodied with facial and chest hair.
Now maybe it's because I'm a rape victim who battles my own forms of PTSD, but I too would be triggered by sharing a room with a complete stranger who looks like a man. I don't care what they identify as. In regards to Kristi Hanna, that's exactly what happened.
As was reported by the National Post, the sharing of a room with someone who looked like a man caused her "stress, anxiety, rape flashbacks, symptoms of post-traumatic stress disorder, and sleep deprivation."
When she reported this to the shelter staff, they offered to move her to a new room, but it lacked a door, therefore allowing no privacy, so she left the shelter altogether.
Yet to the trans community, none of that mattered, and Kristi was raked over the coals. Even I was attacked for trying to defend her. Worse still is the fact that shelters which exclude trans women are now being vandalized. Never mind that they help women who need it.
To the petulant children who make up what I call the 'pronoun police,' all they can think of is their own selfish and self-centric world views.
Few in this 'community,' to which I've been forcefully tied, seem to have any basic understanding of the various reasons why our presence may be triggering to some, especially in a women's shelter that houses rape victims.
It shouldn't take a big brain to see why a male-looking individual with a floppy penis may not be the best fit.
A fact of reality is that I was born a boy. Even now, post-hormone replacement therapy, I have masculine traits that will never go away. When I die, if far off into the future I'm dug up, my bones will have archeologists pegging me as male, not female.
I bring that analogy up because many trans people seem to deny they were born as the gender opposite of what they identify as. But I am not 100 percent female, and I never will be.
I'll never have a period, although some smooth-brained idiots like to argue that "some women have issues that prevent them from having periods, so does that mean you're saying they're not women too?"
No, that's not what that means. It means I have a d**k and no potential even exists for me to have a period. Because, unlike biological women who may have conditions that effect how their bodies work, they still have the proper bodies of the sex it happens to be.
I don't. My chromosomes are XY, and I was born a boy. I'll never have to worry about cervical cancer, though when I'm older I will want to have my prostate checked.
None of this means trans people shouldn't be respected as the gender they present themselves as. We are anomalies in that our brains for some reason developed on a course which differs from what our chromosomes dictate.
I'm not going to call being trans a mental illness, but it is an issue that stems from the brain. Even scans of that organ reveal people like me have brains more closely resembling the gender we present ourselves to be, and due to that, I'm a proponent of supporting transitioning, but that support comes with some caveats.
I, for one, don't think trans women should be competing against cis women in competitive sports. At least, not outside of specialized leagues where everyone consents to trans women being allowed.
In normal events, we are seeing trans people destroy records in track, weightlifting, and other events, and that is not fair to biological females.
I'm also opposed to letting kids take various meds. By all means, if your child is trans, it's for the best to support and love them, but growing up is a confusing time, and it's maybe not a good idea to let them begin a full-on transition.
These days it's simply too easy to get a diagnosis of gender dysphoria, and I fear the repercussions.
I have zero doubts in my mind that soon enough we will have teens and adults stepping forward who were convinced they were trans at a young age, only to grow up and realize they aren't.
Some boys are just effeminate and some girls are just a bit masculine, but today, society is going out of its way to tell them they're trans.
A scary thought for a community that seems to already run on fear.
In 2017, the Southern Poverty Law Center sent out a tweet linking an article about transgender hate murders. In a follow up tweet, they listed names of all the trans people who had been murdered that year.
The placement of the names below an article about hate murders seems to imply all of the listed names were the victims of hate crimes.
As is so often the case, this isn't true. Of the names listed, three stand out. Sean Hake, Kiwi Herring, and Scout Schultz. What's important about these people is that they weren't killed for anything related to their gender identities.
All three were shot by police in different states after charging at law enforcement with knives. That same year, multiple non-trans people were killed by police for the very same reason.
Yet the trans individuals' deaths are tallied and used as examples of a rising trend in the murder of transgender people – a trend that has been occurring for years.
What's most disingenuous is that, in many cases, there's little to no proof that their murders are linked to their status of being trans. Some are sex workers in dangerous areas where cis women are also found murdered each year, or they're just victims of normal everyday violence.
It sucks, but a lot of people just happen to get shot in the United States, and for a myriad of reasons.
Just this year, Claire Legato, a trans woman in Ohio, was shot dead after her mother got into an altercation with a man in their yard about an issue relating to theft. Jordan Cofer, also from Ohio, was tragically killed when a gunman went on a mass shooting in Dayton.
These two deaths are included on the Human Rights Campaign's list of "violence against the transgender community."The list ends with this sentence: "HRC has been tracking reports of fatal anti-transgender violence for the past several years."
"Anti-transgender" violence. Hmm, weird, I didn't know the Dayton, Ohio gunman did all that for a single person.
Even in cases where a transgender person kills themselves, if an agenda can be pushed, this community will immediately take a still-warm corpse and bludgeon people with it.
This week, comedian and actress Daphne Dorman took her own life. She was cited by Dave Chappelle in his most recent Netflix standup as the person who "was laughing the hardest" at his trans jokes. In case you're unaware, this is the standup special that caused many in the media to cry foul and call Chapelle 'transphobic.'
Daphne, on the other hand, thought he was hilarious, and would go on to tweet in support of her friend. Her words don't matter anymore though, because now that she can't defend herself, her existence has been retconned and it is now Dave Chappelle's fault she died; a frankly just sickening and frustrating turn of events. Although it is one that makes sense when you look a bit deeper.
In 2017, at the HRC National Dinner, president Chad Griffin gave an eye-opening speech. He began by thanking Hillary Clinton who had a speaking role that year, before then repeatedly emphasizing how things for LGBT individuals were much brighter under Obama. This is important because the HRC is a major supporter of Democratic candidates and politicians.
He eventually went on to discuss 'HRC Rising,' or what he labeled as the single largest grassroots expansion in the organization's history.
This was important to him, as he proceeded to say: "It's critical we organize and mobilize the 10 million-plus LGBTQ voters in this country. Which by the way, is a voting bloc that is larger than the margin of victory of every presidential election since 1984."
For a couple years now, this speech hasn't sat well with me. I look at our media landscape and watch as fearmongering rules the day. A narrative has been created which paints anyone on the right as a hateful bigot, and has gay and trans people fearful that they're going to die.
Trans lists over-conflate and simplify the reasons people are murdered. Comedians are blamed for suicides that have nothing to do with anything they've done.
And anyone who so much as questions the absurdity of what's happening is torn down, and labeled every negative thing that will stick.
Why this keeps happening is clear. An environment has been created that is pushing people to conform to a particular mindset by brute-force scare tactics, and this is inevitably convincing them to vote a certain way.
The left is ruling by division and fear. Browse social media and the trans-death stat is cited ad nauseam.
These people legitimately believe they're going to die. All the while, the actual issues that caused those deaths aren't being discussed.
Inner city crime and prostitution are big factors, as is poor mental health. I mean, sane people don't go charging at police with knives.
Yet those issues don't get blamed, nor are they being adequately discussed. Daphne Dorman, in these people's eyes, didn't join the 41 percent because she had deep-rooted issues. No, it's Chappelle's fault. It's the right's fault. It's the bigot's fault.
And as a right-leaning individual myself, who also happens to be trans, I know this to be false. I'm embraced by my community. They aren't transphobic, they don't want me dead; they just have issues with much of the same stuff I do.
A lot of trans people call me a self-loather, but I don't loathe myself, nor do I loathe the fact that I'm trans.
I just loathe the community I've been forcefully grouped into, and I think it's understandable why a lot of other people do too.
Trannies and their allies are now their own worst enemies, but unlike them, I refuse to shoot myself in the foot.
They Live, We Sleep: Beware The Growing Evil In Our Midst
November 6 2024 | From: TheRutherfordInstitute / Various “You see them on the street. You watch them on TV. You might even vote for one this fall. You think they’re people just like you. You’re wrong. Dead wrong.” - They Live
There’s the world we see (or are made to see) and then there’s the one we sense (and occasionally catch a glimpse of), the latter of which is a far cry from the propaganda-driven reality manufactured by the government and its corporate sponsors, including the media.
Indeed, what most Westerners perceive as life in America - privileged, progressive and free - is a far cry from reality, where economic inequality is growing, real agendas and real power are buried beneath layers of Orwellian doublespeak and corporate obfuscation, and “freedom,” such that it is, is meted out in small, legalistic doses by militarized police armed to the teeth.
All is not as it seems.
This is the premise of John Carpenter’s film They Live, which was released more than 30 years ago, and remains unnervingly, chillingly appropriate for our modern age.
Best known for his horror film Halloween, which assumes that there is a form of evil so dark that it can’t be killed, Carpenter’s larger body of work is infused with a strong anti-authoritarian, anti-establishment, laconic bent that speaks to the filmmaker’s concerns about the unraveling of our society, particularly our government.
Time and again, Carpenter portrays the government working against its own citizens, a populace out of touch with reality, technology run amok, and a future more horrific than any horror film.
In Escape from New York, Carpenter presents fascism as the future of America. In The Thing, a remake of the 1951 sci-fi classic of the same name, Carpenter presupposes that increasingly we are all becoming dehumanized.
In Christine, the film adaptation of Stephen King’s novel about a demon-possessed car, technology exhibits a will and consciousness of its own and goes on a murderous rampage.
In In the Mouth of Madness, Carpenter notes that evil grows when people lose “the ability to know the difference between reality and fantasy.”
And then there is Carpenter’s They Live, in which two migrant workers discover that the world is not as it seems.
In fact, the population is actually being controlled and exploited by aliens working in partnership with an oligarchic elite.
All the while, the populace - blissfully unaware of the real agenda at work in their lives - has been lulled into complacency, indoctrinated into compliance, bombarded with media distractions, and hypnotized by subliminal messages beamed out of television and various electronic devices, billboards and the like.
It is only when homeless drifter John Nada (played to the hilt by the late Roddy Piper) discovers a pair of doctored sunglasses - Hoffman lenses - that Nada sees what lies beneath the elite’s fabricated reality: control and bondage.
When viewed through the lens of truth, the elite, who appear human until stripped of their disguises, are shown to be monsters who have enslaved the citizenry in order to prey on them.
Likewise, billboards blare out hidden, authoritative messages: a bikini-clad woman in one ad is actually ordering viewers to “MARRY AND REPRODUCE.” Magazine racks scream “CONSUME” and “OBEY.” A wad of dollar bills in a vendor’s hand proclaims, “THIS IS YOUR GOD.”
When viewed through Nada’s Hoffman lenses, some of the other hidden messages being drummed into the people’s subconscious include: NO INDEPENDENT THOUGHT, CONFORM, SUBMIT, STAY ASLEEP, BUY, WATCH TV, NO IMAGINATION, and DO NOT QUESTION AUTHORITY.
This indoctrination campaign engineered by the elite in They Live is painfully familiar to anyone who has studied the decline of American [ Western ] culture.
A citizenry that does not think for themselves, obeys without question, is submissive, does not challenge authority, does not think outside the box, and is content to sit back and be entertained is a citizenry that can be easily controlled.
In this way, the subtle message of They Live provides an apt analogy of our own distorted vision of life in the American police state, what philosopher Slavoj Žižek refers to as dictatorship in democracy, “the invisible order which sustains your apparent freedom.”
We’re being fed a series of carefully contrived fictions that bear no resemblance to reality.
The powers-that-be want us to feel threatened by forces beyond our control (terrorists, shooters, bombers).
They want us afraid and dependent on the government and its militarized armies for our safety and well-being.
They want us distrustful of each other, divided by our prejudices, and at each other’s throats.
Most of all, they want us to continue to march in lockstep with their dictates.
Tune out the government’s attempts to distract, divert and befuddle us and tune into what’s really going on in this country, and you’ll run headlong into an unmistakable, unpalatable truth: the moneyed elite who rule us view us as expendable resources to be used, abused and discarded.
Instead, the study found that the government is ruled by the rich and powerful, or the so-called “economic elite.” Moreover, the researchers concluded that policies enacted by this governmental elite nearly always favor special interests and lobbying groups.
In other words, we are being ruled by an oligarchy disguised as a democracy, and arguably on our way towards fascism - a form of government where private corporate interests rule, money calls the shots, and the people are seen as mere subjects to be controlled.
As CBS News reports, “Once in office, members of Congress enjoy access to connections and information they can use to increase their wealth, in ways that are unparalleled in the private sector. And once politicians leave office, their connections allow them to profit even further.”
In denouncing this blatant corruption of America’s political system, former president Jimmy Carter blasted the process of getting elected - to the White House, governor’s mansion, Congress or state legislatures - as;
“Unlimited political bribery… a subversion of our political system as a payoff to major contributors, who want and expect, and sometimes get, favors for themselves after the election is over.”
Rest assured that when and if fascism finally takes hold in America, the basic forms of government will remain: Fascism will appear to be friendly. The legislators will be in session.
There will be elections, and the news media will continue to cover the entertainment and political trivia. Consent of the governed, however, will no longer apply. Actual control will have finally passed to the oligarchic elite controlling the government behind the scenes.
Sound familiar?
Clearly, we are now ruled by an oligarchic elite of governmental and corporate interests.
We have moved into “corporatism” (favored by Benito Mussolini), which is a halfway point on the road to full-blown fascism.
Corporatism is where the few moneyed interests - not elected by the citizenry - rule over the many. In this way, it is not a democracy or a republican form of government, which is what the American government was established to be.
It is a top-down form of government and one which has a terrifying history typified by the developments that occurred in totalitarian regimes of the past: police states where everyone is watched and spied on, rounded up for minor infractions by government agents, placed under police control, and placed in detention (a.k.a. concentration) camps.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
For the final hammer of fascism to fall, it will require the most crucial ingredient: the majority of the people will have to agree that it’s not only expedient but necessary.
But why would a people agree to such an oppressive regime?
Fear is the method most often used by politicians to increase the power of government. And, as most social commentators recognize, an atmosphere of fear permeates modern America: fear of terrorism, fear of the police, fear of our neighbors and so on.
The propaganda of fear has been used quite effectively by those who want to gain control, and it is working on the American populace.
Despite the fact that we are 17,600 times more likely to die from heart disease than from a terrorist attack; 11,000 times more likely to die from an airplane accident than from a terrorist plot involving an airplane; 1,048 times more likely to die from a car accident than a terrorist attack, and 8 times more likely to be killed by a police officer than by a terrorist , we have handed over control of our lives to government officials who treat us as a means to an end—the source of money and power.
As the Bearded Man in They Live warns, “They are dismantling the sleeping middle class. More and more people are becoming poor. We are their cattle. We are being bred for slavery.”
In this regard, we’re not so different from the oppressed citizens in They Live.
From the moment we are born until we die, we are indoctrinated into believing that those who rule us do it for our own good. The truth is far different.
Despite the truth staring us in the face, we have allowed ourselves to become fearful, controlled, pacified zombies.
We live in a perpetual state of denial, insulated from the painful reality of the American police state by wall-to-wall entertainment news and screen devices.
Most everyone keeps their heads down these days while staring zombie-like into an electronic screen, even when they’re crossing the street. Families sit in restaurants with their heads down, separated by their screen devices and unaware of what’s going on around them.
Young people especially seem dominated by the devices they hold in their hands, oblivious to the fact that they can simply push a button, turn the thing off and walk away.
Indeed, there is no larger group activity than that connected with those who watch screens—that is, television, lap tops, personal computers, cell phones and so on. In fact, a Nielsen study reports that American screen viewing is at an all-time high. For example, the average American watches approximately 151 hours of television per month.
The question, of course, is what effect does such screen consumption have on one’s mind?
Psychologically it is similar to drug addiction. Researchers found that “almost immediately after turning on the TV, subjects reported feeling more relaxed, and because this occurs so quickly and the tension returns so rapidly after the TV is turned off, people are conditioned to associate TV viewing with a lack of tension.”
Research also shows that regardless of the programming, viewers’ brain waves slow down, thus transforming them into a more passive, nonresistant state.
Historically, television has been used by those in authority to quiet discontent and pacify disruptive people. “Faced with severe overcrowding and limited budgets for rehabilitation and counseling, more and more prison officials are using TV to keep inmates quiet,” according to Newsweek.
Given that the majority of what Westerners watch on television is provided through channels controlled by six mega corporations, what we watch is now controlled by a corporate elite and, if that elite needs to foster a particular viewpoint or pacify its viewers, it can do so on a large scale.
If we’re watching, we’re not doing.
The powers-that-be understand this. As television journalist Edward R. Murrow warned in a 1958 speech:
But unless we get up off our fat surpluses and recognize that television in the main is being used to distract, delude, amuse, and insulate us, then television and those who finance it, those who look at it, and those who work at it, may see a totally different picture too late.”
This brings me back to They Live, in which the real zombies are not the aliens calling the shots but the populace who are content to remain controlled.
When all is said and done, the world of They Live is not so different from our own. As one of the characters points out:
“The poor and the underclass are growing.
Racial justice and human rights are nonexistent. They have created a repressive society and we are their unwitting accomplices. Their intention to rule rests with the annihilation of consciousness. We have been lulled into a trance.
They have made us indifferent to ourselves, to others. We are focused only on our own gain.”
We, too, are focused only on our own pleasures, prejudices and gains. Our poor and underclasses are also growing. Racial injustice is growing. Human rights is nearly nonexistent. We too have been lulled into a trance, indifferent to others.
Oblivious to what lies ahead, we’ve been manipulated into believing that if we continue to consume, obey, and have faith, things will work out. But that’s never been true of emerging regimes. And by the time we feel the hammer coming down upon us, it will be too late.
So where does that leave us?
The characters who populate Carpenter’s films provide some insight.
Underneath their machismo, they still believe in the ideals of liberty and equal opportunity. Their beliefs place them in constant opposition with the law and the establishment, but they are nonetheless freedom fighters.
When, for example, John Nada destroys the alien hyno-transmitter in They Live, he restores hope by delivering America a wake-up call for freedom.
Stop allowing yourselves to be easily distracted by pointless political spectacles and pay attention to what’s really going on in the West.
The real battle for control of this nation is not being waged between Republicans and Democrats in the ballot box.
As I make clear in my book Battlefield America: The War on the American People, the real battle for control of this nation is taking place on roadsides, in police cars, on witness stands, over phone lines, in government offices, in corporate offices, in public school hallways and classrooms, in parks and city council meetings, and in towns and cities across this country.
The real battle between freedom and tyranny is taking place right in front of our eyes, if we would only open them.
All the trappings of the American [Western] police state are now in plain sight.
Wake up, Western World.
If they live (the tyrants, the oppressors, the invaders, the overlords), it is only because “we the people” sleep.
Why You And Your Kids Should Detox Your Mind By “Deschooling”
November 5 2024 | From: TheDailyBell / Various Everyone has beliefs and habits that they carry into adulthood with them.
Some of these are harmless remnants of childhood, like holding your breath as you go through a tunnel or skipping over cracks in the sidewalk.
Others tend to be larger and more abstract, like the environment in which a child learns or if they tend to see things in a more objective or subjective light.
For many, these things are fairly set once you reach adulthood. They can only be “untaught” through conscious effort. Many children grow up immersed in the belief systems and moral compasses of their parents. Indoctrination in one way or another is inevitable.
The education system, for many, is a huge part of that indoctrination. In school, a child is told what is essential to learn. They are being handed all of the information necessary to pass tests.
Those tests, combined with class participation and completed homework, make up the grades that will get the child into a good college. They are conditioned to take information and retain it without question.
In my previous article, I explained why unschooling – encouraging a child to use their natural curiosity to direct their own learning – is vital to our society.
When children are removed from a traditional school environment to be unschooled, it is highly recommended that they first go through a “deschooling process”. This process, and the need for it, is explained in greater detail by Ivan Illich in his book Deschooling Society.
Illich explains that:
“The public is indoctrinated to believe that skills are valuable and reliable only if they are the result of formal schooling.”
Through deschooling, a child sheds the belief that learning can only occur when it is being fed to them or overseen. It paves the way for an entirely new way of thinking.
Deschooling is just as important for the parents as it is for the child. The parents often find themselves grappling with what they think versus what they have been told to think.
Their own indoctrination, at this point, is deeply rooted and much harder to reverse. Unschooling is counter-cultural and, as such, the parents will often face quite a bit of pushback from the culture in which they live.
Usually, this will come when a child is seen outside of school during school hours. A stranger at the grocery store, library or playground will ask why the child is not in school and be surprised, even incredulous, at the answer.
Family members may think that the parents are doing a disservice to their child by keeping them away from all that the school system has to offer. When this happens, nothing has gone wrong. If anything, it should serve as a reminder to the parents that they are choosing to unschool for a reason.
This process is not exclusively beneficial for school-aged children and their families. Any adult can and should go through a deschooling, or deprograming, process.
Since school is such a large part of a child’s life, and school programs a child to believe that essential information can only be that which is handed to them, some part of that mentality must be carried into adulthood.
The news, various authorities and preconceived notions take the place of teachers in the adult world. So many adults are being programmed, from childhood, to accept information from authority and process it as fact.
Deschooling for a child is, essentially, helping them to clear the regimented, traditional school from their system. This process does not have a time limit. The learning will begin when the child is ready, when their natural desire to learn is reawakened.
For the parent, deschooling is a letting go of the belief that there needs to be a system.
There are no grades, no outside authority to tell them or their child what is essential to know and no tests to mark progress. It is a complete trust in the child’s innate desire to learn.
When a parent and child are deschooling, it could look like:
The purpose of these seemingly unrelated things is to help the child (and parent) let go of dependence on a curriculum to learn what is necessary.
When an adult sets out to deschool, or deprogram, themselves it could look like:
Doing something enjoyable for the sake of enjoyment, without an end goal in mind
Accepting feelings and behaviors without assigning judgments to them
Clearing the calendar of all unnecessary obligations
For both children and adults, this process is imperative to shedding the dependence on outside sources for information and approval or disapproval. It is the beginning steps of a departure from a set, societally approved way of living and thinking.
Deschooling is the beginning steps toward a lifetime of creativity, love of learning and self-trust.
The Rise Of The Western Spy Assclown
November 4 2024 | From: AMGreatness / Various As with any sclerotic bureaucracy whose mission is lost to circumstances, America’s former Cold War espionage apparatus has grown sloppy. But using Western spies to fabricate political dirt crosses a big line.
There was once a time when Washington needed spies with the power to operate clandestinely in a free society. Soviet Communism was an evil ideology that spread its error by revolutionary movements through what was then called “the domino theory.”
Sometime in the early 1990s, though, Russia ceased to embody an ideology and became a nation again. Alexander Solzhenitsyn moved back, and Russians stopped caring so much whether their little girl gymnasts got perfect 10s on the balance beam.
That left an entire apparatus in the West built to fend off Russian intrigue. None of it was dismantled. Instead, intrusive devices meant to prevent World War III wound up in the hands of EU bureaucrats and wannabee sophisticates of the American spy ranks.
Together, they set out to invent Russian intrigue of the sort that let them use their cool gadgets.
Chief among the spy assclowns was a Brit by the name of Christopher Steele. He built a big-shot life for himself by blaming Russia for stuff. It was Steele, as a member of MI6, who determined that Alexander Litvinenko’s poisoning was a Russian state hit.
Nobody has seen the evidence that says Russia poisoned Litvinenko.
We have to rely on Steele, and he can’t tell us how he knows Putin did it because then he’d have to kill us. But, not to worry, the venerable author of the infamous Steele dossier would never just make stuff up, right?
By such shadowy machinations, “Putin is a thug” replaced the domino theory as the raison d’etre of the lucrative Western spy apparatus.
How Putin poisoning political enemies justifies complex intelligence gathering and military bases originally designed to prevent Soviet incursions into Western Europe is not something you were supposed to ponder. A priori, “Putin is a thug” means he wants to attack France.
Some really smart people have been suckered by this circular reasoning. To take but one example, Pope John Paul II’s biographer, George Weigel, is staunchly on the side of preventing Putin’s inevitable march to Luxembourg and beyond.
It is a peculiar feature of the American plutocracy that even papal biographers become paid pundits lending religious zeal in support of military measures to stop the spread of Soviet Communism that ended on its own back in 1991.
Weigel is joined in his views by former Republican standard-bearers Mitt Romney and Paul Ryan, their strange bedfellows Hillary Clinton and Barack Obama, and all of NeverTrump. Russia-bad is something the entire Washington elite can agree upon.
Politico let the cat out of the bag back in 2015 when it reported:
“The United States still maintains nearly 800 military bases in more than 70 countries and territories abroad . . . Britain, France and Russia, by contrast, have about 30 foreign bases combined.”
The great funding pipeline that makes Washington, D.C. the wealthiest region in America feeds mostly on military spending which still, nearly 30 years removed from the Cold War, requires a Russian enemy.
President Eisenhower - the furthest thing from a conspiracy theorist America has ever produced - famously warned in his farewell address to beware “the military-industrial complex.”
Unconventional candidate Donald Trump rattled Washington to its core in March 2016 when he wondered about NATO’s continued relevance and questioned America’s foreign policy in Ukraine. That’s when this “Putin’s candidate” stuff started among both Republicans and Democrats.
There is nothing illegal about paying people like George Weigel to evoke Russian enemies. His reasons for siding with the godless EU against a country that asks the Patriarch of the Church to pass on all legislation is between him and his maker.
Using Western spies to fabricate political dirt crosses a line, though. That is criminal.
As happens with any sclerotic bureaucracy whose mission is lost to circumstance - see, for example, your local post office - the former Cold War spy apparatus has grown sloppy.
It serves political ends without sufficiently hiding its nefarious intentions. Even its spy arcana has become as ill-fitting as the vintage striped shorts letter carriers wear on hot days.
Last week, Hillary Clinton stupidly accused Tulsi Gabbard and Jill Stein of being Russian assets. If spies are willing to deliver anything that has a 55-cent stamp, she might as well send some junk mail.
The great fun will come next. John Brennan, James Comey, James Clapper, Andrew McCabe, Peter Strzok, and the rest thought they were kings in their world of make-believe, playing James Bond against the evil Trump.
Really, though, they were mailmen in ridiculous shorts, reliving past glories of the Sears Catalog day, while stuck hopelessly in a world of internet ordering and drone delivery.
A federal prosecutor is now asking questions. U.S. Attorney John Durham has Mifsud’s phones. This is going to get interesting, and soon.
Unless, of course, the citadel holds, and the prosecution stops short of toppling Washington’s most strongly held conceit: that the $1.2 million McMansions in McClean, Virginia are necessary to stop Putin.
Even if that happens, the people are wiser from this ridiculousness. Washington will never return to that place where heroes like Pierre Delecto save the world from pretend Russian threats.
Drunk-Driving And Fake-Science November 3 2024 | From: AmericanInstituteForEconomicResearch Almost everyone I know has a story to tell about themselves, a friend, a friend’s friend. It’s about the abusiveness of the police in the enforcement of drunk-driving laws.
I’ve known people who were quite sure that they were not over the legal limit but suddenly found themselves cuffed in the back of the police car.
I know a guy who was arrested out of his own driveway, having driven home perfectly safely. I’ve seen lives ruined and wrecked by a system that presumes everyone is guilty and then proves it was scientific machines that claim to be accurate to three decimal points. The level of paranoia on this subject in American life is palpable.
So it’s actually mind blowing – or maybe once you hear this it will seem incredibly obvious – that the New York Times has published a massive investigation that shows that the science behind the breathalyzer is bogus.
Tens of thousands of arrests have been wrong. Cases are being thrown out around the country. The company that makes the machines for the police stations won’t share its technology or submit to a serious scientific review of its technology.
Lives are being ruined even as the evidence piles up that vast numbers of arrests for “drunk driving” are wholly bogus.
"A million Americans a year are arrested for drunken driving, and most stops begin the same way: flashing blue lights in the rearview mirror, then a battery of tests that might include standing on one foot or reciting the alphabet.
What matters most, though, happens next. By the side of the road or at the police station, the drivers blow into a miniature science lab that estimates the concentration of alcohol in their blood. If the level is 0.08 or higher, they are all but certain to be convicted of a crime.
But those tests - a bedrock of the criminal justice system - are often unreliable, a New York Times investigation found. The devices, found in virtually every police station in America, generate skewed results with alarming frequency, even though they are marketed as precise to the third decimal place.
Judges in Massachusetts and New Jersey have thrown out more than 30,000 breath tests in the past 12 months alone, largely because of human errors and lax governmental oversight.
Across the country, thousands of other tests also have been invalidated in recent years.The machines are sensitive scientific instruments, and in many cases they haven’t been properly calibrated, yielding results that were at times 40 percent too high."
The story adds another several thousand words of horror stories about the use of fake science in the service of the machinery of compulsion and coercion that has entrapped millions of Americans and vexes all non-teetotallers on the road today.
It turns out that these expensive machines, both the ones carried by cops and the larger machines at police headquarters, are provided by only a few companies in the world and they are unwilling to open up their guts to serious peer review.
They are poorly maintained and yet the numbers are invoked in court daily. The police have every incentive to allow them to be wrong so long as the results end in conviction.
The few times in which states mandated tests of the tests have resulted in shocking results. Something called the Intoxilyzer 8000 was tested in Vermont in 2005 and produced inaccurate results in “almost every test.”
As it turns out, the only scientific way to determine blood-alcohol content is with blood tests. There are too many variables to make the breath alone reliable and yet breathing tests are the whole basis of drunk-driving enforcement.
The rounding-up problems and inflated numbers alone are raising questions about 45,000 convictions in Massachusetts and New Jersey.
The trouble is that once the fake science is part of the court records, the accused has no viable option but to plead guilty and face a jail sentence and fines and ruined driving record, even if the person knows for sure that he or she was not drunk.
When it’s the state armed with fake science vs. an individual motorist who had a couple of beers, everyone knows who wins.
This is a classic case of the dangers of scientism in the service of state-based justice. Put on the lab coat, sell the government a fancy machine, harass people with unending intimidation, and the result is vast injustice based on bad science.
Citizens themselves have no recourse. This has been going on for decades in the United States and yet we are only now finding out about it.
There was always a potential for injustice at the heart of the rule against drunk driving since enforcement would always be based not on evidence of reckless driving but rather on the content of one’s blood. It was that which was being criminalized.
In fact, there are many reasons one might drive dangerously: texting, physical exhaustion, sleep deprivation, bad day at work, fight with a lover, and so on.
Nor is it the case that having a few necessarily and always results in endangerment of others. The only real sensible approach, then, is for the police to enforce the traffic rules, ticketing and arresting based on what the driver actually does.
The anti-drunk driving regime in this country was not based on that. Rather, it criminalized something that required a fancy scientific test to discover complete with black-box machines out of science fiction.
Even if you are driving perfectly well, complying with all rules, endangering absolutely no one, you would be subjected to brutality at the hands of the police solely upon the discovery of a chemical in your blood, which, as it turns out, cannot be reliably determined based on any existing technology.
Think about this. The whole world is horrified by Elizabeth Holmes and Theranos’s claim that it could detect diseases via a tiny pin prick on the finger.
That this company raised billions on an unverified claim has been the subject of vast outrage and criminal investigations. And yet we have what appears to be the exact same situation with the detection of drunk driving and yet it’s gone on for decades without much in the way of incredulity putting any damper on the arrest-and-jail machinery of the state.
Why is this? I would say the following. Theranos was subjected to a market test. Breathalyzers and Alcotests and so on exist within the apparatus of the state and have thereby been shielded from serious scrutiny.
It has taken the New York Times and its intrepid reporters to blow the cover, and yet, realistically, it will be years before anyone can put a damper on the machinery of personal destruction that is currently in operation even in your hometown.
There are lessons here. The combination of state power and pseudoscience is a dangerous one. Criminalizing something that depends on the scientific accuracy of some secret test rather than observable behavior is itself fraught with dangers.
The state cannot be trusted to police its own application of science in service of itself. It will always face an incentive to exaggerate to gain more money and more convictions.
Now is the time seriously to rethink the entire machinery of drunk-driving enforcement.
Fear-Based Manipulation: How Politicians, Marketers And The Media Create Panic To Control The Masses November 2 2024 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various Make people afraid and you'll be able to control them. This is something manipulators know extremely well. By exploiting our insecurities, they are able to feed us lies and persuade us to do what they want.
This article looks into how fear is being used against us, by offering various examples of common fear-based manipulation tactics that politicians, marketers and the media utilize on a daily basis to control the way we think and behave.
"Neither a man nor a crowd nor a nation can be trusted to act humanely or to think sanely under the influence of a great fear.”
- Bertrand Russell
Fear. Without it we wouldn’t be able to survive. Why? Because it’s the emotion that warns us about potential threats to our survival and urges us to protect ourselves from them.
Let me give you an example to illustrate what I mean.
Imagine that you’re walking outside in the dark and suddenly you see a snake jumping right in front of your feet. Immediately fear kicks in. You start sweating, your heart rate goes up, and your cortisol as well as adrenaline levels increase.
The snake could be poisonous so you immediately need to protect yourself from it.
In such a dangerous situation, your natural response is most likely going to be one of the following:
1.
Run away from the snake.
2.
Injure, kill or somehow immobilize the snake.
3.
Freeze in hopes that the snake will be undisturbed by your presence and leave you alone.
Fear, as the above example shows, is a protective mechanism that is part of our survival instinct, helping us to stay alive and healthy.
But here’s the problem: when that mechanism becomes overactive and we start fearing things that don’t actually pose us any threat, it can wreak havoc not only with our well-being (due to too much stress), but also with our decision-making (because fear, as you’ll soon find out, can hinder clear thinking).
Manipulative people are extremely aware of the latter and try their best to control how you think and behave by using fear-based tactics. Here you’ll learn what some of those tactics are, as well as what you can do to avoid falling into their trap.
Do as They Say, Or Else…
Whether you know it or not, fear is constantly being used against you. By whom? Well, here are a few examples: politicians, marketers, and the media.
Let’s have a closer look into how they do that, starting with politicians.
The vast majority of politicians are demagogues. A demagogue is defined as “a political leader who seeks support by appealing to the desires and prejudices of ordinary people rather than by using rational argument.”
Now, the emotion politicians like to appeal to the most is fear. By intentionally spreading messages that make the general public feel like it’ll be harmed or utterly destroyed if they aren’t elected in positions of power or don’t implement certain policies, politicians are able to persuade the masses to support them.
You might be wondering: How can that be possible? Don’t people base their decisions on conscious, rational thinking?
Well, they do, much of the time, but rarely when they are gripped by fear of a threat, whether real or imagined. Here’s why, according to cognitive psychologist and economist Robin M. Hogarth:
"By creating a state of emergency in our psyche, fear distracts us from the relevant facts on which we should base our conscious decisions.
A fight-or-flight instinct kicks in instantaneously when we’re afraid, leaving no time for us to question its merits. The resulting knee-jerk reaction often leads to a short-term solution that only tackles the symptoms.
This act-first-think-later approach, however, doesn’t address underlying causes."
To illustrate how fear has been used by politicians to influence the layman, let’s watch a fear-mongering ad used during Lyndon Johnson’s 1964 presidential run to persuade people to vote for him instead of his warmonger Republican opponent Barry Goldwater who, according to the ad, would surely lead the US into a nuclear war if elected.
Political leaders harp on any reason they can find to make us panic: terrorism, immigrants, drugs, crime, minorities, and various others.
A master at creating panic is the current president of the United States, Donald Trump. In fact, that’s one of the main reasons why he was able to become the US president in the first place. [Comment: This is an out-of-touch opinion. Despite a great level of awareness in many areas, the author is uninformed on actual matters relating to Trump.]
Trump’s rhetoric goes like this: “Illegal immigrants are pouring drugs and violence into America. Radical Islamic terrorists are preparing for another big US attack. Christians are being executed en masse in the Middle East.” And so on and so forth.
And what’s the solution to all those issues? He himself, of course. As sociologist and author Barry Glassner put it:
“[Donald Trump’s] formula is very clean and uncomplicated: Be very, very afraid. And I am the cure."
Another American president who used a lot of fear-based rhetoric was George W. Bush. For instance, right after the 9/11 tragedy, the warning he issued was: “Be afraid, be very afraid.”
Then for years onward he was repeatedly talking about America being in danger of more terrorist attacks and that the only way to make it safe again was to bomb Iraq.
Additional:Read about the Alliance that
has
been working behind
the scenes for decades to take down the 'Cabal' within the work of David Wilcock.
Some of those reading this may be confused because the cabal-controlled mainstream media is doing
everything within it's
power to denigrate Trump - as he is part of the effort to take the
Illuminati down once and for
all.
And the Alliance effort operates beyond the bounds of countries - out of neccessity; as that is how the Luciferian Cabal
does.
Do you think you can trust the mainstream media? Look at whom they target. One must wonder why 'they' also do not like Putin?
Today, it’s crystal clear that Bush had a hidden agenda: to expand and strengthen the American Empire by gaining economic and geopolitical power.
Panicked and confused, millions of Americans couldn’t understand what was really going on and blindly consented to the so-called War on Terror.
I could go on giving countless examples of politicians who’ve tried to control the masses through the use of fear, but I think these will suffice to carry my point across.
Terrorized About Terrorism
When we feel that our survival is threatened, we’re ready to do just about anything to protect our lives. Yet we’re often unknowingly harming ourselves instead.
For example, a study estimates that at least a thousand additional lives were lost in US road accidents the year after the 9/11 attacks. The reason?
At that period of time a lot more people chose to drive rather than fly, out of fear of another possible air-bound terrorist attack, although the probability of death due to inflight terrorism is calculated to be 1 in 540,000, while the probability of dying from a car accident is calculated to be 1 in 7,000.
Of course, it’s understandable why American citizens chose driving over flying. If you pay attention to any mainstream newspaper or TV channel, you must be thinking that terrorism is one of the top causes of death.
The reality, however, is that you are way more likely to die from a multitude of other causes than terrorism, including heart disease, cancer, obesity, suicide, workplace accidents and contaminated food.
But the mainstream media doesn’t seem to care about those. So why does it make such a fuss over terrorism?
There are various reasons, such as siding with their preferred political parties, but the most important one is simply this:
Fear sells like nothing else.
When, for instance, you read a newspaper headline that elicits a fear response in you, you are much more likely to get the newspaper and read it. Why? Because as author and journalist Neil Strauss put it:
"We’re wired to respond to fear above everything else. If we miss an opportunity for abundance, life goes on; if we miss an important fear cue, it doesn’t."
Fear drives better ratings and better ratings means increased profit. The mass media knows this very well and is doing its best to capitalize on it.
By terrorizing us, it’s able to keep our attention hooked and ruthlessly exploit us for its financial gain.
Another way fear is used to control you is through commercial advertisements.
You might not be consciously aware of it, but corporations are heavily using fear-based advertising to make you buy their stuff. And it has been found to work pretty well. By instilling fear in people, advertising manipulates them into making emotional rather than reasoned choices.
Let’s see an example of how fear-based advertising works.
All the great marketers know well that one of the primary human desires is to connect with other humans and feel part of a community, and hence that one of the things people are most afraid of is to be excluded from their social groups.
And through advertising they try to convince you that if you don’t buy stuff nobody will like you anymore and that you’ll probably be ostracized by your community.
Buy the latest iPhone and you’ll not appear to be poor. Get this pair of Nike shoes and you’ll be cool. Obtain this wristwatch and you’ll feel important. Purchasing them will cost you some money, but not doing so will cost you your happiness.
Afraid and insecure, most people blindly do what they’re told, thus wasting their hard-earned money buying things they don’t really need and which only provide them with a temporary, superficial sense of belonging and emotional gratification.
Now that we’ve looked at different ways fear is being used against you, I’d like to share with you a few simple tips that can help you to avoid falling victim to fear-based manipulation.
The first and most important thing is to identify fear when it arises within you and try to see it for what it is, without shying away from it or pretending that it’s not there.
By bringing fear into your conscious awareness, you’ll be able to examine where it’s coming from and what message it’s trying to convey you, which will help you to better understand it and hence deal with it.
Secondly, when dealing with political, social or other important issues, remember to associate feelings of fear with the need to slow down and regain mental and emotional clarity. Instead of succumbing to impulsive reactions, take the time to educate yourself on the issue at hand.
This will not only allow you to assess your options and take better-informed decisions, but also to discern what you should fear from what you shouldn’t.
Lastly, instead of blindly conforming to the norm and obeying to authority figures, act mindfully and take responsibility for your actions.
Just because a renowned politician, an award-winning journalist or a commercial on a major TV channel tells you what to do or believe, that doesn’t mean you should.
Sadly, after years upon years of conditioning, most people don’t use their critical thinking and instead let others think for them.
To break free from that conditioning, be sure to doubt - and not mindlessly accept - any “truth” that’s being thrown at you by someone else, regardless of who that person might be.
Dealing With “Waking Up.” How To Handle Discovering More Than Just The Tip Of the Iceberg November 1 2024 | From: CollectiveEvolution / Various A look at our current world might bring about emotions or observations linked to feelings of chaos.
With the incredible divide happening in the US due to the upcoming presidential elections, the manufactured gender, race and sexual orientation divides taking place all over, it’s easy to feel like there are ‘bad’ things happening all the time.
People often look at the media and say it’s there to ruin or shift your perception of the world negatively, and I would partly agree with this for sure.
In Brief:
The Facts: An evolution in the way we view our world and the systems within it is necessary to create meaningful change at this stage in humanity's journey. This starts with an evolution in media.
Reflect On: Can we truly change our world if we don't know where we are truly at? Can we expect to see change in our world if we don't change ourselves?
After all, that’s what inspired me to create a news source that took a different approach. But the reality is, we’re in a time where we have to look at some of the tough things going on in our world in order to understand why they are happening, where we are at and how we can shift.
The difference in the way we like to do that here at CE is, we might talk about some of the ‘darker’ stuff, but we’ll always help in moving through it vs leaving a reader hanging.
This is done through an important process I built called The CE Protocol. This is partly how we have been creating an evolution in media for the past 10 years.
My feeling is that we must combine an observation of what we are actively creating in our world with personal transformation so that we can truly change the challenges we face at the core, versus simply throwing bandaids at the situation.
For example, we might want people to unite and be more peaceful with one another, yet we’ll actively attack, mischaracterize others and divide ourselves simply based on something like political orientation.
Why do we do that? Because we don’t know who we are deep down, and we actively get caught up in the illusion of politics that has been manufactured to prey on our programmings.
Therefore, the more we wake up and see the illusion that politics is by consuming different media, the more we begin to see truth and are inspired to make new choices.
This turns us inward where we make changes within ourselves and this then leads us to interact within our world differently because now we are operating from a different state of consciousness.
Many people feel we can simply change our world by working only on ourselves, without having to see the truth of our world.
Often times that changes a person slightly, but they will still support the systems in our world because they still believe in them, thus things don’t change.
In the four short videos below, I will guide you by explaining exactly what this protocol is and how it encompasses the totality of what’s needed to create a shift in inward consciousness and our physical world.
The basic steps are: 1. Breaking The Illusion 2. Awakening Neutrality 3. Deprogramming Limits 4. Living Aligned
1: Breaking The Illusion
2: Awakening Neutrality
3: Deprogramming Limits
4. Living Aligned
Due to the pressure of mass censorship, we now have our own censorship-free, and ad-free on demand streaming network!
It is the world's first and only conscious media network streaming mind-expanding interviews, news broadcasts, and conscious shows.
Click here to start a Free 7-Day Trial and watch 100's of hours of conscious media videos, that you won't see anywhere else.
Surveillance Is Getting Creepier by the Day
Governments Are Tracking Peoples Location Using Their Smartphones Because Of The Coronavirus
Total Individual Control Technology Attacks Specific Individuals Based on DNA Resonance
In one such operation, the perpetrators would target certain geographical blocks of the city, and, for instance, cause everyone in that area to be in a bad mood. 
The Internet Just Crowdfunded the Release of 4,358 CIA Mind Control Documents
Money Made on the Backs of the Populace
The Christmas-Sun Worship Connection
The Earth’s magnetic fields are a carrier of biologically relevant information that connects all living systems
The Sun | Plasma Climate Forcing
Police back down on policing 'hate speech'
CURRENT AFFAIRS
In her book, “The Age of Surveillance Capitalism,” social psychologist and Harvard professor Shoshana Zuboff reveals how the biggest tech companies in the world have hijacked our personal data - so-called “behavioral surplus data streams” - without our knowledge or consent and are using it against you to generate profits for themselves
The Facts: During this lockdown, people's attention has shifted from that which keeps them 'distracted' each day, to having to quiet down, reflect and even explore the reality of what is going on in our world.
United States Air Force: Space Force Now 
Worsening anxiety or behaviors over time
The Facts: 
